Audio

084: How To Make A Million Dollars In 21 Days Selling An Online Course With Amy Porterfield

How To Make A Million Dollars In 21 Days Selling An Online Course With Amy Porterfield

Amy Porterfield is one of the most successful mediapreneurs that I know. She started out by working for Harley Davidson as a cool biker girl. Then she worked for Tony Robbins as his director of content marketing. And then she branched out on her own and has built a 7 figure empire selling products and training focused on Facebook marketing.

She’s the proud author of Facebook all in one for dummies. And to top it all off, she also has a top 10 business podcast on iTunes.

What You’ll Learn

  • What Amy learned from working with Tony Robbins
  • How to build a large and loyal audience of followers
  • How to get big names like Lewis Howes and Sean Malarkey to lend you their email lists
  • How to structure an online course
  • How to keep people engaged with your material
  • How Amy made a million dollars on her last product launch
  • How to run Facebook ads for an info product

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

BigCommerce.com – If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free
bigcommerce-logo

HostGator.com – If you are interested in starting your own WordPress blog, then click here to get 30% off webhosting at HostGator.com!
Hostgator

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com sign up right on the front page, and I’ll send you the free mini course right away via email.

Now before I begin I want to give a quick shout out to my sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store, and Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here’s what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce does not nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

There’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need to hire a designer. Everything from design to payment processing is all built-in, and all you got to do is populate it with your own products. So you can literally start your own online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob.

I also want to thank HostGator for sponsoring the show. HostGator is an incredible webhost that I highly recommend. And in fact did you know that mywifequitherjob.com was hosted on HostGator in the very beginning? They offer 24/7 live support via chart, phone and email, one click WordPress install and easy-to-use-website builder, design services, marketing services and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount. Once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Amy Porterfield on the show. Now Amy is one of the most successful mediapreneurs that I know. And she started up by working Harley Davidson as a cool biker girl. Then she worked for the D. Tony Robbins as a director of content marketing. And then she branched out on her own and has build a seven figure empire selling products and training focused along the Facebook marketing platform. Now she’s the proud author of Facebook “All in One for Dummies,” and to top it all off, she also has a top ten business podcast on iTunes.

Now here’s the thing about Amy and her podcast, first of all, when my wife found out that I was having her on the podcast, she went nuts. And second of all, I don’t normally listen to podcasts, but Amy’s podcast is actually one that I check out from time to time especially when I’m stressed out. And why is that, she’s got this soothing voice that tends to calm me down. So bad day at work, bad day at sales of an ecommerce store, I hit up Amy for some stress relief. And with that, welcome to the show Amy. How are you doing?

Amy: Well thank you so much for having me. That just makes my day.

Steve: I hope that didn’t come across as creepy.

Amy: It’s so sweet. I love it.

Steve: So you know what’s hilarious is that when I was emailing with your assistants to get you on the show, they stressed multiple times that this interview was going to be audio only, so it kind of gave me this impression that you like to do these interviews in your pajamas and underwear, or something like that.

Amy: I have had so many instances where I didn’t know it was video and I’m literally like not ready for camera, meaning I don’t do a lot to get ready when I’m working from home, and maybe I’m just vain and that’s maybe the girl in me. But come on, I got to do my hair, makeup and stuff. So I like to be prepared.

Steve: Yeah I mean just for good measure, I mean my pajamas right now too. So it’s all good.

Amy: Okay, right. So you get it.

Steve: So Amy gives us a quick background story, tell us about your background and how you went from working for Tony Robbins to being an online entrepreneur.

Amy: Well it was a really cool situation where when I was with Tony, I was—what is that?

Steve: I have no idea. You are playing music?

Amy: Oh no, have I? I don’t know what that is. I thought it was you. Okay I am so sorry. That was something on my phone. I don’t know why it kind of went off. I’m not even touching it. I’m sorry; do you want to repeat the question?

Steve: Yeah just start over from what you were going to respond.

Amy: Hear me out. Okay, no brainer. So it was kind of a really cool situation. And what happened was I was the director of content development over at Tony Robbins. And at the time, he was getting into more online marketing, and wanted to do some online marketing launches with his programs. And so we ended up bringing in a bunch of online marketers that were doing amazing things in the space, and a lot of them lived Brooklyn San Diego which was where the headquarters was, but others flew in for the little meeting we had. And a bunch of these guys sat around the table, Frank Kern, Eben Pagan, Jeff Walker, Brendon Burchard, some names you might know, they are just these big guys in the internet marketing world.

I literally kind of was like a fly on the wall. I didn’t realize what I was getting to witness at the time, but these guys went around and Tony said, “Tell me a little bit about your business, what it looks like, what you do?” And instead of talking about their exact products or their exact business, they were talking about their lifestyle, what they loved about what they did, the time they spent with their families, the vacations, where they lived, the downtime, and they did talk about the hard work, but in a way that was just full of passion. And my years popped up like, “Wait a second, this is like a whole new world I’ve never known.”

I was in corporate since I was really young right out of college. So having a business of my own was never even on my radar. And so when these guys were going around and talking, and I just started listening a little bit more, and I instantly got that entrepreneurial bug. I wanted to be a part of it. So for the next year I asked him to move me to the marketing department and work on the launches that these guys were teaching us. So I literally was in the trenches working on online launches, loved every minute of it like couldn’t get enough of it.

And so about a year from then, I also started dabbling with social media, helped Tony with his Facebook page, he took off on Twitter, it was amazing. Tony fell in love with social media. So I thought, “Okay, that’s what I can do.” So taking a lot of baby steps, I ended up going out on my own and doing consulting for social media. My business looks a whole lot different today than it did five years ago, but that’s basically how I got my start.

Steve: I’m pretty big Tony Robbins fan. So if you can give me a quick example of kind of what you did for him before you left, and what you learned from it, that would be great.

Amy: So when I was there, I was in the content development department which meant anything that Tony would think of or create, it would go through our department. And we had a lot of writers, a lot of designers, creators, and we would turn it into his audio programs or live event content or work books, books, anything like that. So all the content went through our department.

Now Tony is a genius in the sense that he always has ideas. He’s very much involved in the content creation, and so there are many, many meetings up to like two or three in the morning working with just, I call it riffing [ph], but he was riffing on all these ideas. We would take tons and tons of notes, and we take all of that together and try to put it into something that made more sense for the audience. And so were really into that content. So I got to travel the world with him, and worked on the content that he would do on stage so e.g. in the Philippines, in Australia. It was a pretty amazing experience.

Steve: Yeah that’s amazing. Did you actually start your own stuff while you were working for Tony, or like was there any overlap?

Amy: Great question. There was overlap. So what I did is I started waking up at 5:00 am every morning, and from about five to seven I would just start learning everything I could learn about internet marketing and starting my own business. So I did that for a good three months. And then I asked to go part time. So I had just gotten married at the time, and I was travelling way too much anyway, so it was a really good segway. And I asked, “Can I work part time on this specific project I was doing.” With some reluctance they said yes, and then I continued to work on my own business, got my first client on the side and built that up a little bit. And then finally I had to take baby steps and big decisions.

So I finally got the nerve to then jump off and go out on my own. It was hard not to look back because it’s funny, when you go out on your own after being in corporate for so long, I feel like all these crazy opportunities come your way, like “Do you want to work for our business, or come work for us, or be our VP or whatever.” And I had to say no to all of it, because it would have totally derailed me which is really hard. But I took that leap and I didn’t look back.

Steve: You know what’s funny Amy is I’m kind of in a similar situation. So I’ve got three online businesses that each make six figures. And I have this job which I recently just went down to four days, and I’m still playing that game. The difference is I’m in the tech sector with my fulltime job. So it’s a little harder to leave, because I don’t want to give that part of my life up.

Amy: That’s really tough. And the fact though that you’ve built three businesses, six figure businesses, while having a full time job, that’s insane. Like that is—I hope you talk about that a lot, because that’s crazy.

Steve: I hope like we can — I’m curious to compare some notes once we get to that point, but one thing I’m always curious about actually was did you leverage any of the audience of Tony Robins, or was your audience completely on your own, nothing related to it at all?

Amy: So I had to completely break off ties in a sense that I couldn’t really leverage that audience, I didn’t really have access to it. However, I definitely took advantage of adding the Tony Robins in my bio. I always talk about him because he is a huge part of my life, and so that is always part of my story which I know helps, I definitely know it helps always.

Steve: Absolutely, so you quit without any incoming place at all, is that…

Amy: Yeah, which I don’t necessarily suggest to everybody. So I did end up quitting. I kind of got to that point that is like bubbling up inside me that I just had to either do it or not do it at all. It just got to that emotional point for me, and I was probably scared I would never do it if didn’t just finally take a leap. So I had a few clients and we had a little bit of savings, but truly nothing that was going to sustain us. So when I went out on my own, I was a hustler, I had to definitely make money. Luckily my husband was making money as well, but not enough that that was just going to completely support the lifestyle we had created. So yeah, that was the most stressful year in my life.

Steve: Okay, and so but you did have some consulting gigs, and then you knew you didn’t want scale that because it’s not — in here it’s not scalable right?

Amy: Exactly.

Steve: So one thing I admire about you Amy is that you are awesome at building a large and loyal audience of followers. And so by the time you started selling online training you probably had a large audience, right?

Amy: By the time I got really serious about it yes. So there were some attempts in the beginning with not a large audience and they were huge failures.

Steve: So let’s talk about back in early days when you had nothing. So how did you get traffic early on, and how did you build up your name?

Amy: So webinars were my tool of choice, I had done some webinars while at Tony Robins kind of behind the scenes, and I knew that I felt comfortable on these webinars, so I ran with that. So I learned early on that if I could create a really good webinar and get really good at the presentation, I was going to be able to sell on that webinar. And so I just studied everything I could about webinars, and I started using Facebook ads early on as well. So I would fill up my webinars with Facebook ads and Lead Pages a company that I love, they say this all the time that webinars are great to sell, but really where they are powerful is growing your email list. And I think that’s how my list grew so quickly.

Steve: So you would go on these webinars without having a product to sell just for the purposes of building up an email list?

Amy: No I wish I had that smart; I didn’t start webinars till I actually had something to sell. Now in early days, I didn’t sell that much, but I did get kind of the experience I was transitioning into a seller on a webinar, I had like a $97 program.

Steve: Okay, and so before you — actually in the early days before you had anything, did you kind of build up an audience part of the Facebook ads?

Amy: Oh, gotcha, okay, so not really and here is why. I had a mentor that would tell me every time we met Amy focus on growing your email list; focus on growing your email list. In that first year and a half I did not focus on growing my email list probably because it scared me, I didn’t know exactly what I needed to do to make that happen.

It seemed very confusing to me and overwhelming, so instead I focused on growing my website. Meaning like writing my blogs every day, and working on my logo and my business card and all of the things I shouldn’t have really been focusing on. Now at the same time I had clients I was consulting, so I had to care of all of those clients which pretty much derailed me from focusing on the things I should have been focusing on.

And so for a year and a half I did not, so I had about 600 people on my list after a year in the business. And then when I tried to launch my first online training program it was a huge failure, just because I didn’t really have anybody that was listening yet. So that’s when I felt the sting and I thought all right, I get it, now I know what I need to do.

Steve: So what was your first product?

Amy: My first product — I’m embarrassed to say this, my first product was how to — I think it was something like how to launch your book online now. I had never launched a book online in my life, however, I had worked with a lot of authors whether it would be Tony Robins or at the time I had worked with the [inaudible] [00:14:20] group, not him individually but his group. So I had worked with a lot of authors, so I though this is perfect, I know social media, I work with authors, I’m going to do have—launch a book online. I should have never done that, I didn’t know enough and I just didn’t know what I didn’t know. So I thought I was going out with something great, but looking back it’s kind of embarrassing.

Steve: So was that launch from your list, or did you use Facebook ads for that?

Amy: So that actually was from my list, so I had maybe 20 people on my first — actually I didn’t even start with the webinar, I started with a tele-summit kind of thing. And I had probably 20 people on that first one I remember, and no sales came through. And then I graduated to webinars.

Steve: Okay, well, let’s talk about your first successful product, how’s that?

Amy: That would be much better, you are trying to get to cry, are you Oprah or something, what’s going on?

Steve: Your first successful product obviously isn’t your gigantic membership course right, it’s probably something…

Amy: What happened was this is actually a good story and a good lesson for those just kind of started now, or trying to get out there and do something. I had started to go to a lot of networking events, good and bad. It took away from me creating my first real successful online training program, but I wanted to get my name out there, and I was working with Mike Stelzner a social media examiner. He had just started his website and he invited me to a few events one being BlogWorld, or at least it was called BlogWorld at the time and [inaudible 00:15:42]. And I would help him carrel people to an interview, he was interviewing a bunch of people for his own show. So I was again like taking a back seat which is what I did at Tony Robins as well, it’s really easy for me to play that role, because I had done it so long.

So I did this with my Mike, he was amazingly wonderful to me and a great mentor, but still I was behind the scenes which I had to be really careful with. So I did that for about two years while I was building up my business, and I met a lot of amazing people. So the good thing about it is that these awesome-awesome people in social media, and online marketing were at these events and one that you find out was Lewis Howes. Lewis Howes and his partner Sean Malarkey, and we became friends — and yeah, so we became friends, and at the next event that we saw those guys again, they had seen some of my webinars and asked me if I wanted to partner with them on a Facebook product. I would create the product, it would be on my content and they had the machine to market it, I still didn’t really have a list.

And so I created this product, super scared to do it, I had never really created a big product like this before. They helped me out a little bit, and we did tons and tons of webinars for it. And it became a huge hit, and it literally is what I felt propelled my business into the Facebook marketing. I got the book deal after that, and I started to create more online training programs. But I definitely got lucky in the sense that someone asked me to partner, now if I hadn’t done the work beforehand, if I didn’t go to the events, if I didn’t constantly blog and put myself out there and create the content, they would have never found me. So I don’t feel like it’s luck, but I think it’s good that I hustled a little bit in those early years.

Steve: So let’s back up a little bit; was Stelzner huge back then when you were working with him?

Amy: He was well known because he had this white paper business, but nowhere near what he is now. And here is the funny thing though, it all kind of comes together, your life experiences, there are some parts I would like to erase, but then I look back and think it all like just is happening for a reason. And when I was working at Tony Robbins, Mike Stelzner — so weird, Morris Smith and I met to talk about…

Steve: Molly Smith, Jesus okay, go on.

Amy: I know, I got really lucky working with Tony, because there was these cool people I got access to. So Molly and I had lunch or coffee to be exact, and we asked her to look over the Facebook page we had just created for Tony. So she had lunch with us and looked over the Facebook page. And then she said, “You should really talk to Mike Stelzner, he’s created creative white papers if you need one for Tony, and we happened to need one. So Mike and I started working together while I was still with Tony, and he wrote this incredible white paper, and I was the middle man between Tony’s edits and Mike’s work that he did. Mike and I became great friends and one day he is like, hey I have got this idea that I’m doing, it’s called social media examiner.

And I remember he showed me the art work and I’m like that’s a little weird, it’s kind of [continuation], and I didn’t know this guy that much, but I really liked him. So he said “Hey, if you do go out on your own, let me know, I could hire you for starts.” So he was literally the first guy that hired me for anything. And it turns out he became this huge success with that, I mean the website is amazing, and what he’s gone on to create is pretty cool. So he wasn’t ads big of a deal then.

Steve: And Lewis Howes and Sean Malarkey, same thing?

Amy: Lewis kind of was a big deal, I think he was born a big deal, so he knew everybody; he was already doing his LinkedIn programs, so he was definitely a big shot. I didn’t know enough about Sean Malarkey to know what he was up to just yet.

Steve: So why did they choose you, like how did you stand out early on like — because you didn’t have an audience, what was their incentive yeah?

Amy: Yeah, so that’s such a great question. So here is a good lesson in that, Lewis had asked me to do a free training for them, like record a video about Facebook for a whole different program they were doing. And because I liked the guys, and I wanted to get my name out there I said yes, and so I recorded something for them. And Sean was watching it, and he just loved my style, and the lesson here is do what you know how to do best. I knew that I was going to do this webinar while I had this training in my blood, I loved to do it. So I knew I would come across one, and so I said yes to it.

So Sean saw it, he is like this girl knows how to teach, like this is really good, come watch this Lewis. And then Lewis watched it, and so when the opportunity came up that, hey we want to publish online for the Facebook product, I was top on mind, because I had done a good job. Now if they told me to write a book, they probably would have not really paid attention. I’m not the best writer, so I put myself forward on what I did do well, and I came across well to other people.

Steve: So that implies you were doing a bunch of webinars before you met these guys, is that…?

Amy: I’m trying to think, I did way more webinars with them than I had ever done, but yes I had started to do my own webinars before I met them.

Steve: Okay, I hate to break this to you too, but I think it was your soothing voice that got them too.

Amy: It was the voice? I’ll take it, whatever works.

Steve: All right, so you got these two — did you have your book deal, like I can’t remember?

Amy: I did not.

Steve: Did not okay, so how did that come about?

Amy: So what happened, it was literally, it was a good year for me. It came about the same time where I was blogging regularly on the social media examiner blog. So they finally had invited me, I kind of moved up the chain over there, they invited me to guest blog, post ads, I was doing it a lot. And this is another way of things, so I was at a networking event, I did way too many networking events in those early years, I don’t think I should have done that many but I did.

And one that I did it was like how to get your mojo on business, or something like that, it was a silly name. And I went to Colorado, it was a great event though, it was just like ten of us girls and we were talking about building a business. I sat next to a woman named Andrea Wall, we hit it off, and we just exchanged like stories about Facebook, because she taught Facebook as well, and I was just getting into Facebook.

And two years later, someone came to her and said we are looking for a co-author of Facebook marketing online for dummies, do you know anybody, and she remembered me and suggested me. They went on social media examiner, saw that I wrote a bunch of blogs on the topic, and invited me into the book, which was huge for me because it really solidified. I became a Facebook expert when that book came out.

Steve: Okay, so I’m getting a lot of key takeaways here, it sounds like networking events was a huge part of your early success okay?

Amy: Right and I find a tease like oh my God I went to way too many, but then when I look back, they did kind of shape some big things that happened to me in those early years.

Steve: So doing these webinars with Lewis and Sean, they probably had huge lists at the time, right?

Amy: They did, they had huge lists, huge affiliate partnerships, and they made me do like, it feels like 100 of them. So when you do that many, you get pretty good at it.

Steve: So when you had one of these webinars, were you adding to your list members of their list?

Amy: I was, so I worked up this deal with them that anybody who bought and anybody who opted in for a webinar, I also got that list.

Steve: Okay.

Amy: So that was huge.

Steve: So that sounds like a pretty big jump start into just your own properties, right?

Amy: It was yeah.

Steve: Okay, and did you use a lot of paid advertising then, or was that something that happened later on?

Amy: I’m trying to think when the paid out advertising really took a big jump. It was probably right around the time that this program FB influence came out. Sean and Lewis used a lot of ads for it, so I was featured in the ads and this is something funny with Facebook ads, especially more so back then, but it still works in similar ways now. My face was everywhere in those ads, and it’s funny how ads were, because if you are own personal brand or if they just hear your business name everywhere in ads, people automatically think you are doing amazing.

So I heard this all the time, your business must be boiling up, I see you everywhere on Facebook, in my head I’m thinking yeah, because I’m paying for it. But it’s just like a perception, and then luckily our perception actually became real, but at the time it wasn’t necessarily real. So something kind of funny happens with those Facebook ads.

Steve: So someone starting out today, would you recommend that they kind of try to take your path, put out good stuff, go to networking events, and try to take advantage of people who are bigger than you and partner with them.

Amy: Not necessarily, so here is why. I think that if I — if someone already told me– if I could do it all over again, the one thing I’d change is, from day one I would start building an email list. I would create some great free giveaways whether it would be a webinar, PDF or cheat sheet or whatever. I have a few of them out there, and I take advantage of Facebook ads 100%, and I build my own list. And I don’t like the idea of having to have a partner like I love Sean and Lewis, they were wonderful to me, but it’s always — I just don’t want to give up any of my content and have to partner with somebody.

So I would go that route first, and then if you do have these opportunities just be really careful what you say yes to and no to, because I said yes to hundred other things that never turned out to anything, which probably took away from me really focusing on my business. So I wish I was a little bit smarter with the yeses, but the yeses that I did say yes to, obviously panned out for me.

Steve: Well, some of these yeses that were bad idea, were they partnerships or were they just products that you kind of developed in — okay?

Amy: They were people asking me to create content for them. So not necessarily partnerships, but hey will you put a free session to my program. I said, yes, to a million of those, and then nothing ever came out of it. When you are new though, you’ve got to kind of experiment to see what’s a good idea or not, and then everything seems like a huge wonderful big idea or opportunity, so it’s hard to say no.

Steve: So any tips on selecting the right opportunities?

Amy: Yes, and we hear some very big tip that I have, and I do this now and I could have done it then if I was smarter at the time. And that is plan out let’s even say your next six months, I like planning out a year, but if that’s too daunting efforts, plan out your next six months. What do you want to promote, what affiliate deals do you maybe want to do, what do you want to create, all that good stuff. And have it very clear, like I literally get into my digital calendar and plan out the space for me to create, and get things done and promote, and it’s all in the digital calendar right now.

So when someone comes to me now and says can you do this? If it doesn’t fit into my six months goal, it’s a no. And so I can put in the banner and say “Hey, let me kind of think about that for the future, right now it’s not going to work.” And if I ever want to come back to it I can, but it’s so much easier to say no when you know what your next six months looks like.

Steve: Okay, I’m glad that coming on this podcast was a little piece of that next six months, awesome.

Amy: It was a yes.

Steve: All right, so I’m just trying to get the chronology correct here, when did you launch your membership site? So you did a bunch of smaller products with Lewis and Sean, right?

Amy: I just did one, the FB influence yeah.

Steve: Oh just one, okay and then that wasn’t a membership site there, right?

Amy: It wasn’t and — so when I think of membership sites, I always think of like you pay a monthly fee to stay in it, and then if you stop paying the monthly fee you are out of it. And I haven’t really ever done it like that, but still I could see where a lot of people think my programs are membership sites for specific reasons will get into that I’m sure. But when I did FB influence I got the confidence, I had this $97 program that was doing well. So that’s when I branched out for the first time and created my most successful program which is the profit lab, and that started in 2012 which is right around the time about six months after FB influence launched.

Steve: Okay and how did you know it was time? So you did that one product with a partner and then you had the confidence, so you decided to do your own thing where you had complete ownership of the product, right?

Amy: Yeah, there was a big part of me, I don’t know where this comes from, but there was a big part of me that wanted my own thing, and I wanted it to be really careful that my revenue was not controlled by other people as well. And I wanted to make it really clear, they were amazing to me, it’s the mindset in my head that I had a partnership and it worried me sometimes.

So that’s when I thought okay, I got into FB influence, it was doing well and then I started to listen to people, we had a private Facebook group. And I saw where they were struggling, what they wanted more of, where they wanted to dive in deeper, and that’s exactly what I created. At the time it was called the Facebook marketing profit lab. Now I just call it the profit lab, because it’s more than just Facebook, but that’s how it was created.

Steve: And by this time when you launched that how big was your list at the time?

Amy: Great question, I’m going to guess, this is so hard to remember, and I have to be careful because I know I have answered this question before. So I don’t want to throw a different numbers, but I think at that time it might have been around like 30,000.

Steve: Okay, so in general do you have any recommendations on what your list size can be before you launch a course or?

Amy: I don’t actually, but I have some recommendations related to this. So Davis [inaudible 00:28:13] a great friend of mine, I love that man. And he when we got into a mastermind together a few years back and I remember him telling me how much money he made, and how big his list was. And he was making — he was just starting, just as much as I was making when I was just starting, but his list was like half the size of mine. So I do feel like I could have definitely done a better job of connecting with my audience, it’s like when you can show your personal side, when you can be yourself, take people behind the scenes, let them in, you are going to have the stride, and I know it sounds like a cliché because we hear it all the time.

But you truly will have this audience that just loves everything about you. And when that happens it doesn’t matter if you have 10,000, 20,000, 30,000, on your list. So I believe that you can have a small list and still make really good money, but you can’t have a small list and make good money if you don’t nurture them and constantly be putting up great content, connecting with them, inviting them in, it really does make a huge difference.

Steve: Hi everyone, I just want to take a quick moment to thank FameBit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Now Fame Bit is the number one market place for You Tube influencer marketing. With over 15,000 you tubers looking to promote brands from beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Now video starts as low as $50, and it’s completely free to post a campaign and receive proposals from you tubers. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guests Emmanuel Eleyae used FameBit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywifequit@famebit.com you will automatically get $10 off. So go to FameBit.com right now and get famous you tubers to promote your products, now back to the show.

Steve: Absolutely, so anyway I have an online course myself which has got about 1200 members at this point. So I thought it would be kind of interesting to compare some notes.

Amy: Yeah let’s do it.

Steve: Kind of like how you structure your classes. So first of all, is your course structured like a library of videos, or do you kind of drip stuff out and just give them little pieces at a time.

Amy: So I used to drip it out for years and then just last year I started to give it to them all at once. So I like both models. Tell me real quick, what is your membership site about?

Steve: It’s called profitableonlinestore.com where it’s a training course that teaches people how to start ecommerce stores.

Amy: Nice. Okay great. So that’s what I do. How about with yours? Do you drip?

Steve: No I don’t drip and I was just curious because what the pros and cons work, because I have never dripped. I have like a library of videos where I have a certain number of videos that you should watch as soon as you sign up, but then the rest of it is just kind of watch what applies to you.

Amy: Okay so that makes sense then not to drip for sure. I was dripping. I actually like dripping better and here’s why. I guess your audience would know what that means, dripping. It’s like–

Steve: We should probably define it real quick.

Amy: So it’s like a module each week. So you are dripping the campaign, like open and a module opens up, and then you wait another week and another module opens up till everything is there. And the reason I like to do that is because I do have a live component to my event on my program where I do live Q&A sessions. And my program is put together in a way that is very specific. Like you need to start with video one and there’s 20 videos, and you shouldn’t be on video 20 till you’ve watched all the ones before it. It builds on each other. So it just makes sense to drip it.

But the thing is we stopped dripping it, because people like to learn at different paces and there’s all of these different types of learners inside my program. Some are more advanced, some are more beginners, and so those that were more advanced they hated waiting and it was frustrating to them. And as soon as I stopped dripping and I actually saw my refund rate go down a little bit as well, because people were getting impatient. They are like, “This isn’t for me,” and then they’d live. Well that totally stopped.

However, I have to be really careful now that I don’t drip. I send out a series of emails and call them, “My on boarding sequence.” For the first 30 days in my program, you are going to hear from me a lot, but I have to be careful. I can’t say, so by now you should be on module II video 1, because then it stresses everyone out because they are not there. So it’s more inspiration and like before and after pictures of some of my students of what they’ve done. But I think those emails have immensely helped as well.

Steve: That’s funny because my return rate was higher than I wanted it to be until I started an email auto-responder sequence too, so I send out emails either everyday or every other day for that first 30 days as well.

Amy: So smart. It dramatically changes your refund rate. I never believed it until this recently.

Steve: So how do you keep people engaged and actually making progress? Like you obviously want them to be successful, right? So what are some tricks that you use for that?

Amy: Okay, so one of the things that I have seen that really works well for me is a private Facebook group. Now because – so this is what I do and this is not for everybody, but it works for me. When you get into my program, I do have a time where the cart is open, we get everyone into the program, and then the cart is closed. So it’s not an Evergreen program. So when you start, if you join at the mastery level, there’s two levels, self-study and mastery. If you join at the mastery level, the first 90 days in that private Facebook group and only mastery are in the private Facebook group, the first 90 days I’m in there every single day Monday through Friday answering questions.

Now it is completely overwhelming in the beginning, because it’s a few hundred people and they have a million questions. And then when they see other people asking questions they are like, “Oh well I got this one, and what about this one, what about that?” So I have to kind of calm myself down in the beginning knowing that it’s going to even add a little bit and it has already which is great. But the questions are so smart, and they allow me to correct their journey when they are going through like, “Don’t take that route. Go here.” Or “I would fix this or that.” Like I’m looking at their opt-in pages and their emails and everything they are doing, and I just feel like this is allowing them to hit success so must faster. So I love the private Facebook group interaction.

Steve: Okay, and what was your motivation for doing this on Facebook as opposed to having your own private forum?

Amy: So I actually have my own private forum for self study. So for self-study I have my own private forum and here’s – it’s just really a personal thing. I don’t love forum functionality. We look through so many forums, we’ve tried to find something that I’m comfortable with, maybe it’s just because I’ve been on Facebook for so long, and I’ve done groups for so long that it’s comfortable for me. But I like the flow of the conversation better inside a Facebook group.

And one thing – this is totally a side not – but when I do, because I have so many people on that group I answer question for, I use Snagit and create quick videos of my voice while I’m looking at let’s say their opt-in page. And instead of typing out my entire answer to them, all they are doing is hearing my voice while I look at their stuff, and it’s so quick for me. And they like that personal touch. So that’s another thing.

Steve: That’s a good tip.

Amy: It really helps me.

Steve: Yeah. Probably doesn’t hurt that you have the Dorset voice going on for you.

Amy: Listen, I’m going to work that voice now, oh yeah.

Steve: So one thing I do at my class I just started a show real quick is I had this point system. So if you are like post in the forums, if you attend office hours you get points that you can redeem for free stuff like a one on one consult and that sort of thing.

Amy: Nice. That’s a great idea, so it keeps them more engaged?

Steve: Yeah it encourages them to kind of post more often and share more stuff.

Amy: That’s actually brilliant. I love it. It’s like the game on [inaudible] [00:35:42] people love. That’s great.

Steve: So I’m just curious also. It sounds like you do launches and then you close it down, launch and then close it down. What was your motivation for doing it that way as opposed to an Evergreen type of sequence?

Amy: So I actually have both. I have one Evergreen program. It’s like a Facebook one on one program. We run ads to it daily and it’s there’s a whole sales funnel. I love that. And then the real truth of it is we started doing these launches like I said back in 2012, and I’ve never made it Evergreen. Now I’m a little nervous to do so, because they’ve been wildly successful for my business, like we almost hit a million dollar launch this last one we did. And we really haven’t dialed in.

And so my fear to be really transparent is if I turn that into an evergreen program, are we able going—are we going to be able to generate that, because there’s such a live aspect. I’m doing live webinars. There’s a countdown timer. The cart’s closing soon. All that urgency like our biggest days during my live launches are the days that the early bird price is going to go up by $100, and the final day that the cart closes, are huge days for us, so that all goes away in Evergreen.

Now I will tell you. This is a mistaken magic on my part and I know it’s a mindset block. And I know like I read Russell Brunson’s book DotCom Secrets and I know if he was sitting here with me he’d be like, “You are crazy, and you should turn that into Evergreen.” And I am open to it. So if you could– I say, if you are starting your business, the more Evergreen automated business you can create, to me the happier you are going to be, because what’s scary– luckily, my launches have always been successful, but let’s say the next one isn’t so successful. I was relying on a certain amount of income, it didn’t come in, and now the launch is over. That to me is a little bit scary. So I don’t like the whole launch model, so I only do two a year because of that.

Steve: So let me ask you this, for your Evergreen product, how do you create incentive scarcity?

Amy: So what we do is, one we are playing with Deadline Funnel right now. And so Deadline Funnel’s tool is a little bit more techie than my taste, but I have some people on the team helping me. But everybody is on their own deadline depending on when you sign up for the webinar, your deadline starts. So you are seeing a countdown timer that no one else is, and so that’s your own deadline.

The other thing is that’s not the only way we are doing it. We are just experimenting with that to see if it’s something we would like for our business. But what I’ve done in the past is we do a 50% discount in email. And so we’ll say okay, you get a 50% discount, here’s the secret code and then we email two more times and we say, okay this is it. This is your last email. Well the code they are getting is to the 50% page, but if you went to my jump start sales page, it’s actually a two hundred dollar product. So it’s the discount code that creates the scarcity.

Steve: I see. I see. Actually this is stuff that David Siteman Garland does.

Amy: Yeah, we’ve talked a lot about that at mastermind. So I got a lot of help from him.

Steve: I use a similar tool called page exploration robot. Same thing I think.

Amy: Page exploration robot.

Steve: The difference is it’s not a hosted solution, so it’s just a word press plug in, there’s no monthly fees, you just pay for it once and it’s…

Amy: Well I like that. Okay, I’ll have to check it out.

Steve: Okay, can we talk a little bit about your launches. I know in the past and I’ve kind of followed you for a little while. You have these really long launches, right. Sometimes they are like weeks and weeks.

Amy: 20 days.

Steve: Yes 20 days. So how do you structure your launch to maximize sales?

Amy: So what we do, there’s a few different things. The way our launch starts is that, we start promoting webinars. I do about five live webinars during those 20 days not including the new affiliates. I don’t do a big affiliates place, or maybe like five or six affiliates will do live webinars with me, but not [inaudible] [0:39:20] them. We do about five to our own list and we spread it out over let’s say the first week and a half, two weeks of the launch. And so what happens is we start running ads about a week in advance, maybe five days in advance of that first webinar.

The day the webinar– the first webinar, is the day the cart opens. So the first webinar I do is the first day the cart opens, and that’s when we do the 20-day countdown. 20 days is arbitrary, it’s just kind of it’s what works for us. From there, we are constantly filling up these webinars to kind of we are using Facebook ads like $40,000, $50,000 worth of Facebook ads over 20 days. And we are filing up my webinars and then a lot of the money also for ads is going to retargeting. Anybody that hits the registration page from my webinar or the sales page, they are going to get retargeted with Facebook ads encouraging them to come back, either check up the sales page or sign up the webinar.

Steve: Okay, before you go on can I just ask how much you pay for you to sign up for a webinar?

Amy: Yes, on average between three to five dollars. So that’s basically…

Steve: It’s in line with what I’m getting too.

Amy: Okay, cool. So that’s basically where we are at. And this last launch I will say, we were closer to the five dollar range and sometimes we couldn’t even get it under five dollars. So we actually stopped some of our ads. So you just never know with Facebook, because we targeted all of the same people again as we did back the last launch, but you just never know. So we run these ads. So that is part of the way we kind of keep this launch going is that we have these live webinars.

In addition, a big play is the early bird special. So I come out with the price. It’s $497 for self-study or $1000 for VIP or mastery. And what happens is about five days before the cart closes; the price goes up to full price. So we are constantly talking about the early bird pricing in ads and in emails. So there’s a huge email play as well. And so we are constantly talking about the email, I mean the early bird special going away. And I close mastery on the day that the price goes up. Because usually—I probably should close it a little bit before, once it gets to around $200 is when I want to close it out. And so once we get close to that we say like we’ve got ten spots left and it’s really true. We really have ten spots left and once they are full we close it. And that’s creates some urgency as well.

So there’s a lot of things going on. One other thing we added for this first time, this last launch we just finished that we’ve never done before are what we call timely bonuses, where I got the bonuses on my sales page. And in addition to that, we emailed twice with the special bonus people didn’t know about. So it gave us an excuse to email one of our words like my swipe file for my emails. You’ve got a packed swipe files. So we ran an ad about it, we emailed about it, and anybody who had already purchased got this bonus, and then we added it to the sales page as a new bonus. So it created some hype around that as well.

Steve: That’s clever. So you bring back people and giving them something for them to come back to your sales funnel.

Amy: Yes.

Steve: Okay. How do you—when you run your webinars, how do you ensure that people actually attend, because I would imagine the conversion rate is much better when it’s live.

Amy: Great question. This is kind of like something I’m super passionate about, because it’s a big deal. So for a while my attendance rate on webinars went down. They were on 20% maybe 25%. But it was low and it was freaking me out, because you are right. If people show up and they are live on that webinar, they are more likely to either buy live on the webinar, or they are more likely to pay attention to the my email funnel after the webinar. So it’s a really big deal that I get people on live.

So what we do now is that we send a series of about four emails and these emails are encouraging you to get on live. “Hey you signed up. We are so excited about it.” And then one of my emails is like, “Let me tell you a story about those who show up live and those who don’t. And this is what I’ve seen.” So I actually just talk about it inside the emails. I might give a case study. I give on three questions to think about before they show up live. So that’s another thing I want them to do again. Show up live, show up live. And I give them a work book to get them kind of excited about what’s to come. So we do a really big push to get people on live.

Steve: It sounds like you give away special treats for people who come on.

Amy: Yes.

Steve: Okay. And so what did that do to your attendance rate?

Amy: So we at least got up to sometimes 32% which is pretty average. I know some people have more than that. But if I’m at 30% show up rate, I feel really good especially because if we’re using go to webinar, each of my webinars I can get about 3000 people to sign up and then I cut it off. So if I get 3,000 people to show up or to sign up for a webinar then I know I’m at least going to get 30 of that a 1,000.

Steve: That is not—so what’s funny is for my class, I have done like the low energy method. So someone just signs up for my list and I have this 30-email sequence that just goes out over time.

Amy: I love that.

Steve: Because I just don’t have the time. I mean I have two kids and then a full time job actually, so I don’t have the time to do this stuff. But it’s really cool to hear, I mean it’s crazy the amount of people that you are getting on these webinars. So what is a typical conversion rate on a webinar that you feel good about when it happens?

Amy: That one’s really tough for me, because I feel like we’ve seen it all over the place. Sometimes 10%, sometimes 20%, it really truly depends on where that audience came from. My list versus an affiliate, versus cold traffic, but one thing we do pay attention to is cost per registrant. And so if we can get that around $20, even higher, we are feeling really good. So that’s the number we started to pay attention to. How much money are we ultimately going to make per everybody that registers for a webinar?

Steve: I see. So you mentioned earlier that $5 per Facebook regist—is that a registrant or someone who actually attends?

Amy: A lead. Just for a lead.

Steve: Okay. I see.

Amy: So if we are paying $5 for a lead for a lead and then we are making $30 per registrant, we are doing good.

Steve: Oh yes, absolutely. I see where you are getting at now. So can you talk a little bit about– and we are running out of time, but can you talk a little bit about like how you actually structure the actual live webinar?

Amy: Yes. So with the live webinar, what I do is, in the very beginning, and I’m very much similar to David Siteman Garland, where I tell people if you are here for this reason or this reason you are in the right place. So I just right away, if you are here to do XYZ I’m so glad you are here, because you are on the right place. And then from there, I often talk about objections and for me it’s usually Facebook no longer works, Facebook ads are too expensive all those things I know my audience is staying right off the cuff. So I address those right away.

And I spend very little time talking about myself. One thing I’ve seen in webinars a lot of people are spending like five slides telling people all about themselves, and most people don’t care. They are there, they want to learn the content, and what I’ve done even more so is I’ve started telling the story about myself through some more information. So I will talk about how my email list has grown. So that’s what people want to hear. They want to know how you did that. And I will say “When I started, this is what it looked like.”

So I’m telling stories through some success that I’ve had. And then I get into the content. I always like to gear my content directly to the product I’m going to sell, and I always like to do steps. So usually it’s seven steps to XYZ. And here’s how much they are related. My last—my profit ad program is “Seven steps to create a social media sales funnel.” Well that’s exactly what I talk in the webinar. The seven steps that are included to create social media sales funnel. But no way would I ever be able to teach so much that they are like, “I got it. I’m good. I don’t need your product.”

I get them so excited about the possibilities of what they could do that by the time I’m ready to sell, it is the most seamless thing, like hey you got two options here, you can try to figure out these seven steps on your own, who the heck has time for that. Or if you like my teaching style, and you think you’ve learned a lot today and you want to dive in deeper with me, then I want to invite you to the profit lab, and here is what we are going to do.

So it’s just a really easy transition, and that’s where most people get stuck is the content in the sell. And usually you hear a pause which I have so done this in the past. And then in a little bit of a cranky voice, and then you go into selling it, you kind of lose out, so it takes some time.

Steve: So do you offer any incentives at the end to encourage in the sign up right now?

Amy: I do, I always do a fast action bonus which is just one special bonus that I only give away if you are live on a webinar. And so that is a really big, we actually recently did this with Lead Pages, I did a big webinar — three webinars with them the last three days, ten paged in the webinars to be exact, to my list.

And we tried two different ways and one of the ways was, hey if you are on this webinar now you get this special bonus, but if you buy in the next few days we’ve got these five different things you get. But you have to buy now and we had a bigger cost per conversion, because of that, so or we had more buyers just to say, yeah.

Steve: More revenue. So that implies that you prefer to give a ways as opposed to giving coupons, right?

Amy: You are right, now you and I are in different worlds, so if I was in ecommerce I would probably do more discounts.

Steve: Interesting, why is that?

Amy: I feel like people — okay, so one of the things, do you know James Wentworth [ph]? Okay, so, James and I were talking and we were talking about what people need to actually join your email list. And I always see this; people come to your website for two reasons one, they need more information, they are looking for details to see if they ready to buy. Two, they are ready to buy, but they want to see how easy you are going to make it for them to buy.

And so this is not always true across the board, but in many cases. So when I’m ready to buy a physical product let’s say I’m interested in [inaudible 00:48:54] I need a new hair dryer. So I know I need a hair dryer, I’m looking online, Amazon is offering it for this, this site is offering it for this, but it gives me free shipping, I’m 100% going with the free shipping.

So I like when I’m going to buy a physical and I’m looking for that product, if you make it easy for me to buy, I’m more likely to do something. So discounts, free shipping, maybe a little extra zing in there, I don’t know what it would be, but if I buy this I also get that. I’m ready to buy now, so I want that, versus you again be told about my Facebook program, you might not think you even need it yet, so let me give you a free webinar cheat sheet to kind of ease you into it.

Steve: Yes, sorry I misunderstood you. I thought we were talking about my digital product here not the physical product yeah, for physical product for sure yeah.

Amy: Okay good, I thought maybe you totally disagreed with me, I’m like whoa, I’m not an expert on products, so you are so…

Steve: I don’t dare disagree with you because you are clearly — you got a book and everything so. So just curios and we are running out of time once again, but how would your structure be different if you were promoting a physical product, which doesn’t have the crazy margins that a digital product would on Facebook?

Amy: It’s so true, so I would still definitely make it play for growing my email list, but what I would do is I probably would do more of the weekly newsletter kind of things that I get from Crate & Barrel and [inaudible 00:50:12] and all that good stuff where I’m interested, tell me what you got, what’s going on. So I definitely would do a different email play every single week.

And then I would personally do more discounts and free shipping in those opportunities. I would also would probably, now this doesn’t make sense, because I should be using more video now. But I probably would even use more video if I had a physical products that I could show people what it is, what it does, what it looks like, all that good stuff. So video would probably be a bigger play for me as well.

Steve: Amy incidentally, that’s the only way I have been able to get Facebook ads profitable.

Amy: Really, that’s so good to know actually.

Steve: I send them to a content page and it’s very heavy on the email sign up forms. And it’s just a piece of content like that uses our products, like demonstrate uses of our products. Get them on the email list and there’s links to actual products that they can buy if they want, but then I market to them on the backend with an auto responder sequence.

Amy: Nice.

Steve: But when I was sending them straight to a product page, it was not well at all.

Amy: Okay, that’s really good to know, so the video really does work well for you.

Steve: Not video, just content, just text based content. We are in the wedding industry, so there’s lots of wedding ideas to get around. But we get them on the email list and then we market to them there.

Amy: Gotcha, okay, I love it that’s great to know, that’s really great to know.

Steve: So Amy I have kept you on for quite a while, thanks a lot for coming on. If anyone wants to check you out and check out your programs, listen to your dulcet voice, where can they find you?

Amy: You can find me at Amyporterfied.com, and I want to tell you this is truly been a pleasure, you definitely have a skill for interviewing, you made it a lot of fun, I can’t believe we’ve been on for an hour.

Steve: I know time flies?

Amy: Really good.

Steve: All right thanks a lot for coming on the show Amy, I really appreciate it.

Amy: Thanks a lot, you take care.

Steve: All right, take care.

What an awesome episode, it still blows my mind how Amy made almost seven figures in a single launch, that is incredible. And in fact after talking to her, I decided to do a webinar of my own and managed to make over $60,000, so her strategies really work. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode84, and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review.

It’s by far the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web. Now if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first years business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up on the front page and I’ll send it to you right away.

Once again I also want to thank HostGator for sponsoring this episode. HostGator is one of the best webhost out there that I recommend if you want to start a blog. And in fact I hosted mywifequitherjob.com on there in the very beginning and loved it. You get 24/7 life support via chat, phone, and email. You can install WordPress in just a single click, and they have an easy to use website builder design services. And the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount, once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit.

I also want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend, if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. So everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing is all built in. So all you have to do is populate it with the products that you want to sell and you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to bigcomerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again URL is bigcomerce.com/mywifequitherjob, thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

083: How To Create Profitable Email Autoresponders For Ecommerce Stores With Xiao Hui Wang

How To Create Profitable Email Autoresponders For Ecommerce Stores

Today I’ve my buddy Xiao Hui Wang on the show. I met Xiao Hui at the Ecommerce Fuel live event last year and he definitely made an impression on me with his email expertise.

X runs the site EssenceOfEmail.com where he specializes in email marketing specifically for ecommerce.

Unlike email marketing for blogging, sending out emails for an ecommerce store selling physical products is quite different and requires an alternate approach. X is an expert when it comes to email marketing for ecommerce so I invited him on to teach us a few lessons.

Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • The email campaigns that you should be running for your online store
  • How to structure your transactional emails
  • How to create a post purchase series
  • How to create a welcome series
  • How to create an abandoned shopping cart sequence
  • How to create a re-engagement series
  • Which autoresponder sequences to implement right away
  • Should you use images in your emails?
  • Should you use a personal or professional tone in your emails?

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

BigCommerce.com – If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free
bigcommerce-logo

HostGator.com – If you are interested in starting your own WordPress blog, then click here to get 30% off webhosting at HostGator.com!
Hostgator

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiteherjob.com, sign up right on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email

Now before I begin I want to thank HostGator for sponsoring the show. HostGator is an incredible webhost that I highly recommend. And in fact did you know that mywifequitherjob.com was hosted on HostGator in the very beginning? They offer 24/7 live support via chat, phone and email, one click WordPress install, so you can literally install a WordPress blog in a matter of minutes. They have an easy to use website builder, design services, marketing services, and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount. Once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit.

I also want to give a quick shout out to my other sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. Now as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store, and Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here’s what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce does not nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

There’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need to hire a designer. Everything from design to payment processing is all built-in, and you just have to populate it with your own products. So you can literally start your online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, today I have got my buddy Xiao Hui on the show. But for some reason everybody refers to him as ‘X’ which sounds way cooler, so that’s what I’m going to call him today during the interview. Anyway I met X at the ecommerce field live event last year, and he definitely made an impression on me with his email expertise. Now X runs the site essenceofemail.com, where he specializes in email marketing specifically for ecommerce.
Now unlike email marketing for blogging, sending out emails for a physical ecommerce store is quite different and actually requires someone different approach. So X is an expert in this realm when it comes to email marketing for ecommerce, so I invited him on the podcast to teach us a couple of lessons. And with that welcome to the show X, how are you doing today man?

X: I’m doing fantastic, how about yourself Steve?

Steve: I’m doing good and I understand that you are Romanian, and what’s really cool about your business– we were just beforehand is that, X actually travels to different parts of the world for like months at the time and just works there just because his business is entirely remote. So I find that really cool. But before we start X give us a quick background of how you got started with Essence of Email, how did you gain all your experience about running email campaigns for ecommerce?

X: Yeah, absolutely, so real quick background on myself, so prior to starting this company which I started about a year and a half ago, a little bit more than that, I was working for about two years with a different agency in San Francisco, and we were doing the exact same thing ecommerce email. So that’s kind of where I learned the ropes of email marketing, and so if you add up the years it’s been kind of three and a half years just daily [scheme] and there’s particular channels of email marketing for ecommerce.

So I have kind of seen the game in terms of different email programs from various different niches whether it’s apparel, whether it’s furniture, whether it’s supplements, anything under the sun as well as kind of the different sizes of stores from people who are just starting out all the way up to some aisle of 500 big bucks retailers.

Steve: Well, so here is the question, so why did you decide to leave that firm, and how did you know that you could do this on your own as an independent company?

X: Yeah, a great question, so it was a great company that I worked for, I was — I had great relationships with all my co-workers and boss and all that. Well, really I knew — I guess from an early age if you will, that I was just meant to kind of do the more entrepreneurial path or something like that, because it’s just kind of my personality and the way I am. I’m part of that networking group, you might have heard of it dynamos circle, basically a lot of location independent entrepreneurs. I mean they have annual meet ups similar to Ecommerce Fuel, and I went to one I think that was back in 2013.

I got to get my year straight now. So it was the end of 2013, and I was talking to some people I was saying, hey I really want to get on my own, I really want to kind of try to do some long term travel as well as create a company. And actually from that conference I got my first two clients. So it kind of rolled from there, and I decided like hey, let’s just try this thing on my own and we are here.

Steve: That’s cool, so how do you get your clients, I’m just curious in general?

X: In general yes, mostly referral and very specific — people coming in from very specific like content we have. For example Ecommerce Fuel actually has been a good source just because every once the ecommerce store owner there. And what we’ve been doing, we actually haven’t been doing a lot of heavy marketing, which is something I should probably focus on too. But mostly we’ve just been putting out some good content around email marketing for ecommerce, and showing people different tips and specifics on how they can improve their programs. And then we’ve mostly been word of mouth to date.

Steve: Yeah, because I know that, I first encountered you when you — on the Ecommerce Fuel forum you posted like this gigantic ten page thing on email marketing. I was like damn I have never seen anyone post such a long post on a forum before, and that’s what got my attention, I’m not sure if you’ve got any clients from that as well. But is that your strategy for getting clients, just putting content out there, getting yourself known, and then having people come to you?

X: Yeah, absolutely I think on our side, the marketing is important for every business of course, but in our mind it’s really about delivering for clients. So right now we have our current clients, and we are more focused on stream lining our operations to make sure we are giving the most value there. And my philosophy is, you definitely want to do some marketing, but the same time the best kind of marketing is just satisfied clients, right?

People are happy with the work you do, then they let other people know, especially in the space and a lot of other spaces, ecommerce store owners tend to also know other ecommerce store owners. So word of mouth has been pretty powerful for us.

Steve: So what are some of the companies that you’ve helped in the past, do you have any success stories that you would like to share just to demonstrate kind of like the power of email?

X: Yeah, absolutely and we work with kind of a variety of different niches, but I’ll just pull one of the recent engagements we just wrapped up with. And they sell — I won’t get into specifics of the product, but they sell kind of one type of product that’s very — it’s customized, but it’s not like a store that sells a bunch of different skills. And for them they had literally zero email marketing. And what we did for them is we implemented a couple of different auto responder sequences for them. And also on boarded their list which has been — it was — they have been in business for a few years, so they had a few thousand on their list, but they haven’t really sent any email out to them.

So we pretty much took the list, cleaned up a bit and sent the first few campaigns out to get people rolling, in addition to auto responder sequences. And today it’s accounted for about 40% of monthly revenue. Just to do email channel since we got started, so it’s pretty powerful in terms of going from no email to having a program running. So and generally I would say like a target to shoot for, and it’s kind of a big range, but depending on your audience, anywhere between 10% to 30% of total revenue coming from the email channel is a good estimate.

Steve: So all those of that 15% or whatever it was, what percentage of those are new customers, versus old customers, versus recovery customers?

X: Yeah, absolutely so I don’t have the exact percentages in front of me, but I would say one of the more successful parts of that was the prospect series. So that one is geared towards new customers coming in, so we are targeting them primarily through on site overlays, so smart overlay capture forms that’s based on certain set of logics, so it’s not just popping up whenever someone first gets on. And that’s targeting people who have not purchased before and with that’s we’ve seen some pretty high conversion rates, I’d say in terms of the 14% not quite 50%, but maybe like 35 to 45 was coming from that.

And then the rest are sequencers for repurchases etcetera. Now a caveat there is that usually, even though prospects series are quite powerful you usually will still view email as primarily a remarketing channel. So most of the time focusing on the past customers that’s where you’ll get the most bank for your book.

Steve: Okay, so let’s go into a lot more depth about some of the things that you said, so let’s say from this scenario of a business owner, let’s say I’m one of your clients. And let’s say I have like 5,000 emails that I have just collected randomly, I haven’t done anything with them for a year. What would you advice me to do, and what sort of sequences should I focus on first?

X: Yeah, absolutely, so first I would ask you, how did you collect those email addresses, most of the time the majority, the biggest portion of the list is going to come from past customers who sign up when they are checking out, right? So they have the checkout, at check out you have the ‘subscribe to our newsletter box’ and you are getting customers coming in from there. So let’s assume that’s the case where it’s mostly just past customers. The next step then is if they are a year old, it’s not as bad, but if they are several years, we will still probably go through the same process.

But what I’m worried about is we can’t really use that entire list, because there’s going to be — the list is more or less cold as we call it, because we haven’t emailed them really sends, the oldest customers are like a year old. So what we would do is we would do a little bit of a list cleaning. There are several ways to go about that, the easiest way is probably to use a pay service. So there’s a couple of third party software where we can take your list and put it in and they’ll spit out kind of the bad email addresses, and we’ll keep ones that are good, so you can retain the portion that are good.

And the reason to do this is of course to help your deliverability, making sure that you don’t have these bad addresses on your email list that make you get blacklisted, or have problems getting into the inbox.

Steve: So you don’t recommend sending an email saying, hey I know we haven’t contacted you in a while, if you want to stay on this list click here type of thing?

X: See we do want to do that, but this is a step before actually, because what this does is it will clean out the ones that say are email addresses that are typos for example. Or are just bad email addresses that have gone dormant etcetera, potentially spam traps on there. So afterwards then we will proceed to actual sending of the message, right?

So then we will send out email saying, hey something like what you said, we haven’t really messaged you in a while, but we have — we are starting up the new email program with all these cool things going on, if you want to subscribe stay on the list. So that’s one way to do it, and another way is I guess maybe a little bit less cautious, but in terms of response rates it’s just playing on that psychology right? The checked box, pre checked box versus the unchecked box, kind of psychology.

So instead of saying– because if the list the way you got the list was people already checking the box for example at check out, they are technically opted in already, right? So it’s more so just to make sure that you don’t want to opt out. In which case the way I would structure that email would be something like, hey we haven’t messaged you in a while, if you don’t want to be on our new awesome email program then click here to unsubscribe. And thus that should retain you — at least initially, and create a portion out of the list, than if you ask someone specifically for extra call to action to re-subscribe.

Steve: Okay, right, okay, and so what’s the next step, I’m not sending out any emails and now I have this list that is kind of responsive.

X: Absolutely, so let me just back track a little bit on, just a quick little high level thing and then will talk specifically on that. So basically at the high level we see email programs for ecommerce as two parts. One is of the automated emails so auto responders, the triggers, the sequences etcetera. And then two is the kind of regular manual promotional campaigns, so you are setting up and sending to the larger portion of the list. So to answer your question and those are the two parts you want to focus on. So I say number one, you want to just stab on the side of the badge [ph] campaigns.

You want to establish some sort of calendar and stick to that calendar. So even if it’s like a once per month sort of send, the key is sticking to that and not just sporadically sending whenever you remember emails. So that’s one side, even if it’s like a newsletter or once a month promotion something like that they could all work. Start simple, start working, rather than running and have that calendar in place that you are following for the mass sends.

Steve: Do you have a recommendation on email frequency for those marketing emails?

X: Yeah, absolutely, so we would like — it varies depending on your audience and your product and how responsive they are. But on a general level what we say is let’s start more conservative, so once or twice a month, and then scale up, and see the trends and the engagement rates. And then in addition to that there’s another level you can do particular for more amateur programs as well is you want to segment your list based on the engagement, so that different segment and [sketch] different frequency.

So if you think about it, let’s say you have a list of like 10,000 people, right? In the beginning you can send them all at the same frequency, but once you get some more data in, then it doesn’t make sense to send the entire list, say you normally send like three times a month. It doesn’t make sense to send the entire list three times a month. No, because maybe 2,000 of those 10,000 people open every single email. They are really engaged, they’ll open, they’re clicking and then maybe 7,000 of them really open their email every once in a while, but not every single one.

And then the rest of them are almost never opening or once in a blue moon, right? And in those cases what we suggest is at least passing out the list by engagement, you can look at open rates, you can look at click rates, you can look at a combination of the factors and saying hey, the folks who are most engaged with us, we want to send them at our highest frequency. And then the once that are kind of in the middle will scale it down a bit and the ones that are very dormant let’s touch them only once in a while with our really juicy promotions.

Steve: Is there a certain open rate and click rate goal that you are trying to achieve?

X: Well, again, the core of it is it depends right, based on the benchmark of your previous emails and how they do. But in general I would say it like average sort of industry wide open rate that I like to see is at least like 20%. And that’s kind of a really rough bench mark, depending on how your niche it could be much-much higher. I mean we’ve had clients come in and they are at 50% plus straight off the bat just because of their product and their…

Steve: And of course the content matters also right?

X: Yeah, absolutely. And you also want to keep in mind the composition of your list is going to impact your open rates, potentially bias it. For example, if it’s an old list and not really in this scenario, but for example if a client came to us, they’ve been sending a little bit of email, they had an old list and like 50% of that list is actually very dormant, then say we do a list cleaning and take out all those people who have never opened in a long time. Then artificially open rates is going to spike up, you want to take that in context.

Steve: I was just asking that question from the stand point of if the open rates start dropping to a certain number, start getting worried that you might need to clean out your list.

X: Yeah, that’s one thing. Another thing is there’s many factors impacting it. Maybe your copy on the [inaudible] [0:18:47] line is not up to par. Maybe the content that you are sending is just getting old. There’re various things that can impact it.

Steve: So let’s focus actually on the auto-responders because most people are lazy, and they want something just kind of automated. So let’s talk about some of the automated sequences that you advice people/stores to implement.

X: Yap, absolutely. So I’ll just kind of give a list, talk a little bit about each, so obviously number one cart abandonment email, kind of a no brainer. It’s going to be very productive on the revenue front and the pound for pound is a very good email to have or a sequence even. So at the very least having one, and then you can potentially build it out to be multiple attachments.

Steve: So how would you structure your abandoned sequence? What works well for some of your clients?

X: Yeah it’s actually very again we definitely want to start with the first one and generally how we structure is up to three touch points. The first one going out say like four to six hours after cart abandonment, and that is just kind of a friendly reminder. Sometimes we show the products, sometime we just have straight call to action to come back. Generally we don’t offer a discount code within the first one.

And then if we then additionally we do the next one which will like be a 24 hour later one and then maybe like a 48 or 72 hour later touch. Then we potentially will put a coupon code or a free shipping code or something into the second one and the third one. One thing you can do is you can do a scale. For instance on the second one you might have a 10% offer and on the third one you might have a 15% off, the logic being you might need a better discount if they gotten to that point and still haven’t purchased.

Steve: So how do you prep people from gaming that system?

X: If you are a savvy marketer you’ll probably game the system. What I’ve noticed is it’s not the [inaudible] [0:20:44] the audience, the customers who buy from you and all that, but in general people are not as savvy marketers as we are. The normal consumer is not really thinking that deep for most part. So we haven’t found it to be too much of a problem, but of course the key is if we do not want to train them to be in that mindset, right? So not really good answer to how to completely prevent them.

Steve: What I was getting at was would you recommend not giving coupon codes for example for someone who has purchased in the past already?

X: Yeah that’s one way to go about it. I say to you, one thing to look at is just doing like an A/B test on one with the coupon code, one without a coupon code. Not only to see which one performs better because most of the time the coupon code is going to perform better, but also just comparing like the margins that you are sacrificing, is that really worth the lift in the sales.

Steve: Okay, and what are some of the guidelines for– like what conversion rates do you typically see from these abandoned emails?

X: They vary yet again, but anywhere…

Steve: Like when should I be worried? If the percentage is too low, like when should I get worried that I’m not doing the right thing?

X: Yeah if it’s dropping, if you are seeing like a 10% conversion rate or something, it’s probably a bit low. I’d say like keep it above 15% to up, the sky is the limit up there. But…

Steve: So just be clear, you meant 15% on the people who actually click on the link and land in your site, or people who you send, period.

X: On the sent; on the carts abandoned.

Steve: On the carts abandoned. And this is across the entire three sequence or just like the—you are trying them at the whole sequence right?

X: Yeah. Generally you are going to see the majority of conversions come off the first one.

Steve: Wow, so you are saying double digits of the abandoned carts can be recovered and that’s like a standard?

X: Yeah that’s fairly standard.

Steve: Okay, all right. Did you have anything else to say about the abandonment series or?

X: No I’ll jump to the next ones.

Steve: Okay.

X: So cart abandonment is one. Then also is this very based on the product, but basically kind of a reorder/cross-sale/up-sale kind of trigger. So based on the products they purchased, you want to, in a delay of course. So one that is 30 days later, 60 days later, you want to push them different products and promote to them different recommended products based around what products they purchase. In addition if your store is selling something that’s consumable, so if you are selling supplements, if you are selling anything else that’s consumable, then the reorder trigger is going to be key.

So I mean a lot of supplement companies would do like you can purchases a subscription which is great or you can purchase one off, sort of bottle or something. So in those cases you know about what time for each kind of product they will run out, and that’s a perfect opportunity to send them a reminder saying, “Hey it’s time to repurchase this particular product that you bought.”

Steve: What happens if your product is not consumable? Do you have any examples of reengagement series that companies that don’t have consumables use?

X: Yeah absolutely. So in those cases, I’d say you want to lean towards like a cross-sale or up-sale search. You still mention the product that they purchased, and then you would recommend particular ones that either go well with that product, or they are the next step above. Yeah go ahead.

Steve: No I was just going to ask, do you typically include some sort of discount for these people? How do you get them to actually come back?

X: Yeah great question. So there’s two ways to go about it. Sometimes, if we are doing kind of just a generic win back if you will, we would say, “Hey here’s a discount, if you come back and shop at this site.” Other times if we are getting more specific with the product recommendations and really strilling [ph] down to like the skill level, then end and of itself, that is sort of a value add, and generally we get people coming back through that. So in those cases it’s more so like, “Hey here’s more cool things we found for you to purchase, and here’s a reminder,” rather than here’s just another coupon code.

Steve: Hey everyone, I just wanted to take a quick moment to thank famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Now FameBit is the number one market place for You Tube influencer marketing with over 15,000 You Tubers looking to promote brand from beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Now videos start as low as $50, and it’s completely free to post a campaign and receive proposals from You Tubers.

If you’ve listen to my podcast before, one of my guests, Emmanuel Eli, used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with You Tube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code ‘my wife quit’ at famebit.com, you will automatically get $10 off. So go to famebit.com right now and get famous You Tubers to promote your products. Now back to the show.

Steve: Okay, so how I’m interpreting that is it’s not necessary to include the coupon code as long as you get a little bit more granular in what you are offering.

X: Yeah and again you should probably test it for a pretty good situation. Do one with a coupon code, do one without, see if it’s generating a significantly higher amount of sales from it.

Steve: Okay. And you are mentioning all of these things, but we are not really talking about implementation so to speak. Is there any particular piece of software that you use to implement these for these companies?

X: Yeah absolutely. So we use quite a few, but let’s just start with kind of the basics. So you have your shopping cart, and you have your email service provider which is just the platform like MailChimp for example is very popular. You can– generally we have a combination of sending out from the email service provider, and some directly from the shopping cart, and sometimes even another kind of another app or extension or some plug-in that we would recruit and use in addition to those two just based on the unique circumstances.

So let’s just take an example, for example Magento or MailChimp. That’s a pretty common combination. We would do the newsletter, the promotional campaigns, through MailChimp; we pass all these subscribers to MailChimp as well. We would set up like the post purchase welcome series, probably some prospect series in MailChimp as well. But things like the order confirmation, shipping confirmations going out through Magento, or a plug-in in Magento if you will, and cart abandonment will go through Magento as well.

And then we need to then do like product reviews and like some even– potentially the product reorder ones. Generally in product reorder we like to just, it’s a little bit more tedious because MailChimp doesn’t have a great way of just doing it in one trigger. So you would need to kind of set up a few based on different skills. We can either do it that way, or we can do again a plug-in with Magento to run those. A lot of times people also use like different review software like Yappo or Reseller ratings and all that, so that’s a different story.

Steve: Okay. I guess it just depends on what your platform is going to be. I was just curious if you have like a third party platform that’s one of your favorites.

X: Yeah I mean, generally MailChimp is a good start in terms of just having an email service provider. They have ecommerce 360 functionality which is cool that you can target based on certain order criteria. It has its limitations, but it’s a good place to start if you have kind of a smaller list and you just want to get started with email marketing.

If you want to go along the– We like to use Klaviyo because they are very focused on ecommerce unlike some of the other email service providers which cater to a lot of different niches. So their functionality is very focused on kind of a lot of the older data, and different scenarios to run into as an ecommerce shop owner.

Steve: Yeah we actually started using Klaviyo ourselves and it’s extremely powerful, and I’m actually having Ed on the show at some point down the line, but let’s go back. Sorry, we took a segway there. We were talking about reengagement series. And what’s another series that you would focus on also.

X: Yeah actually let me just make a small correction there. Generally we wouldn’t call what we are talking about reengagement series. We would say it’s maybe like a product follow up or something like that. In my mind the reengagement series really means a series you are running your dormant contacts through, and attempt to actively reactivate them. So the purpose of a reengagement series then is at the end of the series, for those people who did not respond, you are actually going to clean them from the list. So just a little bit of terminology there.

Steve: Okay. So what would you call the list that we were just talking about?

X: Yes, I’d say it would be like a product reorder product, seller product…

Steve: Kind of like a post purchase?

X: Yeah that would be part of the post purchase series. There’s going to be other touch points within there.

Steve: Okay. So when someone buys, it looks like we’ve gone through the thank you email and then the product reorder, what else goes in that sequence. Let’s finish that one off before we go on to the next one.

X: So for the post purchase series, in addition to the order confirmation, shipping confirmation, that they get anyways, the welcome email, what we like to do sometimes with that is have a call to action focused around asking them to take like some sort of survey, or to manage their preferences in which they self-identify certain characteristics about themselves. So for example what kind of product they are interested in, how they are using it, maybe what kind of demographics they are in, whatever is potentially helpful for you as a store owner to start examining those contacts.

Steve: What sort of questions do you ask?

X: I kind of rattled a few there, but in addition to that, one thing to finish that as well is if they have a particular email frequency. So if they want to receive email once a month, once per week or never, something like that, and anything else that would really help segment. So if you think about [inaudible] [0:31:50] so that’s not necessarily something that you would self-identify of, but for example if you are selling [inaudible] [0:32:00] for example, find an implication that area giving it– you’ve been getting their birthdays, or you can do a birthday trigger on, stuff like that.

Steve: And how do you incentivize them to actually fill out the survey?

X: You can either, not incentivize them and just have coffee with them.” Okay, this will be super helpful for us.” Or you can try a response until finally you can say, “Hey, fill out the survey and we will give you a small code, or small discount to use on your next purchase.”

Steve: Okay, and then once you have this information, how do you– so then you just start creating segments for these people. How is this automated?

X: Yeah absolutely. So I think with the segmentation based on some of those characteristics, is more so to get you started. So you want to continue to build a panel. So for example you want to add other criteria later on as you get more advanced such as if they visited particular product pages, what their past purchase behavior has been et cetera. So once you build out these segments, I think it’s less about automating to them, although there are other certain things you can do. But more so when you are creating sort of bigger promotions, you can be more targeted rather than sending to your entire list.

You can send to different segments, you can also incorporate the data; this gets a little bit more advanced than what you needed in the beginning. But basically you can have conditional logic in the email template itself. So you can say if someone is on X segment, then they will be shown this piece of content in the email, if they are on Y segment, they will be shown a different piece of content.

Steve: So what I was trying to get at is you are using the survey kind of to figure out what content is appealing to your customer as opposed to using that survey to automatically segment the list, is that kind of accurate?

X: That’s correct in this case, yeah.

Steve: Okay. Sorry I interrupted you again. Please go on.

X: Oh no worries, I was done with that part.

Steve: Okay, so survey, so we’ve got the thank you email, the survey, anything else?

X: Yeah, in addition to that, if you think about the process of a customer purchasing, right? Right after they purchase your product, they are kind of on that warm and fuzzy or high if you will after you buy products. So it’s the perfect time to take advantage of that, well take advantage is negative connotation, but use that. We don’t want to take advantage of our customers. But basically if you have– some brands are super active on social media for example on Instagram, on Pinterest, on Facebook, or Twitter. It’s a good opportunity to ask for sharing, for user generated photos, something like that.

So you don’t necessarily– most people after they purchase, they don’t necessarily just jump back and purchase right away again. You do get some of that actually on order shipping confirmation. Sometimes you will see immediate repurchases, after they click through those. But in general, what you want to do is you want to kind of build upon that enthusiasm and try to start building the process by getting them a bit more loyal to your brand, and getting the word out there for you.

Steve: Yes, so what do you recommend for that? just sending out content, pure content, or like what would your sequence be for just keeping engaged with the customer, and then occasionally getting them sales emails.

X: Absolutely. So if you envision the sequence post purchase is actually going to be super long, because how this will go, is that it will dovetail into your main email campaign. So basically it’s a couple of quick points, quick touch points and then they will be put on to your main kind of ongoing email sequence pieces which are more manual.

So we want to thank them, we want to get them to share us. So maybe we mention some of the, if you have a really good blog or something, mention some of the cool piece of content they may find useful within the next touch point. And then if you have like a royalty program and some additional value add for shopping with you, mention that as well. But afterwards then they will kind of move towards your batch campaigns in your regular sense afterwards.

Steve: Okay and so I know we also touched on the reengagement series, can we talk a little bit about that, because it’s different than the post purchase series that we’ve been talking about, right?

X: Yeah absolutely. So the reengagement series, basically with any email list, even if you are doing very good email marketing, a portion of that list will eventually become dormant. Now of course a portion of them will just unsubscribe or complain or something, but there’s so many people who just don’t open their emails, they are dormant, but they never unsubscribe. They are still on the list.

So the reengagement series is really a precursor to cleaning the list. A quick way to do this is just identify your dormant people and just remove them, but that’s not going to be the best way because you can reactivate a portion of those folks right. So it’s not going to be big portion, maybe less than 10% sometimes a little bit higher than that of those folks may still have some life in them, and would engage in your emails in the future at some point.

So what we’re trying to do with the reengagement series is to identify who those contacts are. Basically what we’re doing is we’re sending them maybe like a three or four touch point series over a course of a little bit longer so maybe over a course of a month or something like that. Where the purpose of these email is to get them to open or click right.

So basically if they take that action we know at least their email address isn’t completely dead. So for those folks who do take that action we’re going to keep them on our list maybe have them on a very little frequency, but keep them on our list, and then for the rest of them who are dormant, and have not responded to this reengagement series we clean them from the list.

Steve: So to get them to click do you tend to use very catchy headlines?

X: Yes, so the subject line is going to be key in terms of the series, because you know one of the primary things they see first is that subject line, and that’s going to be very responsible for– to kind of opens that you will get.

Steve: So what are some examples of subject lines that you would use?

X: Yeah absolutely so you can get as clever as you want, but let me just– why don’t I do this, why don’t I break down typically what mail content or topics should be within the series, and then that will give you an idea in terms of the subject lines right. In general you’ll see a lot of stores do this, the first sort of touch on this is a sort of what to call like ‘we’ve missed you’ kind of email.

So you can see different brands be very creative with the copy here or potentially just saying, “Hey we haven’t see you in a while, do you still want to get our emails?” Something like that, and with that one you’re not really offering too much incentive yet, it’s a very light touch point, just reminding them you’re still there, maybe saying, “Hey here are some of our new products since the last time you potentially visited.” And getting them to open the email.

The second one– and series could potentially go wrong, but generally we keep it to a three or four touch points. Second one would be something that’s really screaming to them on the discount front right. So something really juicy that’s on beyond your normal discount, say like if you offer a lot of five percent off discounts you want to offer like a 10% on in here in this case. And you want to at least have the illusion of being it being personalized, sometimes based on technologies you use it’s hard to get true personalized expiring coupon codes within each one of these emails, but for this one it’s what we call like a ‘deep discount’ sort of email, where we’re playing on a different angle to try and get them to reengage right. So we’re saying here’s a really juicy discount, click through, use the discount etcetera.

Steve: Is– oh sorry go on.

X: Go ahead.

Steve: No, I was just going to ask is reengagement series in terms of when to send it out, is this like an automated thing or is it something that you manually kick off occasionally for people?

X: Great question, so generally what we do is we start the first one as a manual, because a lot of time there’s a lot of dormant folks on a list when you’re starting the series. So we do a manual one for the bulk of the lists are dormant, and then from there we want to automate it. And depending on the technologies you use it could be a little bit difficult to automate, because really a true automated sequence for this is if they fall through all of the emails and don’t reengage at all, then they automatically get unsubscribed right.

Sometimes the ESP, the email service provided doesn’t have that functionality where you can say unsubscribe them. So in that case maybe put them on a separate list that you go in every once in a while and unsubscribe. So ideally it would be automated after the first sort of manual sequence, it is kind of a combination depending on what you’re working with.

Steve: Sorry I interrupted you before you were going to talk about the third touch point.

X: Yeah sure so the third touch pint is one– third/fourth sometimes we do four sometimes we do three. Its’ really being very straight forward and saying, “Hey if you don’t respond in some way we’ are just unsubscribing you from the list.” So it’s just black and white saying, “Hey we haven’t heard from you, it doesn’t seem you’re interested we’re going to unsubscribe you unless you click on this or do this action.” So it’s pretty much like a last ditch sort of effort for it.

And then a potential fourth one– so like if you imagine third one saying like, “Hey we’ll unsubscribe you in seven days if you don’t do action,” then a potential fourth one would be like, “Okay, you’re unsubscribed, but here’s a chance to re-subscribe if you ever want to in the future.” So it’s kind of the same part and parcel you can combine into one if you want.

Steve: Okay, so we’ve talked a lot about the auto responders, do you have any kind of advice on how to structure your regular marketing campaigns? And here’s a specific question relating to that, do you advice writing your emails on a very personal tone, or use more professional template like you see some of the big buck stores using?

X: Yeah, that’s a question that in this case is going to be really– I say it really depends a lot but this really does depend right, run A/B test and that’s the only way you’ll find out. So whether it’s a very professional a lot of graphics you know super optimized for images off all that, with the headers and the footers, and navigations, and all that or it’s like more of a plain text maybe just in light [inaudible] [0:43:29] elements, run some head to head A/B tests and you’ll find out.

Sometimes it’s also important to not just base your decision on one test, because a lot of times like for example, if you’re sending out regularly kind of these polished emails, and all of a sudden you send text one, you’ll probably going to get much higher engagement rates. But that might be [inaudible] [0:43:52] just because people respond to things that are [inaudible] [0:43: 55], so if it’s something that’s outside the norm from what they’ve been getting, sort of juicy artificial like in the engagement rates. If you test a couple you find one is a clear winner, then I ask you stick with it.

Steve: Okay, I’m just curious in your experience though for some of the smaller shops what has worked?

X: Great question, so in general we get better performance from more polished, but on that note you have to kind of be cognizant of not having like too much images where if it’s images off people just see blank email, and certain architectural elements, where in general we see kind of better click rates where we’re giving them more options. Of course you have the main call to action whenever you’re sending out email based on the topic of your email, but having the ability to have like header navigation with different categories, or footer navigation, that generally increases aggregate grades.

Steve: Okay, and then when you’re trying to optimize these campaigns, you talk about click rates and open rates a lot, but do you factor in the actual conversions?

X: Absolutely.

Steve: So you don’t really care– that was a damn question actually, but what I meant by that was what is your main metric in the beginning when you’re focusing on these emails, do you just look at conversions irrespective of click through rate and open rate for these emails?

X: No everything is has been taken to context, there’s a lot of different metrics you have to analyze to get the full story right. For example open rates what it’s telling you is primarily is A on that particular email like is our subject line good, is our pre-header good, have we been doing a good job up until that point in terms of having diverse content and keeping people engaged.

Click rate tells us more about– rather we separate click through opens, click through send because they tell a little bit of different story as well. But in general how many people are clicking the emails are– that’s dependent on the content of your emails; it’s dependent also a lot on the layout and how you’re coding your emails, and in the design and other factors around that.

And then of course conversion rate is the [embalm deal] at the end of the day, because you can do the most beautiful emails in the world, if they’re not converting then they’re not doing much for you right. On conversion rates of course the key is to make sure your attribution is tight, because if you for example just Google Analytics, a lot of the times we’re seeing Google Analytics just terribly under attribute what email is doing by the coders magnitude.

Steve: Wait, wait, why is that, like if you’re tagging your links why would that be the case?

X: Yes, so a lot of times email gets kind of under attributed in the sense a lot of times people would be clicking on email and then they either are converting on a desktop later, for example they click on mobile, they convert on different browser later, or they– on notify of the sale from email and they wouldn’t have come to the site anyway if they didn’t get the notification, and then they come at a later day directly to the site and click through stuff like that.

So in general we’ll get that portion that clicking through and ideally purchasing which is a portion you’ll see. At the same time there’s some issues around that, and what we recommend, actually the way we track the metrics is kind of– it’s a bit manual in some cases, but what we like to look at is different sources, so Google Analytics is one source. If your email service provider has their own web tracking we also take into account that, sometimes for example say for Klaviyo they just happen that they one. And then in addition to that if you’re using coupon codes, and even like email coupon codes, so you’re not promoting anywhere else, taking a look and comparing that data against the rest of the data, because sometimes you see some discrepancy.

Steve: Okay and I wanted also your opinion on using a lot of images in emails as opposed to just text, like you kind of touch on that, but I was just curious what your recommendations are?

X: So nowadays – most of the time [inaudible] [00:48:21] Gmail and whatever you’re opening your email with they’re getting better with just showing images, for example Google and this wasn’t that recent ago, but they rolled out kind of the default show images on and have been routing all the images to their own servers to be able to that.

So it’s getting better in terms of just show all your images correctly, but there are still substantial amount of our clients that are going to default with image off, so we are working on, which means if you are heavily-heavily image based in your emails, then a lot of the times your email might just show up with a couple of text and a blank email which is not good.

So we like to have a combination where we are using images, because a lot of products you need that visual to drive people to come back, but at the same time we’re focused on coding elements in HTML whenever possible right. So you’ll see with our [inaudible] [0:49:24] for example the header navigation, the footer navigation, and anywhere where there’s copy for most part, that’s going to be based in HTML and hot coded in.

And then the places where we can avoid it with the actual images, we’ll have like styleless all text, or kind of just a space for the image so that you can clearly tell that if you turn your images on you’ll see it. So it’s a combination, you don’t necessarily don’t want to do any images, but you definitely don’t want to do just a pure image sort of layout which actually you know I see that a lot with big time retailers.

Steve: Yeah, I know I do too, that’s why I was asking yeah.

X: And I think– and again maybe they do their own tests and they found that just works for them, but one of my theories is I think a lot of times is just the bureaucracy, they got creative departments that want pretty emails and the performance is secondary.

Steve: This is my opinion, my opinion is that a lot of these businesses don’t actually split test their emails right, and so that’s why I was just curious.

X: Oh yeah, I don’t want to go into specifics, but some of these big retailers, they may not even be segmenting that well let alone split testing, so yeah just because they’re big doesn’t necessarily mean they’re masters at this particular channel. I mean a lot of them do a really good job, but there’s also a lot that don’t.

Steve: Okay, real big question for me also is how do you escape the promotions tab, do you have any tips there?

X: Yeah so I think it’s less so about escaping it, because ultimately Google is getting smarter and getting smarter, so it’s less about escaping as more so about just keeping your users engaged. In addition into kind of doing your normal promotions you’re adding in less salesy emails, you know maybe craft a newsletter, things along those lines. I remember when the Google firm came out the tabs, the whole industry was kind of in uproar, which was when they brought that priority inbox and all of that.

Every time Google or Gmail does something crazy people freak out about it, but at the end of the day if you look at the stats there’s like some spikes and drops in the beginning, and then [inaudible] [0:51:49] I think they’re all click rates are just like a little bit below prior. At the end of the day I don’t think there is a strategy to try to escape the priorities tab, but rather do everything you can to keep your customers engaged.

Steve: Okay, all right I think those are all the questions that I’ve got, I mean we covered a whole bunch of stuff in this interview. Hey X thanks a lot for coming on the show, I learned a lot and where can people find you if they’re interested in getting consulting, or some advice about their email campaigns?

X: Yeah absolutely, so the best place to be is just our website which is www.essesnceofemail.com, or if you just want to shoot me an email as well my email is probably the simplest one ever, it’s just X@essesnseofemail.com.

Steve: Awesome X, well thanks a lot for coming on the show man really appreciate your time.

X: Sure no problem, I enjoyed it.

Steve: All right man, take care.

X: Take care.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode, X is one of my go to guys when it comes to email marketing specifically for ecommerce. And if you could not tell already email for ecommerce versus email for blogging or selling info products is actually quite different as there many more facets to consider when selling physical products online.

For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode83, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business, go to Mywifequitherjob.com and sign up right there on the front page.

Once again I also want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend if you want start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. So everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing, is all built in so all you got to do is populate it with the products you want to sell, and you can literally start you store in a matter of hours. Simply go to Bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free, once again the URL is Bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob.

I also want to thank Hostgator for sponsoring this episode. HostGator is one of the best webhost on there that I recommend of you want to start blog. In fact I hosted Mywifequitherjob.com on there in the very beginning and loved it. You get 24/7 live support via chat, phone, and email, and you can install WordPress in just a single click. They have an easy to use website builder, design services, basically everything you need, and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to Hostgator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount, once again that’s Hostgator.com/mywifequit thanks for listening

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

082: How Ed Hallen Started Klaviyo An Email Marketing Service Designed For Ecommerce

How Ed Hallen Started Klaviyo An Email Marketing Service Designed Specifically For Ecommerce

Today, I’m thrilled to have Ed Hallen on the show. If you’ve never heard of Ed, he is the founder and CEO of Klaviyo, a very popular email marketing provider that specifically caters to ecommerce stores.

Email has been a very central part of my marketing strategy for both my blog and my ecommerce store. And just recently, I’ve been cheating on my other email provider with Klaviyo and I’m thinking about getting a divorce.

I’ve been very impressed with what I’ve seen so far even though I’ve really just scratched the surface and what’s so powerful about Klaviyo is that it allows you collect information about every single customer in your shop and what they purchase.

Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Ed came up with the idea of starting Klaviyo and the back story behind it
  • The motivations for starting a business in a very crowded space
  • How much did Ed invested in his business early on
  • How Ed made Klaviyo the ecommerce store owner’s choice of platform
  • The challenges early on with his business and the difficulties of running a SAAS business
  • How email marketing will evolve as a strategy going forward

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

BigCommerce.com – If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free
bigcommerce-logo

HostGator.com – If you are interested in starting your own WordPress blog, then click here to get 30% off webhosting at HostGator.com!
Hostgator

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and join me for a free live workshop on ecommerce which I give on a regular basis. For more information about the workshop, go to mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. And if you want to get a jump on starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiteherjob.com and sign up right on the front page.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick shout out to HostGator for sponsoring the show. HostGator is an incredible webhost that I highly recommend, and in fact did you know that mywifequitherjob.com was hosted in the HostGator in the very beginning? They offer 24/7 live support via chart, phone and email, one click WordPress install, so you can literally install an entire blog in just one click. And easy to use website builder design services, marketing services, and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. Please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the 30% discount. Once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit.

Now I just want to give another shout out to my other episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store. And Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here’s what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce does not nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

There’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs so you don’t really need to hire a designer. Everything from design to payment processing is all built-in, and all you got to do is populate it with your own products, and you can literally start your online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quite Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, today I’m thrilled to have Ed Hallen on the show. Now if you’ve never heard of Ed he is the founder of klaviyo a very popular email marketing provider that specifically caters to ecommerce stores. Now email has been very a central part of my marketing strategy for both my blog and my ecommerce store. And just recently I have been cheating actually on my other email provider with klaviyo, and I’m thinking about getting a divorce actually. I have been very impressed with what I have seen so far, even though I really just scratch the surface of the email marketing service.

And what’s so powerful about Klaviyo is that it allows you to collect information about every single customer in your shop and what they purchase. So therefore if you want to send an email for anyone who has purchased a red lace handkerchief, you can easily do that. If you want to send an email to people who haven’t purchased in 60 days you can easily do that. If you want to offer a onetime coupon to first time buyers only you can easily do that. So Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I have actually used for ecommerce that’s far, and with that welcome to the show Ed, I’m really eager to see and learn how Klaviyo got started.

Ed: Hey thanks to you definitely great to be here, it’s been a long time been on the podcast.

Steve: Thanks Ed, how did you come up with the idea, tell me about Klaviyo, what’s the back story behind it. And I’m actually really curious about the name also how you came up with that.

Ed: Yeah, so the quick back story, our background the flunkies background had really been in marketing for kind of the large scale fortune 500 players, so the Wal-Marts and the Targets of the world. And what we saw there was that those companies have a ton of money, were spending tons of money on engineers, on marketers to basically take everything they knew about customers to drive kind of smarter and more personalized just better marketing. And I think we really stopped and said, hey, wait a minute why is this only happening in big companies and also why does it take so much money to not just send everybody the same marketing message.

And so from that we kind of started giving a toss in ecommerce, and really said if newsletters have the most marketing as always been, let’s just send the same thing to everybody. If we can pull in the pages, some things like that, the categories they looked at, what they bought, if they just had a support issue kind of where they are, anything we know about those customers. We can send an email that one the customers are going to like a lot better and we can also send an email that just going to be way more effective.

Steve: Just curious for these large fortune 500 companies, do they have home grown solutions, or do they use third part solutions as well?

Ed: It tends to be a mix and a bit of a hunch pad. I think what has been remarkable through us throughout is that the assumption was kind of that had these giant companies have really solved this and they’ve figured out and they haven’t. And for the most part they are using some off the shelf system, but coupled away with lots of engineers, lots of marketers in a lot of the manual work. And we see the same thing in ecommerce like just because a store has 50 million dollars in revenue, it doesn’t necessarily mean that these are solved problems, it doesn’t necessarily mean that they are any more sophisticated than stores that are much-much smaller.

Steve: Interesting yeah, I can tell you I’m by no means anywhere close to having a large store, but I have been up until the point of trying Klaviyo. I had this hunch pad of stuff where I was pulling stuff out of my database, creating a list, and then using my email marketing provider to send targeted emails, it was just really messy.

Ed: Yeah, that’s pretty common, I mean it’s — and it takes time, and you don’t want to actually do it. Another frustrating thing is that you end up — you can’t just automate it because like as soon as you are fully tied in into all that data, understood, go for basics, like you can just say hey, flip the switch, make these things automated and then you just know they are always going to be running. Which just one has way more impact and two gives a lot of peace of mind, because it just takes me off here like already overwhelmed plague.

Steve: So Ed are you a technical guy at all, or surfer guy or?

Ed: Yes, so I have been in past lives and a little bit in early days of Klaviyo, for the most part also these days. But that’s kind of where my DNA comes from, and I founded the business with co — a past coder who kind of very strong on the engineering side.

Steve: Okay and for you guys how did you guys start, actually I want to get to the name first, how did you come with the name Klaviyo just because — yeah?

Ed: It’s a great question, so at the time we were kicking around a bunch of different names and we wanted something that really evoked kind of trying to help people. And it’s rooted in the Spanish word for — the terms kind of the space ship and the rock faces to help climb and kind of have a big endorsement [ph]. So kind of the idea of what’s hey, can you — what helps people. And then it just stopped, kind of when we started to grow we always thought hey, this is for temporary, but we just never changed it and now have grown fond of it.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of the motivations for you starting your business, were you trying to target the little guys or the big guys, like what was your target market when you first launched?

Ed: To start with, we really started focusing on the little guys; we started focusing a lot on shopper stores, [inaudible 00:08:04] stores, big commerce stores, [pollution]. And the thing was hey let’s take what these big guys should be doing or kind of doing and let’s go to the really little guys. And then as we’ve grown we’ve seen that it paid us, just the really little guys people who have, store sales thousands of dollars not hundreds of thousands or millions of dollars, they had the same needs as then the next set the people up, they are going to be able to sell hundreds of thousands or millions.

And so we’ve just seen it kind of grow and grow and grow until now we work with a lot people who kind of just starting out, we kind of have a whole sets of plan where klaviyo can be like automatically build a bunch of emails for you, automatically build all these automatic flows and just set them up in your base [inaudible 00:08:52]. Obviously we work with kind of some of the largest and fastest growing ecommerce stores.

Steve: Yes, so the thing is with new guys they are probably aren’t even familiar with email marketing in the first place, right? So I would imagine it would be a harder sale for a real small guy as opposed to someone who is larger.

Ed: Yeah, so the thing we see with the little guys– I mean at some point you’ve got to — the key things you have to sort of initially is just get the business up and running, figure out where you are going to buy the product from, how you are going to sell it, get the first set of people to do the same. The second piece though kind of as soon as you will be on that stage, I think we see that parts of the email marketing work really well, very specifically automating things like a banner and carts and going back and strapping people above before. Kind of the things that are just going to run in the background they kind of like maximizing the audience you’ve got are really worth it, because you can spend a couple of hours get fully up and running, and then not touch again for months.

And then over time you can– as that audience gets bigger start to really think about getting newsletters for lead and trying making sure you are just really capturing as many emails as possible. Those things, once you are beyond kind of the first tens of thousands of revenue, it’s — they are really what can make this business have a predictable steady income, because you then have an audience that you are capturing, and get them — work with.

Steve: Absolutely, so in terms of just Klaviyo you started this in 2012 you said right?

Ed: That’s right.

Steve: So when it comes to starting one of these server [ph] companies, there’s actually quite a bit of competition, how did you actually validate your idea and know that you are going to be able to make money before you actually invested serious dollars into the development?

Ed: Yeah, that’s a great question. I think we are big believers in testing and just trying to figure it out. So we basically, it was myself and Andrew my co founder at the time, and what we did was he spent kind of all the everyday examining, like building different little things, testing out like kind of building different ideas. I spent all day every day, emailing and calling everyone I could think of, and saying like hey, this is what I have got, would you buy it? Even though at the time it was either might fully exist, might not exist, might be kind of go together, might be an idea. But just really learning from people and seeing who would buy what. Then it took a while, I mean I probably spent, that phase was definitely kind of three months or so.

Steve: Oh, a couple of months okay.

Ed: Yeah, so it was a couple of months until — but we kept hitting, a couple of months of just a bunch of ideas, bunch of things that seemed like they might work, but now not. But prior three months in, I had sort of honed on ecommerce and beginning [inaudible 00:11:32] exactly what you are saying. I’m pulling resource to my past customers, I’m putting it in excel, I’m tapping into my email system. And I do that once a month and hey; it makes me a lot of money. And so once we had that twice it was like hey, wait a minute this is, we really think there’s something there, so then it was like hey, let’s find the next eight people and call them.

And that phase of we got the customers to start, people who were paying us a little bit and a lot. Started to be kind of validating and then helps us to expand to say hey, people don’t just – it’s not just the special versus it’s just kind of like a widget to email past customers. And I think we then realized hey, wait a minute this needs — it’s kind of got to be newsletters or something else Steve.

Steve: So do you guys run an ecommerce store yourself or?

Ed: We have some good — some very close friends who do. And so kind of throughout we’ve had some people that we’ve known before this, and known throughout where we can call up and say hey, I just want to understand kind of what you are doing, and like how this might fit. And can we test some things out, what really matters to you and those conversations are super valuable.

Steve: I’m just curious, did Klaviyo start out as an ecommerce marketing platform or?

Ed: It didn’t, and I think it started — at first we were thinking just broadly about this problem of hey, all this information about customers is just thrown away, and we are all back on these offers, so we really think actually like a software marketing platform. And you kind of start with what you know and the needs just — in some ways it’s simpler, and some ways it’s much bigger than ecommerce, [inaudible] [00:13:05] what ecommerce is like. With any store you can basically say hey, if you are not running these five emails, you should be and they are going to have a good result and your customers are like, if I have to get on time, like it’s just very clean, in a way that some other markets aren’t as much.

Steve: Yeah, I mean what attracted me to your service actually was that it was very specifically targeted to ecommerce, like your copy all points to ecommerce which made it much more attractive and much easier to figure out what your services are all about because of that right?

Ed: Good that’s definitely, I mean that the goal I think is room for us to improve, the goal was that if you have a source you can plug it in and five minutes later you got good looking emails that are running. We go to your site, we scrap out your logo, we figure out your colors, we build these emails, we set up the best practices, and you are just saying yes, no. And then you see kind of dollars roll in as people come back and buy. So that’s kind of the end state, I think we are close, but we are not quite there but…

Steve: Okay, we will get into those sequences in a little bit. I just want to probe a little bit more about just the start up for Klaviyo also. This is a sales [ph] company, so how much did you invest in the business early on?

Ed: Not much, so I mean to the point that not super specific. So because there were two of us, the costs were really keeping like staying alive, like we surviving. And then for the company it was really just running the servers and then kind of other related email costs, but pretty low, and they really go with our customers. So the great thing about science is that we put kind of the revenues could fuel the business.

Steve: Okay, and then you guys had quit cold turkey before you started it?

Ed: Yeah.

Steve: Interesting. So you had an [inaudible] [00:14:55] from your previous company and so you felt confident that you could…

Ed: Yeah and I just always wanted to do it, and so said hey we’ll just, we’ll give it a shot, will get– push customers and I think is a minimal and see if we can make this work, and then I can always go back and get a job later. I’m not sure that was wise, but it was the attitude at the time.

Steve: No, I mean a lot of people I interview that’s how it goes, so I was just curious in your case. So tell me about some of your first customers, so you have your validation customers, they are probably paying you or not paying you very much, what about your first real customers, how did you get your first real customers?

Ed: Yeah, so a choice we made for better or worse is that we were going to—we’re going to make everybody pay, even if it was five bucks a month, just to say if something is really a problem for somebody, they are willing to pay us a little bit. And so those people came all about kind of three months on, and we largely severally met kind of in the [inaudible] [0:15:54] we met by reaching out to people online.

So one was custom made sweet company in Boston called Blank Label who kind of was one the first piece we talked to about this idea. Pretty early on we met via the Shopigy blog I think, this guy is [inaudible] [0:16:10] who make really cool kind of like wall designs and come to school [inaudible] [0:16:18] manifesto and custom made cards. And all those I think were great, because we could kind of grow with them and we could– they would give us various ideas and feedback and really push us, and also we could just really see this add value right away.

Steve: Okay, and were those early customers enough to just keep the business afloat?

Ed: Yeah, I think they were the– at least enough to get the promise of hey there is going to be more coming next month, you’ll see more coming the next month. It took– there was probably about six months to a year where we were in a largely pouring everything back into the business. We were very focused on because we kind of this was our– because we were watching other software companies, the progress was really, hey let’s get this to a point where it’s a real ongoing business, and if that means pouring all of the kind of money back into it, once we had that little bit of traction we knew the end was inside that we– that was going to be possible.

Steve: Okay, I’m just curious when you had these first couple of customers, was your service open to the public, or were you just kind of capping it at a couple of people until you were confident that you can roll it out to the masses?

Ed: Yeah, we opened it immediately, and it was just being real like hey if something is really a good idea you know you don’t worry about necessarily being copied and hey quite frightening when you are starting out like you just want people to have heard of you. So if anyone did come our way we’d kind of go out of our way and try to make sure we could work with them or figure it out. And that worked and it helped us refine that idea, and we started to see people that we never heard of or had reached out to, or met in person actually showing up on our door and that kind of really helped us validate and kind of stick with the mastering too.

Steve: So I’m just curious when you first launched you didn’t have like this built in audience already, like a huge email list or anything like that, right, it was mainly just going out networking and meeting store owners?

Ed: Yeah, it was all, yeah exactly, so it was a lot of hustle either, hey here’s where store owners hangout, so I’m going to try to just know people who know store owners, or hey I know a couple of store owners, can they introduce me to their friends, and then also saying hey if I look back at the people I know, whether it’s from schools and like alumni networks or other people I know, and software companies in the latest phases like who might know someone. And if I for every person I talk to there is somebody who refers to, do they know somebody. And so it was just like, hey let’s get on the phone, I mean here [inaudible] [00:18:39] and I’m like hey do you know anybody else who might be good and kind of through that process enough to get like a whole set kind of validating customers came out.

Steve: Okay, and by going that route is obviously not scalable, and so how did you start generating larger and larger amounts of customers?

Ed: Yeah, so and we’re very interested [inaudible] [00:18:57] we’ve got to find an idea that’s just buyable to people and enough people, we’ve got to know how to sell it and market it to do this. So that was kind of our core focus, but in terms of going from that so like to say how does this become a sales stream, we just tried lots of things. One was putting ourselves in app stores for platforms like Microsoft app store, things like that, that definitely worked; we tried some guest blogging and kind of blogging at our own site, that worked in different ways…

Steve: For SEO or for other reasons?

Ed: We were trying if for SEO we are also trying to serve. If people with the right audience, if we could just kind of guest blog or use their audience to just get some name recognition too, because given the numbers and to start with we were like we just needed to find the next like 10, 20 people. So we tried doing that, we tried some cold outreach just of like hey we’d see stores without any cool stuff and we were just like dropping in and say hey, are you doing this like we think we can basically be helpful, and yeah it was just kind of trying a bunch of different things.

Steve: So out of all those, which tactic kind of worked the best?

Ed: Yeah, I think to start the app stores really worked well.

Steve: And so yeah I’ve noticed your app in the Shopify store, do people just kind of find that naturally, or do you kind of have to push people towards it too?

Ed: No, people tend to find it naturally, something we are doing in Shopify and also have this– we have a free app that we give away that’s– people can easily build a response of email support, and so a lot of people find that free app and then from that say hey I want to use this for all my emails or I’m trying to send this email, can you help me out. So that’s– at first [inaudible] [00:20:56] and for the kind of new just running out stores has been a really great way, they can get started for free and kind of understand what this is like. We also have a free plan on that app, and so they can also start free there and then gives kind of that path upwards.

Steve: Okay, yeah it seems like when I was just looking at your integrations it seems like you integrate with almost every cart under the sun, so it sounded like that was one of your main strategies right for proliferation?

Ed: Yeah, exactly it was basically hit those– if we stick with one it makes it easy for us to get all the customer data. Number two we can– they’ve got these ecosystems of people who are looking for products that can do this, and so that was just like an easier ways to get to a bunch of customers.

Steve: Okay, and so do you have tight relationships with all these shopping cart builders, and have access to kind of their customer base so to speak, or negotiated something on those lines?

Ed: Yeah, exactly, so for us there’s been just a great—one they are great partners and fun to work with, but two they’re– this a great distribution channel, because they just have that prebuilt reach.

Steve: And there is no resistance, right I mean it’s a win-win on both ends, I would imagine right?

Ed: Yeah, right exactly, like at the end of the day it should make their platform stickier and they just — the happier their customers are the more their stores are growing, the better off they are and like our core goal is just to like get stores grow.

Steve: Okay, everything is in line. So you got these customers now, what are some tactics that you have to just keep them around, like how do you reduce churn?

Ed: Yeah, so the great thing about email, the two great things about email, one is if you– a lot of it can be automated, and once this is automated it’s– there is no effort required, it’s literally just a money machine. And so if we can get people up and running and make them really successful, it’s great on both sides, because there are basically delivered a certain number of dollars every month, and our goals is to try to way less than that, and it’s good, everything is good.

The second is that because it is about growth kind of if we can help people grow the newsletter list and kind of expand and just like grow the business overall, in addition to the automated emails, but also by targeting the marketing by newsletters, by bettering emails, that just is stickier as well, and it’s kind of like once you have that engine running, you as a store it’s not really worth moving to a platform where you are going to have to then hire an engineer and make them do more work for you, hire more workers, like we can replace a lot of that, so that’s worked well for us.

Steve: I guess in your case it’s a little different, because you have access to the sales data also, and you can literally tell your customer this is how much we’ve made for you this month, right?

Ed: Yeah, so it– and it keeps [inaudible] [0:23:37] too and it’s like a the—it’s very [inaudible] [0:23:41] if we were not doing a good job, and somebody was not making more money like they would just know right away. And so it really holds us accountable to if we can deliver value, you are going to stick around, if we don’t you are not.

Steve: I guess the hardest part in your case then is getting the customer to actually do the integration and then install it and set everything up, right?

Ed: Right, so the goal and this– it’s a challenge that we are continuing to solve and we’ve solved for some platforms, how much work can we do for the customer? And so for some platforms like Shopify literally if you just enter your store name and click go, tell us what your logo is, tell us who your customer is, we can set up all these emails, build like 10 different email templates for you, we can kind of get this all the way, and so that’s great.

And so that makes it much easier to people over the line, if you are not a custom platform or for some of the other platforms where their APIs are—or how they work is a little bit different, we do less of that to start, but our goal is we’re going to constantly try to figure out ways to just to kind of shorten that time to value as much as we can.

Steve: Incidentally I was in that camp, right I heard a cart that you guys didn’t support, and I had to hand you everything, but I got on the phone, you guys I think I always kept talking to the same guys I felt bad.

Ed: We try to keep you with the same person, so…

Steve: But, yeah it only took me an afternoon pretty much, so it wasn’t that bad, I don’t know, but…

Ed: Good, that’s why we have that team too, so there are kind of like just how to hack the game.

Steve: So it seems like your platform is naturally averse to churn once you get things right, and the way you get people to get on the platform is you have these one click integrations with all the popular shopping carts, so okay, so I can see that. So there is a lot of other platforms that use similar things to Klaviyo. And so I’m just curious from a marketing perspective, what are some of the things that you point out that set you apart from some of these other competing services, and do you ever find yourself going head-on with some of these other platforms?

Ed: Yeah, so the way we see the email market generally is really broken into two buckets. I think there is one which is just people who are afraid of newsletter centers, that’s also where we see most people right now. It’s like, hey I’m seeing the same more than everybody, maybe it’s kind of I’m plug-in in some of my store data, but not really I’m definitely not setting again a course through that, or probably not like say when you keep on like what they have and they haven’t bought.

And really for against those platforms, it’s really just explaining the integrations and the data we bring in and what we do, and the time it takes to set up. And that’s the key thing there, and there is both kind of allowing people like that and there is also then you know the people have been around like the high end ecommerce platforms have been around for ten years they are really expensive, but just don’t– they aren’t that much better to be honest than those these other centers, so that’s one.

Then there is a separate bucket of a bunch of people who are kind of just trying kind of doing the same types of things we are trying to, and what we largely see is so far the– we’ll see the people like coming off like little pieces like they are really nil [ph] and that kind of thing. They are really nil like the win backs and the follow ups, start to try to like cover up these newsletters, but we just haven’t seen kind of anyone who is like a very effectively sort everything, and that it’s [inaudible] [0:27:05] since we can’t hear there is like big missing holes in the features ads.

So I think the presence of these kind of smaller guys who are out wholesaling it’s like enough for us to say how can we constantly be– and like hey let’s get like awesome product recommendations, can we add also personalization, like just it’s more room for us just to constantly get better, and that’s our focus, it’s like hey at the end of the day how do we make stores more money, and how do we like have them put in real assignment, and if we do both…

Steve: I can tell you from my personal experience, I actually wrote my own abandoned shopping cart thing for my cart, yet what ended up happening was like I could use it just by—it was pretty hands off, but then my wife didn’t understand it. I didn’t make it user friendly, so my wife couldn’t do anything about it, and so when I moved over to Klaviyo like okay, wife you can handle everything now, which is really nice. It made it really easy for some– my wife is not a technical, so it made it really easy for her to manage. And so let’s switch gears a little bit, and talk about some of these automated flows that you have in place.

Ed: Yeah, so the way we think about ecommercing or marketing, we actually think this is, it’s true beyond ecommerce, we have a bunch of customers who are not ecommerce kind of a separate topic, but if you think about like the first time somebody shows up in your store, there is a period before they buy, and there is a period after they buy when you are trying to get them to come back. And the goal is to really say you kind of put yourself in the customer shoes. What are the messages that you might want to get, and what are the messages that really are going to speak to you at those different times in your life as a customer?

And so before you buy it’s– the automation is hey the first time you see somebody tell them the important things about the brand or the store. And so if you are selling something that’s like highly branded or you have a pretty diverse set of products, it’s introducing them to the unique products you have. If it’s– there is something unique about you, if it’s hey here is the back story or here is who is creating these products, or here is some cool uses for these products, or here is our great occasions for these products, it’s really kind of providing that context around yourself or to somebody who’s proactively said, hey I’m interested and I like what you are doing. So that’s a whole set that we typically call like a welcome series, but it’s really just to think about your introduction to somebody.

Steve: Son this is before they either make a purchase?

Ed: Right, this is kind of from the moment somebody gives you their email address for the first time, so then later on your site kind of you invested to get them to your site, and when on your site then say, hey yes I want to learn more about this, I’ll give you my email address. And then we really think about and just hey what– if you had five minutes with somebody, or if you had a minute kind of four times a week like what would you want to say to them about your store so that they really knew when this was going to be a good fit.

Because a lot of buyers are going to show up and either they are not going to have the knee jet or they are going to have other things going on or if it’s occasion based thing they are not going to be ready for that. They are not at a point where they are going to buy, so they just need to know more. And kind of rather than just hitting them with your typical newsletter, it’s just a good time to like make that a more personal introduction to what you are doing.

Steve: How long have you seen the sequence to be like for most stores?

Ed: Yeah I think we recommend kind of three or four emails over a two week period. It definitely depends on what you’re selling and how much there’s to say. I mean if your business is extremely simple, you know maybe it has just a one or two email flow, but it’s really just kind of focus on a few different emails that go out automatically over a couple…

Steve: Do you have an example? So you mentioned the first one. You explained kind of what your company is all about. What do the second and third look like?

Ed: Yeah. There’s kind of a few a different types. The first is often just depending on where you are at and kind of how smaller you are, it tends to be just—and so much it’s just a personal welcome and kind of like explaining maybe the context of the store, or any of kind of the important back-story. It’s really just like a branding email of, “Here’s what this is about.” And a lot of that is also just a reminder to say, “Hey, we know you are interested. Here’s an easy way to get back.” Put a big button to go back to the store. And kind of just make that good first impression.

The second is often times around products especially if you have—I’m just selling… what are the things you typically see people buy first, or what are the products you think really will put your best foot forward is often a good second introduction. Getting into the third and fourth is really, we see as either going further on products or branding. But also depending on your customer likes, like depending on when you think people buy for the first time, will often see like the last email on that series which could be two weeks in, it could be three or four weeks in or even ten weeks in.

Basically say hey, “If we’ve— kind of we’ve invested to get somebody to the website, and they haven’t—we’ve kind of told them about us and they haven’t come through and bought yet, is there something we want to offer?” And it could be a financial offer, it could be something else. It could be anything. And whatever it is, it is really persuasive to say, “If at some point you’ve chosen– you are interested because we know you kind of came and gave us your email, but you haven’t taken the next step. Like is there anything we can do to make that next step easier?”

Steve: What’s an example of a non-financial offer to get someone to the site?

Ed: Yeah so we’ll see— the best way we tend to think about it is kind of seeing why hasn’t somebody bought? And this is going to vary by business. And so one is there’s something about your product that they don’t understand. There’s something about what you are doing, where they have like a reservation like this is going to be hard to set up, or it’s going to be hard to do something.

So we see people then either offer help. It’s kind of like you are– send us any questions or let us know. Or see people point to things like help and do that. We’ll also see, so that’s kind of one, financial and financial could be free-shaping, it could be discounts, pricing, whatever. We’ve seen a couple of people doing like exclusive products. Like, “Hey, here’s something that’s only available to first time people or like kind of a unique sort of offer.”

Steve: Hey everyone, I just wanted to take a quick moment to thank Famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Now FameBit is the number one market place for You Tube influencer for marketing with over 15,000 You Tubers looking to promote brands from beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Now videos start as low as $50 and it’s completely free to post a campaign and receive proposals from You Tubers.

If you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guests, Emmanuel Eli, used Famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with You Tube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code ‘my wife quit’ at famebit.com, you will automatically get $10 off. So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous You Tubers to promote your products. Now back to the show.

Steve: I’m just curious, do a lot of people use the customer behavior aspect for these emails. Like for me for example I instrumented it in such a way that I could see exactly which categories or products that a customer was looking at. Do a lot of people use that information in these first introductory emails, or is that information primarily useful later for different sequences.

Ed: Yeah it’s a good question. So the most important thing especially depending on what you are—if you are going to do some sort of offer as often turning those off if somebody buys, so in so much as using that customer’s photo to say “This person has not bought. They are on a different phase.” I turn those off. The second piece is we do see some of the people use that conversation around, hey here’s the products you are looking at, the categories you are looking at and starting to really to customize.

It really depends how important that is to your store, if you’re apparel and you sell men’s and women’s it’s more important. If you have two very different products or you are a store that sells music and then they sell apparel, and like the buyers are very different. So then it’s important. But if that’s not the case, then usually it’s maybe important down the line, but at scale when you are smaller it’s not a big deal.

Steve: All right so we cover the pre-purchase sequence, what are some of the other sequences that you have in place.

Ed: So kind of pre-purchase, the next real big sequence is around abandonment. I think that tends to be both like pure shopping cart abandonment, as well as more often set up kind of site visiting abandonment basically because Klaviyo has built in web tracking. We know when somebody has clicked their email, or they have entered through another site we then know who they are. And so if somebody is visiting the site repeatedly and not buying, we’ll often see flows that have to go target those customers. And kind of it’s the same type of offer of either help or questions, or even after a certain time like a financial offer.

Steve: Let’s wait a little bit until the…

Ed: Yeah. I don’t know what’s going on outside today.

Steve: I know it’s a second one. Hold on. They just marked down the time here. So I know when to cut this. Let’s see 33 minutes, okay. It’s gone. Yeah, so Ed, I actually was pleasantly surprised when I went to the abandonment sequence in Klaviyo. I clicked on flows and clicked one button, and you guys already had a sample thing already set up and all I had to do is customize it, which was very nice.

Ed: Good. Yeah that’s definitely the goal, just to pull the pictures of the product and just be ready to go.

Steve: Yeah and so in terms of the abandoned cart, would you say that as a new user, would that be one of the biggest low hanging fruit in order to get a return on your email investment?

Ed: Yes. I think if we’d point to the absolute mass set ups, I think abandoned carts would be right at the top of the list [inaudible] [0:37:25] a second. But the meetings you invest so much in getting somebody to your store, that abandoned carts is just really important way to—everybody is busy, everybody’s like going on. Often times when you find something cool you are not going to buy it right away, so they are just an important way to make sure you capture as many people as you can.

Steve: Okay. And then in terms of the number of emails for these sequences what are you seeing that most people are doing that works well?

Ed: Yeah we tend to see two emails works best. One that comes relatively close to the purchase, which really serves as just a reminder, but also just as an easy way to get back to the store. So kind of like when somebody does think that, “Hey I’m interested,” they can just click one button and go back to the store and have their cart and be ready to go. And then the second, which is really more about, “Hey, it’s a couple of days later. You’ve all sort of stuff happened. Here’s a reminder what’s good.”

We do see that segmenting that email which is kind of super easy to do based on people who’ve bought before and haven’t bought before, kind of opens the door to say, if somebody started to buy, didn’t buy, hasn’t bought five days later, they are worth including in like reaching out, reshaping or just kind of something like that, those things definitely work. It really depends on what stage they are at, what the margin of the business is, how promotional you want to be, but also then making sure those are turned off for repeat buyers.

Steve: Interesting. So for people who abandon and they’ve already purchased in the past you do not give a coupon?

Ed: Typically no.

Steve: All right. And just curious from my knowledge, what conversation rates do you typically see from these abandoning sequences?

Ed: Yeah so it really depends on product. And so we see anywhere from you know, we’ve got some businesses that have crazy conversion rates of like 30%, 40%, 50%.

Steve: Okay, I’m not seeing that, but yeah…

Ed: And that is not what I would expect. So it really depends on how much thought someone has to—how much thought they put into the purchase, and the reasons they don’t buy. The core goal of abandoned cart, so one is a reminder and then two is overcome any like even reasons in the customers that they don’t want to buy. And for some reasons that might be “Hey is there a cheaper price somewhere else?” You just tell them how unique your products are. For others, it might be, “Hey is this really going to be as good as they say,” and that kind of be like an address for like a customer testimonial or something like that.

For others it might be just like is shipping going to be super costly or how long is it going to take to arrive or things like that, you can kind address those too. And so really the more of those you have to knock down, like the more it’s just a reminder, you’ll have a lower conversion rate, but we typically see two to ten or even kind of a higher percentage. But the more kind of objections you can knock down, the better off, the better those do, but it is product specific.

Steve: Okay, I was just curious, but I think my second email has not been converting well. The first email converts great. I think I’m getting like tenish percent, but in the second one is, which is expected I would guess.

Ed: Yeah, it does tend to be…

Steve: It’s like a big drop off.

Ed: But it does totally—it really depends how much people—we have customers who are the reverse. Or it’s like if this is up high intention product, then that second email tends to be really the kicker that works best.

Steve: And the next one that you were going to talk about was the win-back campaign?

Ed: Yes so this is, I think, if we did this too will be, you’ve got to run [inaudible] [0:41:01] and you’ve got to run win-backs. And then basically is people who have bought in the past are kind of your already big funs. You’ve spent a lot to get them the first time. You’ve sent your product, hopefully they love it, like you—this should be somebody who’s very proactively fond of you.

And so the win-back, the idea is just saying, hey if that person that we’ve already won over who’s already a fan, either hasn’t bought the next product that you might expect, or has come back if it’s product so he can purchase twice, follow up and just kind of remind him that you are there. And make a choice whether that’s going to be promotional or not. And it’s really a choice around like, your margins and how much value you think that might bring. But it’s just like capture the audience that likes to hear from you.

And so typically you can run those as campaigns, you create a segmented list and say, hey find everybody who purchased six months ago and hasn’t bought again. Or kind over time you can just automate that to say, hey average 20 buyers at three months, six months, nine months, here the emails are going to get.

The first one is just going to highlight product they might like, the second one is going to get them free shipping, the third one is going to be like a more personal outreach that asks them to tell their friends about the business. And then just like have those running. And so basically every customer that comes through and buys first time, you know you are going to be nurturing them over the next year to get them to come back.

Steve: Yeah. And this is like really key for people who sell consumable products, right?

Ed: Yeah, so it’s key for consumables, but really anything that someone could buy twice. And so it’s key for apparel and anything where it’s not like a once-every-three-years type of thing.

Steve: And do you find that it’s helpful to provide product suggestions in these win-backs because you know exactly what they purchased and what they are interested in, right?

Ed: Yeah. So as much as you can exactly, and this is where I like that customer data of, here’s what you’ve looked at, here’s what you bought, all that stuff can be super useful. And sometimes might, depending on your business can change with that flow, like we’ll see people say– say you are selling something like iPhones and you also sell headphones where the natural time for somebody to buy is right after [inaudible] [0:43:28] so we’ll see them have that win-back go out really be more of a cross email that goes out like two or three weeks after somebody buys.

Steve: Interesting.

Ed: So we have some customers who sell bikes and they also sell a lot of kind of bike accessories. It’s also a great fete because if somebody buys a bike it’s just very natural like once you have that bike and you are riding it, there’s these other things you start to think about. And so following up to say, “Hey, you know now you’ve experienced the product, what’s next?”

Steve: That’s cool and that’s completely automated for these customers, right?

Ed: Yes. The goal is that if you can think of an idea, it takes a couple of minutes to set it up because you’ll say, “Hey if you bought a bike and you didn’t buy xyz then three weeks later send this email, and use this existing template and kind of drag in some texts and pictures and you are good to go.”

Steve: Are there any other flows that you can think of that are pretty easy to set up and worth doing?

Ed: Yeah. So the others we see that are valuable I think, maybe not as valuable like the win-backs, but of course which is good with structures, one is product reviews. I mean it’s pretty straight forward, but worth following up on a purchase. Any sorts of cross-sale type emails specific to your business of if somebody buys X we think they like Y, setting those up. We’ve—as you are scaling it a bit larger, flows around “Hey I’ve been emailing you, you either stopped engaging, you stopped opening, you stopped clicking. You just seem less intriguing to stop visiting the site.

We see people setting up flows around those to then basically automatically clean the list over time to say, “Hey I just want to let you know we are going to follow up and take off the email list. Let us know—click this link if you want to stay on.” So those can be good too. Those are part of the main ones. I think the key thing is like just for every business, think about– put yourself on the customer shoes, think about the emails you would like to get, and whenever possible automate it, because you still don’t have time to handle all those manually.

Steve: Just curious, I was wondering if you can comment on some things that you can do to kind of improve deliverability, open rates, click through rate, and that sort of thing.

Ed: Yeah, so deliverability really shouldn’t be a problem. If it’s a problem it’s either something with your email sender and it’s not a promise you went in to, and so follow up with them, switch ISPs, social email senders. The second piece is, I mean it can happen based on how many emails you are sending and what they look like, there’s some other legitimate reasons it can happen. I think the main thing there is as long as you are putting kind of yourself in the customer shoes and sending emails of what you think the customer would like, you should be good. That’s kind of on the liberal side.

In terms of open rates and click through rates, so we tend to kind of break that into two problems. The open side is pretty much all that can go on is, the subject line and like the experiences with your past emails. And the main thing there I think we’d say especially if you are starting out is—I mean we kind of always go back to this think-like-the-customer and that definitely works. It tends to happen when either when you are either sending too many emails, and so the customers are not getting a ton of value from each one. Or you kind of send a series that no one was clicking and no one was reacting to.

And the main thing is put a little bit of attention into the email the first time. And think about if you got it the same thing you would want to click or you will want to react to and if not then either, “Hey could you send less” and that actually gets to that point which strangely converses you that the other problem is not just sending too few. Like if you are emailing people once every two months they typically will forget, like they are not going to remember and like also your opens and clicks go down.

But yeah, I kind of think about both those. And then the A/B testings, people can over use it, but also start to experiment with just say, “Hey whenever I send an email, I’m going to send two different versions maybe two subject lines, maybe two different pieces of content, and I’m going to see which one does better and start to kind of learn what people like.”

Steve: Is that kind of automated in Klaviyo? I haven’t got to that point yet.

Ed: Yeah it’s super easy. And basically for every email, you click a button and then it gives you two versions of the email, and you can click one and change the subject, click the other one and change like take out a different picture. And then when you click go, one is going to be by default. It’s going to say, “Hey take the first chunk of my list and split those emails up and send them up to those different chunks, see which one does better.” And then for the rest of the list it’s going to send out the winner to everybody else. And so it’s kind of a low cost wage. So start to learn but also like, rather than ever stressing on “Hey are people going to like this. They are not going to like it.” If you do that you just kind of have— it’s just low risk, because it’s going to always push the winner out.

Steve: And I was just curious what your take on single versus double opt-in was. I know in the blogging world it’s pretty controversial, but it seems like in the ecommerce land, no store that I shop in out, has asked me to double opt in for something.

Ed: I think we are big believers in—I think we tend to fall on the single opt-in side for ecommerce. And the key thing is—it’s got two key parts there. One is, just be super clear about when someone’s signing up. Why they are singing up, I think in eCommerce we tend to see it that people who are signing up because they know what the—you’re going to send them to. The second thing there was be super clear on how somebody gets off emails and unsubscribes, and can choose to get either fewer emails or no emails from you. And once you are doing that I think it matters less. I think we just see that double opt-in just confuses a lot of people. Like they have already said they want in, so they don’t expect to be asked again.

Steve: So I was just curious is there a time in place for double opt-in in ecommerce?

Ed: You know the problem—it’s a good question and that one is important. There probably is like if for some reason you think, based on how your email capture flow or kind of like, if you think there’s any ambiguity to the person signing up about, whether like they are actually signing up on email list then double opt-in is probably a good fit. But as long as it’s very clear to the customer, then I think there’s at this point less info.

Steve: Yeah I know it’s interesting that you said that because I had my other favorite email provider on the podcast and he was like strong double opt-in. It was quite the contrast between what you said, but it was two different industries of course too. One was like kind of online marketing so to speak and this one is just purely ecommerce.

Ed: Right. And I think that’s like a big difference.

Steve: Hey, Ed I know I’ve kept you on for quite a while. It was a pleasure having you on. If anyone wants to check out Klaviyo, or if they have any questions for you and your team where can they find you?

Ed: Yeah. We’d certainly love to hear from anybody. They can email us at success@klaviyo.com K-L-A-V-I-Y-O or we always love to see people sign up for accounts. And so we are happy to help get you going. And so that’s just klaviyo.com

Steve: And it’s K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, right?

Ed: That’s right. Got to keep it, keep you on the toes.

Steve: And Ed I’m doing your job here for you, but you guys offer a free tier right?

Ed: That’s right. So as a source of getting going, yeah it’s absolutely for you to start and own it till you can—you know the same stuff around, plug in your store, it takes minutes, we’ll set up a whole bunch of template for you, and also a bunch of these emails just come in like pretty build out of the box. So you should be able to get depending on your platform, you get a lot of these going just in minutes.

Steve: By the way just for the listeners I’m not affiliated with Klaviyo in any way, it’s just I really like the service. And there’s actually—if you are just a brand new shop owner you don’t have that many customers yet, you can actually, I can’t remember how many people you can track for free, but it’s something like 50 or a 100 or something like that.

Ed: Yeah so we actually let you until you have your first 100 customers, it’s just totally free. So it’s a great way to just like get started and see. And even you will see kind of the value, and you also see your customers get some cool tools and they are around like. Seeing the customer who they are and their full history of what they looked at and done and kind of a fun and just like a cool tool to just help manage the store. So yeah with all that, it’s kind of great, we [inaudible] [0:52:27] come through. Our new stores come through on every plan because I know they are kind of the most exciting, they are very exciting businesses because they are out there out of par.

Steve: I mean if anything, go and sign up and just implement the abandoned cart plan tool. Cool Ed, it was a pleasure having you on the show. Thanks a lot for coming by.

Ed: Thanks Steve. I appreciate it.

Steve: All right, take care.

Ed: You too. Thanks.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Now Klaviyo is actually not a sponsor of the show, but I’ve been using their email service now for many months and I love it. Running an ecommerce store is so much more complicated than running a blog, and you can tell that many of the features of Klaviyo had ecommerce specifically in mind and I think it’s fantastic.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode82, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now I’m also offering free ecommerce workshops on a regular basis if you want to learn, for more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. If you’re interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up of my free 6-Day Mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, and sign up right on the front page.

Once again I also want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. Everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing, is all built in, so all you got to do is populate it with the products you want to sell, and you can literally start your storey in a matter of hours. Simply go to Bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is Bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob.

I also want to thank HostGator for sponsoring this episode. HostGator is one of the best webhosts out there that I recommend if you want to start a blog. In fact I hosted Mywifequitherjob.com on there in the very beginning and loved it. You get 24/7 live support via chat, phone, and email. You can install WordPress in just a single click, and they have an easy to use website builder and design services. And the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. Please go HostGator.com/Mywifequit to redeem the discount. Once again that’s HostGator.com/Mywifequit. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

081: How To Market Your Online Store On Reddit And Make 6 Figures In 8 Months With Eli Zauner

081: How To Market Your Online Store On Reddit And Make 6 Figures In 8 Months

Eli Zauner runs a subscription box service called UniversalYums.com which sells boxes of yummy treats from all over the world. What’s cool about Eli is that he launched his business while working full time and his business has been profitable from day 1 and is growing very quickly.

In fact, he is doing a solid 5 figures a month after only launching just 8 months ago. And here’s the kicker. One of the main reasons I wanted to have Eli on the show is because he grew his business using Reddit as his single largest source of traffic.

Eli’s experience is truly unique and I love that he’s grown his business so quickly in such a short period of time. Enjoy the episode

What You’ll Learn

  • What the startup costs are when launching a subscription box service
  • How Eli validated his business idea
  • The hardest part about running a subscription box service
  • How Eli got his early customers
  • How to market your online store on Reddit
  • How to adapt to the Reddit culture
  • How to reduce churn for your subscription box

Sponsors

BigCommerce.com – If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free
bigcommerce-logo

HostGator.com – If you are interested in starting your own WordPress blog, then click here to get 30% off webhosting at HostGator.com!
Hostgator

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and join me for a free live workshop on ecommerce which I give on a regular basis. For more information about the workshop, go to mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. And if you want to get a jump on starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com and sign up right on the front page.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick shout out to this episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store. And Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in the class. Now here’s what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce doesn’t really nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you merely have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

There’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs so you don’t really need to hire a designer. Everything from design to payment processing is all built-in, and you just have to populate it with your own products, so you can literally start your own online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitmyjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob.

I also want to thank HostGator for sponsoring the show as well. HostGator is an incredible webhost that I highly recommend. And in fact did you know that mywifequitherjob.com was hosted on HostGator in the very beginning? They offer 24/7 life support via chart, phone and email. They offer one click WordPress install, so it’s super simple to install WordPress blog. They have an easy to use website builder, design services, marketing services, and the best part is I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount. Once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quite Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Eli Zauner on the show. Now Eli runs a subscription box that is called Universalyums.com which sells boxes of yummy treats from all over the world. Now what’s cool about Eli is that he launched the business while working full time and his business has been profitable from day one and is growing very quickly. They are doing a solid five figures a month after only launching eight months ago.

And here’s the kicker, and one of the main reasons that I wanted to have Eli on the show, he’s one of the few people that I’ve spoken to that has created a business using Reddit as their largest source of traffic. Now Eli’s experience is unique. And I love that he’s grown his business so quickly in such a short period of time. And with that welcome to the show Eli. How are you doing today man?

Eli: Good. How are you Steve?

Steve: Pretty good. So tell us about Universal Yums, what you are selling, and how you came up with the idea.

Eli: Sure. So I started working at Universal Yums just about a year ago with my girlfriend at the time. And we basically wanted to start a business with a goal of trying to leave our corporate jobs. Neither of us were very happy with what we were doing and we both really wanted to start a business. But being pretty young we didn’t have a lot of savings in the bank. And so we were looking for a business that we could start that would not be very capital intensive.

So we obviously we are aware of subscription boxes and we thought it would be a really interesting space for us to try and get into, because it’s kind of like a trend right now with a lot of new businesses. And it’s also very low capital because you can kind of see how many customers you are going to have and only order inventory for those customers as opposed to like a traditional ecommerce business.

So we really—I mean we set out with that in mind and also it was like a good match for our skills set. My partner is more like a marketing guru and I’m a bit more technical. So it was a good fit for us. And then we basically just took a month and did a lot of research on what existed today, and where we felt that there might be opportunity in the market.

And we kind of settled down on Universal Yums which is– it’s kind of similar to some existing concepts today, but we kind of put our own spin on it. So basically what we do is we pick a different country each month to feature, and we curate different snacks and candies and chocolates from that country. And then we put it all together in a box and we send it out to our customers first each month.

Steve: And so you mentioned that your start off costs were really low. What were they?

Eli: Yeah so I think we spent maybe like 500 bucks just to get like software and just like very basic packaging supplies. But really the business paid for itself after that especially because people when they sign up they give us money for their order, and then we can then use that money to fuel the cash flow of the business. So it was very, very inexpensive for us to start.

Steve: I see. So you collect the money upfront and then you deliver the box next month? So you have 30 days?

Eli: Yeah, right exactly. So what we do is—when we first launched we set our sign up period for about two months before we were ever going to ship products. So everyone that signed up in that two month period, we got all the cash from that and then we could use that to fuel our first month’s inventory. And then from then on it’s month to month. So we get everything that people pay to us the month prior and we use that.

Steve: So what about people who want the boxes to be delivered as a gift right away? How does that work?

Eli: So unfortunately for them we only ship once a month. It just kind of works with that kind economies of scale of our business, because we want to do all the fulfillment all at once with all the products and we don’t want to be placing orders repeatedly with our suppliers. So I mean yes people are willing to buy gifts, but the gifts won’t be delivered until the day of the month that we are shipping.

Steve: Okay, and so you mentioned, so $500 and you mentioned software was part of that. What platform are you using? Are you using like a fully hosted platform or a custom coded platform?

Eli: So we started out on bluCommerce using bluCommerce subscriptions. And I mean it’s very, very cheap compared to other subscriptions like recurring billing solutions. It’s been good so far, but I actually think that we are going to re-platform pretty soon just because it’s not a hosted solution. And I end up spending a great deal of time kind of managing the website, updating it, security, all those things. So we are trying to focus on really growing the business and it’s tough to keep up with that at the same time. We are probably going to re-platform.

Steve: Just interesting, yeah which platform are you leaning towards, just curious?

Eli: I think right now I’m leaning towards using Shopify and then integrating with a like a third party of recurring billing solution, like Chargify or Recurly.

Steve: And then you mentioned that you run through a bunch of different ideas for boxes before you settled on treats. So two questions, what were some of those ideas and how did you kind of validate Universal Yums before investing money in the project?

Eli: So I mean we came up with a really wide variety of different ideas. I mean we came up with everything from like a more localized like experience-based—it wasn’t even really a subscription box idea, but where we were kind of how people like interact and kind of like—almost like a murder mystery type style, where we would send them like a clue and then they would give the clue to somewhere they would go in town. And then we would have another clue set up there and will kind of lead them through, and then basically everyone would be competing to reach the end of the mystery first and we would have a house full of fries. I mean honestly it was very fairly. We just kind of jumped all over the place before we settled on Universal Yums.

Steve: So how did you know that Universal Yums is going to work? Like did you test the idea before you started or?

Eli: So honestly we did some like very basic stuff. Like we posted a survey on Facebook with a couple of different price points and we got – and I personally read as well – we got maybe like a hundred responses. But it was all very qualitative at the beginning. I mean really of course we talked to people about the idea and thought that some people had interest in it. And I think honestly my biggest opinion is that if you have other businesses that have like a similar concept and they seem to be doing well, the idea is already validated. So really at that point it just comes down to the price point and the specific executions of what you are doing. So we felt like the idea was solid enough, because other business were already doing something similar and in our own twist we could kind of make a niche for ourselves.

Steve: Interesting. So what businesses were you comparing yourselves to that did similar things?

Eli: So there’s an adventure funded business called Try the World, which is similar in some ways. They don’t just send snack items, they kind of curate different food items. It could be anything from like ingredients to spices, everything like that. And they feature a different city. It’s subscription box. They do it once every two months. So that was probably the closest competitor to what we are doing today. And then there was another business called MunchPak which is completely snack focused, but they don’t feature a different country each month. They just kind of send out unique snack stuff within the US and all over the world.

Steve: I see. So given that, you saw that these two services were making money and doing really well. You felt really comfortable with your business model basically?

Eli: Yes correct.

Steve: And then you mentioned you sent out some surveys on Facebook. Was this a Facebook page that was tied to your business, or was this your personal Facebook page?

Eli: No just personal Facebook page, and more so just seeing if friends would be interested in the idea or not.

Steve: Okay. And a couple of questions also, what are some of the huddles of running a subscription box business versus just kind of regular goods selling online? I know we just kind of touched on that, and you liked the cash flow aspects of the subscription box. But what were some of the other considerations that were in your mind?

Eli: Yeah I think for us the biggest issue is that when we are more working with suppliers, suppliers are set up to work with businesses that are just selling items on like a normal basis. And the biggest problem for us is that suppliers don’t seem to understand that if we don’t have the item by a certain day, that it’s a really big deal for us, because then we have to delay our shipment, or we have to find a substitute at the last second.

So I mean the biggest huddle by far is saying like “Hey, if we don’t get the item by this day, it’s a really big deal.” And suppliers don’t seem to understand that because for the most part—I mean our suppliers are mostly working with ethnic groceries. And so if an ethnic grocery doesn’t have an item on the shelf for a couple of weeks, it’s not going to kill their business, but for us it’s huge deal. And really making people understand that is really difficult, because subscription boxes haven’t really permeated the market to the extent where everyone we are talking to understands what we need. And so we have to be really-really specific and clear and reiterate it over and over again.

Steve: So do you ever have any problems with getting wholesale pricing because you can’t — can you promise a certain amount of [inaudible 00:12:12], since you’ve already collected the money. Like how does the pricing work, and how does the negotiation work with the vendor?

Eli: Yeah, so I mean we get a wholesale pricing no problem, I mean they basically have like — they have pretty set prices. I mean it’s like; it’s a pretty well defined industry at this point. I mean the companies that are importing the products like we can look at the same product across five different suppliers, and the price—we are not getting more than like plus or minus 10%. And the food industry is just probably like it’s pretty set.

Steve: Okay, and what are the margins typically for food item, just curious?

Eli: Yeah, I mean so if you are like operating a grocery store, unless you are like [inaudible] [00:12:50] food typically retails for like roughly like 30% to 35%, kind of 40% or 45% margin.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of actually getting the box in place, you don’t actually tell the customer what they are going to be getting right, it’s kind of like a mystery box?

Eli: Yeah, I know so we try to keep the onus of price, we think it’s fun. What we do is we include a hint to the next country. So will do like a little like a poll that runs, and then — most people will be able to figure it out based on that, and then a little bit closer to the date that the box is going to be sent, we will announce it on our Facebook page, just to get people excited.

Steve: Okay and then so your primary motivation for going the subscription route is one, the recurring revenue and also the fact that you don’t really have to carry inventory, is that accurate?

Eli: Yeah, I know it’s true, I think — I mean I think the other reason though is that it lands really well to what we are trying to do. I mean we are like – it’s kind of an experience right, so you get the box and it has not just the snacks, but it also has a bunch of information about the country, some history, some facts about the snacks.

And so it’s kind of like for a lot people, a fun way to learn about the country without having to be like reading a text book. And so it means well to be a monthly service because each month you can kind of focus on a different country, and try their food, learn more about their culture. So I think that it would be difficult to run and just kind of like a one off service just because the recurring revenue wouldn’t be there. And you would have to be holding on this inventory for a lot of different countries all at once.

Steve: So is it just you and your partner, because it sounds like there’s some editorial stuff that goes in with the box right? Someone’s going to write the content that sort of thing?

Eli: Yeah, so I mean my partner writes the content for the box and right now it’s just us. So yeah I mean it’s a lot of work.

Steve: So okay let’s talk a little bit about just kind of the — how you got the word out early on. So let’s say you just launched, how did you get your early customers?

Eli: Sure the first way that we really got traction was honestly on Reddit, that was our first big traction. And really what happened there is I posted the product onto a sub Reddit called ‘shut up and take my money.’ And it has like about 200,000 subscribers. And I mean really with Reddit, on that sub Reddit it’s [inaudible 00:15:05]. So I mean if you get a lot of up votes, the post gets a lot of visibility, lots of people see it, lots of people click on it. And if people don’t seem to like the product, then you won’t really get much out of it. So for whatever reason our product got a lot of traction, I think it was very appealing to that specific community.

We were the number one post for about 24 hours and over that 24 hour period we got about 10,000 people that clicked on the link and went to our website. And we got about like 100 to 150 sign ups off that. And that was kind of our very first like push which is great, we were very excited about it. And I mean before that, like the only other real traction that we got coming up to our launch was through basically what we call like influencer marketing. So reaching out to bloggers, You Tubers, people who enrolled like receive a free sample of the product, and then review it either on camera for YouTube or just write about it for a blog.

Steve: So can we talk about — how did you know about that sub Reddit ‘shut up and take my money’?

Eli: Yeah, so I mean I’m a native Reddit user, like I do it personally just for fun. I never really personally browsed that specific sub Reddit, but I mean I know that Reddit is such a massive community, and I knew that the product would land well to the community. So I spent some time just like researching what different sub Reddits would be that would be open to like hearing about my product. And I found that sub Reddit, also a few others.

Steve: How do you do this research? Do you just kind of type in like treats or in Reddit search, like how do you find these sub Reddits?

Eli: So I mean there’s a few different things, so I’ll kind of walk through a little bit how like I would not just me specifically, but how I would advice someone to try– how to use Reddit. So first of all there’s like obviously the generic shopping Reddits, so ‘shut up and take my money’ is generic, it can be any kind of product. And there was a couple others like deals for example, where you post a product that’s on sale.

And when we first launched, we put our product on sales, so it was appropriate for us to post it there. And there was kind of like just like the generic, wherever your product is you can post it there. And then there’s more like industry specific sub Reddits.

So for us there was this sub Reddit called snack exchange, which is pretty interesting and it [inaudible 00:17:26] existed honestly. It’s basically people who from all over the world send each other boxes of snacks, who live in different countries. And so they get — it’s basically our business, but it’s like they are actually legitimately selling snacks to each other from all over across the world.

So that was I mean — there was like 35,000 people on there. And there’s honestly sub Reddits for just about every industry. I mean if you have a health product, there’s a sub Reddit called fitness that’s really big. If you sell watches there’s a watches sub Reddit, so pretty much every industry has a place where people who will be your target audience are hanging out.

And I mean you can introduce them to your products, but you just have to be careful about not doing it anyway that’s like very commercialized. So Reddit really doesn’t like when there’s like companies trying to get them to buy their stuff. And so you really have to do it in a way that doesn’t feel like you are pushing your product, but you can do it and you can do it really successfully, you just have to be smart about it.

Steve: Okay, so can you walk me through how one of your posts looks like?

Eli: Sure, so for example our snack exchange, one of the ways that we try to engage with the community, is to have like a giveaway. So we figured people on that community are like really interested in receiving international snacks. So we posted like a giveaway on there and people could sign up for the giveaway, and we collected email addresses etcetera. And that was like one easy way to do it. Another way though is to do something like for my specific business; I would post something and like a country specific sub Reddit, you know like hey, like I have this business, I’m really interested in what the best next song from France.

And then people would engage with the post because people want to tell you about the often snacks from their country. So that’s, I mean you basically just have to find organic ways of interacting with the community. And it really depends on the product, like if you have a product that you think solves a specific problem, then go on the sub Reddit where you think your target audience is hanging out.

And ask like, “Do you guys feel like you have this problem, and how do you solve it?” And then engage when people say, “Hey, yeah I have this problem.” They are like, oh, well, I found the solution it’s this product here. So people really look for ways, people will really engage with you when you feel like you are offering something that’s helping them solve their problems.

Steve: So does it require like a strong Reddit account to get any sort of attention?

Eli: No, not really not at all. I mean I honestly started a completely new account for the business, just because I wanted it to be not associated with any of my personal Reddit accounts. And people don’t really check on that very much.

Steve: Okay, because I used to have a pretty strong Reddit account, but then it became a zombie. Maybe I just did too much self promotion who knows. But I remember like having someone with a strong account post made it much more visible. And I guess this doesn’t apply to the Reddits that you were using, the sub Reddits?

Eli: I mean on Reddit, the only reason that your account — I mean Reddit keeps track of how much like how many votes you’ve gotten, it’s called karma. And the only way that that really apply like will affect anything that you do, is there is someone who is checking out your post history to see if you go spamming stuff about your business. So I mean Reddit’s rule of thumb is that no more than 10% of what you post can be about your website or your business or whatever it is you are trying to promote.

So what you should do is you should make sure that you are interacting with a broad variety of audiences, and that 90% of what you are posting has nothing to do with your business, because then you fall within the guidelines, and you won’t get banned or get in trouble.

Steve: When you are posting about– on these other sub Reddits and you are asking for information, those don’t count as you promoting your business, right?

Eli: No, no they don’t. I mean as long as I’m not linking to my website or pushing my service then people won’t take it that way.

Steve: Okay, and for that sub Reddit though the ‘shut up and take my money’ one, I looked at that one in particular, it looks like you just kind of posted your product on there, was that just the etiquette for that particular sub Reddit?

Eli: Yeah, I mean you are actually not allowed to do anything other than post what the product is in the title. Like you are theoretically not supposed to say anything about like the price or anything more except literally just the product name. And it’s just only supposed to be a link to the product, otherwise it will get removed.

Steve: So can you tell me a little bit about the personalities that are on that particular sub Reddit, because it sounds like that one is like generic one that applies to a lot of people right?

Eli: Yeah, definitely it is, I mean so in general Reddit is predominantly male, so and it is predominantly younger men. So I mean honestly it’s kind of a community where your product has to be really targeted towards them. Luckily for us I mean younger men eat lots of snacks, and I mean [inaudible 00:22:14] are more likely to be into things like technology or video games. And so it just happens to be a market that really fit well with our product.

Steve: I see so if you have like a product that’s more feminine that sort of thing, it probably not going to work well in ‘shut up and take my money’?

Eli: Yes, I mean less likely to work well. I mean there are other sub Reddits that are more appropriate for that, but yes probably not going work as well.

Steve: And in terms of finding the Reddits, how many — how did you find the shopping ones in particular, where you just post the product, and then people would like it or they don’t?

Eli: Yeah, I mean honestly just exploring around this big site, like Reddit search function is pretty terrible, but if you just Google search different things like Reddit shopping, Reddit products, Reddit sale, or whatever, then you’ll eventually poke around and find there are more active sub Reddits.

Steve:Okay, and then you mentioned giveaways as a way to kind of give back to the community, were there any other posts that worked well for you?

Eli: Yeah, so I mean obviously giveaways were useful, because people think that you are giving them something, but there’s a couple of other things that we did that are useful. One is you should really find your competitors if they are on Reddit. You can do that just by kind of like searching for their products and their website and seeing if they are posting anything about it. And every time that your competitors are kind of posting in a conversation that’s giving some traction and you feel like you have something to add, then you should engage and say hey, my service does this too and this is how we do it better.

So we actually had a competitor that launched by doing an AMA on Reddit, which is kind of when we say hey this is my story, this is something interesting about me, ask me questions about it. And for whatever reason Reddit took a lot of interest in this particular person. And it blew up, they were the number one post on AMA for like a day, and AMA is like a huge sub Reddit. So I mean they were probably hitting on 100,000 new websites and so after that, it’s huge.

And I mean the only– the way I found out about it is I was looking at Google analytics and there was like 300 people on a website, and I was like that’s very strange and it was all coming from Reddit. And someone had just mentioned us in a comment on this thread, and so by– I went down there and joined the conversation, and through that experience and just being mentioned in a thread I was popular, we got like over 150 website sign ups.

Steve: Holy crap, okay so do you recommend doing an AMA, did you do an AMA after that for yourself?

Eli: I didn’t, I really feel stupid about it honestly, because if we could have had the same sort of success that they did, it would have been fantastic, but lots of people when they start a business they do an AMA. Most of the time it doesn’t do anything, I guess for whatever reason this particular person’s story was interesting to people, and so it got a lot of traction, there’s really no harm in doing an AMA, especially if you have like an interesting back story to your business as a really—it’s like your personal life, then you should do it, there is nothing major [ph] can come out of it.

Steve: So are you– like if you were to do an AMA, would you just set it up and then send traffic to it, or does the traffic just kind of come naturally on Reddit?

Eli: It will come organically on Reddit, I’ve never like done anything outside of Reddit to try to get traffic to my Reddit posts.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of just the success that you’ve had on Reddit, what are some of like the conversion numbers and the traffic numbers that you’ve gotten?

Eli: Yeah, so it will all kind of depend on where it’s coming from, on the shut up and take my money sub Reddit, we were converting like just above 1%.

Steve: That’s incredible.

Eli: Yeah, I mean it’s nice, the thing is on that sub Reddit there is no further information that’s available, you literally can only click the link. So it obviously– it makes sense to me that my conversion rates would be a little bit lower, because there is nowhere else that you can find out about that other than just clicking the links. So you get a lot of people that are clicking the link just to see what it’s all about, they don’t necessarily have a large purchase intent.

And then in other places like for example in like the snack exchange sub Reddit when we’ve done, our conversion rate will be a little higher, may be more like 2%. And then when we got put in that AMA and the comment was there, I mean those people have like very little purchase intent when they are just reading something very generic on sub Reddit, and so it will be more like 27%.

Steve: Hey everyone, I just want to take a quick moment to thank famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Now FameBit is the number one market place for You Tube influencer marketing, with over 15,000 You Tubers looking to promote brands from beauty, tech, gaming, pets, and more. Now video starts as low as $50 and it’s completely free to post a campaign and receive proposals from You Tubers.

Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guests Emmanuel Alley used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with You Tube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywifequit at famebit.com you will automatically get $10 off. So go to famebit.com right now and get famous You Tubers to promote your products. Now back to the show.

Steve: And how much traffic are we talking about here?

Eli: I mean for the shut up and take my money post, both– I’ve done it twice now, and both times I did it there was about 10,000 unique group visits and then…

Steve: In like a day?

Eli: Yeah, in a day.

Steve: Holy crap, okay.

Eli: And then the AMA was about 15,000.

Steve: So how many times can you do these things on the shut up and take my money, you said you did it twice like what’s like the etiquette for how often you can do it?

Eli: Yeah, so on this sub Reddit the rules that can– if you are the creator of the product, you can’t post more than once a month, and we waited actually eight months. So we posted it right when we first launched, and then we basically wanted to give it a long enough time to ever and we completely forgot about it before posting, because if you can’t spare, I mean the sub Reddit people will frown upon that. But if you are posting different products, then once a month is fine, if you are posting the same products you should wait a little bit longer.

Steve: So just curious, have you tried Reddit advertising as well?

Eli: I haven’t, I’ve read a lot about it, and from what I’ve heard for the most part, people don’t seem to really having too much success with it, but I’ve not personally tried it.

Steve: So you’ve only done that one particular sub Reddit once every eight months, but you mentioned that Reddit is one of your primary sources of traffic. So how do you kind of keep it going if you can only publish every now and then, does that make sense?

Eli: Yeah it does, so there are a couple of other things that we’ve done, so for example best sub Reddit snack exchange, it has on Reddit each sub Reddit has like a side bar that typically has just read in a piece of information, like the rules of the sub Reddit, other related sub Reddits, things like that. And on a specific sub Reddit it also has like links to basically subscription box companies that have products that the people might be interested in. So we messaged the moderators about sub Reddit, and we had our product posted on that side bar. So that’s the source of sustaining traffic for us, because it’s always there regardless…

Steve: You don’t have to pay for that link, it’s just there forever?

Eli: No, correct.

Steve: Amazing. Okay, how did you negotiate that?

Eli: Honestly it was very simple, I just messaged the moderator, he didn’t respond, I followed up and then he finally put it up right there. Depending on the sub Reddit, if they have something like that, then you can definitely message the moderators. People on Reddit, I mean they like to see people who are like active Reddit users. You have a business. So if you are nice about it and you approach them, they will probably help you out.

Steve: And they can tell—so what is your comment [ph] at this point with that Reddit account?

Eli: Like 1500 or 2000 or so.

Steve: Okay and does that factor in whether you can get on one of these side bars or…?

Eli: Yeah I think in general, anyone who is like a hard core Reddit user will look at your [inaudible] [00:30:32] and your post history and your comment history. If you are like a really active user that is engaging with the community on a variety of different topics, then people will be very willing to help you out.

Steve: And this account is not your own personal account, right? This is your separate business account. You just kind of developed that kind of over time?

Eli: Yeah I mean honestly when the posts are successful I get a lot of comments from them because there’s a lot of up-posts. And it doesn’t need to be like little things every time. They can just be like a few big successful posts that add up quickly.

Steve: And then how many of these companies are actually on these side bars? Is it just yours or there are a whole bunch?

Eli: There’s like ten maybe on that specific one.

Steve: Okay. And so that’s one source of traffic. Are the other ones like kind of more manual in terms of like getting traffic from Reddit?

Eli: Yeah so one thing that’s nice about the Shut Up and Take My Money is that what people will frequently do is they’ll sort it by top. So Reddit is like– their normal algorithm basically demotes posts over time after they’ve been up for a while, so that fresh content always rises to the top. But you can also sort sub Reddits by top over a period of time. So I can say like “I want to look at the best 25 posts over the last you know.” So what happens is if your post has been very successful then when people sort by top, it will still be up there even though maybe three months have passed.

And this is really great especially when people are coming up to the holidays, because that’s one way that people will book for a gift ideas, is they’ll to something like Shut Up and Take My Money, or sort by top over the past year and then also look at the top 25 posts, they’ll say, hey I think blah, blah, blah would like this particular product. So honestly that’s sub Reddit even though we are not on the front page or anywhere near it, it still gives us a lot of traffic.

Steve: Any secrets to getting one of these Reddits to the top? Did you do anything or was it just you posted and that was it?

Eli: I mean honestly, it’s just about the product and crafting a good title. I mean I think that one thing that helped us is that our concept can be very easily explained in about ten words. I mean what we posted was snacks from a different country delivered monthly. So if you have to find like a very concise way to explain the appeal of your product, because that’s all that people are going to see. And then beyond that, just make it really easy for selling the by the products. Like we linked literally to the product page, the person has to click like one button and then they’ll check out.

So people on Reddit aren’t patient. Make it very easy for them to buy the product. And then obviously like people will comment on your post. Make sure you engage with them, don’t just post it and then go away. I mean respond to people’s questions, provide more information about the product that people are interested, and that will instill more trust in people about your product.

Steve: Okay. So what other advertising mediums have you tried besides Reddit?

Eli: I mean the other place that we found the biggest success is kind of like You Tube and bloggers. So we actually got really lucky. Our biggest You Tube success was not from something that we initiated. There’s a famous video gamer guru called TotalBiscuit. His wife actually was just like a customer of ours. I don’t know how she found our products, but she did and she signed up.

And then they decided that they would film TotalBiscuit trying all the snacks from the different country each month and post a video to You Tube. I mean goodness knows why they decided to do that, but I mean it was fantastic to us. I mean each of those videos has like around 200,000 views and drive a lot of traffic to our website. So that’s great obviously.

And then obviously we have like also engaged in some of the You Tube marketing ourselves. So really what we do is we look for people who we think would be a good fit for our product. People who do like product reviews and people who have like a lot of enthusiasm, who we think will be like fun to have try the snacks because you know our product is very fun.

And then we reach out to them and we say hey, “Can we send you a free box that you could review on your YouTube channel?” And sometimes they say yes, sometimes they ask for money and at this point we are not willing to pay them. So we just say, “Could you do it for free?” And a lot of times they will. And we’ve probably gotten 15 or 20 people to do that. And it definitely drives a lot of traffic to the website.

Steve: So how do you reach out to this people? Is it just the You Tube contact link?

Eli: Yes, so I mean they’ll typically provide like an email address for business purposes that you can reach out to them through. There’s also a website called Famed It which we don’t use. But that’s basically if you want to pay for You Tube marketing you can do that. And I mean what we found is that you kind of have to craft the story a bit. You kind of have to talk about like, maybe watch five to ten videos, get a feel for their personality, get a feel for their back story. Make more of a personalized email.

I mean our business receives like 10 emails a day of just xyz blogger that wants to feature our product, but they don’t ever say anything about our business, and we don’t feel like they’ve researched us. So I mean it’s really important to make the person feel like it’s just not a spam email that you are sending to hundreds of thousands people. You know really craft the content in a personalized way and that will make your response rate much, much higher.

Steve: Hey Eli, I’m going to ask you a very selfish question now. Let’s say you run like a wedding linen store for example, is that Redditable or not?

Eli: Yes but only in weddings specific sub Reddits, and I guarantee you there is a wedding specific sub Reddit.

Steve: Okay so that implies that there’s females on that Reddit– sub Reddit?

Eli: Yeah there are. I mean Reddit is predominantly male, but there are also plenty of places where women are more likely to frequent. Reddit is very diverse and luckily they’ve already done the segmenting for you by breaking it up under sub Reddits, so really no matter what your product is, if you spent some time poking around, you’ll find places where people that are your target market are hanging out, I guarantee that.

Steve: And so what would you recommend a giveaway, or just asking questions like what would you recommend doing?

Eli: There’s really two ways that I think would be useful, one is just market research. I mean looking at the ways that people are interacting, like the kind of questions that they have, the problems that they’re facing. Those are really-really useful things to know for your business. Then secondly just engaging with them, I mean yeah you can run giveaway [inaudible] [00:37:00], but also just looking for people who got a problem that your product solves and talk with them about it, and seeing if your product could be a good fit for them.

Steve: Well is it okay to mention the product though?

Eli: Yeah it is. So I think that one thing that really helps in that regard is if you don’t just mention your product, but your mention your product and maybe like one to two other competitors. People really like when you feel like you’re giving them information to help them rather than pushing your product. So that’s one way to kind of like disguise your actual intent and people will react much more positively towards that.

Steve: Okay, and then back to just kind of your business what are some of the logistics of running the box company, like how do you get products for your box, kind of how the economics work, and how do you decide how much to charge that sort of thing?

Eli: Sure so in terms of logistics every month we work with a variety of different suppliers. Obviously because we’re featuring a different country each month, it’s very difficult– it’s basically just a supply chain challenge because we have to constantly be making contact with new suppliers that have new products for us. So I mean we do a lot of different things to find suppliers, we went to a trade show last month, and we’re going to one this month and that’s a good way.

We do a lot of Google searching, which is quite useful, but it’s also can be very difficult because a lot of suppliers especially in this particular industry are not online at this point. And then one other way that we do it is by kind of reverse engineering. We have like a local international food store that’s really great, and we kind of see where they’re getting their products from.

And then obviously we do like a lot of research just by asking people online who are from the different countries, like what are your favorite snacks, we have personal contacts with people who live in different countries, or were born there and they can tell us what they like the most and then we try to find those products.

Steve: So it always means contacting the distributor right or the manufacturer?

Eli: Yeah so I mean right now we don’t actually import the products ourselves, that’s probably somewhere our business is going to head eventually. But today we work with the importers and so we basically have to find people who are importing products from that country, and then make contact with them, see what they have available that we could purchase that would be an interesting snack or candy. We typically work with like somewhere between two to four different suppliers each month.

Steve: It just seems like and I’m not sure how many customers you have, but like the volumes for food that you have are they high enough to actually cause like the vendors to actually care about you? You kind of get what I’m asking?

Eli: Yeah I know I do. At the very beginning it was hard to get the vendors to pay any attention. At this point it kind of depends, some vendors are still just a pain in the butt to work with, but some vendors are actually really responsive now. Honestly, I think you just kind of have to be very confident coming into the negotiation, like when you first make contact be– project very high in terms of what you think you’re going to buy to try to get better service, and I mean only at the very end you actually have to reveal what you’re ordering so.

I think at this point like the useful thing for us is that a lot of our suppliers are selling to ethnic groceries, and so a lot of ethnic groceries are kind of Mom-and-Pop shops, and so they’re used to dealing with businesses that are a bit lower volumes. Like their minimum orders are really only like a pallet or so. So it’s not too difficult for us to deal with them. Now we’re talking about dealing directly with like an oversea manufacturer, they’re probably not going to pick up the phone for anything less than a container full. So it’s a bit more difficult there.

Steve: Okay and then since you’re a subscription box, how do you reduce churn?

Eli: Yeah, I think the number one way to reduce churn is just by having a really awesome product. I know that’s I mean– I think that’s the bottom line, I think if you’re– I think a lot of subscription business have a reputation for kind of starting off really great, and then kind of reducing the quality and value of the product over time, because they’re trying to make money, but then as a result their churn goes way up.

We really try to focus on putting all of the value into the product itself and not spending any money on paid marketing. I mean pretty much all the subscription businesses have like your first box is free or it’s half off, and like you can get referral credits by referring people, and this and that the next thing. And instead of doing any of that we basically price the product as low as we can to have it be like sustainable for us, and then we put all the value back into the product. So we honestly just try to make the best product that we can, and people stick with us because of it.

Steve: Here’s what’s interesting, when I was looking at your site it seems like every month a box costs a different amount. So when someone signs up are they just signing up for an open ended subscription where you can charge them any amount between a certain dollar amount, like how does it work?

Eli: Yeah so the cost that they pay to us is consistent month to month, so I mean we offer the larger box for $25 and the smaller one for 13, and that never changes month to month. Obviously our cost changes month to month. So I mean it’s really just a balancing game, one month we make like we’re making very-very little, because the products are very expensive, maybe it’s from like a European country and it’s more like fine chocolate some things like that, and the next month maybe it’s an Asian country and the products are a bit cheaper, and so the margins go up. So it’s just kind of a balancing game for us.

Steve: So when they sign up, it’s like an open ended subscription, they actually have to cancel it in order for it to stop coming right?

Eli: Yeah I mean so we’re offering both subscriptions like you said they operate exactly as you just explained, and then we also offer gifts which is basically it has an expiration date, you pay the full amount up front.

Steve: Okay and so you basically have like a 30 day peak into the future in terms of how much you need right 30-60 day?

Eli: Yeah, so I mean at this point we have a pretty good idea of what our trend rate is. We know how many subscribers we have today, and then we basically have to estimate how many sign ups we’re going to get into the future. Unfortunately at this point we have enough volume that we really have to start ordering products two to three months ahead of time. So we’re projecting pretty far out into the future relatively for us at this point.

Steve: So do you do any other sort of marketing like email marketing or like when someone says they’re going quit do you have some sort of sequence in place that will try to keep him to stay, or anything along those lines?

Eli: We don’t right now. I mean pretty much every subscription business does and it’s something we’ll probably be implementing in the future, but now I mean right now we don’t do any email marketing. Honestly, we right now we’ve kind of consolidated our efforts to the channels that have been the most successful for us so far, because we’re being able to grow the business that way. And since it’s only a two person team we kind of try to stay focused on that. I mean really for us it’s like social media, bloggers, that have been the most successful, because the product itself is pretty like interesting for people to [inaudible] [00:44:18]. So that’s what’s been the best for us thus far.

Steve: So outside of Reddit and reaching out to influencers, have any of the other social media platforms been good for you?

Eli: Yeah, so I think Facebook has been good for us, but not in terms of like customer acquisition. I feel like Facebook honestly for most people is just a place to kind of like maintain the community and to interact with the community, and that’s how we’ve used it. Twitter I think can be a way to acquire new customers, but it’s kind of like ground work. I mean one thing that we tried early on was kind of like tweeting out to people who were mentioning, interacting like international snacks in their twitter conversations.

And I mean that it works, but it’s like it’s very slow and very time consuming. So Twitter for us at this point is just a way that if a customer has a quick question [inaudible] [00:45:12] respond. And then right now I think we’re going to start focusing on Instagram and Pintrest, because I think our product is pretty visually appealing. I mean the packaging is interesting, and the products themselves are pretty interesting, so I think that will be some good platforms for us to work on.

Steve: Interesting, and then it sounds Reddit is kind of low maintenance at this point it sounds like right?

Eli: Yeah, I mean it is. I mean the thing about Reddit is that you just have to be monitoring it, like I said we kind of check on what our competitors are doing like every few days, and just see if there’s anywhere that we can hop in. But Reddit is more about like looking for the right opportunity to post something, looking for the right opportunity to jump in and get a big win, rather than every single day grinding it out in very small amounts.

Steve: Okay, hey that’s really helpful Eli. For all those people who are interested in getting some yummy treats from other countries where they can find you, and where and they buy a box?

Eli: So we sell only on our website which is Universalyums.com. And like I said the larger box is 25 bucks, the smaller one is 13 and you can cancel it anytime.

Steve: And what do you get in each box, just curious small versus large?

Eli: Yeah so the small box we say is six or more snacks, but most of the time it’s more like eight or nine. And the larger box we say 13 or more most of the times it’s like 14 or 15. We try to include like a variety of different flavors, so like sweet stuff, salty stuff, spicy, some like smaller candy, some bigger treats, so we try to put a lot variety into the boxes.

Steve: And if anyone has any questions about just your business in general, do you have like a Twitter account or some place where they can reach you?

Eli: Yeah we own the Universalyums twitter handle, you can also email me if you have any questions, the email is just support@universallyyums.com.

Steve: Awesome well thanks a lot Eli, thanks for coming on the show, I learnt a lot today about Reddit especially.

Eli: Thanks Steve, thanks for having me.

Steve: All right, man take care.

Eli: You too bye, bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Before talking to Eli I would never have guessed that Reddit would be a great place to advertise physical goods online. I guess I’ll have to go try it now and write about it on the blog. For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode81, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now I also offer free ecommerce workshops on a regular basis if you want to learn. For information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. If you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to Mywifequitherjob.com for more information and sign up there.

Once again I just want to thank HostGator for sponsoring this episode. HostGator is one of the best webhost out there that I highly recommend if you want to start a blog. In fact I hosted Mywifequitherjob.com on there in the very beginning and loved it. You get 24/7 live support via chat, phone, and email, and you could install WordPress in just a single click. They have an easy to use website builder design services, and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. Please go HostGater.com/Mywifequit to redeem the discount. Once again that’s HostGater.com/Mywifequit.

I also want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts out there that I recommend if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. Everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing is all built in, so all you’re going is populate it with the products that you want to sell, and you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to Bigcommerce.com/Mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is Bigcommerce.com/Mywifequitherjob. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

080: How To Achieve Financial Freedom With 8 Different Income Streams With Nick Loper

How To Achieve Financial Freedom With 8 Different Income Streams With Nick Loper

Nick Loper is someone who I met just recently at The New Media Expo in Las Vegas and he runs the popular site SideHustleNation.com where he teaches others how to build a sizable side income.

What’s cool about Nick is that he built up his businesses while working full time just like I did. He’s got 8 different income streams and he’s a huge proponent of using your free time more wisely to achieve financial freedom. He also runs a popular podcast called Side Hustle Nation which you should all check out.

So without further ado, enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Nick created 8 different streams of online income
  • What Nick advises if you have very little money to invest in your business
  • How to get customers and visibility on Kindle, Fiverr and Udemy
  • How to create an audience for your blog
  • How Nick weaves his podcast in with his other revenue generating properties
  • How to create a paid mastermind group
  • How to attract clients for coaching

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and please join me for a free live workshop on ecommerce which I give on a regular basis. For more information about the workshop, go to mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. And if you want to get a jump on starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiteherjob.com and sign up right on the front page. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I have my buddy Nick Loper on the show. Now Nick is someone who I met recently at NMX, and he runs the popular site sidehustlenation.com where he teaches others how to build a sizeable side income. Now what’s cool about Nick is that he built up his business while working full time, just like I did. And he’s got over eight different income streams and he’s a huge proponent of using your free time more wisely to achieve financial freedom.

He also runs a popular podcast called Side Hustle Nation as well which you should all check out. But before he begins, just a quick note, you know kind of up until this point, I focused on guests worth seven, eight, even nine figure businesses, but today I want to kind of discuss some of the little things that you can do to make money, period. And Nick is an expert in this regard. So with that, welcome to the show Nick. How are you doing today man?

Nick: I’m doing excellent. Thanks for having me.

Steve: Yes, what is your story? How did you kind of get involved in Side Hustle Nation and what are all the various ways that you actually make money online.

Nick: Well that’s what we can dive into. I think since I put that different—since I put up that podcast up, I’ve added a few more to the…

Steve: Is that right? Are you like over ten now, I mean double digits?

Nick: Maybe ten, a bunch of different projects going on, but so my background was exactly like Steve said, trying to build the business part time. After graduation, I do what you are supposed to do. I got a corporate job, moved across the country, and pretty immediately found out that sticking around here for 40 years is a pretty scary preposition. And I really didn’t have the desire to climb the ladder. Even the vision or the desire to like see myself being a manager here, or like it just didn’t appeal to me. So I was trying to figure out, how can I get out of here?

And the first business and painfully I actually started this even prior to graduation or as in affiliate marketing. And the site that I ended up having built was a footwear comparison shopping site. So it had been like a next tag or a price grabber, so specifically for shoes. And so the way the site made money was Zappos and Amazon and these other footwear retailers would pay a commission for any sales that were referred through the site. And aggregated all of these catalogues and you would say, if you are looking for Nike shocks, women’s model, xyz or whatever, you know here’s what you can find it and here’s the best deal. You know find my size or whatever the button said to click off to the matching site.

Steve: Just curious, did you get stores to send you their product feeds, or did you manually gather all those for that site?

Nick: So it was all aggregated through a handful of different affiliate networks. So Commission Junction was big, Link Share was big. Google affiliate network at the time and Amazon has their own product catalogue. And so the technical challenge was matching all those together and normalizing the data, because some people will say this is new Valence, some people will say this is new Valence Inc, some people will say this is new Valence Software and try to teach the system to say, “No, no that’s all the same brand,” and stuff like that.

Steve: So Nick are you technical? I know we live in kind of the same area where there’s a lot of tech workers here. Were you in engineering at any point or?

Nick: I’m not. I guess I saw a couple like IS classes and like one CS class. So you know enough to be dangerous, enough to speak the language, enough to be like well should your query really look like that. And the tech team is probably just annoyed at me at this point. They are like, “Look, we got it. Just stop bothering us.” So no, I didn’t program any of this myself. It was all just kind of laying out the specks and the groundwork for it.

Steve: Okay, and then I remember just before we were chatting you mentioned you just recently shut this down. So I thought we kind of just go over some of the ways that you make money today. And so you mentioned now that you’ve hit double digits. So can we just kind of go over kind of at a high level what those are, and then we’ll just kind of focus on the ones that are making you the most money.

Nick: You bet. So I was so involved in affiliate marketing even though the shoe business has– the sunset has fallen on a few business. We still have a handful of different affiliate sites that are varying in performance from very good to not so great. So that’s before the—what else is going on, like we’ve been to self publishing on Kindle and that’s been a really fun side hustle. I started that probably almost three years ago at that point. I remember getting my first like royalty cheque from Amazon for like $47. And I’m like, “I’m a professional author! Somebody paid me for my thing.” It was really cool.

Steve: That’s true.

Nick: I’m doing some peer to peer lending which is not really a side hustle, but more of a alternative investment strategy selling some stuff on Fiverr which is the market place, because it serves starting at $5. After meeting a gentleman whose claim to fame was I have made enough money on Fiverr to buy a house in my first year. And I was like, “Tell me more. Okay, I’m saying this because I’ve been on Fiverr a ton of times as a buyer, but never really as a seller.” And so he kind of broke down what happened to get that. I thought that was really interesting. So that inspired me to get started there myself.

I’ve got the blog and the podcast which makes money through referral sponsorships, affiliate stuff, sponsor posts occasionally. I run the Side Hustle Nation inner-circle mastermind and some coaching that happens through the site as well which is growing a little bit over the past year or so. That’s been a ton of fun. I’ve got some by the minute consulting on clarity.fm and I think you can set up a similar thing on Google help outs now which I have yet– it’s on my to-do list, just pretty fun building online courses through Udemy. I haven’t done any self post the ones I give, but I do the Udemy thing, testing that platform out. And just in the past year or so I’ve gotten a little more involved in freelancing both in writing and book editing. And then my latest is Amazon business. I’m starting out with some clearance arbitrage, and actually just made my first sales on that on Friday.

Steve: Awesome. Congrats man.

Nick: It’s pretty cool. Pretty cool although refresh that app, or open that app and see actually numbers, not zeros in there.

Steve: So let’s talk about your big money makers here. Now you mentioned a lot of stuff. What are like your top three money makers?

Nick: So it varies month to month. You know when there’s a book launch going on, the Kindle stuff will rise to the top, but probably the affiliate stuff is consistently up there.

Steve: Okay. And then which sites are you doing affiliate offers on. You mentioned it’s not like you had a lot of sites actually.

Nick: Yeah, a handful of sites, so some of them do better than others. And actually lately the affiliates stuff through Side Hustle Nation has done the best. But the other site that’s done well is a directory of Virtual Assistant Companies or outsourcing companies, it’s called virtualassistants.com, and I started that in 2011. And that site is monetized with some cyber advertising, some referral like Regent [ph] for this type of companies. And then they buy the minute consulting stuff feeds into some of the clarity stuff.

Steve: So let’s talk a little bit about that. So how do you create a site like that? How do you drive traffic to a site like that? So is it similar to your shoe site in a way where you aggregate different things, and you are making affiliate revenue off of it?

Nick: So unlike the shoe site, this one where the shoe site was heavily relying on pay traffic and Google adwords and Bing search ads, this site is entirely organic search. Because our ranks are well for much of our outsourcing related terms and especially like long tail key words in that sense. So having had to do a bunch of pay stuff on upfront, but my inspiration for the site was like browsing. I had started a wine site. I don’t know why like within one country even though I know nothing about wine I thought this was good niche to get in to. And I saw this site. It was like a review site for these different wine clubs. I knew how much these wine clubs were paying out to affiliates sites. This guy must just be printing money. This is like the easiest site in the world to build.

So I literally like tried thinking of what can I– you know you are listen to tropical MBA, what can I [inaudible] [0:10:19] in jam on this guy’s idea, and came up with the Virtual Assistants space. I work in—especially for software products that you can do this. The other one I wanted to build for ages is like the affiliate marketing—the email marketing version of this like the AWebers and the Getresponses and the Infusionsoft, all these companies, and a ton of them have like recurring payoffs it would be really cool to set this up. But that’s what I did. So I started using the exact same theme as that guy, starting out, use the exact same plug-ins, and just have somebody on Elance and then put it together for 50 bucks, a 100 bucks.

Steve: So is it a WordPress site or no?

Nick: Yes it’s a WordPress theme and just replaced the content with—content about outsourcing instead of content about wine. And it took a while to take out gain and traction, and I was stalking people on twitter to like—if they would tweet about the company I’d send them a note and be like, “Hey would you mind dropping in a review?” And that’s kind of how I seeded the initial reviews.

Steve: That’s really interesting. For some reason I don’t see it mentioned in the Side Hustle Nation or at least maybe I didn’t maybe go through the material close enough. But so you just put up a site and you did some research on Virtual Assistants, and then you just started writing articles about it? Is that how you drive traffic to it?

Nick: Yes a lot of it is based on my experience in outsourcing and trying to find assistants for the shoe business. So we ended up being a cool pivot because we were just trying to find out which of these companies overseas are legit and which ones are scammers and which ones are actually decent operators. And so now there’s like over 150 different companies with profiles on the site and close to a thousand user reviews. So it’s really taken off and it’s all user generated content that Google loves to chew on.

Steve: So how do you get users to leave a review?

Nick: Just at the bottom of every post. “Have you worked with this company? Leave a review.” And so initially it was reaching out to people on twitter, like if they mention this company, reaching out to the companies. “Hey if you have any happy customers, send them by to leave a review.” And you can kind of see based on the time stamps because it’s a marketing channel for the companies. So you can tell when they send out an email blast to their customers, and then you go like six within two days span or something.

Steve: Interesting. And then what was your content base strategy for that site?

Nick: It’s a couple of different ways. You know, one is kind of my personal experiments and trials and failures in outsourcing, and the other is just kind of news reporter style like who or when, where and why on different companies.

Steve: And how often do you publish?

Nick: It goes in spats. I go get inspired and do five posts in a two week span or something like that, and then do nothing for a month.

Steve: So do you have anyone who manages the site or is it mainly your content? Do you have writers or–?

Nick: Mainly my content. Have you used—I mean I’ve tested several different writing services. So I can profile them on the site. Like Iwriters, I’ve gotten articles from Fiverr, I’ve gotten articles from Copywriter today, Textbroker, all those places.

Steve: For some reason whenever I think of Virtual Assistants these days, I think of Darker’s site.

Nick: He’s on it. He’s on there.

Steve: No I would imagine that you are kind of competing against the guys like Darker who are putting out content—not competing, that’s maybe the wrong word. But I guess you are outranking guys like Darker and then you’re referring traffic to his services. Is that kind of accurate?

Nick: Yeah, probably not outranking Chris, because he’s got his whole empire built up. But he’s only one out of 150 companies. So there’s plenty of other options that people are looking for answers on.

Steve: Okay. And so your basic strategy there is to pump out content, get the content ranking for long tail key words, soliciting reviews by just soliciting some of these companies for their positive reviews to put on your site. And so everything is pretty much organic?

Nick: Everything at this point is relatively hands off. And now what I’ve started doing is you know recording video interviews with the founders and doing trials of the services myself. So I’ve got that kind of firsthand content to put up there as well.

Steve: Okay, so you have that site which sounds like it’s more or less on autopilot. What are you actually actively working on right now that is generating a good amount of income? Or what are you excited about right now?

Nick: I spent a lot of time on this Side Hustle site. It’s a very content intensive content revenue, writing the posts kind of the case studies experiments that go into those, recording the podcasts and doing that sort of thing. Lately, the past couple of weeks, I’ve spent a lot of time trying to learn the Amazon business, the importing business just because it’s such a hot side hustle right now, it’s such a hot business that people are interested in. And I’ve been probably ignoring it for too long. And I need—because of the nature of the other site, I need to be able to speak intelligently about it. Whether it works or not, I need to at least have an experiment to write about.

Steve: I see. So let’s talk about Side Hustle Nation real quick. So how does Side Hustle Nation generate income, and how does the podcast kind of all come into play here?

Nick: Sure a couple of ways or several ways. So there is services like you can hire me for side hustle coaching. There’s a private mastermind that I host. The site runs money through affiliate revenue and some sponsored content.

Steve: Okay and then give me an example of one of your affiliates.

Nick: So I’m an affiliate for Blue Host and I’m not putting up [inaudible] [0:16:21] numbers, but occasionally generate sales for that. One of my cool like examples is my friend Sean Marshall came on the show like in January, February. And he’s like, “Hey, this is my business kind of open the Commono [ph] on. This is my business. I run a local marketing support for local businesses to the point where it’s an amazing lifestyle business. I up and moved my family to Cozumel Mexico and we are Scooby diving and the girls are learning Spanish, it’s great. And by the way I have a Udemy course on the topic. It’s 75% off for your listeners. And so when we affiliate linked that, you know after 30, 40 minutes of him delivering the content, they converted really, really well. So those are kind of affiliate relationships that perform best on the site more so than the Blue Host stuff.

Steve: And you said a bunch of stuff there. You also mentioned some sort of membership site or mastermind. Is that what you said?

Nick: Yeah. So I host a quarterly mastermind, five or six people at a time. We meet, we agree to talk about side hustles and accountability and goals for the quarter.

Steve: And these are people that pay you on a monthly basis? Is it like a subscription or–?

Nick: Yes.

Steve: Okay. So how did you get those customers? Are they just people who follow your blog or–?

Nick: Yes. Podcast listeners, primarily blog followers, email subscribers. So that’s where I’ll talk about it on the basically on the podcast and then in the email list, “Hey, we are starting a new session. Get your application in.”

Steve: I see. How much do you charge for that?

Nick: $97 a month.

Steve: $97 a month and then you take what, five people every month or so?

Nick: Yes, there’s actually two groups going now. So I have ten people in there.

Steve: Interesting. So how did you come up with the idea of doing that, and how do you kind of run things.

Nick: This was an idea from Alex Parker actually. We were recording a session last year on the topic of masterminds– the importance of masterminds and more so like the ability to host paid masterminds. It was something I never had even thought or heard of before. And he was like, “Nick, you have a relatively decent following. The Side Hustle Nation people would love to hang out with you.” I said, “Okay, well let’s see what happens.” Put it out there and you know had eight, seven, or eight enquiries and founded a pretty solid crew there.

Steve: Interesting. So you just put yourself out there and then you got five people to sign up. Are you actually present during these? Do you moderate all these discussions?

Nick: Yap. I’m on every call.

Steve: Okay. Is it just like one gigantic Q&A session or how do you run it?

Nick: So we take a couple of different formats. One way is just to be around Robin format where everyone has kind of ten to twenty minutes to talk about, “Hey what did you get done this week? What are you working on? What are your challenges?” And kind of solicit feedback from the group on whatever topic you want and then accountability. What are going to get done before next time? And format number two is the extended hot seat format where you do very abbreviated round the horn with everybody. And then somebody else has 30 or 40 minutes to dive into their business and what they want to get done in the next three months or maybe some bigger longer term stuff than just this week, like “Where do you want to go with this over the next three months?”

Steve: So these guys – you meet with these guys once a week for a month. And then are you ever in the hot seat or is it just primarily for the people who pay?

Nick: Yeah, just for those guys.

Steve: I see. This format sounds exactly like the other masterminds that I belong to. It’s just funny though that you’ve—it’s creative that you’ve monetized this actually. So do you find that the people that you attract, are they all trying to create blogs or is it just kind of all across the board?

Nick: It is across the board, more — a couple of people also probably doing ecommerce business, since that’s kind of hard right now. A lot of the people in the authority business space and kind of building their personal branded blog, and I want to be known for this, I want to start a podcast, I want to be known for this.

Steve: Okay, and so right now it sounds like you have 10 people paying you $97 a month for this? Okay, and then you also mentioned Udemy, so for the listeners out there Udemy is an online course platform, can we talk about what type of courses you are offering on there, and how much that generates approximately?

Nick: Sure so I — my main course is on how to rock your kindle launch, how do you rock your book launch basically, especially for like first time author, nonfiction, here is the system that works. The course was created after I put up a guest post on Steve Scott’s site, yeah, and it was like really like in terms of like 5000 words guest post. I got a ton of love on social media, a ton of love in the comments, and people were like you are joking, hey this could be a book in itself. And so I realized okay, there’s an appetite for this kind of information, how can I expand on this? And I had been wanting to try Udemy, I decided to interview people like Scott Braden and Rob Cabin [ph] and we were having a ton of success on this, like okay I got to give this a shot.

Or rather I got to give this another shot because I launched a course previously, and it did nothing and it was like this is a waste of several bits of…

Steve: On Udemy you mean?

Nick: Yeah, I said man this is — I don’t know maybe I just didn’t just do it right or whatever, so I kind of studied from these experts on how to launch it a little bit better. What worked best during the launch actually, so Udemy is a lot like Amazon, like if you can provide that initial push in terms of traffic and enrollments and sales and reviews, then their internal algorithms start to take place, like if you can provide that initial push like with your book to climb the ranks, then all over sudden it’s on the best seller list, and people will find it organically.
Similar with Udemy, and so in the first couple of months after the launch, this course generated maybe 3,500 bucks and then it’s between 3 and 600 a month since then, so relatively and passive since then, so I made it in November and haven’t touched it since, so it’s been kind of a cool.

Steve: So what is the main difference between your failed launch versus your successful one?

Nick: Okay, so the biggest success driver for the more recent Udemy launch was finding a couple of high value affiliate partners. So Udemy has an affiliate program through LinkShare that is I think a 40% pay out, and then if you are a top performer you can ask them to like bump you up to like 50%. And what that will do, so somebody could get 50% of your course for selling it for you. And so in my case that was Steve Scott, so he had built up a good report through that guest post and some other channels and hanging out at New Media Expo and all that. The other was Spencer Hass from Niche Pursuits.

And so in Steve’s case, it was like I have referred — I referred ten people to your post all the time and they ask me how should I launch my book, and it seems like it would be great to have this page thing to recommend and get paid on. And in Spencer’s case, him and his partner parent had been working on some kindle projects kind of like quietly behind the scenes and so I knew they were working on that, because I’d been following their stuff for a long time. You just send them early access to the course; hey I know you guys are working on this, check this out. And so they were very-very generous when they did their book launch recap report like, hey we owe Nick a huge thanks for teaching us all this stuff, and that was a great endorsement from both of those guys.

Steve: I see and how much do you charge for this course, how does like the pricing and your cut, what does Udemy take as well?

Nick: So I set it at $99 initially, and since bumped it to 149. I should probably bump it to 199. So how Udemy works is a very discount driven platform. And so with the courses that were sold through Spencer and through Steve were priced at $24. It’s like hey, get 75% off through this affiliate link. And that means my cut on it was $6 to $12 depending on how the structure is set up. So not a huge, not like the $2000 super premium courses that are out there, but an interesting channel. The reason people go to Udemy, a couple of reasons. For traffic that you refer as the instructor they are going to give you 97%.

So you could theoretically put your course up there for $500. And if you have that audience to sell to, they are going — and you don’t have to worry about video hosting, you don’t have to worry about payment processing, you don’t have to worry about any of that stuff. And if you are going to drive all those sales, sell it all day long for $500. You can also opt out of their promos to say like when they run like their monthly — because I launched right before in November, like right before black Friday. And so they had a big whole like black Friday thing, so everything was like $15.

Steve: Like every course on Udemy was $15, okay.

Nick: Yeah, and which was cool because it sold a ton of copies and it was all theoretically incremental, but it was also like if you have like some super premium material, you wouldn’t want to discount that to $15 either. So you could opt out of that.

Steve: Interesting, so yeah I do notice those coupons flashed by and it seems like everything is always heavily-heavily discounted on Udemy. I’m Just curious why Udemy versus your own platform?

Nick: Okay, so the second component of that is like Amazon, here is an opportunity to reach a platform of 6,000,000 students versus how many people you talk to on your blog, podcast, email list. It’s from that 6,000,000, and so if you can hit this right for your target key words that’s kindle publishing, that’s self publishing, that’s kindle launch, that’s book launch, whatever it is.

If people are sourcing for that, you have the opportunity to reach a much wider audience and that can be — and some people are using it purely as a discovery platform. They’ll put my course up for free; the minimum course is 30 minutes. And now I can funnel those people, I can send educational announcements to those emails or to those people which generally pings their inbox. And basically it’s an exposure challenge for a lot of people.

Steve: So that’s interesting, so you can list your course on there and then once people sign up you have access to their emails at that point?

Nick: That’s a good distinction to make, you don’t have their email, you can message them on platform, and you can send them either educational announcements, or promotional announcements. And I think you are limited to like four promo announcements per month.

Steve: Okay, that is really cool, and so let’s switch gears a little bit, because I want to kind of go through a little bit of list of all the ways you make money. I’m really curious about Fiverr; I don’t see how you can possibly make significant money with that platform. You are making five bucks or so off a customer right, so how does it work?
Nick: So Fiverr works like this, it’s all about the up sales and the $5 gigs are all about the pre made files, you can just hit send on basically. So it’s just like selling a book or a course, it’s no — there’s no work required to send this. And that’s what the guy in his screening was AnarchoFighter if you want to look him up one of the best Fiverr sellers on their top rated seller.

So he said hey, all my $5 gigs are just PDF, video, audio file deliveries real quick. I followed the script he had sent two seconds. If somebody wants my actual time and involvement, that’s when it’s going to be into the gig extras, the up sales and stuff. So one of his — they had — last we spoke was like I’ll send you the seven steps secret to a killer auto responder or something like that.

And there was — in the up sales I will write message number one for you, I would write message number two for you, I would write the whole thing for you. As he is upgraded to like a top level seller like he can charge, I don’t know up to 100 bucks on extra or something like that.

Steve: But he still has to manually respond to each one of these request right or no?

Nick: I think at that time definitely yes, at this time they may have added like a quick delivery like so somebody orders just the basic, and it’s just like a file you can paste in. Or like you can have it set to auto reply a certain script, and here is the Dropbox link to download the file or something.

Steve: Okay, and then I think I read one of your posts that you made several thousand dollars on Fiverr?

Nick: Yeah, I was doing around 500 bucks a month during my first year on the thing, so that was pretty cool. I did do some manual labor for part of that, how did it start? I started selling a couple of eBooks that I had, and they’ll say well, but then I got brave and said I’m going to turn on the screen recorder. I’m going to look at your website and for five minutes I’m going to just tell you what I think about your website, how you can improve your SEO, your conversion, your usability well. And that gig did okay; I got a couple of orders here and there.

Probably three or four, five months after I had it live, or I wake up in the morning I’m like flooded. My inbox is like flooded with Fiverr orders, I’m like what is going on. In short if I log on to a website and I see my mug on a homepage, I’m like oh my God, what am I going to do?

Steve: The homepage of Fiverr?

Nick: Yeah, the homepage of Fiverr just top 50 or top 100 site in the world, like very high traffic site. And it was a ton of fun and it ended up being okay, hourly maybe 20 to 30 bucks an hour with up sales and extras and everything. That went on, plus you meet some cool people on the platform just because it’s such a high traffic site, like I met coaching clients, I met mastermind members, I met bestselling authors. It’s kind of weird who’s on there on Fiverr, but it’s a really cool, I look at it as kind of a fun platform to play around with. I definitely wouldn’t go there if you are trying to purely make dollars, and there’s a million people out there trying to teach like Fiverr arbitrage, and do all this nonsense.

I’m not really doing any of that, but one way to think about is if you do have a larger service that you want to sell or similar — even a digital product, perfect for digital products, they have a larger service. Think of like what’s a bright sized like gateway drug that can get people into your service. Some people are doing — graphic designers are out there doing like little Fiverr cons for people’s websites and stuff like super quick, super easy as of entry point.

Steve: Okay, hey, just talking to you for like the last half hour, it seems you get a lot of stuff cooking in the oven. Whereas if I look at myself I can barely keep up with like the 2 or 3 websites that I’m doing, do you ever find yourself overstretched. And what is kind of your view on focusing on one massive money making project versus lots of little ones?

Nick: So I was massively focused on shoe business for a lot of years. And that was probably good at the time, but also there’s some risk in that right? Same thing if you work in a day job, if you are relying on one source of income for your livelihood, that’s an inherently risky position to be in, because Google can shut you down at any moment.
They shut me down two or three times over the course of the ten years I was running the business. Just by saying — and actually they did that one my first day of self employment, like I gave my notice, returning keys for my company car, and somebody said, hey your reviewer site is poor quality like this doesn’t meet our guidelines. You don’t have any problems for two prior years of account history not to mention the thousands of happy customers, like who are you to judge Google, but…

Steve: So they shut down your Adwords account or what happened?

Nick: Yeah, they shut down Adwords and so overnight 80% of traffic revenue was gone.

Steve: Oh my goodness!

Nick: And it was a battle, it was a struggle to kind of get that back going. And eventually they said oh, looks like we made an error, like 2000 is really expensive error, but thank you, for turning me back on. So that’s where kind of the desire for this diversification comes from. Well, I’m totally with you and if I try and focus on one thing at a time, but I have got to have, I don’t know, I have a little bit of ADD too, it’s like I’ve got to have several things going on, so I’m not going get bored. And so I try and preach diversity a little bit or diversification.

Steve: So I know a lot of the listeners, at least a small sub set of them are just trying to make money in any way they can, whether that be in ecommerce or side hustles and that sort of thing. So for someone who is just trying to make money as soon as they can, and you got a lot of experience in doing a whole bunch of different things, what would you say is probably the best way to start?

Nick: Start out by selling a service, you don’t have to worry about building a website, or having a product, or having an audience, or doing any of the stuff. Like you just need some skills that you have, some service you can offer and customers know what they want. I think Bryan Harris puts this really-really well, and say, hey look this is the fastest, absolute fastest way to get started. And he goes into detail in episode 87 of the side hustle show, on how exactly to get that done, reaching out to this target list of customers and offering something valuable to them for free in advance just to start the conversation, and go from there.

Steve: So let’s talk about that a little bit, so I’m just — in your opinion let’s say you have the skill, what is your next step?

Nick: So in my case I have been doing some nonfiction book editing, specific like business book editing. So if I wanted to grow this and kind of add capacity, but if I want to grow this what I would do is look on Kindle, look on Amazon for some business books. And I found one the other day that was like just atrociously written and formatted, because it was actually repurposed from like Udemy content, it was very clear like, oh I just hired a transcriptionist to like transcribe my video with no — didn’t care about sentences ending in periods, they didn’t care about spelling, it was just like horrible.

I said man this is your — you are signing your name to this, this is your brand. And so what I can do is take screen caps of that book, read, pin it up, and like look these are all of the errors I found just in the first chapter. Like let me clean this up for you and especially mister Udemy instructor you’ve got ten different courses, I know you are going to repurpose all of these over to Kindle. So that would be a perfect client team to land in the early stages.

Steve: So you would reach out and you would contact an Amazon author directly?

Nick: Yeah, so I would reach out to the author, I would just figure out their email address or website or what I know, probably first name at website name.com usually. You can try to look it up on reporters see if you could find somebody that way and say hey, mister author, I was checking out your book, thank you so much for publishing it, great content. However there’s — I don’t know if you had this proofread or not, because clearly you didn’t. I noticed a ton of errors, here is just what I found in the first chapter, my editing rates are blah, blah, blah. I don’t know you just want to start that conversation and see if there’s something that would be interesting.
And you could even go the — you could kind of instill some fear like, hey this is going to hurt you in the reviews which is going to hurt your sales, it’s going to hurt your credibility, like you are leaving money on the table by not investing in editing, whatever.

Steve: Okay, have you tried this tactic before in the past?

Nick: I have done it, I haven’t done it on this particular author that I have one. And in that capacity with all these other stuff, but that’s how I would go about it.

Steve: Okay, and then — so you have this first client and let’s say you do a good work, what’s the next step after that? Obviously you can’t go and keep scrounging for clients this way, right? In the long run it’s not scalable is what I should say.

Nick: What is and it isn’t; you don’t need that many, like if your goal is to make a thousand bucks a month, your goal is to replace your day job income, like you can absolutely get there this way up to your hourly capacity. And then it’s a matter of raising your rates and things start to snowball from word of mouth from that point.

Steve: Okay, and so it sounds like you’ve got a bunch of gigs where it requires your time, and then you also have a bunch of different passive sources. What is kind of your philosophy in balancing those two?

Nick: What’s kind of funny because somebody asked me this the other day and what percentage of your income is passive? And I was like well, I don’t know, let me add it up, and so it was probably 70% or 75%, but at the same time, almost all of my time is — a decent percentage of my time is dedicated to building those passive assets. So it’s like does that really count as passive? Because it’s like every time you write — it takes a month to write a book and then, but after that like that can be a passive income asset, so it’s like, is that—does that count as passive or not.

So there is two sides of it, I think there’s the speculative investment in putting that time to create that course, to create that book, to build this authority blog or whatever you want to do, that may never pay off. Or if you really want to bring the cash or just in a hurry I go the freelancing route of selling some service.

Steve: Okay, then and that example that you just gave regarding the editing. How would you conceivably turn that into something that was a little bit more passive in the long run?

Nick: So what you would do, I mean the productization opportunity would be to hire editors underneath you, would be to build a software like Grammarly or something like that, I think like machine learning somehow automate that. You could throw on some insularly services like oh, we are going to format this for — CreateSpace. We are going to help you with your launch — we are going to recommend cover designers and collect fees on referrals or something like that. So a bunch of different ways you can do add on services.

Steve: Okay, cool and then what — I meant to ask you this, what is like the kind your Side Hustle Nation podcast come and do all of this? Does it generate income directly, and how do you kind of track the effects of having a podcast on your overall business?

Nick: Podcast has been the number one growth driver; it’s absolutely the highlight — absolutely the highlight of my week. It grows – it’s probably grown twice as fast as blog leadership just in terms of downloads and reach. There may be a common theme to all the stuff we talked about, whether that’s leveraging these existing platforms, leveraging Amazon, leveraging Udemy, leveraging Fiverr, and iTunes is one of those platforms. When I started my podcast I had email list of 11. There was no audience and it just — and being happy with every small milestone along the way. But it’s grown like crazy and it’s just been — the feedback that I get makes it totally worthwhile.

What I have been doing too — and this is kind of the secret source for podcasting is content marketing because I realize I’m never going to have Johnny doing this. Download numbers, sponsorship numbers, and on top of that it’s a weekly show rather than a daily show, the numbers are just are never going to look like here is the sponsors. And so there was a light ball moment, they said look this is just content marketing for Side Hustle Nation, for services, for affiliate stuff, whatever.

That’s going to be– like the goal of the podcast should be to get people on the email list. And so I started creating these episodes specific often and offer a free show, which takes, admittedly takes more time, but you almost have to do it like the results are just night and day and these things convert like crazy, and so I plug it at the beginning and end of every show.

You could do this, you can put together an action guide, you can put together like the checklist, you can put together the transcript to give away. What I do is like the extended show notes, I call like the highlight real. This is like the sports center version of the podcast and you can grab it at sidehustlenation.com/whatever. Plug that the intro, outro, and these do really-really well.

Steve: I see, so it’s like a content specific bonus except for a podcast as opposed to a Blog post?

Nick: Content upgrades.

Steve: Okay and then what do you do with these subscribers once you have them, like they are all signing up for different reasons, right? How do you market to these people on your list?

Nick: So one core thing, so I do create a separate sign up form for each week. And so you do get some tagging, this is where it was little weak. You do get some tagging on what they were interested in. Okay, they opted in an episode about Amazon FBA, that’s great intelligence to have. Unfortunately people can opt-in for as many of these as they want and it’s just like file delivery mechanism after the first one.

And so you don’t have any data on what else they signed up for, but you do get the first one which is valuable. So you can segment if you have a special offer, special something, hey this could be interesting specifically to the Amazon FBA people, specifically to the Kindle publishing people, like that’s great to have. So you can segment to those people who have a little more relevant email.

Steve: I’m just curious for a lot of your affiliate stuff, is it primarily driven through email or through your post on your blog?

Nick: There’s– so like the Bluehost stuff is primarily driven in other kind of like web services stuff. It’s primarily driven through the blog. Anything that’s side hustle specific, or like people’s courses and stuff does much better through email.

Steve: Okay, cool Nick, hey, it was great chatting with you today, we’ve already been chatting for quite a while. If anyone is interested in Side Hustle Nation and any of the other different income sources that you talked about today, where can people find you for questions?

Nick: You bet, nick@sidehustlenation.com if you want to send me an email, or would love to have you stop by the side hustle show. Check it out new side hustle, new part time business ideas every week.

Steve: Awesome, hey Nick thanks a lot for coming to the show man.

Nick: You bet.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. I really like Nick’s initiative and how he has managed to create such different and diverse income streams for himself in order to support his family. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode80, and I just want to remind everyone that I’m now offering free ecommerce classes now on a regular basis.

So if you are interested in learning more about selling online, please sign up at mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. And if you enjoy listening to this episode, please go to iTunes, do a search for My Wife quit Her Job and leave me a review, because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keeps this podcast up in the ranks, so other people can find this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice.
It’s also the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or share it on the web. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up right on the front page, thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

079: How To Take Your Talent And Turn It Into A 6 Figure Business With Grant Baldwin

How To Turn Your Talents Into A Scalable 6 Figure Business With Grant Baldwin

Grant Baldwin is someone who I’ve known for a while but we didn’t actually meet face to face until recently at NMX. In fact, I was featured on his podcast “How’d You Get Into That” several months ago where he interviews unique business owners.

Not only does he run a popular podcast but he’s also a professional motivational speaker for students. And the man is very prolific. I think last year he spoke at 60 events throughout the year travelling all across the country.

So here’s what’s cool about Grant. Giving incredible speeches all across the country is lucrative but it is not scalable because you have to physically be there.

And after having kids, Grant realized that he wanted to scale back the travelling to spend more time with family.

So he sat down and figured out a way to turn his talents and passion into a more scalable business and he’s had a lot of success in a short period of time.

How do you turn motivational speaking into an online business?

Enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Grant turned motivational speaking into a thriving online business
  • How does GrantBaldwin.com generate money
  • What does it take to create a digital product
  • How to structure a webinar for maximum exposure and conversions
  • How to get traffic to a webinar
  • Tools to use to run an efficient webinar
  • What Grant’s actual numbers are for his course sales
  • How to land professional speaking gigs

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners, to teach us what strategies are working, and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses. Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes.

And please join me for a free live workshop on e-commerce which I give on a regular basis. For more information about the workshop, go to mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. And if you want to get a jump on starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up right on the front page, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love, here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. In this episode I’m going to be talking to Grant Baldwin. Now Grant is someone who I have known for quite a while, but we didn’t actually meet face to face until recently at NMX. In fact I was actually featured on his podcast, ‘How did you get into that,’ several months ago, where he interviews unique business owners. And not only does he run a popular podcast, but he is also a professional motivational speaker for students. And the man is actually very prolific, I think last year he spoke at over 60 events throughout the year travelling all over the country.

But here is what’s cool about Grant, now giving incredible speeches all across the country is lucrative, but it’s not scalable because you have to physically be there. And after having kids Grant realized that he wants to scale back to travelling to spend more time with his family, so he sat down and he figured out a way to turn his talents and passion into a much more scalable business, and he’s had a lot of success in a very short period of time. So how do you turn motivational speaking into an online business, now let’s find out, and with that welcome to the show Grant, how are you doing today man?

Grant: I’m doing awesome dude, that’s a good intro, I like that that was nice. I’m just going to steal that and take it with me everywhere I go.

Steve: I’ll send you the slides afterwards.

Grant: Please do.

Steve: And so give us a quick background story, tell us about your business, your speaking business at first, and then how you got started with everything.

Grant: Yeah, I have been a speaker, a full time speaker, for about eight years or so and travel like you said all over the — primarily the US, speaking in a lot of different conferences, conventions, a lot of what I did early on was with students, still do out with students, high school, college students. Today we also do a lot with entrepreneurs and small business owners. And so yeah, a lot of it — a lot of what of what we talk about is kind of along the lines of motivation, we also talk a lot about careers and work in general.

So it’s been a really cool gig, and even cool like you eluded to there. It’s fun, but it’s not very scalable. So it’s a very — I had a friend say one time, it’s a very high paying manual labor job, meaning when you go get on stage and you get to run your mouth for few minutes, they are going to give you a good check for it, but you have to actually go there.

So we’ve been in this process of trying to figure out, how do we cut back on travel. Because travel and speaking it’s so a lot of fun, but again it doesn’t scale and you kind of hit that ceiling, how much you can charge, the number of events that you might want to do, as well as like you said, I’m a husband, I’m a father, I have got three little girls. And so as much as I enjoy speaking, it’s way more important to me to be a good husband, to be a good father. So trying to just figure out different ways that we cut back, and we got an online course that we’ve been utilizing to help with that, that’s been going pretty well as well. I think will get into it a little bit today.

Steve: You know real quick, I actually didn’t know this about you, but are you doing this full time — the speaking thing is full time right? You obviously wouldn’t have time to hold down a day job in addition to the speaking gigs, right?

Grant: Correct, yeah, we’ve been self employed for I think — self employed for seven years now, eight years full time. So yeah, when it’s good, it’s really good, and when it’s bad, it’s really bad, and that just kind of the highs and lows of entrepreneurship.

Steve: And I’m just curious about this too, did you ever have a day job, like a corporate job at any point?

Grant: Well yes and no, not like a traditional corporate job. I worked as a youth pastor actually for a little bit in my church. So I did that full time and that was kind of — it was kind of like my first like, real I guess career. And once I decided I want to do the speaking thing, I worked at a security company doing sales work for them. And it was just a 100% commission deal, which was nice because it provided a lot of a flexibility to go out and to travel, and to do booking, and speaking engagements. So that’s kind of — I would say the ball — more of my career has been self employed or not, so that’s been pretty fun so far.

Steve: So I’m just trying — so I actually went through your site today, and I was just curious how everything kind of ties together. I know you have a website and you also have a podcast, are all those things kind of tied together, like how does grantbaldwin.com generate income?

Grant: Yeah, good question, so the bulk of my revenue up until this point has been primarily through speaking. And we’ve got some products that go along with that for a lot of the student audiences that we speak to. So we’ve got a book, we have curriculum that’s used in about 400 high schools right now. And so that — between the product and the speaking, that has been the bulk of our revenue, and again that’s fun, but a lot of the product revenue which scales a little better than the speaking, a lot of the product revenue is driven from the speaking. So meaning I go speak, and I can turn around and sell product there as a result of the speaking.

So again that’s all well and good, but it still kind of comes back to this challenge of scale, and you just — you hit the ceiling that there’s only so much you can do there. So a little over a year ago we started a podcast called ‘How did you get into that’, and part of it kind of came from — a lot of people were asking me that question as a speaker.

People would come up to me after an event and say, “Hey, I’m curious, how did you get into that?” And I found that people always fell into one or two groups, either people wanted to become a speaker, and they are like I’m just curious, like what would be the next steps I would need to take. Or people would be like I have zero interest in speaking, that’s just fascinating that you make a living from that.

And so I found myself asking this similar question to other people that I would meet too, just have something like unique, random type of career. It’s like that’s just — I don’t necessarily want to do that, that’s just fascinating that you do that. So if you can make a living doing that thing, then surely I can figure out my thing.

And so we started the podcast, just interviewing people that were just doing something interesting, things that just caught my attention, things that I was like how do you go by getting into something like that. You are a great example, we had you on Episode 89, and we were talking about that like, how do you create a business selling handkerchiefs, like I didn’t even know like that seems like a very small niche thing, how do you go about getting into that.

And so we’ve had over 100 episodes now just talking with people about this. So naturally as a speaker there are a lot of people who would say, hey, one of the things I’m interested in, in terms of a career and how to get into something is, how to become a speaker. And so a couple of months ago we started a course called ‘booked and paid to speak,’ where we are teaching people about that process of going from I have zero engagements, I just know that I want to speak, I have no idea how to get started. And teaching them how to go about and get that going. So that’s been going really well, that’s been a fun project, and it’s definitely an opportunity to help more people, and to scale both impact and income.

Steve: So let’s talk about your class real quick, so how is it structured and when it comes to public speaking I would think that it’s kind of a hands on sort of teaching requirement, right? Like if I’m going to learn about speaking, I’d probably want someone right next to me kind of looking at me and just telling me what I’m doing wrong and that sort of thing. So how do you kind of turn that into a digital course?

Grant: Yeah, a good question, well there’s basically two sides of the coin. You have the art of speaking, which is the actual speaking itself and being on stage and presenting that, and then you have the business side of it. And so I don’t — within the course we talk a little bit about the art of speaking, but the bulk of it is on the business of speaking.

And so that doesn’t require as much of the personal — the one on one interaction. And so that’s a part I personally enjoy, I really like speaking, but I don’t — all the hand movements, and I walked this side of stage to make this point, and then I do this thing, and then I have this voice inflection, and like all that stuff like I just — like I understand it, but I just I don’t gig out on it, that doesn’t do a lot for me.

And to be honest with you and I guess it’s been a bit difficult for me to kind of reverse engineer. Like people ask me like, why are you a good speaker, how do you become a good speaker? Like you just do it a lot, like I don’t know that there’s any like magic seeker recipe of — if you are speaking in this way, and if you talk like this, and you have a deep breath, and then you get really quiet.

Steve: So like lesson number one, just go on and do it a lot, all right.

Grant: Well, honestly like that’s kind of how I felt, like I think am a really good speaker, but how did I become a good speaker? Because I have done it hundreds and hundreds of times in a lot of different situations, so you just kind of figure out what works and what doesn’t. So how I would reverse engineer that, I don’t know that I have a great answer for it. But what I’m interested in and what I do feel like I have a good grasp on is how you actually get bookings, because whenever I got started as a speaker, I didn’t have a podcast, I didn’t have a blog, I didn’t have a platform, I didn’t have any social media, nobody knew who I was, yet for my very first speaking engagement they paid me $1000 to go give a 45 minute talk.

And so that was just mind boggling to me that — here I’m with no platform, no prior experience, but I went out and I found them, found an existing event that had a need with — and I offered a solution for, and so it was a great fit. And so from that we’ve been able to build a very successful business, we’ve been able to teach other people, here is how you would go about – actually let’s assume that you are a decent speaker, let’s assume you know what you — you have some idea of what you want to talk about, now what? Do you just sit back and wait for the phone to ring which is what a lot of people assume like, hey I’ve built my website or I have a video, I have got it up online. If I build it they will come and they are not coming and I don’t know what to do now.

So instead we’ve told people no here is how you actually find events, here is how you find bookings, here is how reach out to them, here is how you find decision makers, here is how much to charge. And all of those type of pieces that when you are just getting started, you just don’t know. And so that’s a lot more of what we focus on within the course.

Steve: How did you know that there was demand for this?

Grant: Well, partly it was just paying attention to the people that are asking me questions. And I think that’s a great thing for anybody and any type of industry is what are the things that people are regularly asking you questions about? So Steve in your case, I assume people are coming up and going like, okay you built this business on handkerchiefs, and I’m interested in — My wife wants to quit her job and come home, and we’re thinking about doing– even if we made like 500 bucks a month, that would be game changing for us. How would we go about starting an online e-commerce store?

And so when you pay attention to what it is that people are regularly asking you for, then you can start to kind of piece together and say, okay clearly people are viewing me as an expert, I may not be the best in the world in this, but obviously I have some basic knowledge from my experience, and now I can start to put that into work. And so that was part of it for us, was you just over years, you just have enough people that are interested in this subject or topic, and you’re like I think there’s something there, I think we can give this a shot.

Steve: So here’s the piece that I’m missing here, so you mainly give speeches to motivate students, right, and so this audience that you’re talking about, are these people that just follow Grantbaldwin.com, or these priority students that you’re speaking to?

Grant: Correct, yeah. And really on a lot of our business was for students, and today we do a descent amount of adult stuff as well where parents, teachers, educators, business owners, entrepreneurs. This year I’ll be keynoting Fincon, speaking at NMX, those types of events that are also in our space and in our niche.

So there’s plenty of people that are wanting to become speakers that want to speak to students, and they recognize that I have a lot of experience in that, but there is also people who are saying, hey I would love to talk to busy mums, I would love to speak to people about fitness, I would love to talk to people about overcoming divorce.

So there’s a lot of different people in a lot of different niches and industries that are part of the course, who just say hey there is this thing I want to talk about. Here is this life experience maybe that I have had. Here is this group that I really resonate with. I just don’t even know how to begin to find them.

And so the– although a lot of my experience this far has been with students and high schools and conferences and colleges, the process for getting booked in and paid to speak is relatively universal. There is going to be a little nuance differences here and there, but for the most part, the way that you go about getting booked for something whether– for me the way I went about getting booked for Fincon is going to be probably the same way I would go by getting booked for let’s say a college.

So there is a lot of overlap there. It‘s not like you have to do it this way in that industry, you have to do a different way in a different industry. Yeah there may again maybe a couple little subtle things there, but for the most part there is a lot of overlap there.

Steve: So you are getting questions from people who you are giving speeches to, so what’s the next step, like how do you know that all the– all your efforts in creating a class, whether it’s actually going to sell or not, did you do preorders, like how did you kind of launch it, once you had the feedback?

Grant: Yes. So we did the– we did a validation process which is what I would highly-highly recommend and basically what that means is you kind of get a rough idea of what this is going to be. And so for me I wrote out on Evernote, I wrote out a long description almost like what the sales page could be, and just like hey this is a rough idea of what this is going to be, here is what I think are some of the modules we’re going to include, here’s an outline.

And so basically what I’ve done is I had started kind of collecting some emails of people who would had expressed interest in this subject or topic, and then this is in January, this couple of months ago, I emailed– I don’t know maybe 100, 150 of these people and just said– just sent them the link to this Evernote like note that I created and just saying like, hey here is this idea I’m playing with, it’s not built, I don’t have anything, I don’t have anything to show you, but here’s what I’m playing with.

And so I’m thinking about building this and it’s probably going to cost a few hundred bucks, but I tell you what, if you are interested in it, I’m going to take some preorders here and determine even this is even worth of building. And so we had, I think it was 22 or 23 people that paid 197 for basically and in reality as bizarre as it seems they’re paying thin air, they are paying for an idea at that point. Because I don’t have anything, there is not– I have nothing to give them.

But by doing that, now I have some revenue, now I have some– I have people that are interested, people that are bought in, because you’re going to have plenty of people that are like yeah, I’d love that, that’s a great idea, you should totally make that, but people will validate it by actually paying for something. So by having 20, 25 people that would pay for something, now not only has it validated it for me, but also I get their feedback as I create the product.

So what I would do is I would give them an outline and say hey here’s the lessons, here’s kind of what we’re going to be covering, what are the gaps? What are the things that you see that you wish I would be talking about or what are particular lessons that you are really looking forward to or you really hope I go deep, or you really want me to answer these questions.

And so I’m able to get this feedback and I’m creating not what I just think that people want, but I’m also creating something that people actually want in getting their feedback. And so there’s that kind of balance there, because when you are getting started on something like speaking or building an e-commerce site, like you don’t know what you don’t know. But there is also some pieces that like they are really interesting, man I really– this is this something I’ve been wondering a lot about, and so I hope that he covers this within the course.

And so it’s good to get that feedback from actual customers and clients and students that are in the– that are planning on going through the material. So it took me about 60 days or so to create the entire course, and the whole thing is digital, it’s all online, it’s eight modules, 26 video lessons, each lesson is anywhere from 10 to 30 minute or so. And they can– I would say it’s– there are some courses that are built where you have to go through module one in order to get module two, through two to get to three, and they all kind of build on each other. And there’s some of that, but in the same way there’s– it’s a bit of an encyclopedia where if you want to start at G, you can go to G and then you can skip to R and do that.

So you can kind of bounce around of what you need some help with as it relates to speaking, and everybody is going to come into the course in a different place as well, there is going to be some people that have spoken 100 times and some people that have spoken zero. So you have to kind of account for that. So whenever we launched the course in March, we knew we had a– we were getting good feedback from the students that were going through it, it seemed like we had a good product.

The challenge then for I think most people was like, okay how do I– I’ve sold to a handful people who reached out, but do I just sit back and wait for those other people to continually ask me questions on email and then I say oh by the way I’ve got this thing, how do I continue to pitch it?

Steve: Yeah, that was my next question actually Grant.

Grant: Yeah, [inaudible] [0:17:29] and so for us one of the things I was interested in was doing webinars and running Facebook ads to webinars, and I know whenever you and I hang out in Vegas we spend a ton of time chatting about this, because it was something I’d seen some people do and I was intrigued by the concept. And again it seemed like there is a lot of people out there interested in this subject topic of speaking, and so that was kind of the path of travel we’re planning on taking.

Steve: Okay. So let’s dig deeper into that. So you mentioned driving Facebook to a webinar, so can we talk about like who you targeted, how much you spent, how did you structure ads, that sort of thing.

Grant: Yap. So I’m pulling up here just numbers, we got a spreadsheet that we keep on all of this stuff. So our very first Webinar was march 3rd, we spent $535 in Facebook ads. So I think it worked out to about 100 bucks that day or so, from that we had 341 people register which worked out to $1.57 per person registering for the webinar.

And that’s a key number to look at there is how much does it cost to actually get someone to register, not just someone to click on the page or the registration page, but someone to actually register. So that’s a key metric that we watch and we look at. So the ads themselves, we– I went through– I think I used Rick Mulready’s Facebook ads course. And so went through that, just to kind of get a basic understanding, because it shouldn’t be as complicated as it seems. And so you have campaigns and ads and ads all of that jazz, and so I just wanted to get like a descent overview of how like how does this work.

So we created like a really basic ad, a picture of me on stage speaking, I don’t even remember what the hell was with that, but literally just kind of like going through existing ads of other people and just kind of following the template that kind of existed there. And so that went to a lead page where people could actually register for the webinar itself. We tried to do– I think we started promoting it basically five days out, because the further out you promote it, the easier it is for people to lose interest and to just forget about it, or things to come up and life to happen.

So we would try to do five days, is usually what we tried to do, and we tried to have some emails in between there, because if someone registers at day five and it doesn’t happen for five days, then there is a lot, again even an app here where they could go– it could happen that people just lose interest on. So on the retargeting itself, I tried to target people that I knew were speakers, there I targeted interests like public speaking, motivational speaking, toast masters, speaker’s bureaus, speaker’s associations, like those type like speaker related subjects and topics.

As well as again you can target Tony Robbins or Zig Ziglar, or people that are big name motivational speakers, or just speakers in general that maybe people would be following. So I think that’s…

Steve: But those people might not necessarily be interested in learning how to book speeches, right?

Grant: Oh, they are 100% like there is plenty of people who are like I just like Tony Robbins, I have zero desire to do that. So that’s where a lot of it on Facebook is it requires a lot of testing and it requires a lot of just playing around. So one thing that I learnt early on was within ad sets and I’ll try to make this as simple as possible, within ad sets a lot of times what people will do with ads is they will just pick like 10 different enters [ph], and look and lump those all together within one ad set, meaning like you can’t really tell which ads or which interest groups are converted.

I can’t tell if Tony Robbins interest is converting better than public speaking interest, versus motivational speaking interest. So what you would do is you create individual ad sets for each of those interests. So now I can look at just Tony Robbins and I can see how much is it costing me per register of people that clicked from that interest? And I can compare that to just motivational speaking or just public speaking, or just [inaudible] [0:21:35] whatever the other things are.

Steve: How big are there audiences typically for the given amount of ad spend that you’ve been spending?

Grant: They are all going to be– the ones that we’re kind of looking at are usually a couple of 100,000 and how good or bad it is, I don’t know.

Steve: So, for a hundred bucks a day, how much of that audience do you reach in five days– you do it for five days, right?

Grant: Yeah, typically five days, I mean we started at around a hundred bucks a day, now we spend anywhere from like three to four thousand per campaign, which is going to be again like kind of three to five day type period.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: And so it’s – and again a lot of it is testing, just trying different options, trying different ads, different titles, different headlines, different copies, all those different variables there.

Steve: So what’s the process? I mean it sounds like there’s so many different variables there, so what is the process that you guys kind of went through to kind of narrow things down? Obviously you can’t be targeting all these variables all at once, right?

Grant: Correct, yeah, the process I went through is I hired a guy.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: Basically to sum that up, because I did it a couple of weeks on my own just to get a feel for it. Just to figure out like okay, I just need like a basic understanding of Facebook ads, and Power Editor and that kind of stuff, and then hired a guy, and I’m happy to give you his name for the show notes and all that jazz, but…

Steve: Okay.

Grant: So I work with him at just a contract basis. He is doing a lot more testing than I could. So where I might target you know people that are interested in Tony Robbins, and that’s my whole interest, he might look at okay, we’re going to specifically target women who are 35 to 55, on mobile phones in Canada who are interested in Tony Robbins.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: It’s like Jeez, okay, I didn’t know you could — you — like that’s crazy granular, but– so he’s doing a lot more of that, and he can get a better feel for it. So I did it the first few weeks on my own just to get an understanding, and then turned it over to him, and…

Steve: How did it work when you were doing it yourself, just curious?

Grant: Honestly, I didn’t really change much, like I basically just used the same ad, and the same interest. And then if an interest like — if like for example on that first week of my average cost per customer per webinar registering, was a $1.57, again that’s kind of an average between all of the different ad sets there. So some may be a little lower, some may be a little higher.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: But the ones that may be really, really high, let’s say that there was some that were like five, six, seven bucks per register, I could just turn those off. And that way I’m spending more on the ones that are converting better. Or I could just, I could put more money towards those, whether I’m turning the other ads on or off anyway.

Steve: So do you find that the conversion rate is the same across all the different interest groups once they opt in for the webinar? Does that make sense? What the question I’m asking is?

Grant: Say that again.

Steve: So is the convert — like once they sign to the webinar, a percentage of them will convert naturally, buy your class, right?

Grant: Right.

Steve: Is that conversion rate similar across all the different audiences that you’re targeting on Facebook?

Grant: Not really. And so, then you need different tracking pixel for that. So it’s one thing to track what they — what interests people have that they clicked on that they would then register, but then you can also put a tracking pixel on the thank you page of the actual checkout card. So that when someone — that way, you can go back in later into Facebook on the back end and see that okay we had – let’s just, you know, for just round numbers here, let’s say it costs two dollars to get these people on a webinar.

And it costs five dollars to get these people, but the five dollar people converted better so in fact it made us more revenue even though it cost us more upfront. And so that’s why it’s important to have some of those have that tracking pixel on the thank you page. And again I’m not smart enough to figure out how to actually do that, but that’s why — but you do need to have that, so you can figure out not only what — just because it’s cheap to get someone on the webinar doesn’t mean that they’re going to actually buy.

Steve: Okay, okay.

Grant: And so that where you have to also play with the targeting a bit.

Steve: Just curious, what’s an example of audience that’s been converting well for you?

Grant: Women have been converting well. Women interest in…

Steve: It’s because you are a ladies’ man, Grant. Sorry go on.

Grant: I don’t know about that, I don’t know, maybe because I have a wife and three daughters, and so that resonates with the women. But in fact that’s an example of where it has typically we’ve found it costs us slightly more to get a middle aged woman on the — to register for the webinar, but they convert better. So even though it may cost me a little more upfront, I can also generate more revenue on the back end from there, so.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: Again, like, there is — I’m with you, there’s a ridiculous amount of little nuance to variables that you have to play with, so you know we’ve played with variables on what day of the week should the webinar be? Should it be an afternoon or an evening one, should you show a replay. How long should you leave the replay up? Should you do a promo? How many days should that promo run? So there’s just a lot of different variables, but one of the things that I really, really like about this webinar model is that every week you’re doing a new webinar. So every week you have a new opportunity to try something.

Steve: Right.

Grant: Whereas let’s just say you’re doing a big quarterly open close launch. And let’s say you know, parts of it work and parts of it didn’t, but you don’t really get to play with any of it, any of those variables you want to test for another let’s say 90 days or so, but with this — with the webinar stuff, if you’re doing it on a regular weekly or bi-weekly process, then every time you do another one — okay let’s try it this way. Okay let’s do it on a Tuesday night, let’s do it on a Thursday afternoon. Okay let’s try ending it on a Sunday, the promo. Let’s try ending the promo on a Friday. Let’s try this fast action bonus, let’s try…

Steve: Can you share some of your results, like I’m sure it’s going to be different for everybody, but when is the best time that you can run a — you run webinars?

Grant: Well, typically we do either a Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday. I try to do them in the middle of the week, and we do either three o’clock or seven o’clock central time. And so part of the thought on that, and part of the reason why we kind of go back and forth is we have a lot of people in Australia, a lot of people in Europe that are interested, but if you’re doing a seven o’clock, let’s say central time webinar, that’s in the middle of the night in Europe, but it’s first thing the next morning in Australia. But if you do let’s say three o’clock in the afternoon, you’re catching the Europe crowd, because it’s at night there, but it’s the middle of the night in Australia.

So you have just – again like just because weird little nuances that you have to think through, and it’s not like we have massive amounts of business that come from Europe or Australia, but those are little things that you have to keep in mind as well as you just have to consider people’s schedules. Like just within the US, you’ve got four different time zones, and those are always going to fall at different times. You know, you’re catching people around lunch time, or dinner time, or their commute time home. Or they are putting their kids to bed, or — like you just got to think through some of those different types of nuances, and that’s where I think it’s good to test. And so we haven’t seen like a dramatic difference between the two.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: And so some ones we go back and forth. So one week we may do a night time one on a Thursday, and then the next week we may do a Tuesday afternoon one. So…

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Grant: It is just kind of playing with them. So one of the next things we want to try is — and I can’t speak a lot to this, but we’ll just be doing more of an automated evergreen thing, so people can join our webinar when it makes sense for them, or when it’s most convenient for them and time zone becomes less and less of a factor at that point, but that’s some more we’re interested in, but I haven’t gotten…

Steve: Does that mean it’s just a recording then at that point?

Grant: Yeah, so it would be a recorded webinar, so it’s — you know there’s huge, huge value in doing it live, and there’s a lot of people that I’ve — you know I’ve kind of explained what we do to, and they said, oh you should totally do a recording. And I was like yeah, but A, I like doing the live one, and I think by doing a product about speaking, it helps to do a live one.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: And then I think there’s huge value in making that connection. You know as silly, and as simple as it may seem, you know answering someone’s questions live, or giving someone a shout out or saying their name on a live webinar is a huge deal to them, you know.

Steve: Right, yeah.

Grant: And so by doing that live, it builds that connection, and it builds that rapport with people that you just don’t get from a recording.

Steve: How many people typically attend and what’s your conversion rate look like typically?

Grant: Yup, so we have typically right now about a 15 to 20% show up rate, which you’ve got to — which is a low show-up rate, but keep in mind this is a — it’s not bad for cold traffic. Because remember when they sign up from Facebook, they have no idea who I am. This isn’t people that are already on my list, they have no idea who I am, so usually around 15% will show up. So if you have 1000 people register, then we’ll have about 150 that will actually show up. Now from that group, we’ve had anywhere from like 6, 7%, up to — we’ve had a few that are like 15 to 17% that will actually then buy.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: And again there’s a lot of variables that go into that, because we’ve had the course out for three months, but we’ve also been — we’ve raised the price numerous, numerous times. And so the– how a $200 product converts is going to be different from how a $1200 product converts. And so that’s — and again the web bonuses you include or what — how — like if the promo is just up for that night, or it’s up for a couple of days, and what day of the week it ends on, so that’s where some of those different variables come into play.

Steve: And in terms of just your return on Ad spend, what is that typically?

Grant: Yeah, right now — I’m just scrolling over here on my spreadsheet. Right now on average for every dollar we spend in Facebook ads, we’re getting anywhere from like $3.50 to $5 back.

Steve: Okay, wow.

Grant: So…

Steve: That’s excellent, okay.

Grant: Yeah, so it’s pretty good, and it’s, you know, it’s going well, so it’s…

Steve: What’s stopping you from just scaling this even higher?

Grant: Yeah, that’s how we’re playing with is you know if this works at 4000 per campaign, would it work at 10,000 per campaign? But one of the big variables there is the — something about the — and again the guy that I’m working with could explain it better than I could, but just the — like if all of a sudden, you throw a ton of money, then it makes your cost per acquisition higher, and so the algorithm within Facebook kind of messes it up.

So you almost have to start small, and kind of incrementally creep your way up, and Facebook adjusts accordingly, but if you throw a ton of money at it all of a sudden, you’re also going to — like let’s say we’re targeting Tony Robbins, okay? And there’s going to be a — and if he has you know, several hundred thousand, or a couple million likes and people that follow him on Facebook, there’s going to be a percentage of those people that are going to — that will be interested in seeing our ad, and then clicking on it and registering and actually showing up for a webinar.

So early on you can — you’re almost kind of like skimming the cream off the top, but then the longer you keep targeting that, and the more you spend that cost per register will grow, because you’ve already cherry picked the people that were really, really interested in it. And now you have to do a bit more…

Steve: I would imagine you have to constantly find new audiences, because you’re going to exhaust the existing ones, right?

Grant: Exactly.

Steve: They’re going to start see — okay.

Grant: Yeah, exactly, and so if you, like if you continue to just market to just– again just going back to just Tony Robbins, and we are just marketing every single week. Because Facebook algorithm from what I understand is set up where it’s going to initially when you first target a group, it’s going to target the people within that group that are most likely to click and most likely to actually register.

And so overtime, those people are– again you’ve kind of cherry picked those people. They’ve been on the webinar, they’ve registered, they bought, or they didn’t buy or whatever, but then you start getting in to more and more people who historically they don’t click on ads and they don’t register for webinars, but that’s who are you targeting at this point. So you are– the few that you do pick up means that you are spending more to get that person. So that’s where we are kind of at, trying to figuring out before we start spending even more, then we want to make sure that that’s dialed in so that we don’t double it, but then our conversion stays the same, but our cost is much higher.

Steve: Okay. And so just to kind of summarize everything that I’ve learnt from you so far, so you typically do a five day campaign on Facebook. And people who even sign up the day before, if the webinar is tomorrow, that’s fine too, right?

Grant: Totally, yap.

Steve: Okay. And then you are getting like a 10 to 15% show up rate. How many people do you typically like to be speaking in front of at a webinar?

Grant: Well when you are doing a live one, some of it depends on the software you are using. We use LeadPage and its all– and then we use Google Hangouts and Chatroll and that all works out together. It’s a cost effective solution, you pay a couple of bucks for Chatroll and a little bit for Leadpages, but Google Hangouts is free, there’s no limit to the number of people that can be there.

But with Chatroll, one of the things that we’ve noticed at least is that the more people that are on the webinar, the more energy there is. There’s more questions, people feel like it’s an event, whereas let’s say we get 100 people to register for a webinar and we only have ten people on it, like if most people would show up to a webinar and you can clearly see that there’s only ten other people there, you kind of feel like, “I guess this isn’t that big a deal.”

So there is kind of that social proof that goes along with a bigger webinar where there’s a ton of questions coming in, and you can tell that there’s people from literally all over the world. It kind of validates your decision to be there. So I’ve noticed that some webinars we do that have smaller numbers of attendants don’t convert as well as some of the other ones where people feel like they are a part of something that is bigger than themselves.

Steve: Okay so what’s the size that you like to have at least?

Grant: We like to have 100 people. It’s great but you know that’s always the number I kind of shoot for, but even if you have– I think even if you have 50 to 100 people, that’s still a good amount on a webinar. That’s enough conversation and chatter. And a lot of that you can read from– you can kind of get a sense from the how active the chat room is. But if you just have ten people there and you ask, “All right, anybody have any question?” You are going to be sitting in silence for a while.

But just the kind of the law of numbers is that if you got 100 people on there, you are going to get a bunch of questions will start coming in. And again it kind of creates that energy and buzz there. I guess some of this maybe different depending on someone’s particular niche or industry, but for me I like to have 50, 75, 100 people on. So I think that– and again I don’t know if I have as much data to back up it back as much as just kind of gut feel.

Steve: No that’s cool. Just curious, so some people you said 85% of people don’t come, do you guys hit them up again since you have their emails?

Grant: Yeah we are trying to figure out that right now. And that’s something we’ve been playing with some different variables on– they opted in, they expressed interest, so what do we do at that point? Do we just– we are doing our webinar next week. Do we invite them to that one, and then the one after that one? And then do we just keep hammering them? And so right now what we are kind of landing on is we are going to create basically like a 30 day email sequence. I don’t know maybe a couple of emails a week. There’s just more consent and maybe like some soft cells around. And then maybe after 30 days maybe invite them back to another one.

And so we are going to kind of play with that, because that is a huge factor of going like let’s say you have a thousand people register for a webinar. Let’s say you spent $3,000, and let’s say you had ten or fifteen people buy. That’s great but you still had 900 plus there who didn’t buy. So they expressed interest in that subject or topic, so you want to continue to reach out to them without stalking them and without bothering them or harassing them.

And you want to continue to add value to what it is that they came for and what they are trying to learn. And I think you do a phenomenal, a phenomenal job at that of someone signs up for your email list– people need to get on your list just to like see your sequence. That’s what I did. It’s because like you’ve got, what is it like 30 different emails that go out?

Steve: I got 30 right now, but I’m missing the webinar component which is why we are talking Grant.

Grant: Yeah, very well. I’m missing the email part then, so we need to notes for sure, but you do a great job of that like continuing to stay top of mind with someone. And so some of it is they are interested in the subject and topic, but the timing is not right, or the money is not there. But if you stay top of mind and you continue to provide content, then when the timing is right, then they will come back and then buy.

I assume for you, that you can probably speak to this better than I could, there’s probably some people that have been on your list for months and months and months, but they finally buy. I don’t know what the tipping point was, but finally they decided to make that decision to jump in.

Steve: I mean sometimes it takes almost a year really. It’s weird.

Grant: And again some of it depends on where the traffic comes from. Again like right now we have two tiers on the course. The top tier is $1,200 which is a huge, huge financial ask for someone who doesn’t know who I am. Now you have to build– so some of it is just like building that connection and building that rapport and building the credibility and building all that up and sometimes you can do that on a webinar. And we convert fairly well for $1,200 product on a webinar from cold traffic.

But there is plenty of people who are like, “This seems legit but I don’t know who this guy is. I just saw a Facebook ad.” So that’s where having like an email sequence and series beyond the webinar, even if somebody was on the webinar, they really liked it, but they didn’t buy, you know being able to continually just say, “Hey, here’s some other stuff that I think will help you, here’s some stuff to check out. Let me continue to usher you some free stuff. I will send you some free stuff. And then I’ll try and ask again later and see if I’ll catch you at a better time.”

Steve: Can we talk a little bit about the actual webinar itself. How do you structure that?

Grant: So I spend about ten minutes at the beginning talking about some house-keeping stuff and then building some credibility. I’m just telling people, “Hey, we are going to go for one hour. We are going to start right up at the top of the hour. And then I’m going to do Q&A after that.” So kind of establish some of that, “Hey, here’s the chat room. Here’s how this works. I want you to be engaged in that, ask me questions, introduce yourselves, say hi to each other.” I give people an overview of “Here’s what we are going to be covering. Here’s what we are going to be learning.”

Those bullet points that we talk about and the introductions should be the same as what they saw on the Leadpage registration page. So that it doesn’t feel like, “I signed up for this one thing thinking I was going to get that, but then the webinar seems to be about something different.” So it’s basically a lot of the same bullet points that are on the registration page. I’m just using that introduction. So I’m just kind of setting it up. I’m just reminding them, “Hey, here’s what we are covering. Here’s what I’m going to give you.”

Another thing that we do is that we give them a reason to stick around. And so right now what we’ve been playing with is, “Stick around to the end, I’m going to give you just a link to download the slides.” So some people will find huge value in that. So they are like, “I’ll just stick around just until I get that damn link.” And we don’t send them that out in an email. We just wait for– we just give that out at the end of the webinar.

So I spend a lot of time in the beginning, building that credibility and the connection. I show a bunch of pictures. Like if it’s a speaker, I can show a bunch of pictures of “Here’s me on stage, here’s me in front of big audiences. Here’s some numbers. Here’s like the equivalent numbers, the number of times I’ve spoken, number of audiences,” that kind of stuff that just builds some of that credibility.

Steve: So you basically give a background of what you’ve done in the past.

Grant: Yeah you have to. You have to do that otherwise people will, “Why should I listen to you?” You have to give them some context of here’s why you should listen to me. And here’s why I’m knowledgeable on this subject or topic. So from there [inaudible] [0:41:15] meat of the webinar. So we’ll spend 30 to 35 minutes on that or so like really, giving very-very actionable practical stuff.

And so the goal should be that if someone doesn’t buy, even if they click off by the time you get to a pitch or transition to an offer there, they still feel like “That was a really good webinar.” Like it shouldn’t feel like a sales pitch the whole time. It shouldn’t be like, “Okay, I have nine steps to becoming successful as a copyrighter. But I’m going to give you two of them and if you want the other seven you got to buy this.” No. I’m not holding anything back. And I feel like I’m really, really giving a lot of good value in content. So the transition piece then is…

Steve: Hold on in your case, what do you teach them, just as an example?

Grant: Yes, I will teach them how to find decision-makers who are booking events. We talk about how to figure out what to talk about, and who you want to talk to. We talk about your website, your demo videos. Some of those like basic marketing tools that you want to have in place. We talk about contacting the decision maker, like what do you need to ask them, how do you build that rapport with them? How do you send them an email without turning them off?

So like stuff like you could take all, so the transition piece then is, I would say, “At this point you have basically two options, you can take everything I’ve shown you and you can go get booked and paid to speak. It’s exactly what I did in my career to get booked and paid to speak. So you could take that, utilize it and it’s going to win for you.” Or– like there’s still much we haven’t even talked about. Like there’s still so much.

So I’ll get a slide that shows, “Here’s like 10 or 12 bullet points. We haven’t talked about this. We haven’t talked about that. We haven’t talked about– like all these other pieces of speaking we haven’t even covered, we just scratched the surface. And it was so valuable, but there’s still a lot that we haven’t talked about. So like in your case Steve, you can talk about just choosing your product.

And you could spend a whole webinar on that, but we haven’t talked about fulfillment. We haven’t talked about listing on Amazon or eBay or customer service issues, or payment processing. All these other things, like you just can’t just cover all of that. And so that’s where a webinar does good at saying, “I want to give you a bunch of information and some really helpful stuff,” but the reality is that there’s only so much that you can talk about in 45 minutes or an hour.

So then at that point you’ll kind of transition into say, “Hey if you want more, we’ve put together a short cut. There’s a solution for you. And this is a course. I’ll kind of walk through the course and explain what else is in it.

I’ll do some screen showing of the actual course itself which I think has been really helpful for people. And sometimes when you are buying a course, you know like the sales page looks good. It all sounds great. I feel like they are talking to me, but I don’t want to feel like I got been switched,” where on the other side of the curtain it’s like “Oh! I bought a lemon.” You it’s like “I don’t want to feel like this.”

So I think it’s helpful to show like, “Okay, well, here’s where you log in, and once you log in here’s exactly what you’re going to see, and you click here to get this, and if you want this module you’re going to go here.” And so all of that we show here’s the private Facebook group and you can see, like there’s actually people in it, and people are talking, and people are asking and answering questions and getting feedback and advice. So just showing that I think just makes it a little simpler for people to feel like, “Okay, so this is an actual thing and other people have done this, and people are in this, and here’s what I’m going to– here’s exactly what I’m going to get.”

So we kind of layer that on top of each other, build that up, show kind of what the value of this would be. Here’s what the total price would be, here’s what our– here’s what some of the different options are of what you can get it for. And then one of the other things we do is we try to offer some type of fast action bonus. Meaning if people don’t buy then they generally won’t buy, because we– like right then they’re interested, they’re hot, they’re ready to make a buying decision, they’re ready to take a step. And so sometimes they just need that little extra push to go over the ledge and to make a leap and to jump and join.

So we’ve tried this a couple of different ways. So we have done times words like, “Okay, we’re going to a fast action bonus, but you have to buy within the next 15 minutes. And then there’s other times where it’s like we’re going to give you until midnight tonight. And so in terms of the fast action bonus itself sometimes we’ve included, “I’m going to give you a bonus interview you know.” I did an interview with another speaker, and so they’re going some of their best tips and strategies, it’s not within the course, but we’re going give that for people who buy within the next X period of time.

We’ve also– we’ve done I’m going to include a 15 minutes one-on-one Skype call with me or I’ll answer any questions that you’ve got. So that’s a big value add. Another thing we’ve done is because the course is digital we give them something physical and say, “Here are three of my favorite books that I recommend for speakers, and we’re going to ship them all to you.” Not a Kindle, they’re not on PDF but an actual– like the books themselves, we’re going to just send to you. So and that’s easy for fellow members…

Steve: Do you avoid coupons?

Grant: We do, we do them on the webinar and then for whatever that like the promo is, meaning so let’s say just hypothetically let’s say we do a webinar on a Wednesday night, then what we might do is say, “Hi, we’re going to do this fast action bonus that expires at midnight tonight. So they’ve got a couple of hours to make that buying decision.” And then we’ll say, “Now we also have this discount code, this promo code and it expires on Friday.”

So Thursday morning we would send out the replay to everybody because again 85% weren’t there. So we send that to everybody and remind them, “Hey, here is this promo code that you can use.” Then maybe on Friday we’d send like a morning one, “Hey, don’t forget we’re closing tonight,” and then Friday night just a reminder one saying, “Hey, don’t forget this promo code is expiring.”

So you want to have a couple like different points there where they cause people to like to take action, so the closing of the cart, some of the fast action bonus, a discount going away. And I know people are like back and forth on discounts and all that jazz, so one of the things that we’ve been really consistent with is to let people know that whatever price we’re offering right now this is the lowest price you will ever see this. Meaning I don’t want to buy something and then, like if I go to Best Buy and I buy something and then a week later I see that it’s marked down 20% I’m going to be ticked.

So we let people know like, “Hey, we’re not doing some Black Friday deal, there’s not going some half off deal. Like this is the lowest price. And the next time you see this it will– if anything it will be higher.” And so letting people know like you’re not– there’s no magic coupon anywhere else. So I have to always keep that in my mind myself of going like, “We cannot discount it any further than what we’ve given to previous people. So that everybody from here on they’re not going to get a better deal than what anybody before has already gotten.”

Steve: Do you send out the replay?

Grant: We do, and again we’ve tried both. We’ve tried sometimes like over the top expressing in emails leading up to the webinar, and then on the registration page itself like ‘This is going to be live only, there will be no replay, you must show up live.’ Because if people know there’s going to be a replay, then like I don’t have any need to show up live, like why would I, you know.

Steve: Okay, yeah.

Grant: And so we’ve tried both, right now we do a replay, but when people ask beforehand we’re just kind of vague about it and just– because again if they know there’s going to be a replay there’s not a lot of incentive for them to show up live. So I want people there live. I think whenever we– I have to look it up here, I think whenever we– when we did it without a replay, I think we had like a maybe a slight increase in show ups. But then you got again that 85% or whatever the percent is that are definitely not going to buy, because they didn’t even get the chance to see the replay.

So now we do the replay, but where we’re kind of leaning right now is just to leave the replay up or just to leave it shorter. If it’s something or it’s like, “Okay the replay is up and you got seven days to watch it.” Seven days is a longtime. So right now depending on the day of the week that we do it and when we want the cart to close, we try to do like three to five days at the most.

Steve: Okay, Ed I know you run payment plans, do you kind of encourage them to pay in full with these promotions or no?

Grant: Either or. Now with the– a couple of things that we’ve tried is saying, “Hey, we’re going to offer some type of bonus, but it’s only if you pay in full.” Like the discount is for people that pay in full, like for example I’ll give you the exact numbers. We– on the top tier it’s regularly, let me think here, 1397 and then on the webinar we discount at $200 to 1197. And then we have a payment plan of 197 for eight months. So if you want to– if you do the pay in full you can get that $200 discount, if you do the monthly plan there’s no discount, there’s no you know we’re going to take a month off, there’s no $200 deal.

So we definitely try to push people towards the pay in full option. But the reality is also the higher the price point the more difficult– like most people don’t have $1200 lying around ready to pull the trigger on something. So the payment plan maybe more realistic for them in their financial situation.

Steve: Okay, so let’s try to just sum everything up now. Let’s say I’m a new person who wants to start doing this webinar stuff and getting people on Facebook, what would you recommend as an initial budget in my goal for just my first webinar?

Grant: Yeah, well, definitely like all this assuming that you got a product that you know exactly who it’s for, that you’re real clear on the solving a pain, solving a need there. So what I did again is I spend 100 bucks a day on that first webinar with the idea of if I can at that point if I’m selling it for I don’t remember like 300/400 bucks. Meaning like if I can sell basically two, I’m at least break even, and so that was kind of the goal was.

I just wanted at least break even and I don’t want to just to cause me massive amounts. And in fact we have done up to this point– let me see here, we’ve done 15 webinars and we’ve only lost money on one of them. And so I think that was just kind an anomaly, just a little fluke there not that there’s anything that we did or didn’t do wrong. I like our odds right now, and I think that this works, and I think that this can work for other people too. So what I would recommend doing is…

Steve: So you use 500 bucks using your strategy right now for ads right?

Grant: Yeah, $500 and again some of it also depends on the price point for your products. So let’s say that it cost you a couple of bucks to get someone on the list. Let’s say it actually– let’s say you got $100 product, but and even though it only cost you a couple of bucks to get someone on the webinar, let’s say the cost for an actual buyer is let’s say $90, that leaves you only 10 bucks of margin there. So at that point you got to kind of decide like, you know, I did this webinar, I spent all this money, and I had 10 buyers, but I netted $100, is that worth it?

And again everybody is going to be different on that. Again I would say that you take 100 bucks a day, try those Facebook ads, try to get a feel for just how it works, how the webinar process works. A lot of people are very-very intimidated by it. As a public speaker it can be weird, but the same time you’re just you’re talking to people, and they signed up because they were interested in what you have to teach them. They’re interested in what you have to show them.

So put that webinar together in a way where you’re– like put yourself in their shoes, when you were just starting what were the things that you would want to know, what would be things that would give them quick wins, and help them feel like, “Okay, this person, this guy, this girl, really knows what they’re talking about.” And again we made a lot of tweaks along the way, but just starting somewhere and say, “Hey, I’m just going to do this webinar and if we have five people, if we have 50 people, let’s do this webinar and then let’s see what happens from there.”

Steve: Cool man, so I had another question. So have you ever had a webinar where just like 10 people showed up?

Grant: We have done, kind of looking through my numbers here, we have had some that have been like slightly lower attended. The one that we had that like nobody bought was way low attended, I‘m kind of going through a percentage, our show up rates here. I’m looking at 11%, 13%, 20% and then it dips to 7%, and then after that it’s 14, 12, 15, 16, 11.

Steve: What did you do differently, was it just the nature of the ad?

Grant: I don’t know yeah. So in fact we’re like the Facebook ads guys talking to some other people on our team we were talking to and we were all just like just kind of scratching my head like, “I don’t know what happened.” So again like I think you can always in anything with statistics you can kind of throw out the bottom, throw out the top, and kind of get a better idea. So out of 16 if we have one that just we have an abnormally low amount of people show up for whatever reason who knows, you know.

Steve: Yeah, yeah throw that out.

Grant: Yeah, let’s go figure.

Steve: Cool, Grant I actually leant a whole lot just talking to you today, and I want to be respectful for your time because I know you got another appointment after this, but thanks for coming on Grant. And if anyone out there has any questions about this or is interested in public speaking where can they find you.

Grant: Yeah, you can catch me over at Grantbaldwin.com, and if you got any questions feel free to email me grant@grantbaldwin.com. And then if you’re interested in the speaking stuff, all of that is going to be at bookedandpaidtospeak.com.

Steve: Awesome thanks a lot Grant, thanks a lot for coming on the show man.

Grant: Steve really enjoyed it buddy, catch you next time.

Steve: All right take care.

I hope you enjoyed that episode. After talking with Grant I got super excited about doing my own live workshops. In fact I’ve decided to do them on a regular basis now. So instead of offering a free one-on-one consult which is something that I did in the past, I‘m now going to offer free ecommerce classes on a regular basis.

So if you’re interested in learning more about selling online, please sign up at Mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode79, and if you enjoyed this episode please and iTunes and leave a review, because when you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks, so other people can use this info and find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best to support the show, and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person to share it on the web. If you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day-mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up right on the front page, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog and www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

078: DIY Pete Sveen – How To Make 6 Figures Teaching People How To Do It Yourself

How To Make 6 Figures Teaching People How To Do It Yourself With Pete Sveen

I first met Pete Sveen at the Ecommerce Fuel Live event in 2014. And then I saw the guy again at NMX where we finally had a chance to chat a little bit more.

Pete runs 2 awesome sites at ThinkEntrepreneurship.com and DIYPete.com. And he also runs a podcast as well.

But the reason I brought Pete on the show today is to talk about DIYPete. DIYPete.com is a site where Pete inspires others to build their own DIY projects. He’s been featured on the Art Of Manliness, Bob Vila’s show, Sirius radio and NBC. He’s attracted top sponsors like Ryobi, Quickcrete and Gorilla Glue.

Here’s what’s inspiring. Pete full on admits that he’s just an average do it yourselfer and not an expert. And what I like about Pete’s story is that he’s taken something that he loves doing and is passionate about and has turned that into a 6 figure income in under 2 years.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Pete turned his passion into a business
  • How Pete makes a living with DIYPete.com
  • How to create a thriving YouTube channel
  • How to monetize a YouTube channel
  • The early keys when trying to build traffic to a website
  • How to solicit sponsors for your blog and YouTube
  • Advice on how to get started with YouTube for beginners.

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m thrilled to have Pete Sveen on the show. Now I first met Pete at the Ecommerce Fuel live event in 2014, and then saw the guy again at NMX where we finally had a chance to chat a little bit more. Now Pete runs two awesome sites, at thinkentreprenuership.com and DIYPete.com, and he also runs a podcast as well. But the reason I brought Pete on the show today, is to talk about DIY Pete. DIY Pete is a site where Pete inspires others to build their own DIY projects, and he’s been featured on the Art of Manliness, Bob [inaudible 00:02:07] show, Sirius radio and NBC.

And he has attracted a lot of top sponsors like Ryobi, QuikGrid, and Gorilla Glue. And here’s what’s cool about Pete. He fully admits that he is just an average do it yourselfer not an expert. And what I like about Pete’s story is that he’s taken something that he loves doing, and he is passionate about, and has turned into a six figure income in just a couple of years, and with that welcome to the show Pete, how are you doing today?

Pete: I’m great, thanks so much for having me on Steve, and quite the intro, I appreciate it.

Steve: Yeah, no I mean it’s amazing; it’s actually kind of rare that someone can take something that they are really passionate about, and actually turn that into a business in a relatively short period of time. Like I know I’m passionate about a lot of different things, but I don’t necessarily think I could turn a business out of those passions. So let’s start with just your quick background story, and how you got started and how your journey kind of led over to DIY Pete, because I know you have a whole bunch of different sites.

Pete: Yeah, well, I grew up in South Dakota, went to school in Nebraska, and then I packed up in [New Hall] [ph] and moved to Montana, because I always wanted to live in the mountains. But I studied entrepreneurship at Nebraska and started my first business in college. Then I started a number of different businesses in Bozeman Montana once I moved there, and got into internet marketing in about 2011. That’s where I launched thinkentrepreneurship.com, which is a resource for entrepreneurs too, and where I share what I have learned along my journey, and try to inspire others.

And then from that more recently in about 2000 — late 2013, early 2014, I started DIYPete.com, because I have always loved to build things, and my dad kind of got me started doing that as a young kid. I remember I sold snow cones to buy my first tool box. And so I started at an early age and with my internet marketing background that I had from think entrepreneurship and learning about affiliate programs, and how to kind of — I guess you could call it make money online.

I took that knowledge and put it into the DIY website, where I think there’s a lot of people who have great-great websites that share how to build things online. But they might not necessarily have that internet marketing background where they know how to monetize it. And so I think it really did help to have that background in the internet marketing to take into this new space that was less, or I guess you could say untouched.

Steve: I know you also saw — have an e-commerce store that sells signs, are you still running that? And kind of you have a whole bunch of these different sites, how do you juggle them all, and how do you decide what to prioritize?

Pete: That’s a great question, and I have primarily focused on DIY Pete because it’s seen the most growth, and it’s something that I enjoy doing the most. Then I share my story of what I have learned on the think entrepreneurship blogs, so that takes probably that second in line. And signsofthemountains.com where I sell skiing trail signs, I have had since 2011 as well. That brings in a steady income, and so I have maintained that. And I do have some help in running each of these different things, in writing articles, helping make signs, and then in filming and all that. So I do have some help, but I focus on what I’m most enjoying.

Steve: Okay, yeah, I know that totally make sense. And I actually did a little bit of research kind of in your niche on the DIY niche. And there’s actually a whole bunch of people doing similar things to what you are doing. So how did you know that you could actually take this passion of yours and actually make money with it? There’s a lot of competition.

Pete: Yeah, the first thing I knew that I could do is I could implement the affiliate marketing because I knew how to do that already. So I started by – well how I started this website was I was basically posting photos of some pictures that I had — pictures of projects I had created on Facebook and sharing with my friends. My friends started asking how did I build that, do you have any plans for this work; can I go to learn to build one of my own? And so that’s kind of when I got the idea of starting this website where I have plans and video– really detailed video tutorials. So then I started doing this website, and the first thing I did was I put products on Amazon. So I have an Amazon Associates account.

And what I do is in all of my posts and my plans; I have links to the tool that I use. So if I’m using a miter saw, maybe I’m using a drill, a lot of people that come to the website have never built something, or they are looking to see what tools they need, and then they can click on that tool, convert. And I do sell a lot of tools through that website, so that’s kind of what I first started doing to monetize the website.

Steve: Okay, and was — what I was trying to get at actually is, was this whole site — was the business aspect of it intentional, or did you kind of just start documenting your projects, and then saw that it started getting traction, and then you decided to monetize it?

Pete: Yeah, I think it was kind of a combination Steve, I knew that — well, in the beginning, I wasn’t making any money really, I mean it takes time. And so I was just doing it, and it was kind of funny, because I’d talk to friends or call and talk to my parents every Sunday, and they’d be like what did you work on this week? And I was like plans, and they are like, why, I mean does it make any money? So it took time to be able to monetize it. And so in the beginning it was kind of I had the intention of eventually wanting to monetize it, but it wasn’t there yet. And it did take some time, but now it’s there.

Steve: Okay, what I really like about your story Pete is that you are like the perfect example of someone who is really passionate about something, and has managed to create an awesome business out of it, because I know a lot of my listeners out there they have these passions and they are just afraid to get started, because a certain space might be too crowded. Like the DIY space there’s a lot of people out there, but you’ve kind of curved out your niche, and you’ve done an extremely good job with your videos and your presence and you’ve made it happen, so which is really cool.

And what I want to kind of go into with the listeners here is, I want to go into just the different ways that you kind of make money with DIY Pete, just to give people an idea. I know you have a ton fans and a great YouTube channel, but where does the revenue come from, can you break it down for us?

Pete: Sure, so like I said there are a variety of ways that is monetized. One is through Amazon, and that’s with the tools that are sold. A big source of the affiliate revenue is from software believe it or not, because I have the site and people see that I’m sharing projects and they might see that I’m doing this for a living. And so they want some advice on maybe how they can sell projects that they’ve created, a lot of these people are artists and craftsmen. And so they want to be able to sell their like work benches or benches for your kitchen tables, all this kind of stuff. So I recommend software to do that, primarily shopping carts like Bigcommerce or Shopify.

Steve: Okay, so this kind of ties into your sign business a little bit, right? Your experience with your sign business?

Pete: It does.

Steve: Okay

Pete: And then I also recommend hosting services like a lot of bloggers do, so that these people can start their own DIY blogs just like myself. And I don’t think of it as competition at all. I’m just there to you know I think the more projects that are out there, and the more people that can inspire others the better. So I think it’s a win-win there. So affiliate marketing is a big one for me at this point.

Another is sponsors. In the last year and a half or so, I’ve – I think it’s primarily come because of my YouTube channel, because people see that– they see my face, they build a connection and they learn who I am and then they see that these videos are helping a lot of people and reaching others. So that has helped in getting sponsors, and like you said I’ve worked with a number of big companies because of it.

And then I’m also doing product reviews, you may have– like I have a product review for Nest which is a thermostat made by Google. I have a product– I furnished my entire home with blinds from a blind company. And people are trying to reach out to bloggers right now, because they see what we are doing, they see our reach, and they see that we can help them convert sales.

Steve: Can we talk about those sponsorships real quick? How did you get them? Did they approach you? Did you approach them? What was the process involved?

Pete: I think over time I’ve kind of– you know you build your rapport. And first I could say, “Hey, I was on Sirius XM radio. And then the next thing I was on the news channel.” So I can keep saying more things that I’ve done to try and impress these people, so I could have them as a sponsor. So I would– I had an email template and I put in all the information on things that I’ve done of my statistics from my website. And then I’d send that out. And I probably send out ten and maybe hear back from one. So I did reach out. And then YouTube has helped in getting companies to actually contact me without having to contact them. So it’s kind of been a combination of the two, I’d say Steve.

Steve: Okay. So when you are reaching out, how do you know how much to charge? How do you know whether your stats are good enough? Like what are some of the metrics involved?

Pete: Yeah. So YouTube has seen the fastest growth from up to 17,000 subscribers, which is a lot for me. So I’ve taken this and I kind of compare against other people that are creating videos as well and seeing how they are doing it, like I’m in a masterminds where I talk with other DIY bloggers. So I’ve kind of been able to see behind the scenes what they charge, what they do. But in the beginning what I did, was, I was just like, “Wow, you know, they are going to send me Nest thermostat for free!”

Steve: I know that’s pretty awesome.

Pete: So I was doing a lot of them for free. And then like, for instance, the paying company that works with www.nfl.com, they reached out and they told me that they would pay me X amount for each video that I created. And so sometimes they’ve set the amount and as long as I felt that I was getting what it was worth out of it to take the time to create the video, then I went with it.

Steve: Okay. So in terms of when you are reaching out then, you kind of don’t talk about the price at all. Does it– is it very widely or? Basically how did you know that you had enough clout in order to get some of these deals?

Pete: Yeah, I think– I guess it was– I think when they started reaching out to me and said, “Hey, we’ll all throw out a dollar figure.” I mean some of these companies per video or per post where you know I’m doing a post, a video and then sharing it with my audience you are making in the four figures generally around $3,000 to $5,000 per project.

And so I guess kind of once I was reached out to a company and they gave me that, then I felt really confident that I could then go on to another big company and say, “Hey, I’ve got X amount from this company, what would you be willing to pay?” Or you know like, “This is what I would like, where could you come in?”

Steve: I see and so that figure– so I know YouTube people who have like a million subscribers and some have 500,000, 250,000, you have a good amount as well. And so does the subscriber count matter, or is it mainly– do they judge the payment based on the quality of your videos primarily? Do you see what I’m asking?

Pete: Yeah. And I think they do look at the subscriber rate a lot. But I was able– I mean when I had 8,000 to 10,000 subscribers, I was being reached out by some of these– you know these companies were contacting me. So I do think it was a lot with the quality of the videos and how I shared that company like in a good light if that makes sense.

Steve: Okay. And how do they– do they track their sales when you do one of these videos somehow?

Pete: Yeah. A lot of them use the Bitly links in the post. So I try and send everybody to my actual post on the www.diypete.com, and then whatever product that I’m– that’s being sponsored on that post is what we’ll try and put some links into so that they’ll click on it. I also do– I just did a project with meanworks.com [ph] where under the YouTube video there’s actually a Bitly link there so that they can get to that specific page, and get over to meanworks. And so they are able to track quite a bit of stuff.

Steve: Okay. And have you talked to some of your people regarding what like the metrics they would like to see and different things that you can do. Are they doing it primarily for branding or for direct sales? I imagine it’s a little bit of both. But I was just kind of wondering how it works and how they expect out of you.

Pete: Yeah. They expect me to share with all of my audience and to get it out to as many people as possible. And then really I think it’s a lot working with just getting people to know the brand. And something that I’ve found that works really well too in going and finding these sponsors, is just showing them my Amazon statistics. For instance, there was a company that I did a video for showing how to a hang a flat screen TV and to hide the wires behind the wall. And I can specifically track that this one post that I think it has 60,000 or so YouTube views right now. But this specific post is doing about $3,000 worth of sales for them each month, just for these things that hide—you know the skit that hides wires behind the wall.
So that’s really interesting, because you know I can take those numbers, and I’m still making an income off of that affiliate revenue only seven or eight percent from Amazon. But at the same time I’m be able to take these statistics and to show them to different companies too.

Steve: You know for your Amazon affiliate links, are they underneath the video, or are they in the post that kind of displays the video?

Pete: I don’t put them under the video. And that’s just because I’m not – you know if I would I would definitely put a disclaimer, but they are all on resources page on my website, and then in all of the downloadable plans on the website as well as in the post. So it will say “tools recommended” and then they just click on that.

Steve: Okay, for that particular project?

Pete: Exactly, yeah.

Steve: Okay, because you said that you have 17,000 subscribers but some of your videos have like over a quarter million viewers. And so clearly they are going viral on YouTube outside of what you have on your email list or whatever.

Pete: Yeah, YouTube, that’s my biggest traffic generator; YouTube and then Pinterest. So that’s why I’m putting my time – I kind of look back on what worked in 2014, why the do-it-yourself website has grown as it has. And it’s primarily due to YouTube because of the reach that it gets. I mean it’s a huge search engine.

And people when they are building things, they may be able to find plans on other peoples website, but a lot of them just need that hand holding or that extra step to see the actual process and to visualize it, so that they can in turn see which board to connect or which other piece of the project or how to do this next weld. So I think that the visual thing has been really big on YouTube and just the visualization of what I’m doing is where it helps so many people.

Steve: You are actually getting me excited to hear a little bit about YouTube, because even with a subscriber-base of 17K you are able to command four-figures sponsorship deals. Your videos are awesome. My wife and I just watched one before this interview, and the quality was top notch. So if you were to start over again and advice some people who are just starting out on YouTube, what sort of tips would you offer on just how to get your YouTube channel off its feet?

Pete: The first thing would just be sign up for your account, and then create content that is helpful for other people and that’s inspiring. You don’t have to have the top notch equipment right off the butt and I certainly didn’t.

Steve: What did you start out with?

Pete: I started out with an old – it was even called a DV recorder, so it was like the old tapes right before they came out with the digital cards or whatever they are called. And then I just had the built in microphone and Apple iMovie, so very, very bootstrapped start up there. And then I now moved on to a nice lovely little microphone so that I have better sound quality and then a nicer camera and lighting.

So I mean, you will definitely progress and learn what works best for you, but I think that having eventually as good a sound quality as possible is really key. And then just having a tripod and taking time to get some fun different shots and not just one view the entire video.

So I guess that’s what I would start up doing and then just making sure you are helping somebody in some way or another. I mean if you are helping one person, that’s making a difference. And that’s kind of what I thought of it as at a beginning, because of creating these videos, it turns out that it helped a few more than one person, which is awesome, and so I’m really happy.

Steve: For your videos, do you actually have help? Because I do notice that you have different camera angles. And are you by yourself when you are doing this, or do you have like a crew?

Pete: I’d say 90% of the time I’m all by myself doing it. Recently I did do a video, YouTube trailer, just where somebody came and did some filming and did more a real professional job. So that’s something that’s been more recent. But yeah, normally it’s just me in there, because I’m working on the projects when most of my friends are working. Sometimes I will hire some help if I need it, but primarily it’s just myself.

Steve: Wow, that’s incredible. So let’s say you’ve created your YouTube video. What are some of the next steps in your process to kind of get the word out outside of just relying on YouTube search?

Pete: The first thing I do once it’s uploaded, is share on Facebook and then on Pinterest. Pinterest, what I would do is – I spend a lot of time creating a good image where it has like five different photos for the actual Pinterest post, and then just has a brief over view of each step. So it’s a real tall image because Pinterest allows you to have as tall of image as you like, and then it just has to be just kind of narrow. So that is something that I put on there, and then I always create a set of plans with the project. And I put that into a program called Gumroad which – I don’t know if you are familiar with it or not?

Steve: Yeah. You can tell the listeners.

Pete: It’s a really cool program and what I’m trying to do is see if people are willing to donate for any of these plans, because I do have a couple for sale, but I was just kind of trying to test the waters. So I uploaded a few of my plans into this program called Gumroad, which allows you to see anything quickly and easily. They take, I think, it’s like a five percent cut and a small transaction fee– totally worth it though.

And so in my first month of putting one plan up just through the donate option, it brought in an extra $500 for one set of plans. And I have about 13 other plans that I’m working on currently that I can get laid up there pretty soon. So that’s kind of been something that’s fun to see, because that’s a lot of extra money when you think about it.

Steve: It is. Does that imply that you create your own designs for your stuff?

Pete: Sometimes I do. One of my most popular projects is a double chair bench plan, and I did create the plans for that. And then all of my concrete projects, I create the plans for those. There are some projects where, like for instance one of the dining tables that I made, that was designed by Ana White who is an amazing blogger up in Alaska.

And I made a few modifications to it, but I don’t create plans for things that I didn’t create. I just – I really love tri-table and I didn’t want to re-invent the wheel, so I created a video to share with others and even I talked with Ana White. So it’s kind of a little partnership deal where I’m helping her by inspiring more people and showing how to build her project with her plans.

Steve: Okay. Sorry I interrupted you Pete. You were talking about how you put stuff on Gumroad. Please continue.

Pete: Oh yeah. You know, I’m excited to continue experimenting with that donations– I didn’t know if people would be willing to donate, but some people will pay a dollar for my plans. And I’ve had up to $25 for a single set of plans from a donation. So that’s just been another way to learn how to monetize the website, that’s just kind of starting for me.

Steve: Just curious, why the donation model instead of just a straight sales model?

Pete: I think because these projects are ones that I created in the past and so – like maybe I created the video four or five months ago. And I had said, for the free plans, head over to www.diypete.com/ so and so. So I already said it was free. So I wasn’t like going to like change that. I think in the future I will be selling some plans.

And then, I’ve also done some things where I’m working on courses right now. And I collaborated with Bob Vila’s website and I have some courses coming out this year on his site. So that’s going to be another thing that’s just going to continue to bring in more traffic, and it’s another way that this site is monetized as well.

Steve: That’s incredible. Bob Vila, how did you get that gig? Was that– did he approach you or did you reach out?

Pete: That was– actually I was on a trip. I got an email from a PR person that worked for them, and she said that they had picked one of my projects to be on their website in a contest. I ended up winning the contest, and then they asked if I wanted to kind of collaborate and do some projects together. So that really worked out for the better.

Steve: That’s awesome.

Pete: Yeah super-fun.

Steve: Yeah because he’s huge. So you have your YouTube video and you have your plans and I imagine you post this on your DIY Pete website, right?

Pete: Yeah, everything goes to the website.

Steve: So are you trying to drive to your– people find you on YouTube and then you point them to your website, or is it the other way around? How does that work?

Pete: I try to get them from YouTube to my website just because– I mean YouTube people are finding me, but then my website is where I can give them more information, and then where they can get the plans; where I can collect email addresses; where I can get affiliate links clicked on; and where I can get them to see more of my projects, and hopefully kind of build the relationship with them. So my website is my home base where I always try to get them to come.

Steve: And you mentioned your email list. What are you sending them, and do you have an auto-responder sequence, and how often do you actually contact your subscribers?

Pete: Yeah, right now I’m emailing for each of my new plans as it comes out. So this ends up being about twice a month or so. And then if I have a new post that I create then I’ll send them an email as well. I’m collecting emails from the plans. So they…

Steve: Oh okay.

Pete: So like they’ll go through all lead pages to get the plans or through Gumroad now, and then I collect that email address. And the plans have really helped that. I mean you know they are free basically unless they donate, but that’s increased the number of subscribers a lot. So in the last– just since I started the donating thing, I’m getting about 75 to 100 new subscribers for that individual plan that I put up, which is awesome.

Steve: Nice. And then what do you do with those subscribers? Is there like a plan for the people that you have? Do you try to sell them other plans? Do you just point them to your content, or do you just keep them up to date of what’s going on?

Pete: Steve I’ve been keeping them up to date and sending them to plans. I need to get better at that. You know, there are so many things that I can improve on. That’s one of them is working with an auto-responder and figuring out how to– you know just the best ways to create my email plan. So that’s something that I’m still learning. And hopefully I can figure that out.

Steve: Okay. I was just curious because it sounds like you have a really good system here. People actually want these plans so they give you an email address for them. Clearly there’s demand for these plans. So it just sounds like a potential gold mine to me; just listening to you actually.

Pete: Yeah. I think it’s taken time, and I’m continuing to figure things out and hopefully it is more of a gold mine, but I’m having fun with it.

Steve: So did you actually start with your YouTube channel or did you start with your blog first?

Pete: I had the blog a little bit beforehand hand, but – wait here. Yeah, I mean it was pretty much the same time. Yeah because one of my first projects was– one was a desk and one was a table. So yeah, pretty much similar timeframe.

Steve: Okay, and then, in terms of– I’m just trying to get your perspective from someone who’s just starting, who wants to do kind of follow in your footsteps. Do you recommend that they put up the website first and then just start putting YouTube videos up, and then drive those people back to their site to collect emails, is that kind of the procedure that you started with?

Pete: Yeah, I mean, the first thing I would do is just set up a basic word press blog, that’s exactly what I did, it was cheap and easy to do myself. My website was all DIY as well; I made it all on my own. And then, yeah, so then you set up your YouTube channel, that’s easy to do and then just start creating content, it doesn’t have to be perfect. If you look back at some of my videos– past videos, that’s the fun thing is you can see improvement along the way. Some of the first videos were probably horrific. And so they continue to hopefully get better, and to reach more people. So just get started and take action that’s what I would do.

Steve: Can we talk a little bit about your Pinterest strategy a little bit, so you mentioned you create a nice long graphic and then you pin it. Are you doing anything else? Are you pinning other people’s content? Are you doing collaborative boards? How are you expanding your Pinterest presence?

Pete: Collaborative, yeah. If you look at my Pinterest account, I’m still– I don’t have that many followers, but I’ve been able to reach a lot of people through doing collaborative boards with other DIYers who have huge followings, one primarily being Ana White. I’m on a couple of her boards, and the traffic is just crazy. One of the pins that just went up a couple of months ago has 43 000 re-pins, and then…

Steve: Holly, okay.

Pete: They just slowly add up and the ones that reach some of those audience– people with bigger audiences just create a snowball effect, so try and get on some more well known bloggers boards, and then just create nice images that look great. And I use a program called Canva which is free, and I definitely recommend it to listeners out there, if you’re looking for any easy way to create images and you are not awesome with Photoshop.

Steve: So, how do you get on these collaborative boards? I know you go to a lot of conferences and it’s outreach, but do you ever do any cold emails to get on these collaborative boards, or is it just all putting yourself out there and networking?

Pete: I think putting yourself out there and networking has been huge for me. There’s a few bloggers that I have reached out to because I haven’t met them in person, and I see that they are doing some amazing things. And so I have reached out to them and– something that has actually helped, when I reach out instead of doing a cold email, I’ll use a video recording software like QuickTime, I think it’s built into my computer, that’s what I use. And then I’ll just do like a 30 seconds to a minute long clip and say, ”Hey, I’m Pete, it’s great to see what you are up to, I would love to connect.”

And so they see a video of me, which definitely stands out, and I’ve also done just video recordings, I mean excuse me, audio recordings where I just record my voice quick, say a message a minute long, and generally I hear back when I do that. It just stands out a little bit.

Steve: Huh, that’s a good tip. So you record a video, put it on YouTube, and then send the link to the YouTube video in an email?

Pete: Yeah, but I– it’s a private– yeah, it’s all private though. It’s a private link.

Steve: Yeah, of course.

Pete: Yeah, and then something…

Steve: That’s a good strategy.

Pete: Yeah, and then something else that’s kind of stood out just a little bit is all of us we get so many questions from people that visit our sites, and so sometimes it’s actually quicker not to type a complete response, but to do a recorded audio response. And it stands out to the person that’s emailed you, so like somebody might ask how did– where do you get five inch screws to build this project? Well, I’ll just do a quick audio recording and the feedback I get there like first off usually they are excited to hear back, and then to get an audio response, really means a lot. So I think just doing little things that stand out go a long way.

Steve: How do you do that quickly, is there a piece of software that you use?

Pete: Yeah, well I use QuickTime a lot of the times, because the audio quality is the best, but some people use and I’m not sure, you probably have something that you use, I think its GIN.

Steve: Yes, Yeah.

Pete: Yeah, that stores it online and then you can just send then a link, so that might be you want to look into as well.

Steve: Yeah, because I mean, I get a lot of emails also and often times I can’t respond with like a full blown response, but this sounds like a happy medium there, because I can often pump out like an audio clip really quick.

Pete: Yeah, definitely give it a whirl; see if it’s a good fit for your audience as well.

Steve: So, are there any other traffic sources that you rely on? I mean you’ve mentioned YouTube and you’ve mentioned Pinterest, has Facebook or Twitter or any of those worked for you?

Pete: Twitter isn’t– Twitter doesn’t work for my industry as well, in my opinion at least it hasn’t for me, and so it’s not something I focus on. There’s just so many done social platforms that I think– you have to kind of narrow your focus. And so what works for my industry since it is visual is Pinterest and then Instagram has been another one. And that’s something I more recently got into, but it’s kind of grown somewhat quickly, so those two platforms have been biggest in my opinion.

Steve: Can we talk about Instagram a little bit, and what you’ve been doing to increase your Instagram account.

Pete: I’ve just been– basically I like and find as many other ‘Do it yourself’ bloggers, so that they kind of see me and then in turn hopefully like me back. And then I try to be consistent about putting up a photo everyday or every other day, and just I think being consistent is one of the biggest things as it is so many other parts of our businesses.

Steve: Okay, and then just gradually followers will just start finding you by just posting consistently?

Pete: Yeah, and I– my following is not huge by any means and I just got on it in the last couple of months, so I’m looking forward to learning from others and seeing what works and what doesn’t, but and then the other thing would be guest posting. That’s been probably one of the bigger things that helps grow the website and getting featured on The Art of Manliness or Make Magazine has definitely brought in a lot of traffic.

Steve: So when you guest post, are these guest videos, or are they hand written posts? Does that make sense?

Pete: Yeah, usually it’s both. So for The Art of Manliness I did it– I showed how to build a whiskey barrel coffee table, and then I did a really detailed post with all the instructions, and then a video tutorial. So they got– they were really happy because it was a lot of content and then it did mention them in the video. And I was happy, more than happy because it just kind of got my website rolling and got me a lot of traffic, and attention. So that was really helpful, guest blog posting.

Steve: That’s cool, and then have you purchased any ads or do you ever drive any pay per click traffic to your side or tried any of those things?

Pete: I don’t too much, I’ve really– the only thing I’ve done is on Facebook, sometimes I’ll do a little sponsored post, just because they– it seems like your post barely get out to anybody anymore on Facebook. So I’ll just do the sponsored thing, but I don’t generally spend money trying to get people to come to my website. I generally would rather get it on another website or on Pinterest, it’s– at least in my industry that would get you quite a bit of traffic I’d say.

Steve: Okay, and I was just curious, how does Think Entrepreneurship kind of all weave into all of this?

Pete: Well, yeah Think Entrepreneurship is resource for entrepreneurs and what I try and do is share my journey along the way and what I have learnt. So, just tips, like something I like to do is right hand written thank you cards when I’m on people’s podcasts, or when somebody gives me– I mean anything like that. And so like I said, the benefits of writing thank you cards, how they’ve helped me in business, and how they can help you.

I say– I talk about like software that helps me, I talk about things I’ve learnt, or conferences I’ve been to, so others out there who are maybe looking to go to conferences have an idea of what would be good to go to as somebody is getting started in blogging. So just a place where I share what I’ve learnt, and with the goal to hopefully inspire a couple of people.

Steve: Okay, the reason why I ask is, often times, at least for me it’s very difficult to work on multiple sites. And so Think Entrepreneurship obviously brings in a little bit of revenue as well, and so I was just kind of curious how you juggle all these things, you do this full time, right?

Pete: I do.

Steve: Okay.

Pete: Yap, [inaudible] [0:39:58].

Steve: Okay.

Pete: Yeah, and the DIY Projects with Pete like I said is the main focus. So I’m putting a lot more attention and working on a daily basis creating videos, creating content for other websites. And then more like once a month or a couple of times a month I’m doing something over at Think Entrepreneurship, so just enough to keep it constant and up there, but not something that’s taking up all of my time. And more recently I do now have help in writing some articles on that website, so that’s been a win-win as well.

Steve: I was just curious what is your posting frequency on DIP Pete, because I imagine these videos take a long time, right?

Pete: Yeah, it really depends on just the project. But I’m trying to put out at least one project a month, and you know if it’s a real– if it involves a video and it’s real detailed, yeah I can’t get out more than a month usually. So if it’s a quicker project then I might be able to get up one every other week. So I’m trying to be more consistent, that’s something I’m always trying to strive to be better at, and so yeah that’s kind of what I’m doing. And then I‘m also always working on other projects like that might not be for my website as well.

Steve: Care to share any of those– these are not business related…?

Pete: Oh, yeah okay.

Steve: Okay.

Pete: No, no they might be projects like for the Bob Vila Website, for Ryobi Company, because I do at least four, but as many projects as I can for them in a year. And then I do projects for just other blogs out there for instance Make Magazine. And so it’s a variety of different websites that these projects are going on, which continues to help kind of bring traffic to the overall website.

Steve: I see, so when you contribute to some of these other brands like Bob Vila and Ryobi, they actually drive traffic back to DIY Pete?

Pete: Yeah, but I always make sure that our link is included and that helps, because a lot of these websites like Humanworks.com I just did a post of them a couple of weeks ago, and that’s a pretty high ranking website that gets a lot of traffic. And so I link back from a website of that stature certainly helps in Google sites.

Steve: Oh yeah for sure. So I’m just curious for some of the listeners out there I’m just kind of curious about the time frames. When did you actually start seeing traffic– not traffic, but traction with the DIY Pete and your YouTube channel? And how many videos had you put out at that point?

Pete: Yes so I would say traction with the YouTube Channel and with the website overall business in about five to six months is kind of when I got some of my first big posts on other websites under my belts. And so I was seeing more– I was seeing over 1000 people a day, which was nice.

And then it’s kind of trickled from there as far as money coming in through Amazon which was my first source of revenue there before I made over a couple of hundred dollars that was probably around six/seven months. And then it’s just kind of kept going up from there. And now Amazon, it ranges between– about 800 to 1800 a month, it just kind of depends on who is buying what.

Steve: Yeah I imagine the holiday season is pretty huge of you too.

Pete: And the holidays are great and then just like the software that I sell, and some of the other affiliate programs started picking up just once I kept continuing to see more traffic. So it’s been fun, and I’ve learned a lot definitely along the journey.

Steve: What about YouTube, do YouTube ads– do you run YouTube ads first of all, and do they actually bring in…?

Pete: I do.

Steve: Okay.

Pete: Well so what I’m seeing for traffic on the YouTube channel is about 140,000 views per month right now, and then it’s at the 17,000 subscribers. And the YouTube channel with that current traffic sees right between $400 a month to well actually about 400-700 right now at that current traffic. And then I also do Google AdSense, and that’s just on the sidebar of my website. And the reason I’m saying this together is because you get paid in one check from Google, so they add the AdSense to the YouTube earnings.

And then so my earnings on AdSense are right actually about the same right now as what I’m making. So I get a check for total around $800-1100 or so from Google right now at the current traffic I’m seeing, if that kind of gives you just a frame of reference.

Steve: That’s cool yeah I know thanks for sharing, thanks of sharing. You know Pete hey, your story is actually really inspiring, just the fact that it gives the listeners some inspiration that they can go out, find sometime they’re passionate about, and just do an incredible job of getting themselves out there, and actually be able to make a living with it. So I really appreciate hearing your story today.

Pete: Cool.

Steve: I don’t want to keep you here too long, but if anyone wants to kind of get in contact with you, or ask you any questions, and maybe get an audio reply, where can they find you?

Pete: Please do. You can stop over to my website DIYPete.com, and I would love to hear from you. My email address is Pete@DIYpete.com, and shoot me a message, let me know what you’re up to, and if you have any DIY questions, or anything else, or just want to chat, and I’ll get back to you, and I’d love to hear about what you’re up to.

Steve: Thanks a lot Pete, thanks of coming on the show.

Pete: Yeah you bet you, thanks so much Steve, have a good one.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. A lot of people actually contact me wanting to know how to make money online on a very low budget, and I always tell these people to simply put themselves out there whether be through writing, through podcasting, or through video. And Pete is the perfect example of someone who did just that, and now he makes a lot of money doing something that he loves.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode78, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. Because when you write me a review, it not only makes me proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can find this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guest. It’s also the best way to support the show.

And please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profits in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, and thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog and www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

077: How To Create Software That Automates Your Social Media Marketing With Laura Roeder And MeetEdgar

How To Completely Automate Your Social Media Marketing With Laura Roeder

Laura Roeder is back on the show to teach us how to completely automate your social media and how to create a SAAS business in the process!

If you don’t remember Laura, she was on the podcast back in episode 9 where she taught us the right way to handle social media. Since then, she’s launched an amazing tool called MeetEdgar.com which is what I now use to manage both my Facebook and Twitter accounts.

Stay tuned to hear how Laura created an incredibly helpful and successful Saas Tool. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Laura saw a need for social media automation
  • The motivation behind MeetEdgar.com
  • The business model behind MeetEdgar and how it makes money
  • Laura’s approach to selling her service
  • How Laura got people to sign up for her service early on
  • The best way to market a SAAS business
  • How Laura reduces churn for MeetEdgar
  • Her onboarding process for new users
  • The right way to create a SAAS based business

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcast where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, today I‘m really happy to have Laura Roeder back on the show, now quick intro in case you don’t remember her, Laura runs LKR social media where she teaches others how to expand their social media presence, and if you don’t remember her I had Laura actually on the podcast way back in Episode 9, and a lot has actually happened since then.

So first off she gave birth to a very cute baby boy, she hasn’t been sleeping for more than three hours a night, she no longer stays out past 8:00 pm ever, but besides that she started a super cool SaaS company called Meet Edgar which is software designed to automate your social media presence. Now incidentally I have been using Meet Edgar for about a year now, and my facebook following has doubled since then, and even though I don’t have a new born like Laura I’m actually getting sleep, with two kids and multiple businesses I have very limited time for social media. And with Meet Edgar I pretty much do nothing, and my social media accounts just continue to go up and to the right.

So the tool truly works and today Laura is going to tell us how she came up with the idea, and then nuts and bolts behind creating your own SaaS business, and with that welcome back to the show Laura, how are you doing today?

Laura: Thank you, I’m doing great, I’m really happy to hear those social media results, you’re actually one of our early users of Edgar.

Steve: Oh yeah, is that’s right. Yeah I remember on your– giving you feedback about it, and I liked kind of how you rolled it out and so I was hoping to get into that a little bit today.

Laura: Absolutely.

Steve: But quick, real quick, give us the quick background story regarding Meet Edgar because I didn’t really give a very thorough intro on what the tool actually does.

Laura: Yeah, so when I was running my social media training business, LKR social media, we were teaching a methodology about creating this giant spreadsheet with different categories in it, and that’s your social media updates and write a bunch of updates in one category, put them in the spreadsheet, then copy and paste them from the spreadsheet to you social media scheduling tool of choice.

So this is the process we were using, this is the process we were teaching, all of our customers were using and whenever you have a giant spreadsheet of social media updates, as you can imagine it gets pretty cumbersome. So what I really wanted in a tool is one, I just wanted a tool that sort of a library of my updates. To this day it bubbles my mind that more tools don’t have this, you send now your social update near your tool, but most of the tools don’t save them, maybe there’s some sort of stats section where you can see the stats, but they don’t have an organized library of all your updates.

So I wanted my library right in the tool and I wanted to repeat my updates automatically, that’s the way we are teaching people how to do it, you go through your spreadsheet, go through everything in your category and once you are done, just go back to the top and start again. So I decided that since it wasn’t out there already, someone had to make it, and that someone would apparently be me basically. So our company built Meet Edgar into 2014, it’s grown amazingly since then and we finally have the social media tool that we wanted to use.

Steve: Yeah, so I remember back in the day before Meet Edgar, I was actually using a couple of other tools that allow you to schedule your tweets and your Facebook posts in advance, and I just could never keep those queues full because it tool my time and energy to do it.

Laura: Yes, I mean we had the same problem, you seal up your queue but it’s going to run out, it’s really unique about Edgar is that it never runs out, because we cycle through your content again and again.on

Steve: Yeah, so real quick for people who don’t know what is actually the business model behind Meet Edgar and how does it generate money?

Laura: So it’s your typical SaaS business, most of our customer are paying $49 a month, that’s kind of our basic small business plan, we don’t have a free plan since we are a business tool, a lot of social media tools kind of toe the line between having consumer usage and having business usage. We’re really focused on the small business, or the monetized blog kind of whatever your business looks like, and that’s how we make our money.

Steve: Yeah, so really quick, I was kind of curious about that because a lot of these guys have freemium plans, so what was kind of your decision making process behind not having that and just charging $50 a month right off the back?

Laura: It’s definitely something that we’ve thought a lot about and gone back and forth on it, and I’m not saying that we would never do it; I think freemium can be a great marketing tool, but the problem with freemium is that you have to support a lot of free users, that’s part of the deal. And we haven’t raised money we’re a bootstrap tool, so if you don’t have millions of dollars in the bank that you can use to support customers that may not ever give me money, it can be really challenging to do freemium,.

So we just really don’t feel like we had the bandwidth to do all the back and stuff and support for free customers and be able to make money, and the other reason was we really wanted to be really clear in positioning like I said as a business tool. A tool like buffer is great for business; it’s also great for just people who are using social media just for fun, just for finding stuff, put on your personal twitter account.

We really wanted to let people know we’re not a good tool to use just for fun, because we are a bit more advanced, you have to fill up your library, you have really think through your contents. It’s kind of a different work flow, than a lot of people use right out of the gate [ph] on social media. So I thought that will definitely make it really clear if we’re charging at least $50 a month, that you really are using this as a tool to market your business.

Steve: Okay, and so you mentioned that you’re a bootstrapped company, how does one actually go about studying Meet Edgar SaaS based business with recurring billing, are you guys using any standard platforms, or is it just kind of coded from scratch?

Laura: No we use a lot of different tools, so for billing we use Stripe for all of our recurring billing.

Steve: But in terms of the side structure itself, like the Meet Edgar website, and then all the back end stuff, is it like standard platform or did you guys hand write a lot of stuff?

Laura: We use both, I’m not like– I’m not a—that is somewhat of a CDO [ph] question.

Steve: Okay, no problem.

Laura: Like I know we use [inaudible] [0:07:27], I don’t know what [inaudible] [0:07:28] sort of is.

Steve: Okay, no that’s okay. Yeah, so and I remember when I first started using your tool, I remember that you kind of had this very deliberate launch sequence. You started out with something very simple kind of bare bones, and then you had people like me kind of test the heck out of it. And so can you just kind of talk about your approach to releasing your SaaS based software and kind of the process that you went through.

Laura: Yeah, so we wanted to, like most SaaS businesses release as early as possible, without being too early, which is always a difficult balance to strike. So we started coding in January of 2014, probably about a month or two after that we put up just a really super basic landing page, basically saying something like Edgar is going to manage your social media, and just letting people know the very basics that it was a social media tool, and letting people put in their email address.

So we started collecting emails of people who are interested. A few months after coding– obviously we started using it ourselves and testing it ourselves as early as possible, and then reached out to a few friends, so you may– I don’t know if you actually started then, but you might have been one of those early friends that I reached out to because you have such a huge backlog of content, which is one of our best used cases for Edgar, people who have spent years generating content like you have.

So we reached out to friends, offered them accounts to play around with it and use, maybe about like 10 people, we did that with. And then we opened it kind of quietly, we didn’t do a huge whiz bang launch, we had an existing list from LKR business, which obviously was a massive help in launching Edgar, and we leveraged that list by kind of trying out different marketing sequences for different segments in the list, trying out different messaging and things like that.

So we did have– I remember we had a Google hang out that we positioned as kind of a launch party that we’ve been in I think July or August of 2014, but by the time we had done that we had already reached out to different segment space, that we were just sending marketing emails saying, hey this is something you might be interested in signing up for.

Steve: So that initial group it was just ten people, I remember I started it back in June 2nd of last year, was I among the first bunch, or how many people do you have in that first squad?

Laura: I think you were kind of like the 2nd probably then sort of the 2nd squad.

Steve: Second squad, okay.

Laura: Yeah, because I remember emailing you, you’re like this looks cool but it’s going to get too much time to set up. I was like no we set it up for you, now don’t worry about that. I had to convince you a little bit, which you know it was very typical actually that’s kind of our biggest challenge in Edgar is it does take more set up on the front end, it actually saves you—I mean your users thousands of hours of time, but it can be difficult to convince people to put in time in the beginning. So yeah I think we had a few people at first, and then I kind of kept reaching out to more friends, getting more people on it and getting more feedback.

Steve: Yeah, it’s funny I remember I asked for a couple of features early on, but of course you were still just trying to get something out there and get feedback, and then since then you’ve added a bunch of stuff. We’ll get into all of that in a little bit, but I wanted to ask actually because I was a little bit curious about starting my own SaaS business at some point, how much upfront investment did it actually take to just get started?

Laura: So we put in a lot of money for advertising, so you won’t have to put in that much money, so it’s really a little misleading to say that we’re bootstrapped. I would say self-funded would be a more accurate way to put it, because we definitely had a period of time where the tool was not paying for itself. We used money from the LKR business to start the Edgar business, so we’ve put, I would– I actually don’t even know the exact number. I would say maybe like about 200,000 or 250,000 into Edgar, but a lot of it is Facebook ads, you could do it for less if you just needed to pay development costs.

Steve: Yeah, I was just talking about just getting the tool out, not necessarily the advertising, like for example you need someone who is a tech, right?

Laura: Right, but you know a lot of people do that with the cofounder relationship, which can be a really great way to do it. So if you’re a marketing person like me, who’s not a developer, finding a technical cofounder is a great way to go. I would say that’s a much great to go by the way than hiring some kind of outsourced stuff [ph] shop, which is how a lot of people do it and is I think most people will tell you almost universally about idea, you need to have people that are more core to your team, building your product.

Steve: So do you recommend marrying your tech cofounder?

Laura: Yes. Well there is no work for free which is awesome, you know you are married and you work together and none has a [inaudible] [0:12:19], you work with your wife; it’s a whole lot of situation you’re at.

Steve: So people who are listening here, Laura started this business with her husband, and her husband is the tech lead on the entire project. And so every now and then she throws in a couple of pizzas in his office and ask for new features.

Laura: Great, exactly.

Steve: So just curious, so when you started out was it just you and Chris or?

Laura: No, because we were able to leverage the team from LKR as well, so he built the initial product by himself, by as far as even like determining the road map, we had feedback from the rest of the team; marketing support from the rest of the team, the team has always run both businesses.

Steve: Yeah, so in the beginning then, what would you say was like a bare bones team that you would need to launch such a product?

Laura: You need a developer and a marketer, and by the way a lot of people skip the marketing side of things. A lot of people are developers and they build a product and they put it out there and they think that if keep adding more features, then they’ll get more users, and not really thinking how people are going to find out about all these features that we are building.

Some people have both skills like Nathan Barry is this really rare brand, he’s like a designer, and a developer and a marketer; he’s just like this amazingly talented human being. If you’re not him which I’m not, I think the two main sides are development and marketing, that doesn’t mean you need a fulltime role for each of those, it can be a project that you are building on the side, for sure but you need to build a good product and you need to let people know about it.

Steve: Yeah, Nathan Barry, he does convert [inaudible] [0:14:03] right, I think he reached out to me in the past. Okay so I didn’t realize that he does everything himself, and it was just pretty much you and your husband in the beginning, and then you had your LKR team handle a lot of the stuff as well.

Laura: Yeah, like customer service, I didn’t have to do that myself because we already had a customer service team, but that was a leg up that I had, and you can defiantly do things like customer service with a two person team.

Steve: So you have the– your husband who’s creating the product and then you have your cell phone marketing and then you have a customer service team, so how did you actually– you mentioned that you leveraged your list to get the word out about the tool, but after you’ve kind of exhausted your list, how else did you reach out to new users?

Laura: So Facebook ads have been huge for us, we also do social media marketing, content marketing, but we’ve gotten a lot of users through Facebook ads and you know that’s another reason that not being freemium has been really valuable for us. We get to collect $49 if not immediately, then sometimes with our different promotions, the two week trial or something like that. Within a month we are collecting $49 for someone, from a customer. So that gives us a really big lee way with how much we can spend per lead on Facebook ads.

Steve: Could we talk about your Facebook ad campaigns for a little bit. And so when you run an ad, do you run them to just one of your sign up pages for a free trial, or how does it work?

Laura: We definitely experimented with different things; we usually are just running people to our Edgar home page. But that is a direct call to action, it depends on the sequence we’re experimenting with, yeah sometimes a free trial, sometimes requesting an invitation, which is the flow that we’ve used a lot really successfully and like requesting invitation, and then you get the invitation for your spot on Edgar in an email a few days later usually. So we’ve experimented with different things.

Steve: Okay, and then have you experimented also with some sort of email sequence or what not, to introduce the tool? Like I was just kind of curious, because I have seen your ads on Facebook, but I didn’t click on them so…

Laura: Yeah, we do follow up marketing via email, calls to action, obviously depending on, are we asking you just to use the tool in the first place, have you signed up for the tool, and we are getting you to activate it to actually use it? Have you already paid us, and do we want to make sure that you are actually getting your content in there, [see you??] or cancel. We’ve built on email sequences for all these different scenarios.

Steve: Okay, but in terms of just getting them to sign up, has the best method been just to drive Facebook people directly to your home page or sign up page?

Laura: Yeah, actually it has, we don’t do, check out this e-course first, or anything like that. The main sort of [inaudible] [00:16:50] we’ve used on ads is just this is a new social media tool for you to check out. It sounds really basic, but a lot of people are interested in social media tools, and there are going to be a good lead, if they are clicking on something that just says, this is a social media tool, take a look. They are obviously very interested in the product.

Steve: Okay, and you don’t have to tell me this, but I’m very curious. How much do you pay per just lead when you are using Facebook ads.

Laura: I know we always keep it under like $10 to $15 a lead.

Steve: Oh, okay, and then how many of those leads eventually sign up for something? What I’m trying to ask is, is it– like how do you determine the profitability of the ad? Do you just take into account like the long term value of that customer, or do you do it based on just getting them to sign up, if that makes sense for you?

Steve: Yeah, so there’s also different ways to look at it, looking it the long term value, SaaS to pull LTV lifetime value. That actually, I think that’s something interesting to talk about, because I think that can be a whole trap– I don’t know, you know what I’m trying to say that a lot of startups fall into. Lifetime value means that it’s going to take a long time to collect that money. So right now, our LTV last time it was around $900, which is great. We cost about 50 bucks a month, but it’s going to take us a long time before a customer gets this $900. And I think a lot of people make the mistake of basing everything like their ads of LTV, and not looking at okay, do we the cash run way to get us to $900.

Because you hear people say, oh, we’re going to make $900 customers, so we can spend $500 for the Facebook ad that gets us a customer. Well, that’s not really true, because you have to pay the 500 now. You get the 900 over a few years, so I like looking at things like one month value, three months value, six month value per lead. And then you are actually comparing money coming in and then time frame where you can afford the money going out.

Laura: So in terms of your Facebook ads, and how do you determine whether the campaign has been a success. Do you compare the three month, the six month, or which time metric do you use?

Laura: I mean we would like to use one month, like I said because we are collecting good amount of money pretty quickly. And it is possible for us on Facebook to break even within a month, so that’s what I look at.

Steve: So what’s really cool about your tool is once you are in and you spent all this time getting your content on there, you are not going to leave. Like you got me pregnant so — I can’t leave. And so I guess that’s one of the advantages of your tool.

Laura: It’s a very sticky tool right, because you load your whole library of social media content and — so we’ve got you there. And also it’s just really genuinely useful once people start using it like you said; it just does your social media for you. So it’s really hard to get rid of that once you have it up and running.

Steve: Yeah, and so — which kind of brings me to kind of my next topic. I was just wondering how your on boarding sequence now, and how that works to get people actually invest the amount of time to actually get started with it. And kind of get them pregnant so to speak.

Laura: Yes, so we found that the more done for you ready to go we can make the tool, the more people will use it. So the challenge with Edgar is that you have to build a small library before you can use the tool. So a lot of people are used to the workflow of doing their social media, one update at a time, think of something to say, send it out. Maybe you are using a tool like Buffer that makes it a little more leverage to sending it out of a time.

With Edgar we really ask you to think differently where you have categories, where your social media updates are at being batched in the categories. So in Edgar, you are going to go through your blog and look through the last 15 posts, and load those updates in Edgar. You are going to come up with 15 inspirational quotes and load them in Edgar.

So it’s a bit of a different mindset for people, and one big change we made that really-really helped us get people using the tool is just simply loading a default schedule. We used to ask you to come up with your schedule yourself of when you are going to send your different categories to different networks. Now we’ve just looked at the data, what are good, just generally performing time slots. And we’ve got that up as a default, the vast majority of our users at least start with that default. And a lot of them just use it forever because it works fine, you don’t really need to make it any more complicated.

So something we are working on now, we have our access input, but it’s pretty buried within the tool. And we are going to make our access input one of the first few steps when you first sign on to the tool. It wasn’t like this when you signed up; we’ve improved a lot, so you probably haven’t seen it. We have kind of step 1, step 2, step 3, and one of the steps will be just copy and paste your blog URL, and then Edgar can automatically go through, pull up all of your blog content into the tool. Now you have priceless content for you ready to go, ready to send out in Edgar.

Steve: That would have saved me a tremendous amount of time.

Laura: Sorry, but now we have it.

Steve: Yeah, great, so what’s funny is I was thinking about this just now. Like the easier you make it for someone to get onboard, do you actually have a tool for them to take their library with them as well? And I was just kind of curious like what are some of the things you do to reduce [inaudible] [00:22:27], because the easier you make it for them to migrate, the easier it is for them to leave as well right?

Laura: Yeah, it can be, I mean it’s a little weird because it’s not like there’s a standard across social tools. We do allow you to import and upload a spreadsheet of your social media updates, but there’s no standard. You are going to have to monkey without spreadsheet, taking it out to another tool. And there’s just little and just to go things like Facebook preview, we can’t do that if you have uploaded it from a CSV. You are going have to — so like unfortunately uploading a book of updates, a good amount of our users do it, but it’s not — the social media platforms don’t allow it to be as seamless as I would like. So that’s actually not the primary way that people get the content into Edgar.

Steve: Okay, and so how — do they just do it manually then right now?

Laura: They do it manually yeah, things like the chrome browser plug-in makes it much easier. Then you can just like open up a bunch of content, you just kind of hit the button over and over again, get it loaded up in Edgar or things like, if you are doing inspirational quotes, like this is where the batching comes in handy. If you are doing quotes, open up a quotes library, do 25 of them at the same time, just copying and pasting into Edgar. Batching by category makes them much faster to get content into the tool.

Steve: So I haven’t actually gone through and signed up for your tool as a real user so to speak. And so can you kind of just go through, like your typical on boarding sequence to get people into the tool? So let’s say I just sign up right now, what’s the first thing that you have me do?

Laura: Yeah, I’m actually opening the App, so I can tell you exactly how we do it. I wish I had like our actual sequencing.

Steve: And you don’t have to give me specifics, but I’m just trying to get out of you, what are some of the challenges in getting people addicted to the tool? And where are some of the hot spots and how did you point those out and get over those?

Laura: Yeah, so we’ve looked at a lot of data, because matrix is really cool for looking at data of what people are actually doing, within your App. So for us the first thing that we ask people to do is to connect to their social media accounts. Twitter, Facebook, LinkedIn, that stuff has a huge adoption rate, almost everyone who signs up for Edgar, and ever bothers to open the tool at all, connects their social accounts. It’s just so really easy stuff. The next step is getting content in and that’s the hardest step. So something that really helped adoption there is having prefilled categories, I have mentioned categories several times.

We don’t make you come up with your own when you open up the app; we have content from your blog, content from other people’s blogs, words of wisdom, quotes. And so that makes it much easier for people to sort of wrap their heads around. Okay, this is what I do with social media, and I think that’s one of the reasons that Edgar has been so popular. We are very different from other tools because we don’t just send out your social media; we actually help you craft your social strategy, with this category based thinking.

Another category is promotions, a lot of people don’t really seem to strategize okay, how many promotions do I want to send out, as opposed to links to my blog, as opposed to links to other people’s blogs. Edgar helps you do all that automatically, so that really helps people fill in the blanks. And then I mentioned then you go to your schedule page, get everything set up, and we have the default schedule with all your categories already filled in on a time slot to make that super easy for you.

Steve: Okay, yeah, actually all that stuff was actually available when I joined as well. And I remember using your default categories for all of those things as well. So I have actually used a lot of different Saas Apps, and there’s some where I’m too lazy to set up. And I go through like one step and then I forget about it, and then a couple days later lo and behold I get a very specific email, telling me, hey I noticed that you did this step, you didn’t do that’s step, why don’t you just click here and do that step now. Are you guys using — first of all, do you guys do anything similar, and what are the tools that you use to do that?

Laura: Yeah, we use intercom to do that which is really amazing tool, and both does in and out messaging and sends emails. And we are always looking for ways to build out intercom for those specific little nudges that people need.

Steve: Okay and so do you send out those nudges for people that add content as well as connect social media accounts and that sort of thing?

Laura: Exactly, wherever we see in the App that they haven’t done, will send them a reminder.

Steve: Okay, intercom.io, okay, that’s a good one to look up. And in terms of — when I asked on how you actually got the word out about Meet Edgar, you mentioned Facebook Apps. But are you guys doing anything else and why is it just — why is advertising your app just kind of blend to the Facebook platform?

Laura: So what’s really cool about Facebook is that, there are so many amazing targeting options. And the one that we primarily use is targeting based on other pages that a user likes. So we base it on other small business tools. So we obviously do competitors like Hootsuite, Buffer, Sprout Social. We also do tools like MailChimp and Constant Contact, and Aweber that allows you to get really horned in, because you are not really going to like Constant Contact’s page, unless you are using their software, or at least you are potentially using their software, it’s not something that you really like just for fun.

Steve: Right, yeah, exactly yes.

Laura: It’s pretty specific, so it allows us to make sure that the user one is some sort of small business marketing person in that category. And two and that they are interested in paying for tools to market their business. So it’s just a really obvious match. And we also do a good amount of content marketing via blogging and leveraging guest posts, appearing on podcast like this one. All contribute to our marketing, that stuff is a little more slow burn, it kind of adds up over time. I would recommend that any business start blogging from day one, you are not going to bring in a huge amount of traffic immediately, but after a year of blogging, you are going to get your search traffic to a great place.

Another thing we’ve done that’s been really-really effective is asking users to review us on their blog. It creates a lot of really good quality back links, which I think has helped us rank in the search engines. And it’s really genuine; we actually don’t have an affiliate program. So all of anything you read about Edgar online, you know that it’s true, which is something we did very deliberately. I was frustrated as a user looking up reviews for things and only finding affiliate reviews, that didn’t really give me an honest answer. So we are able to link to these reviews and our marketing materials and say you know that this person is telling you exactly what they think of the tool.

Steve: Interesting, so you didn’t actually tell me to write a review, but I ended up writing one anyways last year. Have you been reaching out for those or have just been people just doing them on their own volition?

Laura: It’s both, people write them and we reach out. We tell people; hey we’ll give you a little exposure by linking to this in our emails, and on our social accounts. So that gives them an incentive, but we find that people love talking about tools, like small businesses are very interested in tools that other businesses use. I know I’m, I love hearing about the tools that are running a business behind the scenes. So it seems to be sort of just a natural topic that people like to blog about.

Steve: Yeah totally. And in terms of your blogging efforts have they kind of added value? It’s been a year now, right? – At least since I have been using it – has the blogging kicked in?

Laura: Yeah well I guess now it’s tuning up, just a year now. So we’ve been blogging for Edgar I guess for about six months now. And for us it’s definitely been more of a slow branch channel. I can’t say that we’ve had this huge hit that went viral all over the internet and brought us a ton of leads. But blogging I just think it’s important to give people something to share, to link back to your site.

Steve: Okay, right. And I’m just curious, I’m sure you have a bunch of success stories by now. Have you guys kind of been gathering those together and I don’t know going out and using those in your ads and your other outreach as well, like I’d be happy to do that for you guys too. I was just wondering– you know, just wondering if you’ve been soliciting those?

Laura: Yeah, we get a lot and naturally if you go to www.meetedgar.com/reviews we have a ton of them linked. We actually have way too many and they are not organized. There’s a lot of improvements we can make on this page. But we have email sequences asking people for feedback and people do send– just keep on sending and a lot of great reviews.

Steve: Do you incentivize them in any way or is it just based on an email and you ask them to do it.

Laura: We don’t. You know, we’ve really avoided doing specific incentives for like go to review or for writing a blog post or something like that. I think it’s just sort of better if it feels like a natural friendly win-win relationship.

Steve: Sure, okay. And in terms of other like, pay per click advertising, like are you using adwords or anything with Pinterest or Instagram, that sort of thing?

Laura: No we are hiring someone now for a fulltime online advertising role. And they will be responsible for expanding into those other networks. We just have the bandwidth on our TM to be honest, but that’s definitely the future for us.

Steve: Okay. And you know for some of those people who like myself actually who are thinking about starting their own SaaS business, like what are some of the tips? Let’s say you are me, how much money should I have? How should I start? What’s the best early way to get the word out and that sort of thing? What would you advice? I know it’s a really broad question.

Laura: So above any of that stuff, the most important thing is just honing in on your MVPA, so that you are launching with a really strong and focused idea. I think that’s what– well most SaaS businesses, I mean, most of them never get off the ground. The vast majority do not even make it to the live stage because they get caught up in development.

The classic thing is just feature-create, adding more and more features, getting more and more disjointed, which in turn makes the marketing more and more complicated. You know trying to convey what this tool does. Or people will launch something that they are really not sure if there’s a need in the market for.

Maybe, I think another common problem with SaaS, there’s a lot of great ideas that no one is going to pay for. You see this with apps a lot. I was at the airport the other day and I thought, “I wish I had an app that told me the best terminal to sit in with like the comfiest chairs at this airport.” I think it’s a great idea for an app. I would never pay for it and I don’t think anyone else would either. But I would like to have it.

And you know a lot of people are like “Oh this is cool. I wish I knew a comfy place to sit at the airport. I’m going to build this app or I’m going to build this SaaS,” without really thinking through or testing, is there a market that will actually pay money for this. So you know before getting the word out, the most important thing having this really drawn down specific idea for the problem that you are solving with your software.

Steve: Let me ask you this. I know you guys released Meet Edgar with a pretty bare bones features set, how did you kind of balance the release of features versus like the-must-have versus the nice-to-have?

Laura: I think that’s the hardest thing. And that’s what my husband Chris really taught me a lot about. You have to release with a lot less than you probably think that you can. In my experience that’s kind of– your expertise is in ecommerce and I would imagine ecommerce is similar where you should launch with a more specific focus for what you are selling and then expand from there. Is that accurate?

Steve: Oh yeah absolutely, because you know, you only have a certain amount of capital in the beginning. And you should just release with a product set that you can comfortably feel– that you feel comfortable with, and then just test the market early on and just kind of make adjustments, because a lot of the things aren’t going to sell, and some things are just going to sell like hot cakes. I guess it’s similar to your SaaS business.

Laura: I think it’s actually a really good analogy where some features are going to sell like hot cakes and some features no one is really interested in.

Steve: So can you give me an example of like a feature that you did not have in the beginning that everyone was asking for versus a feature that you put in where no one was actually interested in all of it.

Laura: Yeah. So I have some great examples of that actually. So one of the big arguments that my husband and I had when we were launching was whether we needed our own in-house analytics? Because I thought this is all about repeating the most successful updates. We have to show people the analytics, and he was just like it’s not our core thing.

Our core thing is a library of repeating social media content. That’s the promise of Edgar. Analytics is not 100% necessary. So we compromised by launching without Bitly integration so that you can check out your stuff on Bitly. And I was so nervous to launch. I always was like so apologetically, “oh god, you know we don’t have in-house analytics. I’m sorry but we are going to build them.”

We do have them now and most of our users never even look at that part of the site. It’s really, really neglected. And that’s– it’s so great that we launched later with that. And we launched with a more bare bones, because we could have spent a year building up this amazing analytics far beyond what any of the other tools have. It turns out that’s not the most important feature to people. And that’s an interesting one because actually a lot of people think that’s important, so they’ll ask you about it, like when I tell people about Edgar, that often comes up. They’ll ask me about the analytics. But when they are actually using it, I think people just don’t really have time to even look.

Steve: You know what’s hilarious about this is that when I first started using the tool, I asked for that RSS import feature and you told me that you were working on analytics at the time. And I was like, “I don’t care about analytics, I just want to get my stuff in the tool.”

Laura: Right, I obviously should have listened to you because yes, the import has been a much more used feature. Also the spreadsheet info, I mentioned most of our users are importing this spreadsheet, but a lot more are than I suspected. I thought we were going to add that and no one was going to use it. But people do use the spreadsheet import because a certain amount of our users have just been organizing their social on spreadsheets on their own anyway. So they kind of already have some sort of spreadsheet they can tweak and then put it on Edgar.

Steve: Yeah and totally and actually you could probably do the Facebook snippets also right, by having a separate field on spreadsheet upload that as well?

Laura: Like the preview?

Steve: Yeah like the preview.

Laura: I think there’s some weird technology thing without actually– I don’t know. I can be wrong about that.

Steve: Okay. That’s just interesting that you said that, because I remember when you told me about analytics, I was saying to myself, “Yeah, I guess” I was like “Bitly is probably good enough for me,” is what I was thinking at the time. Okay, that’s hilarious. That’s really interesting to know. So going forward then, what is your next strategy to kind of expand this, like you are probably well beyond the testing and validation stage. You got a bunch of customers at this point, what’s the grand plan with Meet Edgar.

Laura: So the grand plan is just to keep improving the tool based on that core promise. So with any tool, just like – we are talking about with an ecommerce site – there’s a lot of stuff that you could add. So with the social media tool as some people are interested in a tool that monitors your brand on social media, or a tool that does customer service via social media. We would most likely not add those things to Edgar. Those are other social media tools. You can use a different tool that you got.

We are a really content marketing focused social media tool. So our road map just looks at ways of making Edgar smarter. When should you be sharing different types of content? Which is your most effective content? Which is your least effective content? How can we be a little smarter in how we are sharing content from your blog? That’s a really interesting one to me. You know, you want to share new posts in a different frequency, or if you want to share old posts. So our roadmap is focused around improving your content marketing on social media.

Steve: Okay. Are you guys going to be doing like AB testing of post headlines also?

Laura: Yeah, that’s something that’s possible. It’s not in the roadmap right now, but I think that would be aligned with this core theme of improving the content itself on social.

Steve: Okay, I was just curious because that’s like the first things that popped into my head actually when you were talking.

Laura: Yeah, I knew that was going to come.

Steve: Let’s see, what else did I want to cover here? Because I just think the whole SaaS model is just really cool, because once you have that customer base, the money just continues to flow in on a regular basis. Are you guys planning on doing– so Edgar is going to stand on its own, but at some point, once you have all those nice features in place, are you just going to leave that tool as is and then start something else or—? What I’m trying to ask is are you encapsulating all the futures in Edgar and then creating new tools to fulfill different needs for people, or are you just going to gradually expand the features of Edgar and make it a more encompassing tool? Does that make sense?

Laura: Yeah, neither is the plan, but if we were going to do one, we’ll probably do other [inaudible] [0:40:26]. But I think it’s an interesting question, because I actually think that a big mistake a lot of entrepreneurs make is diversifying too much too soon. We have so much room to grow Edgar. Right now we have about 2,500 customers.

Steve: Wow, nice.

Laura: That’s great. It’s so far from hitting every small business in America that uses social media marketing. We have hundreds of thousands of customers more just in the US that could sign up for Edgar. So I think a lot of tools make the mistake of, maybe they build an enterprise tool to go alongside of it. Maybe they go international. It’s a lot more boring to say, “No, we are just trying to reach every small business,” but that’s our strategy.

Steve: Okay. Well it sounds good then. So Laura, I know we’ve been chatting for a while and if anyone wants to check out Edgar, or reach you if they have any questions, where can they find you?

Laura: Yeah, so Edgar is at www.meeetedgar.com and that’s also our handle on Twitter and on Facebook and my Twitter handle is LKR.

Steve: Awesome. Hey Laura, thanks a lot for coming on the show and thank you for introducing me to Edgar, because for me at least, and I’m like a walking testimonial here, it’s really done wonders for my social media platforms, because I don’t really have time for that stuff. And it’s just– the fact that it’s been able to automate everything has really saved me a lot of time. So thanks a lot for that.

Laura: Awesome. You are welcome.

Steve: All right Laura, take care.

Laura: Thank you.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode with Laura Rhoda. Prior to meetedgar.com managing all of my social media accounts was one big chore that I did not look forward to doing every single week. And Laura has created an awesome tool that I whole heartedly recommend you check out, because it has saved me a bunch of time. And I just to make it very clear that I am not affiliated with this tool at all.

For more information about this episode go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/episode77, and if you enjoyed this episode, please got to iTunes and leave me a review. Because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks, so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now, as an added incentive, I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner, every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

076: How To Make $5000 Per YouTube Video Teaching Men How to Dress Well With Antonio Centeno

How To Make $5000 Per You Tube Video Teaching Men How To Dress Well

Antonio Centeno is someone who I met at the New Media Expo in Las Vegas a few months back and I’m really glad that I did.

Antonio runs the popular site RealMenRealStyle.com which is a site that helps men educate themselves and build a wardrobe that best complements their style.

He also a regular contributor for the awesome blog Art Of Manliness.

Antonio’s blog gets a ton of traffic and he also has a very strong YouTube following of over 250,000 subscribers. Today, he’s going to teach us the secrets to his success. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • Why most people give up when they are about to succeed
  • How Antonio created a large following for his YouTube Channel and blog
  • The method by which Antonio proliferates his content to different channels
  • Antonio’s scalable content strategy
  • How Antonio attracts email subscribers
  • How Antonio makes money with his business
  • Where Antonio gets most of his traffic from
  • How Antonio ranks his articles in the search engines
  • How Antonio is able to attract sponsors willing to pay $5000 per YouTube video
  • How to approach companies to solicit sponsorships

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

This episode was sponsored by Big Commerce. If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick a shout out to this episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store. And Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here is what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce doesn’t really nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

Now there’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba which is new, so you can easily find products to sell online. Now if you are interested in starting your own online store using Bigcommerce is as about as easy as it gets. Everything from design, to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products.

You can literally start your online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle. So you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Antonio Centeno on the show. Antonio is someone who I met at the New Media Expo in Las Vegas a couple of months back, and I’m really glad that I did. Now Antonio runs the popular site realmenrealstyle.com, which is a site that helps men educate themselves and build a wardrobe that best compliments their style. And he’s also a regular contributor to the Art of Manliness. Now Antonio’s blog gets a ton of traffic, and he also has a very strong YouTube following of over 250,000 subscribers.

Now it’s funny when Antonio and I first met and he told me about his website and his YouTube channel, I immediately got self conscious about what was I wearing, which I think was an old red t-shirt and jeans at the time. Anyway not only is Antonio well dressed, but he is a very cool guy, easy to talk to, down to earth, and with that welcome to the show Antonio, how are you doing today man?

Antonio: I’m doing good Steve, and if I were to remember the meeting, you actually were dressed — you weren’t dress super — you weren’t wearing a suit. But you definitely went out wearing a redy t-shirt there anyway. You looked sharp and your hair if I remember correctly was perfect, you had it slicked back, you were looking good. So and you actually had nice shoes if I remember correctly.

Steve: Thank you Antonio, I appreciate that. I generally do not actually do too much about my appearance.

Antonio: And a lot of guys they think that, that isn’t the case, but we don’t walk outside naked do we? Or if you do you often times, in California I know you get arrested.

Steve: You know west Californians, yeah.

Antonio: Yeah, but it’s something that I find it’s a door. It’s a way for me to reach men in particular, although 10% to 15% of my audience is women. But I find it this is a great way for me to show them how this one thing when they make a change, can affect their business, can affect their personal relationships, can affect their confidence, and that’s what I get excited about. Honestly Steve, clothing doesn’t mean that much to me, it’s about helping these individuals become what they know they can be. And I get really excited when I get all these success stories, because it starts with the clothing, but it leads to so much more.

That they go up and they speak to that woman they’ve been almost invisible to, but she noticed his shoes and all over sudden he had the courage to talk to her. And a year later they are married, or a guy that wasn’t doing well at work, wasn’t getting recognized, all over sudden he started dressing the part so he can be a customer facing rep. And next you know he is getting promoted twice, in the period of a year, and all of a sudden he is making three times more money than he ever was. And these guys come back; I mean that’s what I get excited about.

Steve: You know Antonio I must say that you stood out in the crowd right away. Not only because you were wearing a suit, but because you kind of held your way in a certain way that I knew that you were important so to speak. And so when you sat down next to me I was like okay, I got to talk to this guy.

Antonio: Yeah, and I think when I saw you I had — and I had seen you multiple times at the conference. I’m like, that guy looks familiar, and as soon as you — I think you said your website, I’m like boom! I know it, when I knew it, because I had found you on the web. And I remember reading your story years ago when you started off. So it was mutual, and I’m very happy that we are able to connect. So for your audience what can I give them?

Steve: Yes, so the reason I wanted you on the show specifically, was because you have such a strong YouTube presence. But before we kind of get into that, probably some of the readers, listeners out there don’t know who you are. And so I was hoping you could give a quick background story, how you got started and how your journey led to Real men, Real style. Because I understand you used to run an e-commerce store as well, or do you still do that?

Antonio: I have pretty much turned that off. But I’ll take a step back, so I grew up in west Texas, I don’t come from a family of style. I grew up in the trailer park, so I guess you can call it a type of style. But no, I was just a kid who grew up in the trailer park, west Texas, we feared tornados, yadi yadi yada, but I did go out to California during the summers. My parents were separated and divorced, and I learned a lot about, wow, there’s a whole world out there, when we would go out to a thousand notes [inaudible 00:07:00]. Now first forward in a Cornell College in Mount Vernon , Iowa, small River [ph] large school, and we take one course at a time. I didn’t know what I was going to do, but I knew I wasn’t going to go to med school.

I had tried to go to med school and very soon I realized well, I do not like the organic chems. I ran to a Marine Corp recruiter, and that’s when my life, I think went down a very different path than I had planned for it. And all of a sudden, I’m in the United States Marine Corp, I’m in OCS training. I went through and next thing I know I’m finding myself in Iraq, and this is before the war. So we were right in there and I was with 3rd battalion first marines. And we went to — walked through [inaudible 00:07:36] and then over in to Bagdad. So I’m able to leave the Marine Corp as an officer of marines, having learned a lot about leadership. And for the first time, I had my first costume suit, and that was my Marine Corp uniform.

I learned what it’s like to actually wear a suit of honor, and feel like wow, I felt great. We would have the Marine Corp birthday, I would go out on the town, and I would feel like a million bucks. I mean when people would look at you and you wearing your medals, you’re wearing your uniform, you know it makes you just look — I mean, I would never get so much attention from women, is when we wore uniforms. And that’s when I think when it dawned on me, the power of presentation.

Now like many — most things we learn in life, you learn about something and then you forget about it, and you move on. So I went to business school, University of Texas, after living in Ukraine for a while. My wife is Ukrainian and I was running a nonprofit over there, right after the Marine Corp, but over at business school in Texas, I started getting excited about entrepreneurship.

I met a number of people who do amazing things. Guys like what was it’s — founder who is — not Herb Kelleher, I’m think the founder of Southwest Airlines. I can’t remember his name, but the guy came in and just I loved his presentation. Because he walks into a building, it’s non-smoking, he is smoking a cigarette, he didn’t care, he is like, I just gave five million to this school, what are you going to do? I’m like, I like this guy, because everyone else want to go down consulting. Everyone else wants to go down investment banking. They are making it sound like this stuff is exciting and I took that– I don’t know — I couldn’t become an excel jockey and get excited about it. So I’m like, I like this entrepreneurship thing.

And I ended up speaking with a guy; I had some custom suits made by a travelling tailor. He explained to me he is from India, had a fourth grade education, he was making a half a million a year, after 35 years of building up his customer base. And he only works six months out of a year. And I’m like you know what, I have more than a fourth grade education and I think to be back to that Roosevelt quote, about you get a college school education you have a high school education, you’ll steal a rail car, if you have a college education, you should be able to steal a whole rail road.

So the idea is okay, I can do this, and I can do it quicker and so I went in into the custom clothing industry as a mercenary. My whole goal was simply to make money; I saw there was a hole in the market, and I knew a little bit about custom clothing, I just felt that there was opportunity there. And that did me pretty well, but what I learned very quickly it’s a hard industry, it took me about five years to figure out that my business model scaling up wasn’t going to work, especially if I wanted to be able to free myself in the business.

So at about that point I started to pivot, I created my own marketing company called Real Men Real Style, so I wanted to get traffic to my website. And that’s when I realized that marketing side in the men’s sphere was a lot more profitable, scalable, and enjoyable, than what I was doing.

So that’s about the time I turned off tailored suits, it still exists as an information portal, gets about 70,000 people a month to it. But Real Men Real Style, we get about, close to a million visitors a month, about 35,000 a day. Our YouTube channel gets that, sometimes more. And then I got a couple of other men style, Q&A websites, and things like that.

So all in all — I don’t know, I have daily audience of about 80,000 men, 90% men. And I leverage that to sell my information products, to sell my kindle books, to sell my courses, affiliate linking, all the various different ways your audience has probably heard, and I learned through the school of hard knocks, how to make money.

Steve: I was just curious, it sounds like a tailored suit, was that like an ecommerce store, or was that a brick and mortar?

Antonio: It was an ecommerce, so I was the middle man; I had a partner over in Bangkok. When I first started my company in 2007, I traveled the world, I went Boron [ph] in London, Bangkok, Hong Kong, and I had tea with about 200 tailors. And I identified about five or six that I could possibly partner with. I had 20 custom suits made, tore them apart, ended up going finding two people I could partner with, and they were my back end. And I had to create sales. And I created a website where you could enter your measurements, you could enter design the suit, and it would be delivered to your door in a few weeks.

And in 2007, that was a great idea, there was only one of the company in the world, two maybe that were like me. First forward 2013, there’s 200 companies like this. It’s a much harder market, everyone else is taking the investment capital, I’m still growing organically. And honestly I wasn’t going to play that game, when I knew my competitors had money to spend and were rebuilding their sites every two months, and could focus on increasing those conversions and use paper click advertising. And I really was at a point where I didn’t truly understand the value of a customer. So I was not sophisticated enough to play in that field.

Steve: I was just curious though, I mean it sounds pretty scalable too though right, your ecommerce store?

Antonio: No, I would say it’s not, because custom like that, it wasn’t scalable, because I didn’t control the back end.

Steve: Got it.

Antonio: So it’s like if I could have orders coming in, and then I would guarantee them that it’s going to be there in three weeks. And then my partner would — because he is got other partners, he would say, “Hey sorry, a machine broke and it’s going to be six weeks till I can get you anything.” And that’s why, when I had that stuff sort of happen to me, and literally I’m having to refund, apologize for things out of my control, I realized I didn’t want to be in that sphere. I didn’t want to be in that area anymore.

Steve: Okay, and so then you decide to start Real Men Real Style and I know you got a ton of friends, I don’t actually see a whole bunch of ads in your site. So is it mainly just your own info products and affiliate offers?

Antonio: That’s true; I don’t allow ads on my google videos. And that brings me — pull me back anywhere from a couple to a few thousand dollars a month. And that’s nice. But my goal is to sell my own products. One thing I learned years ago, I think it was Ryan Dyce or somebody talked about the importance of owning your own products, because even if you promote a great affiliate system, like for me I’d say he has a great affiliate system. I’m proud to be associated with him, but also only get a percentage of what he sells. When I sell my own products, I get 100% of that, and I like that a lot better.

Steve: Okay, and so in terms of your sales, like how does your YouTube property and your blog kind of tie together. Which would you say generates the most sales, or do they just kind of work together. Like which is your more valuable properties is what I’m trying to ask?

Antonio: Oh, my blog of course, because I don’t own– anyone that thinks they own their social like their Facebook page, or YouTube page, or Twitter account, you don’t. Twitter can shut you down, YouTube– every day I go on there, I know that they can turn off my channel. And I saw it happen, you ever seen that six pack short guy?

Steve: Yeah.

Antonio: A couple years ago, his channel got shut down for a couple days. And now he is a darling of YouTube. They spend I mean it’s like a $30 million a year business of which like half of that is placement on YouTube ads. But yeah, before that…

Steve: Mike Chang that is his name.

Antonio: Yeah, Mike Chang yeah. He got shut down and he just go – it doesn’t matter how big you are, if YouTube doesn’t think you are playing the game, or if their algorithm — somebody says you are violating things, they can shut you down. So my goal is always to get them off of YouTube, get them off of Facebook, get them off of Pinterest, which Pinterest believe it or not, is my number refer of traffic.

But get them off of that and onto my email list, because I own my email list. And I use Infusionsoft, I started off with AWeber, but Infusionsoft is really where I build my email list now and I own that.

Steve: So did you start out with your blog or your YouTube channel first?

Antonio: I started off with the blog first, and then YouTube was how I differentiated the blog from anything outside there. And if you go back to Michael Porter, do you ever study him, I knew you are…

Steve: I did not know.

Antonio: Yeah, so business guy, really he wrote the book on — we talk about like unique selling positions and stuff like that online, or having an edge. He wrote the book Competitive Advantage back in the — it was the early 80s, late 1970s. So go find that book, Harvard business school press, but what he talks about; three ways to differentiate yourself. And one of them is being unique, the other one is offering an amazing service, the other one is price. I knew I did not want to compete on price, so my thing is to offer amazing service and to offer a unique position. And so to stand out from the crowd, I realized that there was only one other guy doing video, and his name was Erin Merino.

And I looked at his videos, and honestly I was like this guy sucks. I could do better than him, What’s funny now, he is one of my best friends, and he is a business partner. And we started the conference together, but at the time I was jealous. And for two years, I wrote and I created content, but I didn’t put up– maybe it was a year and a half, I didn’t put up video, I kept complaining and my wife, she just said shut up or put up. You need to go out there and if you are going to do it, you do it.

So yeah, I started creating videos, I said I was going to create ten, then I created 100, then I created 200 videos in 200 days. And it’s one of those things you got to give the fair shake. And he wanted — I think Gary Vaynerchuk has said you know he had someone complain on Twitter once that, “Hey, I tried a million ways and I can’t make this work.”

And Gary — I was like are you sure — I mean on tweet spot; it was like really, you tried a million ways? He is like, “No, I didn’t try a million.” He is like well, maybe you tried a 100, he said, no I didn’t try 100. Maybe you tried ten, he’s like I only tried it once yet he is complaining he didn’t try—he went and tried it a million ways.
So the point is if you are going to do anything, you need to give it a fair shake. And that’s what I did with YouTube, and it wasn’t until we put those first — I mean it wasn’t until I put 200 videos, I hit my first million views, now we are closing in like on 20 million.

Antonio: Wow, you know Antonio what you are experiencing with these people is not uncommon. I get people who come to me they say, “Hey, ecommerce is not working.” And then when I dig a little bit deeper, I realize that they’ve only doing it for like a couple of months, right? And that’s just not enough time to establish any sort of business.

Antonio: And they see the best out there, they see guys– and Pat Flynn he is a great guy. I have him– good friend of mine, and when they see John Dumas, and they see these numbers, because they put out their finance reports, they think that this is normal or that this is doable within 18 months, or six months. Understand John it made him a partner of a high speed low drive; this is a former army tank officer. This guy has been through a lot, and he works seven days a week. He is the hardest working man I know, and there’s a reason why he is as successful as he is.

Pat Flynn, I know he’s pulled back on the number of hours he works now, but he used to work crazy hours, and he’s dedicated, and if anyone knows better I mean this is the kind of guy that he really is an amazing person. Those results are achievable, but they are not typical and people need to understand that you can get to that point, but it may take you five years. It may take you ten years. It’s making money online is not simple.

Steve: So it’s funny you mentioned that when you started your blog you wanted to differentiate yourself, but you chose to do that on a property that you didn’t not own. And so I was just kind of curious in the very beginning it takes a lot time to do stuff. So how did you kind of juggle writing actual blog post versus doing videos? And which did you prioritize in terms of content in the beginning?

Antonio: So I think it’s J. Bear who talks about this, like how to create one piece of content, and then create eight more pieces from it. So my strategy now is that, so I start everything with bullet points in a video, and then from that articles will be created, show notes, transcripts, podcasts. So I usually — but I already had hundreds of articles that I had written over at the Art of Manliness at a tailored suit in our style guide section.

So I simply created videos that were based off of those articles, because I already knew that content super well. In addition, in my emails, I always ask the second question I ask which I stole from Derek Hopper over at Social Triggers, is to ask people what’s your biggest problem. And people love to tell you their problems, and they love to complain, and guess what, that is perfect information. You can read off word for word in a video and solve that problem and other people are going to love it.

So right there, you will never run out of ideas, if that’s what you use. But as to what is my priority, initially it was the written content. Now it has become the video, and I stay on YouTube even though I don’t own it, because it is the best platform right now for video, for reaching out. Although Facebook video is blowing me away in terms of engagement, but like YouTube I don’t only– and it’s a little bit– Facebook is always about pay to play, so.

Steve: Let’s talk about that a little bit, so you’ve been dabbling with Facebook video, so you just have one piece of core content, you create a blog post out of it, a podcast, and then videos, right? All around the same theme, and then you post it on all these platforms?

Antonio: That’s what I try to do, and I try to scale as much as possible and I’m actually pulling back on the amount of content I’m putting up, because it’s one of those things I don’t have enough platforms to share it all on, and that’s now becoming– I’ve got — the good problem of I got to find out ways, because we’ve got so much great content and how to better distribute it.

Steve: And in terms of just YouTube, was your growth to 250 000 subscribers, was that kind of organic, or did you do anything special to accelerate that process?

Antonio: There is a lot of things that you want to do in a video, so make sure you’ve got a call to action. I find that when I ask people to like, I ask people to subscribe, I don’t have to do it as much anymore, but I– if you don’t do that in a video, you won’t get them to take action. In addition, you want to have certain incentives for them to do so. But again my goal was always to get them over the Real Men Real Style.

I’ve got a nice little opt in page, and I’ve got a free eBook, which that eBook has been downloaded over 200,000 times. And so you think about that we collected almost over 200,000 email addresses, and we’ve got a great free eBook that I really could sell. But it’s something that I just love giving away that great lead that exists sends an immediate sign of good will, and it’s something that is powerful now that other people passed around.

Steve: Okay, and then just in terms of your income sources, your own products is the primary source from what I’m hearing then?

Antonio: That, I also have premium sponsors. So a lot of people– I’ve got a media kit and whenever somebody comes to advertise with me, I’ll put it out there, but I charge $5,000 for a video, and that turns away a lot of people, but the one– here’s the issues. I used to not have that, I used to– okay, I would even take– you could send me a great $500 pair of shoes, and I’ would– okay I’ll try to do a video for you.

The problem there is those $500 shoes, unless I resell them, I can’t use them to pay my rent, I can’t use them to pay my mortgage and my employees don’t take that as payment. And I’ve got about seven people that work, I’ve recently cut back, but I used to have almost a dozen, but those– and I’m sorry those are contracts, because I’ve got them all over the world.

But it was something that I realized, well I need to have more liquid cash because I’m making commitments and people aren’t always valuing. And so I remember– I’ll never forget, once I flipped that switch, yes I had the say no quite a bit more, but all of a sudden I had companies saying sure, not a problem. And all of a sudden you’re getting paid $5,000 for a video, $4,000 for an article, and it allowed me to do a better job. All of a sudden I’m able to hire an artist, I‘m able to hire a content manager, and I’m able to work less, I bring in better.

So it’s one of the—it’s kind of almost like a catch 22 though because you want to be– how much traffic do you need, how– at what point can you do this, but I would recommend at an early point putting together a professional looking media kit, because that way whenever you– I even say yes to somebody, but I don’t charge them. And I do that occasionally with an non-profit or somebody that like stands out for military virtue, or people that have prostate cancer or things like that. I can show them that, hey this is what I normally charge, so they don’t– they realize what they are getting, and that’s– you’ve got to put value on your services, and what you offer, because no one else will.

Steve: So would you say that this YouTube channel and sponsorships have become a significant source of income outside of the products that you sell?

Antonio: Oh yeah, it’s like 20%.

Steve: Okay, and at what point did you– were you able to solicit these offers, and did they come to you? Like what’s your strategy for getting these offers in the first place?

Antonio: At this point they’d come to me, and it really was a reaction to getting so many people reaching out and wanting to guest post, wanting to advertise, wanting to place things in there. And we feel we’ve taken this to a whole another level, now we have a conference that the goal of the conference is simply to bring in all of our advertisers and other content creators so that they can strike deals together and their super fans are just there just to hang out and have fun.

Steve: Okay, but if you can take us back to just the very beginning when your YouTube channel was just starting to get a little bit popular, did you actually go out and seek this deals or were they still coming to you?

Antonio: No, you know I wasn’t seeking them, I’m in this sphere, and I say it’s specific enough, then we were attractive to them, you have to look at what kind of an audience you’re getting in front of. So I have a friend, his problem is that most of the audience, the people he attracts are 14 to 20 years of age, and they really don’t have much to spend, so he’s got to figure out other ways to monetize.

My audience is usually between the ages of 20 and 45, sometimes even a bit older, and they are mostly men, and they are looking to make purchases. So if you got a shoe company, if you have a neck tie company, if you have a– if you’ve got an app that is going to target men, then we’re a great company to work with. And they can very quickly figure that out, but I just found them because now our traffic numbers are so great, opportunities keep coming to us.

We’re now trying to do a better job of reaching out to other companies, but I’m very careful with that, because if a company doesn’t understand the power of online marketing, it’s going to be a hard sell, so I’m still going for the low hanging fruit, which has been companies coming out and reaching out to me.

Steve: So how did you get your first sponsor? Did they come to you or-?

Antonio: Let me see, my first sponsor– it was a friendship started and it was a bag company called Blue Color Luggage, and they were just getting started and we agreed that they would pay a certain amount per month, and we would create two pieces of content for them. And what’s funny is after a year of doing this more opportunities came may way, and I was always– I’m always trying to get people to come into a long term relationship, because the amount of time that you’ve got to sell a premium sponsorship it’s worth– ideally what you want to have is somebody that can come in a larger company like one of my best was Lee Jeans. And we had them for a year and a half, and that worked out really well because for them, it’s about awareness of their brand.

And Blue Color was a great company, but they always had to see a direct return on investment. So that’s the danger with smaller companies, is that it’s often times performance based versus larger companies, it’s more of like they don’t need to see the direct performance, they just need to build brand awareness.

So and it’s two different types of sales channels in my opinion, but we have found that both of them were coming to us, we’re able to strike a deal and make it work, but I’m always– I always tell people try to get in for a longer term deal, you want repeat customers.

Steve: That’s curious I was– just based on what you said I’m just kind of curious how you convince the smaller customers who want direct response, do you offer any sort of guarantees when you put up one of these videos, or can you suggest certain numbers that they might achieve?

Antonio: I can show them a little bit a back end, or like a link of the quantcast so they can see the numbers. I also show them examples, our media kit has a few testimonials in there, and I can show them some back end stuff. But they can often look at our social media, the numbers that we get there, it is something that I– because we get so many offers now, I haven’t had to pursue those too much. And it really is a –there are no guarantees in life, you get married there is no guarantee, when you have kids there is no guarantee.

So I’m sorry, this is– I can’t guarantee this, but I can show you that this is what we’ve done and this is who we’ve worked with, and it’s a great offer in my opinion, if I can get you that return on investment that you’re looking for.

Steve: Okay, and then earlier you mentioned that in your videos you want to bring people back to your side, so and yet you have a whole bunch of subscribers. So do you have two calls to actions in your videos, or are you just mainly trying to get people to your side, but then they just happen to subscribe anyways?

Antonio: No, I have to admit I experiment with my call to actions, and we probably need to standardize a little bit more. I’ve recently brought on, that’s been six months, I have a video gentleman now who edits all my videos, and has been working on that, so we can now link directly, from the video over to our Real Men Real Style. I usually do try to get them off though, you can look it out we’ve got like well over 250,000 YouTube subscribers. To meet that number is honestly it’s a false number because a lot of those, they’ve been on there so long, they don’t check it. YouTube changes that up too, because it used to be that they would always get an email from me, whenever I put out a new video, YouTube has changed that up a bit. So it used to be you could almost email people through YouTube, you can’t do that anymore.

So, that’s why I like owning my listing, getting them off of there. Now it’s a number that some people get fixated on. I do keep it public because I know certain companies will look for that. But to me the big metric is really whenever I send out an email, how many people can I direct to a website, or get to make a purchase or get to take action, and join a course or a product.

Steve: Okay. So when someone sponsors one of your YouTube videos, you actually send out a complementary email blast as well driving people.

Antonio: No I wrap that in. So I got every thick in my media kit individually priced email, podcast, video, blog article, and if they want then buy a package, then we can wrap it up. I do notice that it’s much more effective if I put together a video with an article, and wrap it with an email blast. And that’s when I usually sell, because I like to wrap those up together. And then I try to wrap it into a three part where we do it in over three months, because you need to warn people up to a company. It’s one of those things that you can’t just expect them without ever seeing this, to just buy. Online people like to get touched where they like to see something multiple times.

So I also I try to work with companies that are smart in doing things like remarketing, because then if someone goes to their website, they can follow them around the web. So I’m also careful about what companies I work with, because if they don’t understand remarketing, or retargeting, or any other ad of Facebook, you know it’s just hard the stuff. Then I really– I don’t think they’ll be able to effectively use our advertising.

Steve: Okay, that makes total sense. And I noticed that too with the info products that I sell. Often times it requires multiple touches. I have people sign up after following me for years actually before finally deciding to sign up. So just curious, once– I just signed up for your email list today to get my seven deadly sins menu. Thankfully I’m not violating too many of those. But I was just curious how you run your email list. Since I haven’t had a chance to go down the entire funnel, how do you kind of structure the emails that you send out, and what frequency do you send them out at?

Antonio: I need to do that better, we’re actually reviewing it right now. But I had, I would say definitely I’m going to get you used to getting emails from me. We send out an email immediately which you received in one day or received one that will ask you what your biggest Style question is. The second email, I’m going to go in and start making offers to you. And then I will run you through a series of emails in which I’m making offers. I’m telling you stories. I’m telling you why this matters, but I’m still sending you to my sales page. My goal is to get you to make a purchase and to get you in there. I’m going to actually lengthen this and add more information, marketing into it.

And now that our product, Dec we are about to launch a new course called “The Personal Image System.” So I’m going to want to integrate that more. And I’m going to double and triple the length of my current drip response. But now I’m moving towards the schedule of– emails from me go out on Tuesdays, Thursdays, and Saturdays, and I’m wanting to make sure that my sequence kind of trains you up for that. I want people to get used to getting more emails from me. People ask, “What’s the best time or how often should you send an email?” It really comes down to what have you conditioned your audience to expect from you, and are you delivering value pretty much every time or are you making an offer?

Steve: You know, Antonio I’m just on you totally– I was just on Pat Flynn’s podcast for this, but I lengthen my out of response sequence from 9 emails to about 30 emails and my conversion rate 3Xed. So I was making 3X the number of sales that I was before. So clearly it works.

Antonio: Yeah, and it’s one of those things we let things hold back, like yeah I use this as an excuse. It’s simply moving over to my new product, but yeah we’ve got so much, because I’ve used broadcasts way too much, and I want to pull back from using broadcasts, they are a lot of work, and people just stop tuning, or they tune out of a broadcast, but it’s about recency. There’s a guy named– do you follow Jermaine Griggs?

Steve: I do not, but I’ve heard of him.

Antonio: Yeah Jermaine Griggs, he brings in the– he talks about recency all the time. And when someone signs up for your email list, that is the best time to engage with them, those first few weeks they are interested. And my problem is I’ve got people on my email list, and I’ve taken off a lot of people that become non-responsive, because after a few months, they’ve moved on. They don’t care about Style anymore. They went through the interview. They got the job. Now they are focused on their job. And you know that’s great for them, but it’s bad for you because you sometimes end up getting a lot of dead wood on your email list, and you need to get those people off.

Steve: Absolutely. One thing I also want to comment, because I went through your site pretty in depth before this interview, and I like how you set up the start here page. I actually went ahead and watched your video, and it told me what your entire site was all about. And I thought that was just an excellent introduction. I like the way you structure that, because then I was introduced to all your products. I got to hear you speak. I got to know what you look like, and so I thought it was just really good the way you had that set up.

Antonio: Thanks. I feel bad I need to update it. It’s one of those things that we get so many things on our plate, and I know that I’m going to update that at the start of like two years. But the cool part about that is any one listening knows and that’s the beauty of an online business; is it does force you to think in systems, and allows you to create something that if you create it in a timeless manner, it can live on. And literally years later, somebody is watching that and they are getting a feel of what everything is about.

Steve: I think it was just key that to actually hear you speak and the way you dressed and the way you hold yourself. I thought that was pretty key especially for a site like yours.

Antonio: I’m trying to– on my video– and that’s why video has been so successful force, because we get out there, we show we are a real person. It really has helped with sales. I think three times an increase– you know this is as an old step, but when I went from having just no video to having video, I found that sales of my e-products increased three times. I’m not going to say that has held up for three years, but it is something that I do believe in the power of video sales.

Steve: Absolutely. Can we talk a little bit about traffic? So where does all your traffic come from? The break down.

Antonio: Mostly Google organic; the vast majority, Google organic. And that is a good thing; it’s also a bad thing. A good thing because it’s free, bad thing, but we could get– if they change the algorithm, things could come crushing down. So I’m always trying to figure out ways of– I would say don’t be afraid of paper click, if you have something to sell and if you can actually figure out what the value of a new customer is, then you can always pay for that, but for us, organic traffic and the area because– that really has been useful force.

One thing we did about a year ago, we started focusing more on infographics, and that has really helped out in a space which not a lot of people were creating new infographics or images. So we went out there and I hired an artist in the Philippines. Now I have an artist in Ukraine. And she’s now helping create amazing infographics and banners and images. And in fact if you spent some time on my website, you saw that it’s very banner heavy. I use a lot of image and there’s not so much wording although once you get to the text and the articles, there’s tons of wording. But my actually home page is mostly made of the banners and just arranged in ways, but I find it, visually, that’s what I wanted.

Steve: I assumed that you’ve done that because of Pinterest. Right is that– some of the larger graphics that you have on some of your posts.

Antonio: You know it wasn’t so much about Pinterest, but we do go back and we pin them and that’s kind of been a where you go– you give and take. And I have noticed that because we were doing well on Pinterest, I wanted to have more images. And once I– when I made the hire for my latest artist, it was about that she could create these type of banners, and she creates 10 to 20 a day. And these are so great for Facebook, for posting. Anytime we post anywhere, we use these banners. And that’s much more attractive than just assuming that Google Plus or Pinterest is going to grab the right image. We actually create that image.

And I try to have some strong copy. The copy is more– I’m an educator. I’m not so much an entertainer. And I guess three ways I feel about getting traffic online, you are an educator or you are an entertainer, or you are basically providing latest and greatest– you are engaging with the latest and news. I’m a bit of an entertainer. I would say not too much, but I’m definitely an educator. And I love that space because what I educate and talk about is timeless. So I can step away– we are talking about I’m going to take a trip to Ukraine, and I can step away from my business for a few months and it will be fine. I could technically place– step away from my business for a few years and it would be okay.

Steve: So just curious, you mentioned that a large portion of your traffic is Google organic. Is there anything that you did to kind of accelerate your search ranking? Or was it just kind of based on content?

Antonio: So you do want to– I focus on creating the best content in the world for a very specific [inaudible] [00:39:39] area. If you have a good way like in– if you put in a question and you find an e-how article, I pick on that one a lot, but I feel because I read those articles, I feel less intelligent after reading that article. I mean it’s like that was so bland and so useless that I don’t even know what you just said.

I get ultra-specific. I talk about how a man over the age of 40 who’s recently divorced, how he can dress better and have more confidence. Now I can tell you that’s not for most men. But if you are a man over the age of 40 and you are looking to dress or dressing [inaudible] [0:40:11] you’re going back on the dating scene, that article is a god-sent. And you are going to share it, you are going to love it, you are going to pay attention to it.

And I try to focus in– each of my articles is probably only written for 5-10%, the most maybe 15% of men and that’s by design. Because I want to be useful and I want to be relevant for the man looking for that particular answer. So that helped a lot. The other one is I gave away some of my best content. I write with The Art of Manliness and I have always given Brad some of my best content.

I started writing with him when he first started off with like 8 articles. And I believed in his mission, and I’ve always given him some of my best content. And that’s perfectly fine because that website gets like half a million visitors a day. It just sends me a good amount of traffic of very high quality traffic. And it is probably one of the portals that people tell me that– how they found my website.

Steve: Okay and so to summarize what you said, it looks like you focus kind of on the long tail of search for your articles. You focus on various specific topics that might not necessarily be as difficult to rank for, put out a great content and then the content just kind of naturally ranks itself, because it’s so specific.

Antonio: Yes, it’s more long-form. So we are getting into one, two, three thousand words and we are very specific with the wording.

Steve: Yeah, I noticed that. And then so was it just kind of luck that you and Brad kind of hooked up early on before his traffic really took off?

Antonio: What do they say about luck? Preparation equals– plus opportunity. He was randomly– I had written fifty summer articles, or not randomly. I had written 50 summer articles over a tailored suit, and he reached out to me via my blog at the tailor suits one day. You seem to know what you are talking about. I have this blog, would you like to come write with me?” Which I like to always think I’m the only guest poster that has ever had Brad reach out to me versus– because he gets tons of requests all the time. I’m like, “Okay. I like your mission. You seem like you are a nice guy, and I’d like to put my stuff somewhere else. So sure, I’ll write for you.”

And we just– yeah, I’m a big believer when you put out quality, people will find you. There’s always a need for people going the extra mile, for people that are putting out amazing content. So if you are specific, you put out an amazing content, and you make sure it’s smart, so that it can be ranked in the search engines and found, you are going to do well.

Steve: And do you guest post for many publications, or is it just primarily Art of Manliness.

Antonio: Primarily on Art of Manliness. I have to be really careful. You know it’s one of those things– I have four young kids and I just– guest posts take up a lot of time. And I’m really not at that point. I will occasionally create a video or conduct an interview with somebody, because that is usually within the one hour time frame, but I’m pretty careful about who I’m going to guest post with. Because often times, there’s also now this expectations that you send traffic to your own guest post. And that’s not always– it’s like, so you’re putting all this work, and then you are sending traffic to a website that doesn’t get any traffic. It really doesn’t make sense when you are getting big numbers.

Steve: Right. That makes sense. And I was just curious, we’ve been chatting for quite a while, but I did want to touch on your conference, and kind of how all that comes into play, because running a conference is a lot of work. And so do you do that just from a community perspective, or is it actually to try and improve your business monetarily.

Antonio: It’s really both. I mean I’m not afraid to make money. I think making money is a great thing, and if anyone else disagrees with that they should go read, what is it– Rabbi Lapin, over here you know, “Thou Shall Prosper.” It’s a great book. And he did a video series on why making money is important. So I never shy away from that. But the conference, the goal was to take what we are doing online, offline and to get people together. If I have had one thing that has really helped accelerate my success and that’s building true friendships.

Any time I’m driving through the state of Oklahoma, I stop and I see Brad. Anytime I’m out in California or I’m driving out, I stop and I make time for people. I had a buddy pop up, hadn’t seen him in 15 years, we served in the Marine Corp together. He’s four hours away from me one way, but I mean gave 24 hours notice, grabbed my– pulled my son out of school, we are taking a day trip to go meet a good marine buddy of mine.

So I think that real– people need to make time for those human relationships. And I didn’t see anyone doing this in my sphere, so I created one for it. I mean there’s fashion blog, or fashion conferences that are about catalogues and stuff like that, but nothing that was geared towards men that are wanting to get practical advice, to bring the retailers, to bring the content creators together, to bring the super fans together, and that was the goal.

Steve: Okay. The reason why I ask is because I have been thinking about starting a conference of my own, but just the shear amount of work is kind of daunting. And so if there is already conferences that kind of cater to what you want to do, is it necessary to start a conference, or should you just be going to more conferences in the first place?

Antonio: Well first you want to go to some conferences and you want to see the difference between a good conference, and a not so good conference. And I’ve been to both and I knew that I wanted– that was the one thing I wanted in my conference, that it would not suck. So that was number one.

I also had a great partner, Aaron Morino over at I am Alpha M, and many people presume to me as my competitor. This guy has been on Shark Tank, amazing PR man. He’s got an amazing business, and he’s now a great friend because he’s the only person in the world I can commiserate with him on what it’s like to get– have people tear apart your style on YouTube.

And we started ten months before the conference and we met every week. Maybe five minutes sometimes, maybe other times an hour. And we would talk about what needs to be done this week and we would do it. And when you have 40 meetings like that, you get a lot done. And I can tell you that I didn’t feel the conference what that much work, partly because I had a great partner and partly because we started it, and preparing for it early and it just happened. And it was great. It was a lot of fun and we are going to do it again.

Steve: Awesome. Also was this the first time you launched it?

Antonio: It was the first time we had it truly as a conference. We had it one time in July, and that was just an impromptu meet up out of actually what was called VidCon. And VidCon is in Anaheim, California. About 25,000 people came out. And we saw the power of that conference, but also that conference sucked from the perspective of if you paid 500 bucks, you really didn’t get much. But what I did get is a perspective on what the power of video, the power of interacting with your super fans, the power of having brands meet with content creators. And that’s what I wanted to create in my industry.

Steve: Okay. Hey Antonio, I want to be respectful of your time. Gosh, I learned a lot about how your business works and everything that you do, all the little details that you kind of think about in order to create a thriving business like Real Men Real Style. So I really appreciate that. For anyone who’s listening and wants to be able to get a hold of you or find you online, where can they find you?

Antonio: Hey Steve, I always recommend my contact form, and the reason being I have a little bit of fun with it. So they can go check that out. Now that email will go right to me.

Steve: Okay. Sounds good, well hey, Antonio thanks a lot for coming on the show, really appreciate your time.

Antonio: Thank you. Bye, bye.

Steve: Bye.

I hope you enjoyed that episode. Antonio is the perfect example of someone who has built a very strong brand on YouTube as well as his own website, and he’s now reaping the rewards. And it just goes to show that you really need to put yourself out there right now, and start creating a following.

For more information about this episode go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/episode76, and if you enjoyed listening to this episode, please got to iTunes and leave me a review, because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks, so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now, as an added incentive, I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner, every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

And once again I also want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I personally recommend, if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. They’ve got an incredible theme store where you can chose from a wide variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t need to hire a designer. And they also offer integration with Ali Baba, so you can easily find products to sell online.

So bottom line, everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products. And you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

075: Making 7 Figures Selling Digital Courses Online With David Siteman Garland

david siteman garland

I’ve known David Siteman Garland since December of 2008 back when he ran a tiny local television show in St Louis. Fast forward to today and he owns the popular media blog, TheRiseToTheTop.com, where he teaches other people how to make money creating digital courses online.

If you’re interested in starting your own digital course, make sure you click here to check out his training class.

Also most recently, he launched his own software designed to help people create their own membership sites without any technical knowledge required.

David is one of the most successful mediapreneurs that I know and today he’s going to teach us what it takes to sell digital courses online. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How David went from running a local tv show to selling online digital courses
  • How to build a large audience of loyal followers
  • How David built up traffic for his media blog
  • How David uses Facebook ads to drive traffic to his courses
  • The step by step methodology for creating your own course
  • How to get signups without a large email list
  • The pros/cons between having a launch and an evergreen product
  • The best way to start a membership site
  • How David launched his software product and his launch process

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

This episode was sponsored by Big Commerce. If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcast where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick a shout out to this episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store. And Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here is what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce doesn’t really nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

Now there’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba which is new, so you can easily find products to sell online. Now if you are interested in starting your own online store using Bigcommerce is as about as easy as it gets. Everything from design, to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products.

You can literally start your online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. Today I have an old time buddy with me on the show, David Siteman Garland. Now just the other day I was looking through my emails to find the first time that we actually corresponded, and it is actually way back in December of 2008, back when David run a local television show in St. Louis.

Anyway today David runs popular blogs/video blogs/teaches other people how to create courses at the risetothetop.com, and he also teaches other people how to create awesome interviews, all of that’s– I think that’s one of your older products, and most recently he launched his own piece of software designed to help people easily put up their own membership sites. Now David is probably one of the more successful online mediapreneurs that I know, and with that welcome to the show David. How are you doing today?

David: I am awesome Steve, that’s so funny that it goes back to December 2008. I remember that, that’s– it’s amazing how time flies, but thank you so much for allowing this email blast.

Steve: Now, yeah, crazy, right, what is that like seven, eight years? That’s crazy.

David: I still– there’s no math, but sure, we’ll call back.

Steve: Well, just a quick aside before we begin, just before the show your assistant asked me whether it was an audio or video interview, and when I replied audio only I got this email saying sweet, no video, I’m not going to shower or wear pants. So…

David: Right and I am wearing shorts, but I did shower because I did cross fit today, so I had to that, but that was more for the sake of my wife and other people, versus obviously this interview.

Steve: Excellent. So give us a quick background story and tell us about– because I know you’ve moved a lot of times, or the course of your career, tell us about the Rise to the Top, how you went from running a local television show, actually even before that, I think you did something related to hokey, right?

David: Yeah, that’s right, so I’m– when we’re doing this interview I just turned 31, about a month ago, I started kind of entrepreneurial journey right out of college, worked for a local– this could sound so crazy because it was, a local professional inline hockey league for a couple of years out of college, and I was– I kind of got broad in there, I kind of do everything all the older people didn’t want to do, and sort of became– I kind of took it over a little bit, over those two years. So I ended up basically running the league, and the sponsorships, doing different things, I ended up talking on the radio like those– it was just as like crazy real world MBA, if you will for a few years after college.

And then I started a television show/website here, I’m from St. Louis Missouri, and I came up with this idea, and it really actually happened I think at a coffee shop, I was sitting with a friend of mine, and I said, you know, it’s just so funny, looking back it’s so ridiculous. I was just like wow what have– how do you create a TV show? Like what if I did a TV show where I interviewed different types of entrepreneurs, and kind of make it—I made it like a talk show into this– but I want to put it on the local TV and I want to put it on the internet.

And I started way back in 2008 because I had sort of generated an interest with entrepreneurship, and that’s kind of where it began, I began– I took all my permits for money basically, and started this local TV show. I went around and sold local adds, and no clue what I was doing, really no long-term plan, or anything like that, and that’s how I got going essentially with my business which has changed a lot up to today now.

Steve: Yeah. So this television show, why did you decide to shut it down in order to go online?

David: Well yeah…

Steve: Was it not getting any traction or?

David: No, no. it got plenty– it was really just an evolution, because what happened was, I interviewed local entrepreneurs, I’d buy some studio space like I would rent studio space, and I would get videographers and stuff like that, and I would interview a lot of local entrepreneurs. And it was a blast, right, people in St. Louis, then I actually traveled around a little bit, I went out to Los Angeles, I went to New York. For example, [Jerry Vinokurov] [ph] was a very early interview on the rise to the top, went actually to Los Angeles, said if you did a million match maker party [inaudible] [00:06:54] like really-really interesting people.

But a shift for me came, and there’s been many shifts sort of throughout my career so far, a big shift for me came actually when I met my wife Mercy, because I realized I didn’t love that model at that time, I mean I said, you know what I don’t really want to travel around everywhere. I don’t really want to be kind of be slapping all over the place, I want to come up with something that’s more– I don’t want to say automated because it wasn’t into that yet, it was more like– well I could shoot this from home.

And that’s when I started doing interviews online basically via Skype, and I remember the very first one I did was with Peter Shankman, who since he sold the company was called Help a Reporter. And I remember we did it, and this by the way before it was super easy to do stuff on Skype. This was video interviews on Skype before everyone was doing video interviews on Skype, right?

Steve: Okay, yeah.

David: So we had really like Jimmy rig this thing up and I don’t– I’m not a techie by the way. So we had people in here trying to help do this stuff, and I remember we did the first interview, and we got– I got like look at it, and edit it, and we realized that we interview– we recorded all of him, and missed all of me, right awesome. So he was super understanding, and we ended up shooting it again, and stuff like that.

But then for the next few years, that’s what I did. I interviewed entrepreneurs– all different types of entrepreneurs online, and that allowed us to also leverage, go from kind of local, kind of ads and sponsors to more internet based ad and sponsors like HubSpot, CITRIC, were some of my sponsors, and we did that for several years until kind of the major shift that happened.

Steve: Okay, and then you had a kid, did something change again after that or?

David: Well that was just– that was recently.

Steve: That was recently, yeah.

David: So, shifts came a few years ago, I mean what happened was first of all, did 500 sport shows, and at one point I was showing five days a week. It was a blur– it was crazy looking back again to as far as these stories, like I said in retrospect are really crazy. But let’s– we got to do it sometimes, you know, and so I was doing this and this is where the shift started to happen. First of all, I started to realize, and this is kind of [inaudible] [0:09:04] obvious speaking here, but when you have something that’s 100% sponsor based, you have very little if any control of your revenue.

Steve: Okay.

David: Right, is that fair to say, because the sponsor could wake up on the wrong side of the bed, someone could get fired, someone could shift jobs, and boom. What if 80% of your revenue is gone over night, you don’t control it, you don’t take control of it. And for me, I started to get more and more worried about that, because people come to me, and start saying David you need to have your own products and programs, right.

And I started interviewing these people, which I have now the mediapreneurs are people that were creating their own online courses and products and programs and selling them, the Andy Porterfields of the world, the Ryan Lees, the Marie Forleos. I interviewed these people and like you know how that CV– it’s probably happen in your life before too where you kind of like have this light bulb of like Oh my God, this is what I’m supposed to be doing, like this is like Oh my God, I can totally resonate with these people, because I started– everything they were saying, I was nodding my head and I was like they were talking about, that they were making amazing revenue.

They were helping people, how cool is that, you’re helping people get results whether it’s in business, fitness, life, whatever it might be, right. They were not tied to a computer doing one-on-one work or working with sponsors 24/7 or anything like that; they had very much that elusive, freedom-based lifestyle we talk about. Not that there’s no work, there’s plenty of work, but you got to do it on your own terms, right.

And also they were– they just had these killer lifestyle, they can just spend time, they could do what they want, they can spend time with kids or family or going out or traveling or sports. Whatever they wanted to do and they just didn’t seem as stressed and as ridiculously bogged down as a lot of the other types of entrepreneurs that I interviewed. You know, they were raising money, they had very high margins in their business, how cool is that, right.

It’s not like I’ve been watching, I don’t know if– have you come to the show Steve it’s called The Profit on MSN base A?

Steve: Yes I love that show, yeah.

David: Amazing show, I love it like I got my wife and we watch it all the time, and it’s really a good show and I always fascinate when someone’s like it’d be great if you made 25% on what you bring in, I mean or 20%. If I bring in a million dollars, let’s just say and I make 200,000 they were saying that’s amazing. I look at this business, and I’m like Oh my God, the numbers are almost reversed.

Steve: Yeah, I know totally.

David: It’s almost reversed, it’s such a high profit margin, and it’s so much fun. So that’s when I started obsessing over online courses and what ended up happening is I launched my first online course, I did hundreds of interviews, thousands of hours of research in about– it was about four or five years or so. I launched my first course called Create Awesome Interviews [inaudible] [0:11:51] introduction, which is teaching people to do what I was doing, right online interviews. So it’s all about that, and I remember the very first launch that I closed, did $19,800 to 400 people, just 400 people on that, that raised their hands and I said, you know that I might be interested in this, right.

And for me, it wasn’t the amount of money, but it was just a life changing shift, to say Oh my God, there’s a tremendous opportunity here to be teaching and to be sharing knowledge with people, and walking them along a path to get them results, and that’s when my business made the shift into online courses.

Steve: Dude, I think we have like the same story, so I started out with my blog with just affiliate advertising revenue?

David: I remember that absolutely.

Steve: And then one of my affiliates, my top affiliates decide to cancel the affiliate program.

David: Yes.

Steve: And so I was like crap. And then I decide to create my own online course too, but your course wasn’t around, so I was sitting there and having to figure everything out from scratch as well.

David: Right, which is a pain in the butt, right, I remember it, right.

Steve: Pain in the butt, yeah. But now you know that revenue just kind of comes in and like you said the margins are like 99% right, so-

David: Right, it’s cool, and a great point that you made there, that’s a scary amount like I’m a big believer in entrepreneurship that you want to have control of your revenue, right you want to have control of it. And for me, that was just crazy, we’re able to build it up, we did 90,000, then 100 and the next launch we did 75,000, then it got over in to six figures. And it grew it grew and then we did more products and more programs over time and kind of perfected the process, and that’s when I really kind of turned the ears and I said, okay, what do people want to know that are following me?

And my subscribers, what do they want to know, what do they want to know more about, and what happened was the dialogue had changed over the years from, hey David how do I do interviews, to hey David how do I create, promote and profit from my own online course, how did you do it, like teach me how to do that, and that’s when we came up create awesome online courses, because we really perfected it over the years, I mean exactly what to do to walk someone through the process of doing this and being successful with it.

And so that’s when we launched that course and that’s when I hate to say the world changed, that’s exactly what happened with us. We– it was our biggest launches to date, out biggest success stories, people come in and say hey, I remember a girl in– Nikki Brown, she’s one of our earlier customers of create awesome online courses. She’s an army wife, she lives in Hawaii, she’s amazing, and she was a part time park ranger and college professor, and a killer copywriter, just absolutely amazing.

Steve: Okay.

David: Watched the course about copy, and did 50,000 dollars on her first launch, you know…

Steve: That’s crazy.

David: And it started propelling and it’s not just about stories like Nikki and I’ve got a thousand stories like that, right, but it’s also the people that make the 2,000 and the 3,000, that could be life changing, right?

Steve: Oh Yeah.

David: And so for us, I’ve done the podcast for five-plus years, and I looked at it and said this is the way we’re going with our business. So I actually– and I was a little burned out too after doing interviews almost five days a week for a long-long time. And so we shifted our whole business to be solely focused on how big people, create and promote and profit online courses, and helping them with that. And that was software and now different things that we are doing, but it’s all based around that very specific niche and need. And we become one of the world leaders at it which I’m super proud of.

Steve: Yeah, I mean, I always recommended your products on my blog and they kind of sell themselves in fact so…

David: Yeah, and I think that was cool is the dialogue kind of changes over time with products and programs right. Because when I started it you did too, same as I think, a lot of it in the beginning is you say, “Hey, here is what I have done and I have gotten my results. And now I want to teach you how to do it, right?” That’s how it starts, it says, “Hey, I have done this, now I’m going to teach you how to do this right?” But over time as you get success in it and testimonials, now it’s like, “Hey, I learned how to do this, I taught myself how to do this, and did it. Now I taught these people how to do it, they did it. And boom you are off to the races, you know what I’m saying is it snowballs over time; you gain a lot of momentum.

Steve: Yeah, hey, Dave one thing that I kind of admire about you is that you’ve always been really great at building kind of large and loyal audiences, followers. And so I was just thinking by the time you started selling online courses you already had a pretty large following, right? And so I was hoping that you could actually take us back the old days of The Rise to the Top first. In the very beginning, how did you kind of get traffic around, how did you build up your name so that when you did some of these launches they had immediate effects?

David: Yeah, that’s a great point and FYI even my first launch I didn’t really even focus as much on email list building back in the days I should have. And now that’s really the crux of the business is your email list and your relationship with said email list, right? With the people on the email list, and so back in the day I didn’t even have all that big of an email list, but the way I got started — and again this is just the way I did it. There’s probably a lot simpler ways, back there, first of all I didn’t know what direction we are going to end up going right? All I knew is we’re doing interviews about entrepreneurs.

So early on, a few things would happen. Number one, I literally started — when I first putting my show up I just– like my own Facebook page, like personal facebook page. That was one of my first kind of little audiences or people just — big people I knew from college, stuff like that or family. Like that’s how it kind of started a little bit. Well I just — my first probably 50 people were people that were probably from my private Facebook page. Or people that I had met — one former fashioner, I would literally send out individual emails Steve, back in 2008 and say, “Hey, I’m starting the show, if you want to know [inaudible 00:17:51], this guy you want to spam anyway. And then I would be like add them all to an email list or something evil.

So I said, “Hey, I’m starting this show and interview people, here is what’s going on with that,” like — kind of like a little like personal PR, like type thing there. And I said, “Hey, if you are interested, let me know and I’ll add you to our email list, I’ll let you know when new episodes come out right, like that kind of stuff. And we started to kind of roll it a little bit that way.

Then what happened is — and again the climate is a little bit different now than it was in 2008 right? Like there was not as many with shows as there are now, it was very kind of new — most of people who had shows were like super techie people, which is not me by any means. Or just kind of people that happen to be on the bleeding edge like myself. And so what ended up happening was people were going — ended up sharing their episodes when they got interviewed. And this was critical, and the thing was, here is the thing that’s important Steve.

I did 500 plus interviews, I never once asked someone to promote, ever, not one time. Because I think that gives a bad feeling in peoples’ mouth when and it was like, “Oh, you just interviewed me so I can promote it.” Do you know what I mean type thing? And so for me I always just said, I sent them a link and I said, “Listen, thank you so much for coming on, I just want to share this with you.” And my thought process behind that was also, hey, if they like it and they watch it, they are like “Oh, this is really cool and well done, and I liked the questions and I liked how I sounded.” Like all that kind of stuff, then they would share it.

And if they share it with let’s say — let’s just use a random example, a thousand people Steve. What I have noticed is let’s say 200 come and watch it and 50 people say, “You know what I liked it so I’m going to subscribe, right?” Well, compound that over time, I mean that happened with almost every interview. We had a lot people share them and that started to grow the list early on. And that was how really I started to build those relationships. And also I think the key that I have always tried to do Steve is talk and type like I’m in real life.

Steve: Yeah, you definitely talk — I mean talking to you, you definitely act like you are doing real life for sure.

David: Yeah, and I think that was the greatest compliment you could ever get. Like I remember when I was speaking at events, I don’t do events and stuff anymore. But when I was out kind of speaking and stuff like that, that was like always the greatest compliment I could get, if someone is saying, “Hey, you are just like you are online, right?” And I think that’s a good teaching moment there because it’s not the case with everyone, let’s just put it that way. So I think that — you hear this, it’s almost cliché, you would agree, but I talk to people like they are friends of mine, and we are having fun, like that’s why I talk to people.

I don’t talk like a marketer or an infomercial, or a CEO or anything like I’ll talk down to people, anything horrible like that, that you wouldn’t want to do. I treat people just like we are friends and it’s a family. And I think that’s helped really kind of grow it over time, because at the end of the day getting traffic and bringing people in is one thing, but it’s really about building the relationship with those people that’s critical.

And now, honesty the relationship a lot of time is built through commerce with us. Do you know what I mean? Like the relationship is built through great content if you will, like meaning a free webinar or a free video series, or some kind of free teaching element. And then really the relationship is solidified by some kind of commitment, meaning purchasing a product or program and then it goes from there. So it’s definitely been an interesting journey for sure.

Steve: As you were doing these interviews, you mentioned that the landscape has changed right? And so I remember you hosted everything on your own site, and you used to collect subscribers that way. So how would that have changed today, like given that there’s podcasting, there’s YouTube, there’s all these other avenues. How would you proceed today if you were to get started?

David: That’s a really good question, what I would do today. It would be similar; there wouldn’t be a ton of changes. For me – it’s [inaudible 00:21:54] with my brand, I could get away with a broader show like I did then. You know what I mean; a lot of times if you were to start today you are going to need something much more specific, because there’s so many broad shows out there, right? Like on entrepreneurship right, like — for example doing a show about people that have online stores right? Like that would be a type of specific thing that would be pretty cool.

But in terms of the marketing, I would definitely obviously be on iTunes again, maybe on YouTube; I have to think that through. But here is the thing that I think would be the biggest thing, Steve is that I would have plenty of calls to action in my podcast, basically doing ads for myself.

Steve: Okay, would you take on sponsors then?

David: Maybe, but I would say that my first — I would say my primary goal though of a podcast besides create content obviously and having fun, would be that I want to get leads and people towards my products and programs, right. So I would want them to walk them down a path towards create awesome online courses, maybe towards Course Cats that you mentioned earlier, which is helping — it’s a theme and a closed website to help people create their own course website on word press without needing an insider to develop or write. So might be walking them down a path to that.

So I think a lot of times I would be promoting free stuff that you would have enter your email address for during the podcast, does that makes sense? So like I would say, ‘Hey, check out this free video series on creating awesome online courses. And send them over there and whatever that link is and they could enter their email and start down a path to get free videos, and then eventually the invitation to join the program. Maybe for cost cut, it might be something that I’m working on now, it could be like a tutorial on how to set up a course from start to finish. Whatever it might be, I would be my own advertiser.

That would be my number one thing I would do, maybe later on I would consider other ads, but I would make sure that I didn’t cannibalize my own sales. Because that’s really at the end of the day what the crux of a business is.

Steve: You know what’s hilarious about all this David is that I had the same struggles with my podcast also. So in my podcast in the beginning and the end I pushed my own stuff, my free mini course, and starting your own online store. And just recently I have been getting offers for sponsorships. And I debated to myself for a long time whether to take this, because the money actually isn’t that great and so right now I’m just trying with a sponsor right now, with the podcast and want to see how it goes.

David: Sure I mean running is fair, and that’s what’s cool about this business and that’s what I love about retreats. If you want to kind of lamp it all together in the media entrepreneurship, is that you could do these experiments. And either it’s not going to be — it’s not like you are building a hotel, and you are taking on like $20 million in a day, and it might not work, right? Like this is not that big of a deal, you give it a shot and you are like okay, it’s either good or not.

And I think in my opinion it’s going to be a numbers thing whether you feel like it’s taking away from your own sales, is it making sense or not, it might, it might not. I mean, a great example Steve is John Lee Dumas entrepreneur on fire. He does a good job of kind of walking in the line with sponsors and his own products and programs.

And I also know for a fact, that his products and programs by far outsell. I mean in terms of his—I mean not even close, but he still does sponsors as well, so there’s not a perfect answer to that, I think you really want to keep your goals in mind. Because the last thing I would want though is cannibalizing my own revenue of my products and programs, because I’m promoting Snookies Cookies or whatever, whatever it might be.

Steve: You always come up with these whacked out names for stuff that I don’t know where you pull that stuff from.

David: I don’t know, neither do I.

Steve: So you know I got an online course myself, which is got about 1,200 members at this point. So I thought it could be kind of interesting to compare some notes on the entire process. So let’s say someone in the audience wants to create their own digital course and this is right up your allay. Walk me through the steps. What is step one and what is the logical progression in doing so?

David: Yeah, there’s really seven steps to creating an online course for sure. And the first step there’s a little bit by depending on where you at right? So the first step that I recommend is that people either know what topic they want to create a course on or they are not 100% sure on what topic they want to create the course on, right? So they either know or they don’t know if you will, when you started yours where were you?

Steve: I knew exactly what I was going to do, just because my whole blog had just one theme to it.

David: Right, which is so awesome, and that’s why you are a genius and the rest of us struggle Steve, right?

Steve: All by accident my friend.

David: Right, but it’s funny because I was actually more in the number two. And a lot of people I talk to, people I have done webinars with and things like that; they are often in number one like you are. They kind know what exactly what it is, I’m like well aren’t you just lucky. But regardless of whether you are number one or number two, here is a couple of tips. If you are not sure exactly what you want to do your course on, I call this the paying attention principle okay. Start thinking about what questions have you been getting online? I had coffee at cocktail hours at — wherever you go via email, on your website, like anything like that start paying attention.

That’s how I started back in the days I said, “Oh my god, people are asking about interviews, it’s been right under my nose the whole time and I had no clue right?” So I would start with that. Another way to look at that is if you have a podcast or blog. If you don’t and you know how to post, someone walks people through stuff that’s gotten really good attraction, I think that’s another good thing to look at there as well.

But regardless whether you are at one or at two, if you have an idea come up with some kind of idea you want to test, right? And what I would recommend doing is actually sending out a quick little survey. And use whatever assets that you have to promote said surveys. What I mean by that is, if you have an email list or a Facebook page, a blog, a podcast, some combination of all those things, if you’ve got none at all you could start with your personal Facebook friends, something like that right?

And I ask them one open ended question, and that question is, what do you want to know more about blank? And blank is obviously don’t type blank, you want to type in the topic. What do you want to know more about opening your online store? Or you could even tailor it Steve, what do you want to know more about growing your online store, it’s very different right, starting versus growing, very-very different. You could start to tailor these things, right?

And what ends up happening, it’s not about getting a thousand responses or anything like that right? It’s just about kind of testing the waters a little bit to get some feedback, get some ideas, get the language used, build some confidence up. Because a lot of times what I realized, is people don’t realize how much they know until some people to fill out their survey.

They are like wait a minute; I thought everyone knew how to set up an online store right, or whatever it might be. And you realize that you have — a lot of people get trapped in this, well, who am I to be an expert, right? Why– I’m not an expert, and I always tell people you don’t — the expert fairy doesn’t come flying in the window at night, and come in and like tap you and like sprinkle you with expert dust and fly away, right? If you done something where you’ve got results and you can share this with other people, you are good to go. This is not like you have to have 50 books and live on a mountain, have you noticed that Steve?

Steve: You know what’s hilarious about what you are saying just now, I remember like when I first created my sales page for my course, and it wasn’t converting that great. I sent out this survey, and then people started telling me what they want to hear. And then I would use their exact language on the sales page and it started to convert better.

David: Right, and you know what’s also interesting about that is a lot of times you will pick up stuff that you didn’t even think about, right? Like for example I’m making this up or let’s just say it’s about an online store and oh my god, like the number one question is which shopping cart should I use, right? Well, now boom, lights should be going off in your head. This could be a great leading point on my sales pages. This could be a free video that I could do, like, “Hey, here’s the best shopping cart to use, I am going to show you exactly how to do it right now, if you want information on the course go here.”

You know what I mean, like there’s a lot of different things you can do with that, because the foundation of this kind of stuff is critical. And I think that’s one of the key things. People want to skip, and just kind of go start recording stuff, let’s focus on the foundation first, and it’s going to make the rest of this process very easy, in all honesty. If we know what to do with, it’s very easy.

Steve: Sure, so what – let’s say you have your idea already. What’s the next step?

David: Do the survey, right.

Steve: Okay.

David: And then the next thing is like to kind of get the core stuff out of the way. So that means; naming, pricing, all that kind of good stuff, right. Like kind of that foundational thing about your course, before you even record it. And I’m a big believer — I love recording stuff first, I mean recording stuff before I sell it, versus, you know kind of doing the hey I’m going to release it as I create it type of thing, because I’ve noticed that actually adds a lot of stress on top of people. Meaning that now they have to worry about marketing and promoting, and they have to shoot module four, and like this and that. There’s a lot of stuff that goes on, so I’m actually a believer that you want to record early on, but…

Steve: Interesting, I actually went the opposite stance, just because I needed a kick in the butt to get working.

David: Yeah, some people do. And that’s why I always encourage people regardless of which way you’re going to do it, and this is important Steve, that you want to get a date on the calendar, right?

Steve: Okay.

David: I don’t give a crap what you need to do, put a date on the calendar. It will be this is it, like it will be done. You know what I mean? And you’ve got to do that, and you’re right. Some people do need that actual kind of pressure and that’s totally fine. But in terms of naming your course, this is something people get hang up on, and it’s a lot easier that they think because at the end of the day, the name doesn’t matter. And this is so important — like the name doesn’t matter.

At the end of the day, it’s going to be about the result you’re getting people and the hook. What’s the promise? What’s the result, you know. How can you — it’s the sexy part of it, if you will. Like what’s the promise of doing your online course? So for example Steve what’s your promise?

Steve: My promise is that you will have an online store up and running and you will be profitable.

David: There you go. And our promise for example, is that you will have an online course, right?

Steve: Right.

David: And you will do a launch, and you will bring in sales. So you want to have something that’s specific, that is if they follow exactly what you do to a T, what’s the result? And if you can’t get that, you don’t have a good topic, you know. And so, the key here is not worrying about the name. I would just grab a .com, you know, and this is — I think it’s important. I don’t — you could have your core website, and put a bunch of courses up on it, I like to have each course being its own little mini-branch.

So — because when you’re — I’m a big believer in charging premium prices, and getting premium customers, and creating premium products, Steve. And the thing is, I love having little mini-brands. So I would love if people grabbed the .com that they want for that course. You know supersexycourse.com.

Steve: Yup.

David: Steveistheman.com course, whatever [Inaudible] [00:33:04]

Steve: I totally agree with you Dave. We like took the exact same path here, go on. Sorry.

David: Yeah, so — yeah exactly, so, right on. So you want to grab a .com, it’s great for branding. It makes things a lot easier. And then in terms of pricing your course, you know people have different philosophies here, and I’ve learnt a lot of this over time and tested it, and there’s really no reason to not be in the top 10% of your market. And I think this is so critical because people say; well I want to try to undercut people, or I want to do a special ridiculous discount, no.

The top 10% of your market is going to attract the very best people, the least problem people, in all honesty, and also people that are much more likely to get results because they are invested in it, right? We’ve always heard, I going to get what you pay for. Right or you’re going to get what you pay for. [Inaudible] [00:33:51] someone over there, so we went to Las Vegas, and we went to the most expensive buffet in Las Vegas, Steve, I don’t know, $200 or so. I don’t know how much, the most expensive one. So I’ll say it’s $200, I’m going to eat a wheel barrel full of lobster if we do that. And the reason for that is I want to get my money’s worth, you know what I’m saying. You want to get your money’s worth.

Steve: Right.

David: And so, I think that’s where you want to think about pricing is towards the top end of the market. Now people calling me and say, David wait a minute, how am I going to stick out from the competition? There’s another course out there on my subject. I can’t believe it. What am I going to do? Should I pack my ball and go home? And the answer is of course not. Other courses on your subject is a good thing, is a good thing. If there’s other courses out there on your subject, that is showing you that you have a hot market, and it’s something that people are willing to invest in, right?

Yet someone in my Create Awesome Online Courses program even [ph] private Facebook group just for customers, and we had someone coming in there and say you know, I want to do a podcasting course, but I’m really nervous about it because I see so many out there. I see this one, is great. I see this one, it’s great.

And so there’s many, many ways that you can stick out from the pack, and one of those ways, besides your own experience and your own teaching style which is going to be unique to anyone else, which is important, but also the fact that you can come up with some kind of gap or specific niche, that you can serve. So for example, this customer we realized that he works really well with people that sell services. Okay, so sell service based businesses. He had more specific terms for that, but I’m just basically blank.

Steve: That’s fine, yeah.

David: Service people, and he wants to teach them how to podcast with also the specific end result of using the podcast to drive to a funnel that will help generate more business.

Steve: Okay.

David: And that’s very, very different than teaching people how to podcast and get sponsors. Or teaching people how to podcast, and just have some fun, and not have a business to associate with it, or this or that. So there’s always ways that you can niche down. And I think that’s one of the key things to think about during these foundational periods of your course is you know can I niche down on topic? Can I niche down on people?

So for example on topic would be something like that, and on people, right? Maybe another one, instead of doing a course on how to generate leads on social media, which is very broad and ridiculous, you might want to do one on how to generate leads for attorneys on LinkedIn. So the more specific you can go with something, and not just have a broad process, the better off you’re going to be when it comes to your course.

Steve: So to summarize what you’re saying, basically you want to get fewer customers, but those customers will be higher paying. So you want to create a premium course to a very tailored audience, right?

David: You want people who will make comment and see your great free content, and when they see a great course, they say; heck, yeah, that is me, or that’s not me at all. You want one or the other, you don’t want that middle ground, it’s kind of for me, I don’t know, maybe, maybe not, right?

Steve: Right.

David: That’s not good. You want people to be like; oh my God. He’s — he or she is talking directly to me, that’s me, that’s me, I’m totally on that. And that’s when you’re eliciting that emotion, where people are going to invest because they want that, they want what you’re offering, versus like; it’s kind of for me and my neighbor, and the puppy down the street, right? And that’s where people start to get themselves in a little trouble.

Steve: Yeah, so one thing that a lot of people get concerned about is if they have a course or something, how do you going to get people to sign up if you don’t have a big audience or a big list already built in. Like you had that luxury when you launched, but your students obviously won’t, right?

David: Well, I got across the board and I always tell people that — and this is the way I design this Steve, I designed it for people that have an email list of some kind. I design my programs– because another lesson here — let this be a lesson is that a course for everyone is really a course for nobody, at the end of the day. So we draw a little line, the same way we say; hey, you might have 50 people, you’ve got to have some people.

Well probably 10X the amount of people that you have after you do a launch of your course, because a lot of people don’t know this, but a launch of your course is one of the best email builders itself, by going through a launch and doing that whole process. But we have had people come in, that have had less of an audience, we just don’t — we don’t — I don’t specifically teach list building. I can give advice and do different things there, because everyone comes at it from a different stage. We want to look for people that have an audience of some kind, and they’re ready to create a course and promote it to that audience, and also grow that audience, you know.

Steve: I see, I got it.

David: But that being said, you know, there’s plenty of ways you can start out with that, and one of the greatest things that you can do is start with a give-away. Start with a give-away. A give-away that you in return, someone gives their email address, you give them something free. A free video series, a free cheat sheet, a free resource guide, a free infographic, whatever it might be, and that can be one of the greatest basis for list building is having this great free give-away, that then — you then promote your butt off on the internet.

There’s a lot of different ways you can do that, right? You can start with again a personal Facebook page. You can start by doing Facebook ads so that seeing if people sign up, right. You could do — you could go out and try to get on podcasts and say, hey I’ve got this unique angle on this topic, I would love to come on and teach it, and then at the end, you get to plug yourself, on the podcast, or whatever it might be, you say, hey check out now my free resource guide, my free cheat sheet, my free video, at this link, right? Same thing with guest blogging, if you could get out there and do it. So there’s definitely a massive hustle element that comes with building a list, Steve. Would you agree with that?

Steve: Absolutely, and so just curious, you have a bunch of students. Have any of them one with really small lists have been successful selling their courses?

David: Absolutely, absolutely. And the funny thing is, I tell people it’s designed for people that have a list of some kind, and people won’t listen to me, all right. They’ll say oh I know, I’m going to give it a shot, and then it’s funny; we’ve created this kind of fourth category of people that buy our course. Like our categories a lot of times are; a blogger, a podcaster that wants to create a course.

Someone that has a course right now and maybe it’s not going so well, or maybe they want to do even better, so they want to come in and learn the process, or someone that does like one-on-one work or some kind of other work and wants to scale it. You know, they speak, they are an author, whatever it might be, and they want to scale it. They come in, but our fourth category has been what I would call the committed beginner.

Committed beginner is the person that comes in and says you know what, I don’t have a list, but I’m going to listen to everything you say, and I’m going to learn a little list building on my own, you know a little bit, and I’m going to go out there and get it. Maybe I might grab an ads program, maybe I’ll do whatever. So, there’s a guy named Brian who just launched a course — this took him less than a month. I’ve got to double check on it, I don’t want to completely quote that, it might be five weeks, you know shoot me. But he started with nothing, Steve. Nothing and we’re talking nothing. And he came in — he came out of the great opt-in, it’s — he actually didn’t want me to talk about his topic all that much, because it’s pretty competitive…

Steve: Yeah, that’s fine.

David: But here’s what I can say about the topic, the topic is teaching people how to pass a specific exam. Does that help?

Steve: Okay, yes.

David: So its teaching people how to pass a specific exam, he literally came up with some free videos, put up an opt-in page, used LeadPages or whatever he did for that, sort of driving some ads traffic, and he actually started a little blog where he’d get some articles, and get some things out there, that are all pointed towards this free object, okay. He got just a few people, now. I want to say it was like 80 people, 70 people. Something like that, walked them then through where they got this free piece of content that made — walked them down a line towards the course, and said; hey, you like this free stuff? Great here’s the course, right. He ended up doing about $3600 already in the sales from this.

Steve: Nice.

David: And realize this is from nothing. I mean what else could you say about what other type of business would allow you to do that so quickly, and so, now he can build on it. He’s built his credibility. He can use those people for testimonials, and he can grow from there. So you know, if you want to start and your assets are relatively low as to who you can reach online, I think a great way of starting, if you know exactly what you’re going to do, and I think that’s important Steve. The problem is when you have someone that comes in that has no audience and no clue what they want to do.

Steve: True.

David: That’s not really who I serve, and I think those types of people just need to get out there and get more experience, in all honesty. But if you know, you’ve got this great thing you want to teach, but you don’t have an audience yet for it, that could be very doable, because that’s when you can start testing offers. Testing ads, hustling your butt off to get on to podcast, and doing guest blogging, that’s where all that stuff can happen. So I don’t want to deter people and say oh my God, I have no lesson out of here, it’s just if you’re clear on your topic, and what you have to offer, there’s a lot of ways you can do that as well.

Steve: Cool, hey David. I wanted to spend at least a couple of minutes talking about standard platforms and kind of throw you a little soft ball here. So let’s say someone wants to create a course, what platform do you recommend, and does there happen to be some sort of plug-in that makes the whole process easier?

David: Yes. Well four — actually four steps is not a plug-in, so we’ll talk about this. This is…

Steve: Okay.

David: This is interesting, so let me back up the story on this, is that when I first started doing courses and teaching courses, it was a massive pain in the butt to get your course website up, right? Because you had two options, essentially, option one is that you get a third party site. So somewhere you pay a subscription or something like that, and you put your course up on there, and you pay every month, but I don’t mind paying every month for something, but there was also a lot of other weird stuff that would happen. Like transaction fees or you couldn’t customize anything.

So it didn’t look really good. Or their sites were not reliable, or they would take your customers and start marketing them other stuff, right. All kinds of stuff, because at the end of the day, remember we talked about control of revenue, it’s the same thing with your course website. You want to have 100% control of your course website. Not 98, you want 100%, right?

Steve: Right.

David: So the best option, what I’ve always used is WordPress. WordPress because then you can build something that’s really cool. But here’s the problem, until now with WordPress has been– I’ve always told people listen, WordPress is great, but to get it looking, you know amazing, and working perfectly, you’re going to have to hire a designer or a developer. Unless you’re a super techie person, which not so many people are. I mean, if you are, and you’ve got great design ability and great tech ability, you are in the very small percentage, okay.

And so what we realized — and you know what, a lot of people do go out and hire people [Inaudible] [00:44:40] and it’s great, but there was never a solution where you could build something that looked like a six figure designer and developer did it, but you did it yourself. Or you could even pass it off to a virtual assistant. That — it’s that easy. So I got to gather with my developer Brad, who I’ve been working with for five years, and I said “Listen, in all honesty, I’m sick of answering the WordPress question.” I get it 50,000 times a week, people say, hey what theme should I use? Like what’s this?

And we’ve tested everything out there, and we just didn’t like a lot of stuff that was out there. It’s either it didn’t look good, or it didn’t work well. And we said we want to make something that is very easy, that people can customize and make stuff look a million bucks, get their course up online, move on with their day. So that’s where we created coursecats.com.

I mean Brad really did all the heavy lifting on this, because he took what he normally charges $5000 to $6000 for and made it into a very affordable piece of software that people can get, where they get this template, they get this theme and template and sales page for their course, and then a guide with videos and everything to walk them through, okay, now you do this, now you get your hosting, now you do that, now here is how we are going to put our videos up. Here is how we are going to do this; here is how you make the colors. And we did a kind of soft private launch for this to my customers, and it sold out in 50 minutes.

And then we opened up another 100 sponsors, sold out less than in two days. And we’ve had people on and this is coolest thing that were procrastinating and there was stock, they said — one guy actually said, he had been waiting for five years which is a little scary for everyone. But they were able to get their courses up over a weekend, over a day, over three days by doing – you know however time they wanted to put into it. They were able to get it up, but not only up but up where it works and it looks good.

So that’s of Course Cats this [ph], so the way that we do it, think of it as a framework Steve. And then we actually have just a few, very-very few, recommended plug-ins, because we didn’t want to reinvent the plug-in game, because there’s actually amazing plug-ins out there now. I mean plug-ins for those who don’t know, what I’m really referring to is what we call membership site plug-in, or a course plug-in.

And what essentially that does is protect your content, so just your customers can see it and it integrates with your payment processor and your email service source kind of things. So we have four that we recommend inside the Course Cats to help people. But you can think of Course Cats as basically as if you would hire a big time developer or designer to create your site and make it look awesome, that’s what it is.

And I’m very-very proud of this because we’ve never done anything big like this before, and it just came from years of people asking for something like this. And we said, “Well, we can’t find a solution that we want to recommend, so we are going to go create our own, and that’s where it’s gone from there.

Steve: So would say it’s a WordPress theme then?

David: Yeah, I would say it’s a theme on steroids because it’s much more I think, because you get a theme, but you also get a full guide to walk you through everything. Not just a theme but also other stuff, like how do you get this plug-in and put in there right, for example. And also– and this was Brad’s idea in all honesty, is that we kind of came up with this thing called the perfect sales page for just for online courses. And you get the sale page as well, all that integrates there at least. So it’s yeah, so that’s a good way of looking at it.

Steve: Okay, and then you recommend membership plug-ins that kind of work with the theme seemlesly.

David: Exactly, we walk you– and at the end of the day you don’t need that many pieces to create a really successful course website. Like we were talk about this the other day, you need hosting and a fresh WordPress installing, we recommend Bluehost for that. Then you get Course Cats and that takes care of like 98% of the rest of it. Meaning now you have got okay, a place to put your marginals, a place to put your bonuses, your downloads, your full website, right? Your sales page, okay, then you simply integrate it with one of the four plug-ins that we recommend, and we are going to add more over time. We are really– we are really specific on that stuff because we don’t want people adding stuff that’s crappy, right? Like we want to make sure that they are like okay, we don’t want to add something that breaks.

We want something that works really well, so we got our recommend plug-ins like WishList and PowerPress and a couple of other ones in there. So that will then protect your content and also integrates with your email provider and stuff like that. And then we talk about your payment processor which could be something like Stripe or authorized.net, and that’s it.

Then you are off to the races and I think that, for me watching my students and myself with this, this could be one of those thing that people waste so much time, not only on, but thinking about right? They are like, what I’m going to use? What’s plug-in? What’s this? What’s that? They drive themselves crazy and it causes what we call techno stress, right? And the thing is we just wanted to alleviate that, we wanted to be like let’s not worry about this. Let’s get it up and get it done.

And now we can worry about the fun stuff like promoting and marketing and creating great testimonials and really helping people. Let’s get past the tech stuff and move on. And that’s really why I want to get pass it because I got — frankly sick of hearing people say well, this plug-in or that plug-in? You know what I mean? This theme or that theme or like well, we are just going to lay it out for you and do a step by step system on what to do.

Steve: I mean this piece of software seems like a very logical progression to what you’ve been going towards, right?

David: Yeah, for sure because it’s simply listening and understanding what people’s problem and ambitions are in my niche and going with it, and making sure that it makes sense. So I think to me, people, one of the mistakes I see out there is people say, “Well, I’ve got my course on creating teddy bears. Now I’m going to create a piece of software on kettle bell swinging.” And you are like, “This doesn’t make any sense my friend. This is like two completely different universes.” So I think the more you can bring things together and make it into a really integrated thing, makes a lot of sense and it’s also a lot of fun.

Steve: Cool man. Hey, we’ve already been chatting for 50 minutes Dave. Where can people find you if they have questions for you either about creating courses or your theme.

David: Yeah, so and I’m sure you’ll have some links you can put whatever you want.

Steve: Yes, absolutely.

David: There are some special wants. One is www.createawesomeonlinecourses.com which you can be, you start with that and Steve I might have a special link for you for all that kind of good stuff. My main site is the www.risetothetop.com which links to everything. So it links to Create Awesome Online Courses, it links to Course Cats. And then of course you can check out Course Cats at www.coursecats.com meow, you don’t have to put in the meow. You don’t have to put in the meow.

Steve: Are you taking new customers for that right now.

David: Yes. So we are actually officially– we are actually in the– well this will be up for a Russian or—yes we are open and customers can come in absolutely right now.

Steve: Awesome dude. Hey, well thanks Dave for coming on the show. I learned a whole lot about online courses and I hope this kind of pushes some people who are sitting on the sidelines over the edge.

David: Awesome Steve. Thanks for having me. It’s been a blessing and a pleasure.

Steve: All right man, take care.

I hope you enjoyed that episode. I have known David for seven years now and it’s been really cool to watch him become a media mogul, and find his calling teaching others how to start online digital courses.

For more information about this episode go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/episode75, and if you enjoyed listening to this episode, please got to iTunes and leave me a review, because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks, so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now, as an added incentive, I’m also giving away free business consults to one lucky winner, every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest, and if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Once again I just want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I personally recommend, if you want to start your own online store, without having to worry about anything technical. They’ve got an incredible theme store where you can chose from a wide variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t need to hire a designer. And they also offer integration with Ali Baba, so you can easily find products to sell online.

So bottom line, everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing is all built in, and all you got to do is populate it with your own products. And you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

074: How To Create Amazon Listings That Sell Like Crazy With Karon Thackston

How To Create Amazon Listings That Sell Like Crazy

Karon Thackston is the owner of MarketingWords.com where she teaches others how to write high converting copy for ecommerce stores.

She’s been a professional copywriter for 25 years. She’s the author of over 10 books which include popular titles such as

She also consults individual ecommerce companies as well.

Recently, she launched an Amazon bootcamp where she walks sellers through her detailed process of keyword research and how to create conversion-worthy titles, bullets and descriptions. If you are interested in this program, Karon’s offering 20% off to MyWifeQuitHerJob listeners.

Click here and use coupon code: BOOT20 to get 20% off

In this episode, Karon is going to teach us how to create Amazon listings that will sell like crazy. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • The most common mistake that newbies make when listing their products on Amazon
  • How to properly fill out the keyword fields on an Amazon listing
  • The process that Karon uses to list a product on Amazon for conversions
  • The most important guidelines when it comes to choosing keywords
  • Why you shouldn’t price your products the lowest on Amazon
  • How to differentiate your products from the competition
  • How to avoid duplicate keywords
  • How to find new keyword ideas for your products
  • The right way to fill out your product bullet points
  • Karon’s framework for deciding how much copy to write for a given product

Other Resources And Books

Want To Learn How To Start A Profitable Ecommerce Store?

Create  A Profitable Online StoreDid you enjoy listening to Arree’s story? If you would like to create your own profitable online store and join a community of like minded entrepreneurs, then sign up for my full blown course on how to create a profitable online store.

My course offers over 60+ hours of video and includes live office hours where you can ask me questions directly.

If you want to learn everything there is to know about ecommerce, be sure to check it out!

Sponsors

This episode was sponsored by Big Commerce. If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick a shout out to this episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store. And Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here is what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce doesn’t really nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured, and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

Now there’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba which is new, so you can easily find products to sell online. Now if you are interested in starting your own online store using Bigcommerce is as about as easy as it gets. Everything from design, to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products.

You can literally start your own online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I have Karon Thackston with me on the show. Now Karon has over 25 years in combined experience in marketing, advertising, and copywriting, and she’s actually been helping e-commerce clients get both higher rankings in the search engines and higher conversion rates on their Amazon listings with the power of copy. Now she’s the author of ten books and she runs the popular site, www.marketingwords.com which I highly recommend that you check out.
And today we are actually going to delve deeply into Karon’s techniques for creating a high converting Amazon listing as well as learning about her entrepreneurship story. And with that, welcome to the show Karon. How are you doing tonight?

Karon: Great, how are you? Thanks for having me.

Steve: I am very good. I understand that you just celebrated a landmark birthday. So I was kidding, you told me not to go there and I will not.

Karon: Well all anybody has to do is to check my Facebook page and will immediately learn what that landmark what day it was.

Steve: So Karon I’m just curious, how did you come to specialize in the field of copywriting?

Karon: Oh gosh, forever ago I was in college and started working for the college newspaper at the University of South Carolina. One day there was nobody in the production department. We only had two people to in there to begin with. And it was the back to school issue of the newspaper. So things were crazy and that’s the one that all the local advertisers wanted to be in.

And somebody said, “Look, you are just going to have to write the copy for the edge yourself.” And I said, “Write the what?” And that was the first time I ever wrote copy. Since then I worked at a local radio station filling in during the summer, and wrote copy for radio ads and that grew into TV ads and newspaper and all of the things that build up before the internet. In 1999…

Steve: Did you ever work for a larger firm or was it always independent?

Karon: No, before I started marketing words?

Steve: Yeah.

Karon: Yes, there were a couple of ad agencies that I worked at, and then some a couple of in-house ad agencies as well as some full service ad agencies.

Steve: Okay. And then why— just curious I always ask this question, why did you decide to leave and go out on your own?

Karon: Well I was kind of tired of doing what everybody else wanted me to do and in the way that everybody else wanted me to do it. So that was part of it. And then my husband and I decided that it was time for us to start our family, and I wanted a way to work from home. So we looked into me starting some sort of business at home before we began to start our family, so that we would be ready when this child came and the child never did. But we birthed a phenomenal business and have watched it grow and flourish over the last 16 years. Every time I say that I stop and think, “Men has it been 16 years?”

Steve: That is a very long time especially in internet years.

Karon: It is a very long time, but it just doesn’t seem like it’s been that long at all. Not even a little bit.

Steve: How did you get some of your early clients?

Karon: How did I get some of my early clients? There were online bulletin boards.

Steve: Oh you’re talking of BBSs?

Karon: Yes.

Steve: Oh my goodness! Okay, wow.

Karon: The early, early-dark-cave-man-days internet. And I remember I got some of them through the Target Market magazine Bulletin Board. I used to get some really great clients through the early days when the practice of article marketing was—and submitting to a Brazilian article directory and what not, I used to get a lot of big clients from that. But steadily over the years it’s been a combination of folks seeing me or hearing me on podcasts like yours or webinars or things of that nature, SEO, good rankings, and marketing that I do with advertising or live events or things of that nature.

Steve: How many of your clients would you say are e-commerce focused clients?

Karon: I haven’t done a count in a while, but I will just say it was probably 40-50%.

Steve: So a large percentage are definitely e-commerce focused. That’s great. And in terms of, I know Amazon is becoming more and more popular which is why I wanted to have you on the show, are there—are you finding that you are getting more Amazon clients these days?

Karon: Oh yeah. I mean you can always tell when somebody has some sort of major training going on, if there’s a shift in Amazon. You know maybe you’ve got the dates coming up where the inventory has to come out with additional piece [ph] and what not; you can always see influxes of sales from those particular product listings coming in. You know people that need them tweaked, or people that need them written, we just got over that. Like last month was a launch for another product that happens a couple of times a year and we got blooded fast.

Steve: Okay, and would you say, do you cater more to the little guy or do you have larger clients, or do you like focusing on smaller guys?

Karon: We are kind of in the middle. The newbie sellers that this is their first time out and they are watching every penny that they spend, you know they are trying to do a private label or something to that effect which can be a little bit costly depending on what you are doing. Sometimes it’s a little too high of a price for them. But the ones that are right in the middle, that have established themselves as private labelers, maybe they have two to three four, ten products to their name now, and they are used to doing this, they don’t have the inclination to write the product listing themselves. Maybe they run out of time because they are focused on other things, those are really the ones that we work with the best.

And then we have manufacturers who have their only comp sites and are looking to move those products on to Amazon, and we do a lot of business with those too. Major retailers, big buck stores, national chains, things of that nature, we don’t tend to be a good fit with.

Steve: Okay. And before I get into like some of the details, do you have any cool success stories that you care to share that just kind of demonstrate the true power of copywriting.

Karon: We got a really excellent conversion rate. I guess if I don’t tell you—I don’t have permission to share the details publicly, so I’m not going to give a lot of them. I can tell you what the number is, but I just can’t tell you who the client is.

Steve: That’s perfectly fine.

Karon: About a 14% conversion rate on mermaid tail.

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Karon: That was fun. I actually thought they were joking when they sent out that over. I opened up the questionnaire that we have for clients and went, “Okay.” Never done one of those before.

Steve: So you know when someone comes to you, what would you say is the most common mistake that most people make when listing their products on Amazon like kind of as a newbie?

Karon: Not formatting the keyword, the search term fields correctly, and not understanding what the best use of those fields is.

Steve: Okay. And I think there’s probably some people listening who aren’t familiar with the terminology that you are going to be using. So I’m going to ask that you kind of elaborate some of these at first, and then once the terminology has been established then we can go on. So you mentioned the key words, are you referring to the key words that are being used to search on Amazon?

Karon: Yes, when you create a product listing, you are allowed 50 characters and five different fields labeled search term fields. And a lot of people refer to this as key words not to be confused with the section that you will see right beside that, that says “platinum keywords.” If you are not an invited designated platinum seller, it doesn’t matter what you put in the platinum keyword fields, they are not going to work for you.

So you are looking at the ones labeled search terms. And there are five of those fields; you get to put in as many key words as you can fit 50 characters per line, maximum. And then you also have your product title, which is I believe the technical name when you add the product is, product name, but most people refer that as a title. So that also counts as a key word field.

Steve: Okay. And you generally don’t want to duplicate your keywords in these fields, is that right?

Karon: You do not want to duplicate keywords in these fields. And Amazon makes quite clear in several different places that they are working with individual key words that can appear in any order and that it’s not necessary to use commas in there, as a matter of fact they make the statement that “Amazon system ignores punctuation in the key word fields.”

So you just want to put a space between each one. But what most people do is they would go in, they are Google sensitized, so they go into these five fields for the search terms, and they put one key phrase in each of the five fields. So if you are talking about dog treats maybe the first field they would have gourmet dog treats, and then organic dog treats, and beef dog treats, and whatever and whatever. So it’s a huge waste of space.

Steve: You know what Karon— oh sorry, go on.

Karon: I was going to say there’s the duplication of the word dog treats to start with, but they are not filling those spaces with keywords. You have all of that space. I always try to put as many keywords, individual keywords in there, as possibly could fit in order to drive traffic.

Steve: Okay, I was just going to say, I think we are jumping the gun a little bit. I know you—I understand like if I were to come to you for a copy, you probably have some sort of process in place before we even think about the nitty-gritty like the key words, right?

Karon: Keywords come first.

Steve: Yeah, so I felt what I would do is let’s do a hypothetical case study. Let’s say I came to you, and I wanted you to write a copy for some of my handkerchiefs, what are some of the questions that you would ask me, and what is the kind of mindset that I need to take in order to effectively create an effective high converting listing on Amazon?

Karon: The first thing that we always take into consideration is the mindset of the Amazon site visitor, unlike somebody that is going to Google to search for something. Maybe it’s information, maybe it’s entertainment, you know it could be a dozen different things. When a person shows up on Amazon, and does a search, it is with the exclusive purpose of making a purchase, or at some point in that buying process. Nobody goes to Amazon to look up TV listings or find information about whatever. They are here to buy something, eventually or right away.

So we want everything about these handkerchiefs to be appealing to a shopper, not just to a “site visitor,” but to somebody who is in the mood to buy. So it’s a lot like organizing a display in Macy’s or some other physical retail store. You want to make everything as attractive as possible, including your words. We start with the keywords, because those need to be incorporated in the title, and then we also naturally would include those in other areas of the Amazon product listing, just because they are going to pop up anyway. It’s hard to talk about handkerchiefs, without using the word handkerchiefs.

Steve: That is correct.

Karon: We want to find out what makes these handkerchiefs special. If you just go to Amazon and you type in handkerchiefs, you are going to get millions of options. So if we have organic cotton handkerchiefs, or silk handkerchiefs, or personalized and monogram handkerchiefs, so it’s a bundle of different types of handkerchiefs. Or whatever it is that makes these particular handkerchiefs special, and we start to narrow it down. Okay, so if it is not just ordinary handkerchiefs, they are organic silk handkerchiefs imported from Thailand or whatever. How many of those are on Amazon?

Well, if you’ve got more than a couple that are coming up in the search results, you need to start looking at ways to differentiate that product even further. What will make you standout as different as or better than all the other listings for organic silk handkerchiefs on Amazon.

Steve: What are some of your guidelines, when you say there’s too much competition and you want to narrow down more. Like how many identical listings would you expect to see before you make that determination?

Karon: I would say that if the first page of Amazon search results are filled with identical or extremely similar products, you need to start thinking about ways to differentiate yours from everybody else’s.

Steve: Okay.

Karon: Yeah, so we are just looking — I mean it doesn’t take 15 different ways to differentiate your type, it only takes one thing. And a lot of times it can be done in one word in your title, instead of organic silk handkerchiefs, if it’s the set, you can put a set. Because not everyone is going to have that, if you have some special packaging, it comes in a gift box, maybe it’s monogramable or has special trim around the edges. I’m coming up with these off the top of my head, but whatever it is that yours has that others don’t have. Or you can look at ways to just position your product differently.

If it’s absolutely identical to everything else that’s on Amazon, then maybe you position it as a gift item. Or maybe you position it as perfect for christenings or something to that effect. But keep looking until you find something about your product or service that can set you apart. When shoppers get on Amazon, and you are looking at a thing right now, anything silicon is huge. You can go look up silicone cupcake liners, and you will just have pages and pages of the exact same things.

And when that happens, what you put on the page is over looked by a lot of shoppers, because they are defaulting to price. And you don’t want them to default the price, because if you play the price game, it’s always a race to the bottom. One person under bids or under cuts somebody else who is on the listing, and then may come back especially with automatic re-pricers, and before you know it nobody is making any money at all. So you don’t want to get caught up in having all of your shoppers looking at price, because everything else sounds exactly the same as the last 25 listings they’ve looked at.

Steve: So you are looking for keywords that differentiate yourself from the competition. And are you including this in the title tag, or the keyword sections or both?

Karon: Well, it’s not — there’s the product name, is that what you are talking about?

Steve: That’s what I mean yes, sorry.

Karon: Yeah, well, you wouldn’t put them in both, because you don’t want to duplicate. We would either put it in the title, or put it in your search term fields, but you wouldn’t do both. But yes, if it’s a viable keyword, then you would put that in there. If it’s something like, somebody else has gold plaited whatever, and yours is [inaudible 00:19:55] whatever, then you can use that. But even if it’s a matter of positioning it as a gift instead of necessity, gift may not necessarily be a good keyword, but it would be good for attracting folks to click on your listing instead of somebody else’s.

Steve: Okay, so once we have the keywords down, what is then the next step?

Karon: The next step is to finish your listing. And while these keywords are going to naturally appear when you are writing your bullets and your product description section, it is not necessary contrary to popular belief, to put them in there for the sake of Amazon, it’s so funny. I guess maybe a year ago, I was doing summer search in Seller Central about this very thing. And I found in seller support where Amazon list what is automatically included and indexed for search, and what is not indexed for search. And I have in there what used to be just a bullet in a bullet list, that said, ‘Bullet points and product description copy are not indexed for search.’

Steve: Okay.

Karon: Because I’m doing a webinar about this, so I went the other day back to that link that I’d saved to get a new screenshot of that. And they are trying to get that point across to people so much, that they have now moved that bullet out of the list and put it in a yellow highlighted box, so that people can see and it’s so funny because there’s this huge debate about whether that’s true or not. And I just shake my head and wonder why people would think that Amazon would not be truthful about that particular thing.

Steve: It’s funny because I have encountered listings that have gigantic text box for the bullet points. And at least on one of the forms that I frequent, this guy said that increased the traffic for his listings when he started doing that. So I mean no one knows for sure, but apparently if Amazon says it’s not, then it’s probably true I would guess.

Karon: Well, I can’t imagine why they would say something like that; I mean their whole purpose in life is to make lots and lots of money. So if they tell you that bullets and descriptions are not indexed for search when they really are, that means that you are going — if you follow that advice you are going to have less of a chance of ranking on Amazon. So that means that they are going to have less of a chance of you are selling as much as you could possibly sell.

So I don’t know, you are absolutely right, we will never know everything that’s in Amazon search ranking algorithm, because then it could be easily manipulated. And I do know for a fact, that the search ranking algorithm is not static, it is dynamic. Meaning that it doesn’t always operate the same way every time, which was very interesting to me, as it moves in shifts, and mops, and people type in different things and what not. It is actually changing as the results show up every time.

Steve: Okay, so we were just talking about bullet points, what are some of your best practices for these bullet points?

Karon: I like to put the benefit first, most copy writers are taught to do features and benefits. You tell them what it is, and then you tell them why they should like it. But when it comes to bullets on Amazon, I have found that putting the benefit before the feature works better, because it captures attention.

So instead of saying — let’s see, I’m looking at a bottle of water that I have on my table right now as we are talking. So instead of saying that this bottle of water or this bottle is — won’t add anything to the taste of my liquid. It’s made from a particular type of plastic, so that whatever beverage you put in there is going to be absolutely unaffected by the plastic. You won’t get that buckeye [ph] chemical taste.

Then that’s what I would probably start with, is something about not having a buckeye chemical taste. Edward [ph] had a water bottle that made you scow when you drunk from it, it probably had this type of chemical or that type of chemical. No worrying about that with this particular bottle. If you have an exfoliator, those are very popular right now. The ones you’ve probably see them on TV, or maybe your wife paid more attention to it that you didn’t.

Steve: Yeah, I don’t know what you are talking about, but yeah go ahead.

Karon: With your little pedicures and the automatic rollers and you use them on your heels and what not. So instead of saying this exfoliator gets red of dry dead skin, you could start the bullet with the benefit. Show off — you are saying, get your sexy sandals out. Show off your foot flops this summer, go bare foot with confidence, that’s what they are looking to do. And then you can tell them about some of the features of this particular exfoliator.

Steve: Is it even important to mention the features, if you just mentioned the benefits, would that be good enough?

Karon: Depends on what it is, for some things folks are looking for specific features. Maybe they want — for these exfoliators, one of the biggest complaints is that they are not powerful enough. That if you apply even the least amount of pressure to your foot the roller stops. So it’s become a selling point to list the power elements of the motor. How many amps it has, how many watts it has, how many revolutions per second the little roller goes around. So they know how fast it’s spinning and things of that nature, so it depends on what it is. For a mermaid tale, no you wouldn’t have to do that.

Steve: So I’m just curious, so if I would have come to you and I was selling these exfoliators, and I want you to write a product description and bullet points. Do you actually go in and do the research and look at all the reviews on Amazon? Like how do you found out what are the most important benefits that you should feature?

Karon: There’s a lot of different ways, and yes the reviews and the questions if there are questions available for the product listing are very important. But we don’t spend all of our time on Amazon; we go out online through Google or different types of other websites that sell the original [ph]. They have reviews and comments online on lots of different websites, so we will look at that as well. If it’s something that is a brand name product, then we can also look at that particular website to see if we can find any information that’s not being used on Amazon or other ideas for keywords too.

Steve: Okay, what about, in these bullet points do you — let’s say you’re private labeling something. Would you mention your brand in any way in these key points?

Karon: Sure most of the times we do, there’s plenty of room in the bullets most of the time to be able to put the brand in there. And especially if that’s important to the seller, they are going to expand on that brand later; you would want to include that.

Steve: Okay, because I would imagine like let’s say you mentioned these silicone products. Like you said there are so many of them. I guess it would be to your advantage to try to brand something right, in order to stand out. Is that what you would do, or would you do that in the product name? Or would you do that in the bullet points?

Karon: It depends, I mean Amazon says that the brand can go in the product name — I mean it’s a case by case basis. Sometimes I’ll put it in there, other times when we do the listings we choose not to put it in the product name. A lot of it depends on space, especially in kitchen Amazon is really cracking down, and they have soft launched a new set of parameters where you would get a hard stop at 100 characters for the title, which is what they’ve changed the style guide to.

Well, the title has always been 100, the bullets were not 100. We’ve had several clients that are existing long time sellers and newbies as well, that have gone in and found hard stops in the kitchen category for each of the bullets at 100 characters. So it depends, if we are really tight on space and they are bumping, they are getting errors because the title is more than 100 characters when they try to interact, then we may take out stuff like the brand name and things that would not directly impact the sale.

If it’s not a nationally known well recognized brand, then chances are people aren’t going to be searching for that anyway. So that could always go in a keyword field. Or they recognize the brand field anyway as a matter of fact, as already searchable.

Steve: I was thinking more in terms of establishing a brand rather than having a recognizable brand. Okay, so in terms of these bullet points — so okay, so you mentioned benefits, followed by features, what else do you include in this bullet points?

Karon: We like to try to include some life experiences. And this is where being a real advertising geek and studying infomercials can come in handy, because that’s how infomercials makes tons and tons of money. They don’t just sit there and point to this amazing juicer or whatever the product maybe, and show you all the features and pull out all the parts and the attachments and the accessories, and show them off and explain how powerful they are, and easy to clean and what not.

No what are they doing? They are standing there, talking about your daily routine and how you can use this juicer, first thing in the morning when you in a rush, and you are trying to get out the door, it’s a quick breakfast. You can just zip some fruits and veggies through it, stick in your to go cup, run out the door and have a nutritious, delicious, filling breakfast on your way to the office. And when you are at home at night and you get some cravings, you can use the same juicer to whip up some smoothies that are thick and frothy and satisfying. You can use fruits and juices so you get that sweet fix that you’ve been craving all day long without wrecking your diet.

These types of things compacted of course, because of the space limitations are really awesome for drawing people into your bullet points, because they can relate to that when it includes things that would apply to their own lifestyle.

Steve: So do you think it’s more important to do this in the bullet points as opposed to the product description itself?

Karon: I do it in both.

Steve: Okay.

Karon: And the reason being that the bullets are way more read than the product description section is.

Steve: Okay, so let’s see what do we got so far, we got benefits, we got features, we got storytelling, is that accurate or?

Karon: Not necessarily storytelling, more just relating to life experiences, their daily routine. However these products fit into their daily lives.

Steve: Okay, and do you kind of include calls to actions in these bullet points, like what else do you use?

Karon: Not calls to action, we try to stay as close to Amazon’s terms of service as possible. You can put guarantees in there, they have actually changed that in most of the style guides that they used to not be able to put warranties and guarantee information in bullets. But the rest of it should not contain “Marketing materials.” They even go so far as to say, the bullet point section is not a place for paragraphs. So we try to keep it generally in check with what Amazon is doing.

Steve: Okay, is that relatively new? Because I know like a lot of listings I see have a lot of those things in them. And they always have like a call to action on like the last bullet point.

Karon: It’s not new, but you know as well as I do, that Amazon has not proven itself to be a very good enforcer of its own rules. So most of the things that Amazon tells you to do, people have been doing for years and getting away with it, and that’s why when I do things like enforcing character limits in the kitchen category or starting to [roll barrel] [ph] softly in several different accounts people are just horrified. Because now all over sudden they didn’t even know Amazon had these rules before, because nobody told them, and they didn’t bother to check. So now they are being forced to be accountable to rules and regulations that they didn’t even know existed before.

Steve: Okay, so in terms of, when you are writing these bullet points is there a specific order that you go in, or does it kind of not matter?

Karon: It depends on the product as to whether it matters or not. And I don’t know that there are any specific criteria that I could tell you, usually when we go through and evaluate the information that the client sends, whether it’s from a manufacturer or things of that nature, all the nitty-gritty about the products, if there’s a logical order for bullets, for trying to walk the customer through some progression of something, maybe it’s a system, or this product is something that can help them accomplish something over time. We may go in, in that type of a series, but one thing that you can actually test, when it comes to bullets is rearranging them to see if that helps your conversions.

And that something we do regularly for clients even if– if the bullets were not written in any particular order, switch them up. People don’t read everything on the page, they never do. Typically in a paragraph they are going to read the first few words and it’s the same for bullet points. So if they didn’t get past the third bullet, because they got tired of reading and they are scheming down to a different section of the page, they may not have even seen what you had in the last two. So switching them up and doing some tests to watch your conversion right, is a good way to tweak that sum and maybe get a couple of extra sales out of it.

Steve: So what’s your methodology? You just like in the beginning of the week you change it, wait a week, change it again just measure the conversion rate? Okay.

Karon: Well, I mean not necessarily I’ll take that back. We can’t wait a week or whatever, but usually we tell clients to watch the traffic levels, because you want to give it time to have an equal amount for each change that you make. So rather than saying just wait a week, if the first one had been there and got 1,000 page views, then when you put the next one up, wait until it has at least 1,000 page views before making another change.

Steve: Okay, what I was trying to get out was, you are not really split testing these, right? It’s one change, wait ‘X’ number of page views, switch it up, look at the page views, even though there could be some seasonality and what not that you can’t really account for right?

Karon: Yes, and — I mean if this was something that — if it was a product that was seasonal, I would do your testing during your busy time. Otherwise you are going to have a hard time measuring even if you wait, it may take you a very long time to get the same number of visits to that particular page in your off season. So if you had swim goggles and its February, you just probably need to wait until spring before you start doing some testing.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of the product description, do you find that changing the copy around there really makes a big difference to a listing?

Karon: We have found in certain cases that changing that copy up can make up a big difference. And most of the time, this is if it’s not positioned in a way that worked out how we thought it would work out. We did a food scale one time, and thought of positioning it for folks who were on particular diet, low carb-diets or weight watchers or [inaudible] [00:37:19] or whatever, because those are so popular. And that didn’t work out well, and we ended up having to change it.

So when we took out that positioning of that food scale, we had to change the product description, because it was also written to support the title on the bullets, that are dealt with using a food scale when you are on some sort of diet.

Steve: Okay, but in that case it seems like you changed more than just a description, right?

Karon: Yes, because it was the whole concept of the product that didn’t work out how we wanted it to, so we had to change everything. We have done product description changes — have we done product description changes? Just the product description — no…

Steve: Well, let me ask the question in a different way. How much time do you focus on the product description, and how long are your product descriptions typically?

Karon: Product descriptions it depends on what we are writing for, if it’s a private level description, we will push the 2,000 character limit.

Steve: Okay.

Karon: If it’s something that is more of an everyday type of thing, if we are writing for somebody who has personalized toothbrushes or whatever, I’m pulling that off the top of my head. Those don’t take a lot of explaining. We look at — what I call my face formulae, familiarity, audience, cost, and education. And that goes into play with just about every product that we write for. If their audience is not very familiar with this product, or maybe they’ve seen it, but they don’t know all the details about it yet.

If the audience is one that simply demands a lot of information instead of generally not needing as many details. If the cost is higher, if it requires some education, if it’s something brand new, if it’s something complicated. All of those things go into play when we decide how much copy is needed to write. We’ve done jewellery stores that had excellent results, and their product descriptions were probably — it was about a paragraph, so maybe 100 words. And when you get up to 2000 characters that’s more of like 350 or 375 words.

Steve: Okay so just to summarize what you are saying it seems like you have this formula called “FACE.” F stands for Familiarity, A-stands for—what does A stand for?

Karon: Audience.

Steve: Audience. C stands for Cost and E stands for Education. So it requires—if it’s more expensive it requires more education. If the customer is not familiar then you need to turn to write a longer product prescription. Is that kind of accurate? Okay. And I see listings with graphics in the product description, but I’ve never been able to put those in myself. How do you get graphics in there?

Karon: There are only two classifications of sellers that are allowed to use graphics. Those who are registered vendors with Amazon, which means that Amazon is purchasing your products wholesale from you. Those people can also sell through their own seller account, but they don’t go through seller central, they go through vendors central.

And registered vendors are allowed a lot of flexibility including having images and or videos in the product description section. The other category of seller is called an A plus seller and that is highly exclusive invitation only. And those folks get way more flexibility than vendors get, and they can have images and videos and all sorts of other things that’s typically only for major national brands.

Steve: And what about platinum status? You mentioned that earlier on in the interview.

Karon: Platinum status I have actually not found out a lot about. And what I need to do, we don’t typically we don’t get into all the account types and whatever, we just—so how to write the product description for those particular things. I don’t know that platinum sellers get any flexibility in title link, their bullet link, their bullets included in the product description. But they do get the extra keyword fields.

Steve: So anything special that you do to actually get the Amazon listing to rank in Google search?

Karon: No. Not so much, I mean generally what we do already we are including key phrases in the title where they just happen naturally in the bullets and in the product description. But Google is looking actually at the html code behind the page. So if you look at the Amazon product listing page and you scroll from the top all the way down to the bottom, Google is looking at the entire page, not just the title or the bullets, and the product description.

So everything else that’s text on that page whether you can see it or you can’t, Google takes into account. So in the grand scheme of an enormously long and complicated Amazon product detail page, the copy that you’ve written really doesn’t take up that much space. The keywords unlike a regular web page, the keywords that you put into your search term fields are not visible in the code, so Google doesn’t see them. Those are only for Amazon internal use.

The product name is going to show up in the code as the title tag for Google and also as the meta description tag. So Google typically if you do a search for a product that you know is on Amazon and you see that listing show up on Google, what they typically you are going to do is pull text from some other portion of the page so that the title tag and the description tag don’t match. That could be anything. Maybe it’s something you’ve written. Maybe it’s something out of a review.

Steve: Okay. Here’s kind of a random question I was just thinking about, a lot of people who sell on Amazon also have their own shops. So is good product copy—would you say it’s more important on your own independent site or on Amazon? Meaning if you were to focus on product describing grade copy, is it more important to do that on your own site?

Karon: Well it depends on what you mean by important.

Steve: What I mean by that is that you don’t want to include the same copy on your Amazon description as on your site because that will be like duplicate content, right?

Karon: It could be. Amazon is such an enormous site. If you are searching for a physical product chances are you are going to have more than one Amazon page show up in the product listing, because it’s just Amazon and everybody shops there practically. If I would say that, copy on an individual e-com site would probably have more impact on Google, because there would not be as much on those product pages typically as there is on an Amazon page. There’s a lot of code for Google’s, but to surf through and digest on an Amazon product page.

If you go to an e-com store, and you are clicking through you know from a category to a sub category to a product page, you may have depending on the page, 50 words in the product description you know, 100 words sometimes you got tabs at the bottom with more information and what not. But because there’s not the suggested products and the Q&A and the product reviews and the “people also bought” you know all of that is complicating an Amazon page. So I think for SEO purposes, it would be more impactful on Google for that property to be on an e-com page than on an Amazon page.

Steve: So just curious, are all the principles that we’ve kind of talked about, are they applicable to copy on your own personal e-commerce site as well?

Karon: Most of them yes.

Steve: And so would you actually recommend using bullet points on your personal e-commerce site, kind of like the way— okay.

Karon: Yes. Bullets are awesome in an e-com environment.

Steve: Okay. And this is kind of using the same principles for the bullet points as on Amazon for your e-commerce to improve conversions?

Karon: Yes you can. I always—one of my favorite saying is, “You should taste that.” But yeah, I mean you could certainly start up that way and test it and see what happens. I don’t think that most traditional e-com stores would have bullets that are as long as what we see on Amazon these days.

Steve: Sure. Okay. And this is just kind of like another random question. How does it differ when you are trying to optimize something for Google versus Amazon? Like what are some of the main differences?

Karon: Amazon is its own universe. There are no outside influences that we know about on Amazon internal search engine. They pull from fields that they designate, that are located on their site. You can’t build link popularity to your Amazon page and have it show up higher in Amazon’s internal search engine because outside forces don’t have any bearing on it. Amazon is strictly individual keyword based. And as far as keywords go, I mean there are other elements that cause you to rank higher; your sales ranking, your seller feedback and blah, blah, blah, but as far as keywords go.

And in Google there are many, many outside influences beyond your website that can impact where you rank on Google search engine; social media, blogging has a bearing, back links have a bearing, tons of different elements go into this. The navigation of your site which would be on page element, that doesn’t have to do with key words or copy. So Google has a much broader algorithm than Amazon does.

Steve: It seems like Amazon algorithm still is pretty basic at this point, right?

Karon: It’s getting more simple every time they make changes. It used to be very complicated to write SEO copy way back when– and the more sophisticated Google algorithms gets, the easier it becomes to write great search engine copy.

Steve: Okay. Hey Karon we’ve been chatting for quite a while. Everything we talked about today, I understand you have a book that kind of covers some of the basics of Amazon and how to write great copy, what are some of the books that you’ve written that you would recommend to the audience if they are interested in this for specifically for e-commerce actually.

Karon: Specifically for e-commerce, I have one called e-commerce Copywriting, that goes through from creating a keyword based navigation all the way down to ideas for generating product copy and things of that nature that’s been selling for years now, and it is updated regularly so that it is current.

And there’s also for those that are specifically interested in creating Amazon product listings, there’s Amazon Advantage which is my product strategy guide that walks you through everything that we’ve talked about here, and a whole lot more including the entire system that we use for keyword research for Amazon and formatting those fields, so that you get the most impact that can drive the most amount of traffic through the keywords.

Steve: Okay. And if anyone is looking for your services or they want to contact you where can they find you?

Karon: www.marketingwords.com.

Steve: Okay and do you have a contact form there where people can reach you?

Karon: Yeah sure I do.

Steve: Awesome. Okay. Well Karon thanks a lot for coming on the show. It was really great to see how the mind of a copywriter works with respect to Amazon.

Karon: Thank you Steve. It’s always a lot of fun to get together with you. And I understand you have a landmark birthday coming up, so happy birthday early.

Steve: I do. Thank you. I will not reveal my age however.

Karon: Me either.

Steve: All right Karon take care. Thanks a lot for coming on the show.

Karon: Thanks a lot, see you later.

Steve: All right see you.

I hope you enjoyed that episode. Selling on Amazon is super hot right now and there are many little tweaks that you can make to increase your sales dramatically, and copywriting definitely makes a huge difference.

For more information about this episode, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/episode74, and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes, and leave me a review, because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks, so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice.

It’s also the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends, because the greatest gift that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person, or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive, I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information, go to; www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

And once again, I just want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I personally recommend, if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. They’ve got an incredible theme store, where you can choose from a wide variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t need to hire a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba so you can easily find products to sell online.

So bottom-line everything from design to sourcing, to payment processing is all built in and you simply have to populate it with your own products, and you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcomers.com/mywifequitherjob. Thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

073: Student Story: Creating A Profitable Business Selling Your Art With Arree Chung

Student Story Arree Chung On How To Transition From Artist To Entrepreneur

Arree Chung is one of the students in my Create A Profitable Online Store Course. And what I like about Arree is that he’s a professional artist who writes and illustrates his own children’s picture books.

Now most artists try to make money by selling prints and copies of their work but Arree realized early on that that path would not generate enough income to make a living.

So Arree and a group of his friends got together and decided to launch Live In A Story, a site that sells high quality children’s wall decals designed by artists.

Today his shop is doing really well so I invited him on the podcast today to talk about his experiences in starting his online store. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • Why most artists are poor and what mindset to take as an entrepreneur
  • Why Arree decided to sell wall decals
  • How to leverage your artistic talents to start a business
  • The hardest part about starting an online store
  • How to validate your niche before you begin selling
  • How Arree found his first customers for his online store

Other Resources And Books

Want To Learn How To Start A Profitable Ecommerce Store?

Create  A Profitable Online StoreDid you enjoy listening to Arree’s story? If you would like to create your own profitable online store and join a community of like minded entrepreneurs, then sign up for my full blown course on how to create a profitable online store.

My course offers over 60+ hours of video and includes live office hours where you can ask me questions directly.

If you want to learn everything there is to know about ecommerce, be sure to check it out!

Sponsors

This episode was sponsored by Big Commerce. If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick a shout out to this episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store. And BigCommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here is what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce doesn’t really nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

Now there’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba which is new, so you can easily find products to sell online. Now if you are interested in starting your own online store using BigCommerce is as about as easy as it gets. Everything from design, to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products.

You can literally start your online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. Today I’m really happy to have Arree Chung on the show and Arree is actually a student in my Create a Profitable Online store course, and it’s actually been a while since I’ve had a student on my podcast, but recently I got some emails from people wanting to hear about more students, because they want to hear about people who are actively in the trenches.

People at the very beginning instead of already established players. Now Arree is kind of unique and that he’s an artist in the purest sense, and prior to starting his online store, he was actually a full-time illustrator. And as you know, making it as an artist can be kind of tough. A lot of artists try to sell their own prints online, or they try to sell their own drawings, and there is a reason why they have the term starving artist.

Now instead of giving up on his art and pursuing a completely orthogonal profession just to make money, Arree has kind of managed to merge his artistic passions in with his business, he is the founder of liveinastory.com, which sells high quality decors with his own illustrated art. Now, but these decors are not just limited to Arree’s illustrations, he’s actually signed on many artists to create custom decors and his shop is just starting to take off. He’s now doing four figures per month, and he is just at the tip of the ice-berg. And so, with that intro, welcome to the show Arree, how’re you doing today man?

Arree: I’m great, thanks for inviting me Steve.

Steve: Yeah, really happy to have you. And I thought if you could just take a couple of moments and tell the audience about how you kind of came up with the idea with liveinastory.com.

Arree: Yeah sure. So I have a lot of friends who are having babies and actually I used to promise my friends that I would paint them a mural in their kids’ room. My best friend who had his son Jade about– I’m going to say about seven years ago, I promised him that I would paint his kid’s room and then– I was in arts school at the time, and just months and months passed on because everyone is busy, and it’s actually a ton of work to do so.

But I made good on it, and I drove to his place in Sacramento and bought all these paints and just worked like a dog for like two days and– but I created this really beautiful environment and I was really happy to contribute and make something for him. And– but I definitely thought to myself like that’s not scalable and I would probably only do that for one of my best friends. Even then I just don’t have the time to do it.

Steve: But you are doing my house next right Arree, that will be…

Arree: Yeah, if you have another baby then, [inaudible] [0:05:04] but how I came up with the idea latter on was, I actually wanted to be a picture book artist for the longest time, and I finally had the opportunity to do so. And one of my friends Brian Won also came out with a picture book called “Hooray for Hat,” and somebody wrote on his– wrote article about his book, and just praised the illustrations that they were so delightful there.

They could work as home decors, that you could just buy the book and literally buy two copies and cut out one of the pages of one book and make wall decors or prints off of them, and that’s when the magical idea came to me that instead of painting people’s walls that you can leverage the beautiful art in children’s books to make wall decors.

And then I started researching wall decors and I just saw the art work in wall decors is not of anybody, but the wall décor art out there is terrible. I mean it’s made by people who haven’t really dedicated their lives to making beautiful illustrations for kids, and just doesn’t have a sense– the same kind of soul or story behind it, and so I got really excited about that. And that’s when I just knew I had to do this business.

Steve: So one thing I love about you is that you are so passionate about your business. Now, we’ve actually had the opportunity to have lunch and chat, and I can just feel the passion that’s exuding from your pores, and one thing I like actually, and we had this conversation over lunch one day, we were just talking about artists and how they can make money, and how they sell art in the first place. So one thing we did talk about is, why didn’t you decide to sell prints and how did you kind of merge your inner entrepreneur and your inner artist?

Arree: Yeah. So I think I’ve always been an artist at heart, and just give me a little bit of background and then I’ll go forward is, I actually graduated at Davis with Economics degree and I worked in business world, and while I was working in the business world, I always want to draw and to make stories. And then I took a leap of faith and quit that consultant job for a job at Pixar and from Pixar, I quit to go to art school and then just basically through logic, and reason behind and just pursue my passion, and I think that’s what a lot of artists do is that they pursue what just feels right in their gut.

But then when it comes to making a living, I think it’s difficult, there’s just no way around saying that it’s difficult because you have to create your vision and you have to create a service or a product. So out of art school I started working through video games and I made a lot of games I just wasn’t into or passionate about, but they were good paying jobs and I learnt a lot. And so I started thinking of two things, one what kind of art that I want to create in the world which was picture books, which happens to be a product that is a business.

So I started pursuing that, but that’s also a very difficult endeavor to do, and then I started thinking about what is it that I would want to make in the world, and whenever I like walked into a twist store or a book store, and I go to book stores all the time, I just see a lot of really neat things and I just want to make something that would live there as well. Like I always felt like, I can make something that could be here.

And I just didn’t know necessarily how to get there. So I think the merging between entrepreneur and artist has always been with me, and as I’m getting older and more experienced in– through work experiences I’ve been able to merge [ph] the two. So going to your original question of why not sell art prints is I think a lot of artists think that they can sell art prints online, and some do actually do quite well, I don’t want to say that you can’t do it at all. You have to have a built in audience that you are selling to, and you also have to think about what– you have to view your art work and I know this might sound unpopular, but you have to view your artwork as a product.

What is it that people want to buy, and how do you differentiate yourself. I think your class has been great because we do start from the finding a niche on Google, and using the key word planner just worked tremendous, I mean pure simple businesses meeting demand, and I think that there’s lots of businesses that support selling prints online, and they are in the business of distributing prints, they are not in the business of building your brand and building your art work.

So I think that a lot of artists end up wanting to sell hundreds of prints, but they don’t put the time into marketing their prints, finding distribution of their prints. They don’t think of all of the business parts of running a business to actually move products.

Steve: So in that respect– I can’t even remember the last time I actually bought a print. But in order to sell something as an artist it almost feels like you need to have a large built in audience that really cares about your work and that sort of thing. And so when you chose decors it kind of made the product a little bit more broad, right? These are families who are just having children. They want to decorate their child’s room, and in the meantime they are reading all these children’s books, so it would be kind of cool to have those characters on their walls. [It’s alright] [ph]. And so that was kind of how you got the idea.

Arree: Definitely, absolutely and I think that wall decors is a good application of art to a product need where instead of painting the wall and sort of hiring someone, they can conveniently buy a product that they can decorate the room in ten minutes, 15 minutes.

Steve: I thought I’d just share this with the listeners out there. Arree just recently licensed all the goodnight moon artwork for his decors as well which I thought that was pretty cool.

Arree: Yeah we are working on that product right now and we are working on how we are going to launch it, but it’s really exciting. I think it’s going to raise awareness for our company as well as add a classic to all these contemporary artists that we’ve signed on.

Steve: So let’s talk about– let’s go back in the beginning when you first got started now. And you know you are still in the trenches, but what were some of the most difficult parts for you about getting started?

Arree: Yeah, so I think probably the first question that we had was how are we going to produce the products? Were we going to find a manufacturer in China or are we going to try and produce this thing ourselves? Also just thinking about the concepts of our brand and our story and how to be very genuine and true to it. So as an artist myself I care a lot about the little details. About you know I care about the edges. I care about that this product works. I’m putting my name on it. All my friends I’m working with in the children’s book industry; they all care really deeply about it. So from that perspective it was actually an easy decision to say, “Well, we probably have to manufacture these things ourselves at least in the beginning to where we know we can really stand behind the quality.”

And so I think the hardest part in the beginning was actually just figuring out how to make a great quality wall décor, how to produce it efficiently.

Steve: Okay, and let’s talk about some of the research aspects. I mean wall décor spends a whole bunch of different things. How did you kind of settle on the main designs that you wanted to target?

Arree: Oh right. So in design-wise, there are a lot of tools that you can use online. I don’t know if this website is still up or not because I looked recently, but there’s a website called Etsyology that…

Steve: Yeah unfortunately it went down.

Arree: Yeah I think too many people were researching a lot out of it. But it was a really great researching tool where you can find stores that are selling specific items, and you can look up what their average selling price is and what not. But actually I found that a little bit later. You know I’m a pretty numbers-metric-driven guy. And so we actually found a few stores that we thought, that we saw that they were doing quite well. And we actually went through Etsy and downloaded their sales data. You know it’s public domain.

If you go Etsy store you can just look through it. And by doing– I think we downloaded ten stores or so sales data for a year, and just went through and systematically looked at what people buy and we just categorized them. And that gave us a good idea of what kind of product next to offer which is actually like you know like now six months later. It’s holding true that we discovered people pretty much for the most part want to buy trees, tree wall decors. From there we did analytics keywords search and also saw demand was there, and that’s when I knew that there was an opportunity. And your class really gave me the confidence that I could pull it off.

Steve: So one question I did have to ask you was, why did you decide to do your own website as opposed to just relying on Etsy for example as your main platform.

Arree: Yeah so Etsy– there is a couple of different reasons. One is Etsy is their own platform and you don’t have to rely on them, so being reliant on them if they change any of their rules or what not, your business can be wiped out right away. There are also a ton of competition on Etsy, and by running our own website we could utilize Google adwords and drive traffic that way as well as do social media and a lot more long term things. And probably maybe the biggest reason after that is that we want to establish a brand that is going to make just beautiful products out of children’s book art work. And that’s something that will be you know bigger than just an Etsy store.

Steve: So here is the thing. If all of you guys are listening, can you just go and check out his site. It’s at www.liveinastory.com it’s actually a very beautiful website and the art work is incredible. So one thing that I get often, a question that I get asked is, some people especially artists, they are a little squeamish because they might not be tech-savvy at all, so how did you actually create your website and what platform did you kind of settle on.

Arree: So I partnered up– I think in the beginning of starting a company it’s really good to think about what your strengths are and what your weaknesses are, and certainly there are a lot of things that you just don’t have experience on that you are going to have to learn. So when I started the company, I found co-founders that balance each other really well. And so my friend Catalina, she, and I worked out a previous start up together. She’s tech-savvy, and so she ended up taking on the website and I knew that between her and I that we could build the website together. I believe that she is using Blue Host as the shopping cart. And then I think we have a template that she basically is building off of.

Steve: Okay, so you guys are just using open source?

Arree: Yeah.

Steve: Okay cool. Had it been you by yourself, you probably would have chosen a different route.

Arree: Yeah if it was me by myself I would just do Shopify, because I know that they have a great deal. I think the templates look really nice, but I think that– I have experience using the Squarespace for my own personal website that I did by myself for most part. And I think there are positives and negatives to using those services. Now the positive of using the templates is you are pretty much good to go, it’s pretty first and easy, but adjusting anything is a real hustle. You really have to– even for developers, adjusting a template can be kind of scary. So sometimes it’s easier just to build something custom. And I think like long-term optimizing your own website is probably a lot easier than building a website if that is if you have the technical capacity in house.

Steve: So in terms of getting started for you, you had to figure how to produce your products. You got the website covered with your partner. What were some of the other things that you had to do that were kind of difficult when you first got started?

Arree: Yeah, there’s a bunch of little nitty-gritty things. So finding the right printer and the right cutter and the production sort of the production requirements; initially we really wanted to bootstrap completely on a very small budget. So we were actually planning on running out of our garage during the garage start up. It turns out that the power requirements for our large printer just wouldn’t work in a garage, and we would need a lot more space. So we ended up to having to an office and finding an office that would fit our budget and what not is also a big task. So you know that probably took us a month. But those were some of those initial huddles.

Steve: And then– actually I’m just curious how much did you spend just to start this business?

Arree: Okay so the monthly– I want to say probably less than $2,000 initially to start. Yeah it’s not too bad. So our equipments we’re leasing. It’s pretty much lease to own. So the monthly is actually quite affordable. But when you add rent and what not then you do have at least a few thousand dollars of expenses every month. But you know, overall that’s still a pretty low burn rate for a company.

Steve: So can we talk about your decision to actually print these yourself as opposed to just using a third party in the beginning. I mean sure the quality might not be nearly as good, but at least you can get up and running without that initial cost.

Arree: So we did actually look at that. We contacted a bunch of people and there just wasn’t. If we were going to use a third party for them to produce the décor, they would just charge us too much and it would eat up all the profits. That just doesn’t seem like a very viable solution. Like for us to sell– so we sell these trees for about $100, and if we are going to have a company produce these trees for us, they would charge us over $100 just to…

Steve: Oh really.

Arree: And for us to get the cost way down, we’ve had to really work on how to optimize the printing and how to use the least amount of paper. So there’s all this work that actually goes into making the product an affordable product. And if we are going to go with a third party, we’d still have to turn around those files and actually work with them hands-on, and just be really back and forth on it. And then they would definitely charge big time. And then the material itself in the mark up that they would charge too still would pretty much eat away all your profits. It just wasn’t actually a business opportunity there.

Steve: One thing I like about just you and your business is that you have a long term vision for your profitability. So I’m just curious, in order to generate some quick profits, did you ever at any time think of just getting some of these decors from like Asia or what not, and just selling them so that you can make some money, bootstrap your business and eventually sell your own stuff? Like what was the thought process in terms of short term money versus the long term?

Arree: When I was initially researching the niche of wall decors, I got super excited because you could buy these decors from overseas for a dollar or less. And there are people on the internet that are selling them for $70 and they are producing– they are buying it at volume for $5 or less; sometimes a $1 or less. But that wasn’t consistent to what our brand was and who we were and that wasn’t something that I wouldn’t be proud of sticking my name on it. So we never entertained that thought at all and I just put it as a challenge to ourselves that we would need to value the long-term vision, and need to be able to produce a design that people are willing to pay money for to become profitable.

And what I’m really proud about in the– you know I think we’ve really had about four months of sales in terms of having our website up and doing very little bit of marketing. We have lots of satisfied customers and we are getting some word of mouth referrals.

So I feel like we are building a brand right from day one and people are talking about us in a positive way, which is something that I don’t think that could have happened if we just bought products from overseas and try to sell it.

Steve: Yeah there’s a lot of generic products out there. I know firsthand from seeing your product that is top notch quality and the printing is on a different level as well. So let’s talk about sales a little bit. So how did you actually get your first sale?

Arree: You know it’s– we got our first sale– I want to share with you actually some maybe embarrassing story. Initially when we started the website we were just trying to throw a lot of traffic at it through adwords. And a lot meaning like 50 people a day, it’s not a lot. And for the first week or two, we actually didn’t have any sales. But later on we actually discovered that there was an error in the shopping cart.

So our first sale our first week would have come that first week. We just didn’t discover this till much later you know that error has been fixed, but theoretically our first sale should have been through the shopping cart. But our first sale was actually just through word of mouth. We started on Facebook, we did a blog post and then our first sale actually came from a former co-worker, and he was buying– he bought the [inaudible: 00:23:19] animals for his brother in law that they were having a baby. And so that was our first sale. And then from there, librarians started like hearing about us and librarians…

Steve: How did the librarians start hearing about you?

Arree: So we started a Twitter account and we also started a Facebook account, and we started a blog. I did a blog post on our vision and how and what we wanted to do. And there’s just a really great community on twitter of librarians that started sharing that blog post and people started talking about it on Facebook. And so we got a lot of traction just off the bat with the book community.

So the children’s book community is just a really amazing, supportive, encouraging, community that really values kids and books and creativity. They are so encouraging and whenever they see something that they are excited about, they talk about it. So we haven’t done a ton of marketing yet and that’s actually what we are going to work on next. But our initial sales have actually come through just people talking about us online.

Steve: That’s amazing. So these librarians, do they buy it for the library or are they buying them for themselves?

Arree: They buy it for the libraries.

Steve: So that market is probably pretty small I would imagine.

Arree: I actually ran the numbers on how many librarians there are in the United States. So it’s very niche. I think there is 125,000 libraries in the United States. And so it certainly isn’t– it’s middle skill compared to how many parents there are of course. But I think that is a market that’s underserved, and that’s just really, really low.

Steve: So you started with librarians and then what is your plan going forward? I know a lot– so let’s talk about what you’ve been working on. Because I know a lot of what you’ve been working on is kind of some of the infrastructure for your store, and poising for growth later on, that’s why I mentioned you were kind of on the plasp [ph]. So what have you– what are some of the things you’ve been working on in terms of products?

Arree: Yeah, so in terms of products I think there’s two main elements that we’re working on, there’s– the first thing is having really amazing artwork and a vision for the product lines. So we’ve been working on the perfect – so called perfect catalogue that we would want to offer parents and librarians. And then going through and contacting those artists and seeing if they’d be interested in working with us and to my delight, there’s so many great artists that we’re bringing on fairly shortly. So Molly Idle, she does this book called “Flora and the Flamingo.” It won the Caldecott Honor award, a year or two ago. We have artwork with Greg Pizzoli, and he won the Dr. Seuss award a couple of years ago for his book “The Watermelon Seed,” and he’s making really amazing artwork. You know, all these people make really amazing artwork every year.

Steve: So what is your value prop? Like how do you convince them to come on?

Arree: Oh, it’s actually a pretty simple value prop. The value prop is that– the first part of it is you know just making beautiful artwork out of your décor, out of your artwork. It’s just a fun thing that most artists are interested in. But I think the longer term value prop is that; artists especially picture book artists are building their own brands with every single book that they do. And it’s just a natural extension of their characters in the stories, and there’s lots of librarians and parents that love your work already, and you’re just giving them another opportunity to extend that story and to support your artwork.

Steve: So these artists, do they already have a built in audience in email list that they can tap into to sell these decors?

Arree: They do, so a lot of them have– like Molly has thousands of followers on Twitter. Another person that we’re in the contract talks with, but he’s interested is Aaron Becker. And he did this book called Journey and Quest. And it’s been named one of the top 100 picture books of all time. And so for all these artists they’re building their reputation with every single book, and they’re building through social media, their own lists, and what not. So we’re going to – we’re actually working on the infrastructure businesswise to also give them credit for the traffic that they actually send to the store, so then they’ll earn a referral fee and talk…

Steve: Are you allowed to comment on what the revenue break is? Like when someone buys a decor from you that was designed by somebody else?

Arree: Oh, sure, yeah. Absolutely, so I’m a big fan of being honest and transparent, and I think it’s helpful. So in typical product licensing, a royalty will run you anywhere between 4% to say 20%. So for example if I made a bunch of flower designs and I tried to license that to a company that makes bedding, since I’m probably not very reputable, they’ll probably just give me about 4% of — 4% royalty. And then if you say try to license, I don’t know, marvel characters from Disney, which is a huge property, they can take upwards of 20, 25%.

Steve: Wow, okay.

Arree: And at that point, then they’re eating up a lot of the profits. So we do a pretty standard royalty which is– you know I believe in giving a very healthy royalty, because I only want to work with the best talent. And so we’re paying a royalty of 12% to all the artists, and it’s extremely healthy royalty, and so from a product stand point, you know if we’re selling something for $100, $12 goes to the artist, so it’s a really great revenue.

Steve: Yeah, so you’re kind of like a Zazzle in a way, so to speak, right?

Arree: In some ways yes, and in some ways no. I think that Zazzle it does not build– like they’re more in the business of just getting a lot of traffic, and selling [inaudible; 00:29:22] products, so I don’t– they’re not trying to build an artist’s…

Steve: No, absolutely, absolutely. No I mean I love your model, because you’re an artist, but there’s no way you could put out the volume of designs and just by licensing artists that are kind of within your own network and within your very small niche, you’re able to get a whole bunch of designs. And it’s kind of a win-win, right? For these artists, they don’t have to do any work once the licensing takes place, right?

Arree: Well, they – yeah…

Steve: And it’s just…

Arree: Yeah, they don’t have to do a lot of– I mean, they do have to help build their collections and design their own collections, and I give them feedback. So there is a little bit of work involved there, and sometimes they make some new artwork. But overall, they don’t have to worry about manufacturing, they don’t have to worry about [inaudible: 00:30:05] they don’t have to worry about all that other stuff. And to that point, I think you know, where Zazzle – the difference between we and what Zazzle does, is Zazzle is just selling a tone of mugs and T-shirts, and they don’t work with anybody specifically.

Like we’re actually spending time to market each one of our artists specifically to you know, it raises brand awareness to parents. You know we’re marketing, we’re telling them about the picture books that our artists make and what not, so yeah, it’s great.

Steve: So how do you actually convince one of these big names? It’s you mentioned that you signed on Goodnight Moon, which is pretty huge, how do you convince them to take a chance on one of the smaller guys?

Arree: So the story behind that is; I go to New York for my own picture book career and I meet with editors and what not, and last time I went I actually brought a lot of product with me, and I just started giving the product away. And I think like the way you convince most people about taking a chance with you is actually just having a very compelling vision about what you want to do. And so I just shared with them the vision of bringing really great artwork to walls. To the walls of kids homes and libraries, and I showed them what the current market is.

And so the current market right now is; there are big players that basically license Disney artwork, and big movie artwork, and you know things like Frozen and what not. And then there are a bunch of small players that offer very generic artwork, and there’s nothing in-between, and that’s where I saw opportunities to build this direct connection between artist’s work and leveraging the internet and online stores, and also building distribution through retail to fill that middle part where you’re actually offering very unique, charming artwork.

And so, it was really easy to actually– like once you tell them that story of what you want to do, it was actually pretty compelling for them to want to be a part of it. They all got excited immediately. Actually I was a little overwhelmed at– there was all these editors that started giving me new names of agents, and people I should contact. And you know they were really excited about it, and want to help as much as possible. So I think the Goodnight Moon actually came through – I’m obviously not sure exactly how I came about, but the licensing agency that represents them reached out to us, and talked about the opportunity, so…

Steve: Wow, that’s amazing.

Arree: Yeah, and I think it was through an editor, either through an editor or an agent.

Steve: Like I said, when I– the couple of times I’ve chatted with you, you’re just so passionate about your idea that it really comes across, and so that’s probably what they cued in on, and that’s why they wanted to work with you.

Arree: Yeah, you know, it’s up to me to make it happen, now.

Steve: So real quick, so you know there’s a lot of artists out there who are listening to this, and let’s say they’re photographers or they’re artists, what sort of advice would you give them if they want to start their own business that kind of involves their passion?

Arree: I think the best advice I can give anybody in terms of starting a business or even starting a creative endeavor, is actually the same thing. It’s just to get started and not to be afraid. You’re going to make lots of mistakes early on, and I’m a firm believer in just the power of will and grit, and hard work, and not being afraid of failure, and actually reaching out to people, and figuring things out along the way.

So I’ve learned a lot about life, and just becoming an artist. Like you know I started really becoming an artist when I was 25, you know I’m 37 now and you know that 10,000 hour rule that people talk about, where it takes 10,000 hours or roughly ten years to be great at anything, is a 100% true, and I’ve seen it in my life, and I think if you’re starting a business, or you’re starting anything, it just takes a lot of time and dedication to get really good at it.

Steve: Let me ask you a question in a different way. Would you advice that these people do something, or pursue a business related to their passion, or something orthogonal?

Arree: You know, I think there’s not a one answer to that, it really depends on your personality, because I don’t think I one answer fits all. But I think if you’re clearly passionate about something that you should– starting I think takes a lot of work, and a lot of hard grit. And so if you have a passion and you can do enough research to where it makes sense that this would be a good thing to pursue, and you can make a living doing it, then I think you should wholeheartedly go after starting a business that you’re passionate about. You know…

Steve: So what would you advice, so let’s have a photographer, what are some of the ways I could research different ways to make money with the business. Like where did you go to? You mentioned earlier you did Etsy and you looked on Amazon. Are there any other places that you looked at?

Arree: No pretty much just Amazon, Etsy, and Adwords. I think that the internet– leveraging technology is really important, because everything is quantifiable now. So if you could find numbers, you can validate an idea. And then you’re not just shooting in the dark.

So for example, I think like if you’re going to start a wedding photography– or if you’re going to start a photography business, I think that a couple of key ways of going about it is you could research who else is doing what you would want to do, and then see how much social media followers they have. See what kind of support, and kind of backward engineer a plan of how you would do it, and you would be able to pretty easily quantify through using excel, and spreadsheets what you would have to do in terms of volume of, you know whether it be views and follows to you know your conversion rate, yeah. So that’s what I would do. I would actually build a spreadsheet, and try to tie that to specific metrics. That makes sense?

Steve: Okay, and– yeah, yeah, it does. And now that you’ve kind of built up an artist portfolio, and you have some other prints that you’ve licensed, what is kind of the next step for you guys in terms of marketing?

Arree: Oh, yeah great question, so we’ve learned two main things with our audience is that we– there are a lots of librarians that need wall decors to liven up their libraries and their reading rooms, and their spaces for story time. So we’re building out specific products for those librarians, and we’re going to be at ALA, American Library Association conference this summer, and so we’re marketing towards them very specifically. We’re also starting our social media presence online to reach lots of moms, and just going to offer very beautiful photography as well as helpful articles, and just get the conversation going. We haven’t put a lot of time into doing that yet, and but that’s all on the horizon, yeah.

Steve: Nice, yeah what I like about your model is you’ve kind of started out with something that’s been working which is librarians and you’re focusing on that, and then while you’re kind of strengthening that avenue, you working on other marketing avenues and building up your portfolio of products at the same time. And I think that’s just a great strategy to pursue. You’re just taking everything in baby steps, and just seeing where it goes.

Arree: Yeah, you know I read somewhere and I think it might have been even on one of your blogs that it’s good to do 50% marketing and 50% product development, because if you develop all your products without doing any marketing, then you might be at this point where you spent so much time and money developing something that you don’t know whether it works or not. And then if you market too early and you don’t have anything to talk about, then you’re really then just wasting your time.

Steve: Yeah.

Arree: So you sort of need to build them simultaneously in baby steps as you said.

Steve: So Arree where can people check out your works? I know you’ve got a nice really cool children’s book which I got autographed from you, thank you very much. Where can people find you? Where can they look at your works, and if anyone has any questions for you, where can they contact you?

Arree: Yeah, so the first place to go is liveinastory.com and you’ll see lots of great wall decors and artists we are working with, and then I have a personal website for my children’s books. Its arree.com, A-R-R-E-E.com, and then if anyone wants to email me; they can email me at arreechung@gmail.com.

Steve: Awesome and I know that there’s a lot of artists out there listening, and who knows, maybe they have their own art portfolio also. All right, hey well thanks a lot for coming to the show Arree, really happy to have you.

Arree: All right, take care.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Arree is actually one of the few pure artists who signed up for my course to create a business based on his artwork. And I’m really ecstatic that he’s doing really well. And if you couldn’t tell from the interview, Arree exudes passion, so please go check out his work at liveinastroy.com. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode 73, and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes, and leave me a review, because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks, so other people can use this info, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support this show, and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person, or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive, I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information, go to; mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

And once again, I just want to thank BigCommerce for sponsoring this episode. BigCommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend, if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. They’ve got an incredible theme store, where you can choose from a wide variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t need to hire a designer, and they offer integration with Alibaba, so you can easily find products to sell online.

So bottom-line everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing is all built in and you just have to populate it with your products and you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob. Thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own inline business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at triple www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

072: How To Create An Online Business That Suits Your Lifestyle With Scott Fox

Scott Fox On How To Create A Business That Suits Your Lifestyle

Scott Fox is someone who randomly reached out to me over 3 years ago and we’ve loosely kept in touch ever since. If you’ve never heard of Scott, he has built or advised hundreds of websites that have generated billions of dollars in sales including sites like LiveNation.com and Billoreilly.com. 

He’s the best-selling Author of 3 books, including his most recent one Click Millionaires: Work Less, Live More with an Internet Business You Love.

Today, Scott is an internet startup coach and runs a portfolio of niche websites including the popular free entrepreneur coaching forum at ClickMillionaires.com. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How to find the right business idea for your personality
  • The 9 keys to creating a successful business
  • Which online business model that Scott prefers over the rest
  • How to build an online community
  • How to reach out and meet influencers online
  • The most important aspect of growing your business
  • How to design a high converting website
  • How to design for mobile
  • When to diversify your businesses
  • How to Google proof your site

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

This episode was sponsored by Big Commerce. If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to Mywifequitherjo.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick shout out to this episode’s sponsor – Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store, and Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here is what I like about Bigcommerce; unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce doesn’t really nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

Now there’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs so you don’t really need a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba which is new, so you can easily find products to sell online. Now if you are interested in starting your own online store using Bigcommerce is as about as easy as it gets. Everything from design, to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products.

You can literally start your online store in a matter of hours. Simply go towww.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I am really excited to have Scott Fox on the show. Now Scott is actually someone who randomly reached out to me, I want to say two years ago maybe, and we’ve kind of loosely kept in touch ever since. Now if you’ve never heard Scott, he has built or advised hundreds of websites that have generated billions of dollars in sales including popular sites like livenation.com and billorilley.com. He is also the bestselling author of three books including his most recent one, Click Millionaires: Work less live more with an internet business lifestyle that you love. Now today Scott is an internet start-up coach, a father and he runs a portfolio of niche sites including the popular free entrepreneur coaching forum at clickmillionaires.com.

Bottom line Scott knows a lot about creating niche websites for profit and how to create lifestyle businesses which makes him ideal for my podcast. And with that welcome to the show Scott, how are you doing today man?

Scott: Good Steve thanks for having me, nice to talk to you.

Steve: Yes so give us the quick background story about how you got started on the internet and how your journey kind of led to Click Millionaires.

Scott: Sure, it’s a longer story than most. I was involved in the internet in the early 90s which is, these days, going to be a while ago. That’s because I was at Stanford in the early days and this thing people kept talking about and producing– there was email and is very all text-based. This is before there were even images on the internet.
And long story short the Palo Alto in the early nineties was a good place to be for sort of a human incubator or for future internet entrepreneurs. Everybody knows that story by now and I got involved in the internet then. And I raised money for my first dot com in ’96 and I’ve had lots of ups and downs since then, but along the way figured out that there is a lot of opportunity online. And a lot of people don’t get to hear about how to do this. They are kind of getting left out of the revolution.

I made up my mission once I had made enough money to do so; to write books and podcasts and offer forum services and stuff like that. To help other people who are not necessarily blessed like you or me with a particularly– I’ve got a business background and you’ve got a technical background, and they don’t necessarily have those tools. And I thought it was important to try to share the fruits of the revolution that is happening online with other folks. And that’s what my books and coaching forum are about; to help other people figure out there are opportunities here for anybody. It’s not easy, it’s not quick, but it’s a new way of living and that is the lifestyle business which I know we are going to talk about.

Steve: Yes for sure, so you aren’t a part of somebody’s larger company anymore right; today you just kind of run a bunch of niche websites? Is that accurate?

Scott: That’s right; I would like to say I graduated. (Chuckles)

Steve: Graduated?

Scott: Yes so some of the bigger ones you mentioned I can’t personally claim I made billions, but when you build websites like livenation.com that’s billions of dollars of ticket transactions every year. It’s for real, so I give the money from my books to charity and our forum at clickmillionaires.com is free. I’m still making money but it’s really not from helping other people learn to do this. It’s from other niche businesses that I’ve started.

Steve: You know it’s funny there is often this disconnect; a lot of people think that when you start a business you have to shoot for the moon like start the next Amazon or the next Facebook, but there is a lot of business that you can just kind of create on the side that will exceed your income and you can live quite comfortably doing that. So that’s what we are going to be talking about today.

Scott: Yeah, I think that’s a great point. People think you got to be Mark Zuckerberg or Steve Jobs or something. There is kind of myth of like the lone genius who is going to conquer the world. I guess it started back with Thomas Edison or something, but it doesn’t have to be about that and a lot of my approach in my books and so forth, is about having a portfolio of businesses just like venture capitalists invest in a bunch of companies. They are not like going to put their money in and hope that it’s going to become Google right. They put in a bunch of little things and some rise, some fall, some muddle along and you know over time you make money in a bunch of different ways, so that’s what I like to do.

Steve: Yes since you’ve worked with a bunch of different websites I thought it would be pretty interesting to get your take on how to get started as a brand new internet entrepreneur today. So I thought we’d just kind of go over some of the different business models, and I’m going to create kind of like a scenario for you. Let’s say I have like a one to two year time window where I kind of want to gradually replace my income and quit. So in that respect, with that scenario what kind of business models would you recommend online; how would you go about getting started?

Scott: The big thing for me, I think is a real paradigm shift from the way that people tend to think. There is so much out there about like find your passion and follow your passion and do what you love, and the money will follow and that’s supper. But if you’ve got a mortgage and you’ve got a timeline, your passion may not turn into cash real quick, so the offer is very different. If you are like I’m going to build this up over the next twenty years so that when I retire I have some extra income. That’s very different than what you are suggesting, so if you are talking about making real money right away, or again not right away, this is not instant cum not a get rich quick game.

Steve: Sure, right.

Scott: But getting right to it, focusing on the money, the number one thing is you got to find a need and this is, I know you know this, we are talking in theory in general, right? You got to help people. I actually have seven principles in the Click Millionaire’s book. You said you were flipping through it last night, you might have seen this chapter. The seven principles that I have found, not just to design a business, I’m not trying to teach people to found Microsoft, right.
You really do need a technical background and millions of dollars and a big team to do all that. I’m talking about little niche businesses. So if you are going to do that there are seven principles in the book. The first one is really obvious; help people. You’ve got to find a problem and solve it, and the more painful that problem is, the sooner you can solve it, the sooner you’ll make money. That may be a little obvious, but that’s where I start every time. It’s not about your passion, if you want to make money, you got to find a problem and solve it.

Steve: Okay so where are some good places to find problems?

Scott: Yeah exactly, so that’s what leads to the interesting part and that’s where the passion does come in because you can look at your own life. Look around and find out what annoys you in your life? What’s the problem that bothers you? You see lots of apps out there that solve different things, or make things more convenient, right? What is an area that you are passionate about? You are big into yoga or you are a gardener or you love to restore old cars; I don’t know.
That’s where the passion can come in because I really do think passion is important if you are entrepreneur, because if you don’t love it what’s the point, right? You can get a job. But if you are going to create your own job across between your passion and a commercial need that other people need filled is the right place. So that’s a little airy fairy, but what I’m saying is look at things that bug you.

Where is the biggest problem that you can help address, and if you can help other people figure out how to solve that you can sell them information, you can could sell them products, you could sell them services, you could broker those things, there is lots of ways to solve it through this, amazing internationally distributed internet thing.

Steve: So how do you determine whether a particular area is too saturated or not?

Scott: Well then you’ve got to go online and that’s the beauty of the web, right? You go to some Google searches and see what’s out there. What’s interesting to me is that a lot of people immediately get turned off if there is competition, and that’s potentially a valid approach, right? Just try and start a general purpose bookstore right now online?
That’s going to be tough taking on Amazon, right?

So you got to be realistic about this stuff, but I would look and think deeper. In a lot of cases you’ve got to go to a second, third or even a forth level niche. Let’s say pick books, let’s say you don’t do a general bookstore, you do books that appeal to sports people, athletes okay you know, what’s sport? You drill down to scuba diving or to field hokey or whatever and narrow, narrow, narrow and find a problem. Where is something that is being underserved, and that’s a research task that is hard to quantify.

Where you can get a little more quantifiable and you probably know this part as well is, with Google Trends and Google keyword planner and things like this you can go in and actually get reports on things, how much are things searched for and where is less competition and where there is more competition. That’s sort of validation can help you. I kind of like to do a mix of that stuff with my own gut, because the fact is if you found a niche because there’s an area you’re passionate about and you actually know that Google may not know it yet either. You really know that there’s a lack of information about scuba diving in Belize because you were there last month and your cousin lives there or whatever, you’ve got some insight angle. I would run with that crossed with some quantifiable research.

Steve: So what are some of the search guidelines that you have when you are doing the research?

Scott: Well you want to look at volume of keyword searches per month. If you see somebody– I just made that up, but Belize scuba diving. If there’s a billion searches and little competition; wow that was easy, right? It’s not going to be that easy though. And you’re probably going to drill down and you probably want something that’s got several thousand searches a month. And that will point you in the direction of an area to explore, and then the further you go you want to figure out what’s a variety of different ways to say that.

This is basic SEO stuff, Belize scuba diving, scuba diving Belize, you know the major towns in Belize, or maybe major equipment manufacturers for scuba diving equipment, or different keywords related to that, and build a bunch of pages around that. That’s sort of 2007 version of SEO, that’s not the whole game anymore, but that’s enough to give you a solid platform, hopefully in an area that isn’t completely overrun by competition.

Steve: Okay, so based on what you said, once you kind of have a niche you mentioned putting together some sort of information site and starting writing about it, would that be your next logical step?

Scott: Well that gets to your question earlier which is kind of you were implicitly asking about business models as you well know as ecommerce guy, there’s lots of different ways to skin a cat, right?

Steve: Yeah, yeah.

Scott: So you could– my natural thing is that I just like situations where I don’t have to carry inventory, because there is just a lot expense with that right? So I tend to gravitate towards publishing models or information products; blogs, videos, podcasts, things like that. But there’s a perfectly valid approach, and I’ve done it many times and made money that way too as you know better than I. At this point you can buy a bunch of stuff and ship things to people, and there’s a good margin there too if you find the right niche.

So that’s a part of the process I think of once you’ve identified scuba diving in Belize what’s missing, right? If there’s fifty blogs about it well maybe that’s not it, but maybe nobody’s sending out this particular type of equipment that’s appropriate for that market, or something maybe that’s native to the Belize market. There’s some product that the local folks make that hasn’t been marketed well, and you can get into physical e-commerce real quickly again through the Internet. But those are very different models obviously.

Steve: Yeah I just thought I’d comment on that a little bit. So I’ve done e-commerce and I’ve done the info route. I have a blog, I’ve done affiliate marketing, and the blog just took a lot longer to make significant income because it took a long time to develop that audience. Whereas with e-commerce I had something right away that I could sell, and so the money kind of came sooner rather than later. So that’s why I gave you that one to two year time frame. What would you suggest; do you think you could pull off an info-related site within that time frame?

Scott: In terms of making real big money from it?

Steve: Not big money, but just income let’s say fifty thousand dollars.

Scott: It is harder to see. I agree with your point, I’m glad you’re talking about– speaking up here, it’s not just about me because you have as much expertise in this area as I do. So let’s make this two way [laughter].

Steve: Sure.

Scott: I think it’s a harder road, but I also think it’s easier to produce if you have a passion and you’re not as technical. How’s that? So I think you can make a little money and grow it overtime, and the key from what I’m driving at and this is just different structure for different folks right it’s not there is a right or wrong. I’m really trying to help people find lifestyle businesses.

If you want to live the lifestyle where you go scuba diving in Belize a lot, blogging about that is going to be something that serves your needs. Maybe not just financially, but also in your life and that’s something that my books are about that a lot of– I don’t see in any other business books which is what do you want to do? How do you want to spend your time, and if you are only focused on making money, then scuba diving Belize probably isn’t the idea anyway, right?

Steve: Sure, sure.

Scott: So you should be selling socks or something more commercial right? So that’s– it’s hard to give specifics here and I appreciate you pressing me on, because it’s– this is the, as you know again I’m talking too much, you got to talk some more here. But the trick for every entrepreneur is figuring out this balance right; how commercial, how lifestyle, how product, how publishing, how marketing, how these are all the different levers that you have to pull as an entrepreneur.

Steve: Yes, so let’s talk about blogging because it’s something that we both do well and you have a bunch niche sites as well. What are some of the ways? So if you could just give an example of one of your niche sites and how you’ve monetized it. That would that would give us a pretty good idea of what some of the sites you have created are all about.

Scott: Sure. Well I guess my personal favorite model is communities, forums. And I just like it because as we were talking before we came on the air together, when you work alone as an Internet entrepreneur, sometimes you get a little isolated. And so I have set up several forums over the years where people get together. So one you can look at is artfairinsiders.com and this is actually a site that I talk about in all my books. Well not all my books because we didn’t start until the second book.

My star pupil is my mother, and my mother is now 73 years old, and runs a six figure website businesses all based around her interest which are art fairs. So that’s her thing. She likes art fairs, handmade art craft, stuff like that. I’m not interested in that stuff I think, but I set this up for her that we started like ten years ago I guess, 2004 so.

Steve: Wow!

Scott: Not the community, that came later, but it was early anyway. So if my mom can do it anybody listening can do it if you take time and find a niche. And this to be more specific in response to your question, this– one of these sites or several of them, but the artfairinsiders.com is a forum community for art fair artists, and there are thousands of people. Five figures is ten or twenty thousand people in there now, and it makes money through advertising.

They come and they post stuff and they talk about and share the business tips for the different art fairs they go to and where to stay in you know all that kind of stuff. And they’re both AdSense ads, affiliate ads, and actual art fairs want to sponsor things on there to reach the artists. So it’s kind of like what thirty years ago would have been a magazine. But now it’s interactive, it’s online, and the people are all there in real time. So it’s a mini Facebook for artists.

I love that kind of concept because it destroys the geography that used to keep us all a part and the internet is amazing at that, because well even as you and I right now we’re here talking to each other long distance. It’s going to be on podcast and reach people all over the world; those sorts of opportunities for communities are a personal favorite of mine.

Steve: Let’s talk about building communities because starting a forum is not easy to do. You actually– there’s often a chicken and egg problem, right?

Scott: Yeah.

Steve: You have to get people in the door and other people who want to join; they want to see these other people are already hanging out in there. So how do you do it?

Scott: For sure it’s a great question because there’s almost nothing lonelier than an empty forum, right?

Steve: Yeah.

Scott: Well I guess even lonelier is the forum with four people. That’s the worst, yes you’re right. This is something. I used to be in the music business back when there was a real music business anyway. And one of the things that bands are really good at is spreading their music through word of mouth, and leaking things out to influencers.
And all this stuff is now public knowledge through things like Seth Godin has taught us, or our Malcolm Gladwell’s books, things like that. But the idea for getting a forum going; the way I teach it and the way we talk about this at Click Millionaires forum all the time, is targeting people to leak it out slowly. It’s really hard to do a forum with one big launch and have everybody show up and maintain enthusiasm.

I would look– the quick version of this I’d like talk about it for hours is find the people that you want to attract, figure out who the key influencers are, make it very exclusive and very small to start, and basically pretend you’re in high school and you want to have a party, right? And you want the whole school to come, but find the cool kids, tell them, invite them in, incentivize and don’t charge them, maybe even pay them. Get the cool kids in, and then gradually incentivize them to leak it out on an exclusive basis. Pretend you’re a cool hip night club promoter and gradually build that up, and that can be tough in industries that aren’t cool and hip, but that’s the way it’s done, at least the way we do it and it’s worked a number of times.

Steve: So how do you convince the cool kids to come over?

Scott: Well it’s incremental, it’s probably like when you started your podcast right, you find one guy who’s medium cool and then use his name to get up to a cooler guy and a cooler girl. And gradually upgrade and pretty soon you have a dozen of those people, and you use their names to leverage. It’s a pretty manual process, but it’s repeatable.

Steve: Okay and pretty soon you get to the pinnacle and you get Scott Fox on your show.

Scott: Yeah wow.

Steve: So let’s talk about again those first cast– so we talked about communities and you mentioned you have advertising and just let’s talk a little bit about just building traffic to begin with; not necessarily with the forum. How do you get those first couple of readers or customers in the door; what’s typically been your strategy for some of these niche websites?

Scott: The basic– I always start with SEO which is having a good keyword-rich domain name and then basic links from other sites that kind of stuff that again depending on how long you’ve been in the Internet you may know that may sound new to you, or may sound really dated but that’s where we start. And a lot of that’s been devalued supposedly by Google, but we are still finding that keyword-rich domain name doesn’t hurt, right?

Steve: Right, right sure.

Scott: To have other websites talking about you or using guest posts, it doesn’t hurt. So always start with an SEO place so that you have the foundation built so that if somebody is looking for what you’ve got on the internet, then Google will at least know you’re there. I think that’s really important because it’s hard to add this stuff later. I’m sure you’ve done this too right; it’s hard to add search engine optimization later. And then after that these days it’s harder than ever, Facebook isn’t the goldmine that it used to be unless you are going to pay them.

Steve: Yeah.

Scott: Guest posting is a pretty good way. You can tweet a lot, you know, there are so many different channels now. It’s hard to be an expert at all of them, but my recommendation is surely to find two or three that you like, like you love Pinterest, you’ve got a lot of visual stuff, then do that. Don’t tweet if you can’t constrain yourself to 140 characters. That’s probably not your channel, right?

Steve: Sure.

Scott: Pick a few that you like, this is back to lifestyle thing. Don’t build a business or try to build a niche business that requires marketing that you don’t want to do. There’s a lot of ways to market now; if you don’t like to write well probably being a podcaster, right? Things like that and that my answer the question that…tried?

Steve: Well, I was going to actually follow on actually which was at least for my businesses outreach has been a large part of growing my blog, and I was just curious what were some other ways that you do outreach for your properties.

Scott: The– it’s a good question. For me it’s been probably a lot of ways I guess, but guest posting can still work. There’s a lot of noise about the death of guest posting, actually there is a post today at the clickmillionaires.com forum. Somebody is saying that they just discovered that it was dead and a lot of us saying, “I don’t think so.” But yes a podcast is a great way to reach out as we were talking about, you can reach a lot of people if you seem to have an audience.

Steve: Yes.

Scott: And that’s a great way to get people to return your phone calls literally, and friending and commenting on social networks. A lot of marketing to me; outreach you need to talk more because I’m talking a lot here, but I want to hear more about what you just said, but my answer would be again finding influencers and trying to make friends and be influential yourself by choosing carefully the company you keep, and encouraging them to share your stuff as you share theirs.

Steve: Yeah, so I can tell you what I do. I go to conferences now, and typically the way I find my podcast guests, I go out to conferences and I hang out late at night with some of these people. And once like the alcohol starts flowing a little bit you start to learn a lot about some of these people, and you realize that some of these big influencers they’re just regular people.

Scott: Yeah.

Steve: They have families, they have insecurities and everything, and it all just kind of comes out once you have a couple beers and then you invite them on your podcast. And we never experience this, but you know once you get them on your podcast, you talk and then the recording happens, but then generally before or after the podcast is when a lot of the juicy stuff comes out as well. So that’s kind of how I’ve done outreach, and for guest posting for myself it’s really hard to just cold call someone for a guest post.

Scott: Agreed.

Steve: You really kind of have to get to know them at least on a superficial level in the beginning, and if you’ve met them in person it’s almost a guarantee. Like if you’ve met me in person and we’ve actually spent some time together and chatted, and the topic you want to write about within my niche I would be happy to take a guest post. That’s just kind of how it works, and I think what a lot of people do is they kind of hide behind their computers and they don’t really get out a whole bunch, and they randomly solicit guest posts and that that strategy just never works. I don’t know.

Scott: Yeah I think you’re right on, I don’t know about never works, but because the counter to that would be if you’re the only– if you’re in a really small niche blogging about scuba diving in Belize, let’s just repeat that example to death, and there’s only four other guys doing it, you are probably all going to know about each other pretty soon online anyway without having met them in person and you probably can help each other. But it certainly does help to have had a couple beers. Absolutely.

Steve: That’s actually kind of rare these days to find like such a small subset, but it can still happen. Yes it’s a completely brand new niche. Like I have a buddy who I just had on the podcast; he’s really into aerial photography and you know drones have just been becoming popular relatively recently. So he’s like the pioneer into this area which is really cool.

Scott: Nice very well done, there definitely a growth there, good for him.

Steve: Yes so hey Scott so you’ve helped a lot of people improve their websites as well, and so I thought I’d just talk a little bit about some of the things that you do when you take a look at someone’s website and you try to improve it. What are some things that you look for?

Scott: Oh that’s a great one, and then I want to hear yours too. The number one and this amazes me and everybody is listening to this is going to laugh when I say this; how many people don’t have e-mail sign ups. Like people start a website and they are so focused on their content or their products that they forget to collect emails and that sounds silly, but I see it over and over again.

I was actually on a radio show at big Midwestern WJR in Detroit which covers like most of the Midwest, with the CEO of a startup company who was– it was like the tech hour or something. And he was trying to start, I just got back from CES and we had this great thing, we get this press event blah, blah, blah. And so I just very innocently said, “Oh really that’s great, congratulations. How many email sign ups did that generate for you?” Silence.

I literally thought the line went dead, and then the host, the interviewer guy stepped in and tried to cover it up, but the guy– they too completely blew it. They had all this press and didn’t collect a single email address. What are you nuts? So that’s my first one anyway.

Steve: I take that to an extreme actually Scott, so if you go on my blog today I’ve got a sign up form at the top of every post, at the bottom of every post, I have a pop up, I have a slide in and I have something at the side bar as well.

Scott: Right, right well what do you think about all those pop-ups? You’re obviously a fan. People complain, but they work don’t they?

Steve: They do. I mean it’s actually one of the highest converting forms on my site, and I actually haven’t had any complaints really.

Scott: Right.

Steve: I have it set up so that as soon as you close it you’ll never see it again. Some people– what I think can be annoying is if you’re traversing someone’s site and the pop-up happens on every single page. That can be kind of annoying.

Scott: Yeah for sure.

Steve: So as long as you are kind of discreet about it– I also set it so that it doesn’t actually pop up until like maybe thirty seconds later. So you’re just not kind of annoyed by it right off the bat.

Scott: Yeah you get a chance to decide whether you’re interested or not first. Yeah that helps.

Steve: There are subtle ways of doing it too. You don’t have to use a pop up; you can use a slide-in. So as soon as you are scrolling down the page this animated thing just kind of slides in, that gets your attention as well; works almost as well as a pop up actually.

Scott: I agree.

Steve: Yeah so incidentally I just thought I’d add that e-mail marketing is probably 80 to 90 percent of the revenue that I bring in on the blog.

Scott: Well there you go. That’s– say that over and over, that’s a whole podcast right there, repeat that three hundred times. People dismiss that somehow you know, they get so focused on– this is one of the big things I talk about in my forums is people are so focused on supply rather than demand. Right there like I want to do this, I want to sell this, I want to offer you this, but you really got to figure out where the demand is and that’s the trick.
And if you’ve got the people’s e-mail addresses, you know they’re interested, you can keep selling to them, but if you don’t have the email addresses you’ve got no demand, it’s you’re just waiting for random customers to drive by your website. It’s a really tough way to make a living.

Steve: Yeah you know one other mistake that I often see people do is you land on someone’s website and you have no idea what it’s all about.

Scott: Yes.

Steve: So what I’d like to see and what I always advise people who ask me for help is you should have some sort of attractive picture on your front page along with text like a headline that describes exactly what your website is all about.

Scott: Absolutely that’s– would be another one of my big ones. Actually I don’t know if you know this, but one of my many little sites is called expertwebsitereviews.com and I do videos for people. I think it’s 99 bucks or something like that, and I’ll actually look at their site and do a twenty minute video forum and go through this stuff, and I’ve done that about 700 over the years.

It’s amazing what people can’t see because they’re so close to their own site, and that’s– you’ve hit another one, so often I’ll come and I’ll say “Nice looking site, but what is it about and what do you want me to do.” If you can’t tell me what it is, you need a tagline that states your mission and what you– and then some calls to action, those along with the e-mail collector would improve 80 percent of the websites I see.

Steve: Yeah and I actually do those too as part of my course. I actually critique e-commerce web pages. I can’t keep track of all your sites Scott.

Scott: No it’s fine, that’s fine.

Steve: So I don’t know that you did that yourself also.

Scott: I even do them for free, actually later today I do video office hours once a month from the Click Millionaires forum. It’s a Google Hangout open to the public where people from all over the world come in and where they ask questions, or we actually look at sites together live and do some of them, they’re not as thorough obviously as a private paid one, but that’s all through the clickmillionaires.com forum, for free.

Steve: I would also go as far as to say that every page on your entire website should have just one objective. Remove all the noise, remove all the extra links, and just highlight that one specific action that you want someone to take on a page.

Scott: Yeah that’s– especially if you’re running an e-commerce sort of situation like you are that a lot of folks get in and they get frustrated because they’re not getting as many sign ups or conversions or sales or whatever their goals are, and then they add more and more stuff right? So they go like nothing is happening, so I’m going to add some Facebook links. Well that’s not going to help your sales you know, or I’m going to post a bunch of posts instead of just one on a page. It’s like well yeah, but the clear path to the goal is very important for conversion.

Steve: So what are some other things, I mean you’ve done more critiques than I have, what are some other common mistakes that you see?

Scott: Well that’s a good one and people junk things up. They get frustrated and I spend a lot of time helping people pare things down. Simplicity is what you want especially now that so much of the traffic is mobile right. People are seeing these tiny little screens; you can’t have 400 different things to click on one page anymore. That redesign movement towards responsive designs is really important and hard for people to get their heads around, because it’s a different set of technical requirements, right?

Steve: Absolutely, yeah so let’s talk about that a little bit about mobile. So what are some of the changes that you advise people to make regarding mobile?

Scott: Well, you can redo your site in a responsive theme, right? But that’s kind of a big change for people if you’re going to rework your whole site, so if you’ve already got one. If you don’t obviously let’s start there; start with a responsive theme. That’s today’s number one recommendation right? But other than that the easy way to think about this is to make the fonts bigger and get rid of the side bars as much as possible.

And I’d be the first to admit my sites do not follow this, so I’m the doctor and not curing himself here. It’s really hard to let go of your own sites too, but if you can reduce the side bar width so that the center column is large enough to read on a variety of different platforms, that’ll help everything you do. That’s the basic one I’d say.

Steve Cool, I have a couple of things to add in regards to e-commerce; make sure everything is tappable. So if you have like a link, make it into a big button. Don’t make– the reason I discovered this is before when our e-commerce store was not mobile friendly, I remember my daughter was just surfing on a website and she was having problems clicking on certain things. She’s got the tiniest of fingers.

Scott: Right.

Steve: And so if she can’t navigate it, that means a regular adult won’t be able to either.

Scott: Good point, good point that’s one of my favorite suggestions actually is to actually sit behind somebody and watch what they do on your website. Don’t tell them anything and don’t– complete stranger’s kind of weird or another person, because somebody like your wife or your cousin or your friend; they know what you do, so you don’t have to explain the whole context.

But then literally just shut your mouth, stand behind them. And we used do this actually at some of the Fortune 500 companies for internal testing. We’d have like one of the secretaries come and just say “I want you to go buy a ticket,” and just shut up and watch. And you’ll be amazed the things that they miss that you think are obvious, and that doesn’t mean they’re stupid, it means your design is bad.

Steve: Yeah there is actually services out there that’ll do this if you pay them. Like five second test I think is one of them, they just give you a quick first impression of your website as soon as they land on it.

Scott: That’s right, the Click Millionaires way is to not pay for stuff unless you have to though, so…

Steve: Of course, of course and a couple of other things with ecommerce that I might add is people hate typing on their little phones, and so it helps to turn off auto correct. So if you’re trying to enter an address and you trying to check out, you don’t want like your address to autocorrect to some random word, dictionary word.

Scott: That’s a good one, very good.

Steve: I lost a lot of business that way without even realizing it. It wasn’t until a customer called us up having problems checking out on their phone. They told me I kept trying to change– add my address and it kept changing to this, and I was just getting really frustrated.

Scott: Right.

Steve: And thankfully this woman called.

Scott: Yeah right exactly. She called six months earlier, right?

Steve: Well, incidentally we have a clickable dial link right below that as well, so I’m sure she just clicked on it and called us, but…

Scott: Right, nicely done.

Steve: Yeah, so what– you mention a lot– you manage a lot of websites and so I was going to ask you this question whether it’s better to have like a portfolio of websites, or just have one main website that you kind of focus on.

Scott: Well, that’s up to your life I think, I’ve chosen the multiple approach because I’ve got a lot of different experiences, a lot of different interests, but a lot of people struggle to even find one good idea right? So I think it’s kind of partially what the hand that life deals you, and it’s also a question of whether you’re doing it full time or part time. In your case you’re also doing other things and you know you’re not going to have 40 other websites because you’ve already got a job and kids and other things, right?
So it’s a matter of how much time you have available. But I also I am– my first career was as an investment banker actually, and I guess where I got this portfolio idea early on, diversification seemed like a good idea to me. I have heard lots of people getting hurt because they tried to build their business say around Facebook right, or Pinterest. Now Pinterest recently finally made a clear decision that they’re going to not allow affiliate links, well if you were making money you know through affiliate links on Pinterest you’re in trouble right. And then the Google updates crushed lots of people.

I am a fan at least in theory of having a bunch of stuff so that they can all balance each other out. Now that’s not easy to do and it takes time. It’s hard enough to get one business going, so if you have one business going well I wouldn’t drop that to go start other things. Again I think in between this is probably the right answer. What about you you’ve got a couple different things going on, what’s your answer to that?

Steve: Yeah I’m actually had the opposite philosophy I agree. I believe in kind of focusing on one until it’s ready to move on. A lot of people email me and they’ll present me with five sites that they’re working on, and they’re all not very good because they just put them up to see which one is going to gain traction with the hope that they’ll focus on the one that’s getting the most traction. But what I found ends up happening is none of those sites every any traction because you’re spreading yourself too thin.

Scott: Yeah, I can’t argue with that. That’s a great answer too.

Steve: So I believe in focusing on one property until you can get something working. Like keep at it until it works, because the other thing is people tend to give up really easily especially with blogging, right? You don’t see any traction for often six months to a year, and that can be hard for some of the stomach, and if you’re putting together a bunch of sites and you’re only giving it that small time frame, then you’ll tend to give up on everything.

Scott: Yeah that’s quite possible for first time entrepreneurs especially; I guess my approach has been developed over a long period of time, that’s true.

Steve: Sure so you mention the portfolio approach, but you also mentioned earlier that a large strategy to get traffic is through SEO, so how do you kind of make your sites Google proof.

Scott: I wish I could. Well I’ll just find another big G, right? Well I am talking about niches here, so I tend to put in things that have pretty deep roots, and then try to get some links back to them, it’s basic blocking and tackling. But again I’m not opening a book store to compete with Amazon. I’m suggesting a bookstore about scuba diving techniques as applied to Belize which believe me there’s not going to be as much competition.

So I think getting it right early on thinking about what the niches and particularly this is interesting SEO tip which is obvious to you I’m sure, but not to use the word you want to use, but figure out what people actually type. A lot of people tend to get very jargonish when they think about a topic especially if you’re in a field like in medicine or law or in any specialized industry, any B-to-B site. People get all jargonish and that can’t help because if you can attract other specialists who know those terms, but you also need to think about what just regular people type into the search box, and you can uncover farm or some great SEO angles doing that.

Steve: So Google’s search business has actually been kind of flat lining as of late. And so where do you see some of the other traffic opportunities going forward that is not search.

Scott: Well the apps world is very interesting, but I have to be honest I haven’t– I’m not an expert there so I won’t talk about that. Social media is getting harder as well, I don’t have a good answer there Steve, what do you think?

Steve: That is a good question, so I asked you that question because I didn’t have the answer.

Scott: Okay, all right, all right. At least we are honest, right?

Steve: Okay, so for me I would say getting the traffic that you do have and retaining them with e-mail is going to be an important step going forward, and reaching out to other mediums like podcasting, YouTube, certainly social media. Facebook has nerved the amount of reach that a business can have, but then there’s other avenues like Instagram and Twitter where someone will get your entire feed and just kind of putting your feed in all the different platforms to grow I would say this is the best way to diversify your traffic sources.

Scott: Diversify yes, but I just since we are talking that sounds like a lot of work right? I mean to be an expert on all those and have all those feeds going unless you can automate them as a sole– at least if you’re a sole entrepreneur it could crush you. A few years ago Pat Flint, who you probably know, Pat was talking about his be everywhere strategy in 2008. That was fantastic because there were only you know there was You Tube and Twitter you know there were only three or four things, but now there’s Instagram and Snap Chat and Pinterest and you know other 50 things. To do all that even halfway well is hard.

Steve: Yes I actually use automation for that, so my friend Laura Roeder recently released a tool called Meet Edgar which is a great way to kind of automate some of your social media. So I use that to handle my Facebook and my Twitter, and then there’s tools like viral tag which handle Pinterest to kind of automate your pins and that sort of thing. So there are tools out there you don’t necessarily have to become an expert in any given thing, and it also helps to interview experts in their respective fields and get information out of them as well. So everything that I’ve learned or a lot of the stuff I’ve learned is from actually interviewing other people on podcasts.

Scott: For sure I have to admit that I’m guilty of that too. Yeah I remember interviewing Perry Marshall who is a pay per click expert nearly back like 2007 or something, and like after that interview I well understood pay per click and helped me a lot. So stuff like that is a great strategy. I think podcasting is a wonderful thing and actually I’d recommend that if you’re looking for new traffic sources. Audio consumption is rising. There’s a lot of competition, but again if you can find a niche I’d be doing a podcast these days and a video version too. Why not?

Steve: So what would you– how do you feel about the different mediums, like if I had to focus on You Tube podcasting or blogging, what would be your recommendation?

Scott: I would look at where your target market is. Again there is a cross between demand and supply right, so demand is you want people that you know if you want people that are illiterate just to make a silly example then you better go to You Tube so they can watch you right. And vice versa then is the other side is what are you good at? Blogging may be what seems to be required, but you are a terrible speller and you hate to write, so back to podcasting. The answer again I can’t give you a yes or no there. The answer is specific to the situation, but I think those are the three big ones these days blogging, video, or audio, those channels.

Steve: I guess I should have phrased the question a little bit differently. How important is it in your mind to have your own personal branded website as opposed to relying on somebody’s third party platforms?

Scott: Okay that I think is hugely important. Chris Rogan used to talk about hubs and spokes right? So you need a hub and I would see Facebook or any of the social media platforms as outlined spokes to drive traffic back to your hub, because Facebook can change their rules tomorrow and wipe you out. If you’ve built a big you business on Facebook or Pinterest like I just mentioned a couple of minutes ago, I think you have your central hub is absolutely required and that’s your email list.
Also you said most of your sales from your blog actually end up coming from the email list and I agree with that, and I’m glad to hear it and I would say even further. I would also say it is your IRA. It is your 401k. You need to build that up, it is your retirement plan. If you are going to build an internet business for five years, or 15 years, and you are done, that email list is what you’ve got left.

Steve: So Scott what is one piece of advice that you can give to my listeners on kind of how to start if they are still a little bit on whether to start an online business.

Scott: I would say try. I think it is a wonderful– at the minimum it is a wonderful hobby. It can keep you interested, engaged, and learn some stuff, right? More importantly it can turn into something and that’s the really elastic question here is how much money how soon? And people always want an answer to that, and it is so dependent that you can’t give a credible answer to that without knowing a million variables that are unforeseeable.

But I really encourage people to try even if it doesn’t make you a bunch of money right away you’re going to learn a bunch of stuff. And I think it’s often like when people go to college right or like me, I’ll just be personal. When I was in high school I was going to be a doctor. I was even in the pre-med club. But then I took chemistry, right? You know some things change and the further you go the more you– the further you can see.

Unless you– I’m mixing a bunch of metaphors here, but unless your ship leaves the dock you’re not going to know what’s beyond the horizon, and I know that’s a leap of faith that most people aren’t trained for or maybe they don’t have the confidence or the money or time to pursue, but if you don’t try you’re certainly not going to get anywhere. And internet business is an easy thing to start and the key I think is to make that leap that you obviously have got in your bones and so do I.

You have to stop looking at the internet as a consumer platform and look at it as an entrepreneur. Where are the opportunities here? Yeah I can use Facebook, but you know it’s somebody smart and I forget who maybe you know, somebody said if something is free, then it’s not a service, you’re the product right, there aggregating you to sell you as advertising eyeballs. And that’s for Facebook and all the other stuff that seems free. Once you start realizing that looking at things as an entrepreneur, you’ll see opportunities in a lot of places.

Steve: Okay and then where would you recommend that people– what books would you recommend for people to read about this stuff.

Scott: It would be wrong to recommend…

Steve: And so shameless probably…

Scott: Obviously I spent a lot of time and a lot of years doing this. I’ve got three books and all of them are written for folks who are new to this, so your audience may be a little sophisticated for some of it. But a lot of my– my books aren’t so much about like here’s what to do on Twitter today right? They are not– I’m trying to help people change their mindset, to think about a lifestyle business. Like I said there’s these principles in the book that– how to think about this stuff because I’ve thought about it a lot, and I was a successful investment banker, I have a law degree, I’ve raised a bunch of money for different companies.

I’ve just– I think about this stuff and I don’t– I’m not going to be able to tell you what to do on Pinterest tomorrow to make money. But I can tell you how to think about this if you’ve not thought about it much, because I’ve heard about a lot and I’ve written three books of 60 or 80,000 words a piece, and we’ve got this forum and I’d encourage you to explore. Oh you know I should mention we have this niche business identification checklist, we’ve talked a lot about finding niches.

There’s a PDF that you can download at clickmillionaires.com that lists all the factors that I use personally. There’s like 30 factors or something and you can score things. What’s the size of the market, how much will this cost me to build, and what is the production operations going to cost and stuff like this. But it gives you quantifiable way to think about businesses and especially if you don’t have a background of thinking like this about these things, it can be really helpful and it’s free at clickmillionaires.com.

Steve: Yes send me the link I will put it in the show for sure.

Scott: Sure.

Steve: So Scott where can people get a hold of you if they have questions; where can they find you hanging out?

Scott: Well literally hanging out on Google plus, I’ve got a hangout later this afternoon, we do those once a month, we call them video office hours. But clickmillionaires.com is the main site, it’s a free forum. In fact it’s the only forum I know where we give the ad money back to the audience, the top contributors each month get a check.
I personally pay pal them half our revenue, we keep the other half to pay for the expense of the moderators and the hosting and stuff. But it really is free and the money from my profits from my books go back to charity, so trying to help people figure out that there’s a thing here, and even if you don’t have a computer science degree or an MBA, you might be able to play and make your life better too, so clickmillionaires.com.

Steve: Awesome Scott, well thanks a lot for coming on the show. I enjoyed the conversation.

Scott: I did too Steve, it’s great to talk, let’s do it more often.

Steve: Absolutely man, take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Scott has been running online businesses now for decades and it’s always fun to chat with him to get some inspiration on what to do next. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.co/episode71. And if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review, because when you write me review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from our guests. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. and if you’re interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

And once again I just want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. They’ve got an incredible theme store where you can choose from a wide variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need to hire a designer and they also offer integration with Alibaba, so you can easily find products to sell online.

So bottom line everything from design to sourcing to payment processing is all built in, all you got to do is populate it with the products you want to sell, and you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob. Thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at triple www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

071: How To Create A Successful iPhone App Without Any Experience With Erin Matzkin

How To Create A Successful iPhone App With Erin Matzkin

Erin Matzkin is the founder of Cluck Cluck App, which is an app that helps busy parents book, pay and message their children’s caregivers.

What I like about Erin is that she doesn’t have a technical background, but she still managed to create an awesome app for parents. And it just goes to show that you don’t really need to know how to code in order to create a successful app. You just need to create the right team to do so.

Enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • How to create an iPhone app without a technical background
  • How to layout and plan an application without any coding
  • The thought process required to create a successful app
  • How to find the right technical partner
  • How to launch and validate your app
  • How to get on Tech Crunch
  • How to get PR for your iPhone app
  • How to market your app on Instagram
  • The pros and cons of going with a free ad driven model versus a paid model
  • The effect of pricing on iPhone app sales
  • How much you should expect to invest when producing an app
  • What’s a realistic time frame for creating a basic app.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

This episode was sponsored by Big Commerce. If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcast where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used earlier on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month, for more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiteherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick a shout out to this episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store, and Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here is what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce doesn’t really nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

Now there’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba which is new, so you can easily find products to sell online. Now if you are interested in starting your own online store using Bigcommerce is as bad as easy as it gets. Everything from design, to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products.

You can literally start your own online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. Today I’m happy to have Erin Matzkin on the show. Now Erin along with her partners Heather Porter Joyce and Damian Toohey are the creators of the popular iPhone app, CluckCluck app which helps organize and simplify communication between parents and their kid’s care givers. Now what I like about Erin is that she’s a very caring mom who wants the best for her children. And as a mom she had a problem and came up with a very clever solution to solve using technology.
Now her app has been featured on TechCrunch, Business Insider, Real Simple as well as other high profile publications and it’s really something special. With that, welcome to the show Erin, really glad to have you on tonight.

Erin: Thank you. I’m so glad to be here and thank you for that lovely introduction.

Steve: Yeah. It’s a great app. I actually took some time to download it and fire it up.

Erin: Excellent.

Steve: So give us the quick background story; tell us about the app, how it works, and how you came up with the idea?

Erin: As you mentioned my cofounder, Heather– Heather and I have been friends for well over a decade. We are both technology lawyers by way of background, and we started work at the same law firm together and then we both worked together for many years at the Walt Disney Company at Disney Interactive which is their website– which is the part of the company that manages all of Disney’s website and mobile apps. So during this period of time, Heather and I– we got married, we had babies and we spent a lot of time together sort of discussing the challenges of work life balance.

One thing that we talked about a lot was how difficult it can be as a working mom to kind of come home at the end of the day and just really have no idea about what went on with your kids. I mean– for a baby you are like did they get a nap, how many ounces did they have in the bottle? For a bigger kid you want to know like did their homework get done? And then we talked about sort of other babysitting challenges like getting a sitter for a Saturday night. Then one day I was with Heather and she was trying to book a baby sitter for her own birthday party so she could go to her own party.

She was texting and driving which is terrible, texting all of her sitters to see if they could come over. Finally she said, “There has to be a better way to do this.” So the next morning after her birthday party I came over to her house. We were having coffee on her porch and we started hand drawing wireframes for what a mobile app would look like to sort of solve all of our child care problems. A week later, we were like. “This is a really good idea. We should get serious about this.” So we built some wire frames for real and then we were incredibly fortunate that our friend Damian was willing to do the coding for us, to engineer it and CluckCluck was born. Honestly we built it to solve our own problem.

Steve: So exactly how does it work? If you can just walk us through a use model.

Erin: Yeah, sure. So there are three main parts. The first is a booking engine. So you need a sitter for Saturday night. I personally have four people who I use on kind of a regular basis. So with the app you can send one invitation to all of your regular sitters at once. They indicate if they are available or not, and then you pick the one you want and book it. It will calendar for you and for the sitter and it will disappear for everybody else.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: Then kind of the main part of the app is what we would call the feed. So you can set up a little profile for each of your children with what you want to be notified about. That could be anything from again bottles or naps, for a baby to like sports practice or let’s say school gets out on Tuesday early, you could put that in their profile. And then give your babysitter access to this profiles while she is on the job, and just with quick one touch buttons she can give you updates on what’s going with your kids.

So she can just say with one click school pick up is done, homework is done, baby’s nap is done. She’ll also have access to all of your family’s emergency contacts. So let’s say she takes your baby to the park to play, she’ll have all the information with her just in case something were to happen. And then the last piece is the payment engine. So you can pay your sitter through the app and keep the payment history in case you need to export it to excel, like if you pay nanny taxes for example. And that’s pretty much it in a nutshell.

Steve: So in regards to– when the sitter hits the button you basically– there is no texting back and forth at that point. It’s just probably just one user interface where you look at to determine whether they’ve accomplished whatever you’ve setup for them to accomplish, right?

Erin: That’s exactly right.

Steve: That’s nice. So when you decided to design this app, did you have Damian this whole time or were you kind of worried about the technical challenges of developing an app in the beginning?

Erin: We were definitely worried about the technical challenges. Heather and I do not code ourselves. I wish I did. In my next life I will be an engineer. But we are– again we are tech lawyers and so we have helped various clients build many mobile apps, many websites. So we knew what that piece of the process should look like. So we were able to really sketch out a great level of detail, what the functionality would be. And once we finally got Damian on board– I’m not going to say coding was simple for him, but he had a clear road map for what it needed to be.

Steve: So you mentioned wire-framing a lot. So that’s terminology that only someone who is kind of experienced would use that sort of term. So were you developing apps in your job or?

Erin: Well no, I was helping. So when I worked at Disney, I would help the Disney business team to develop and build apps.

Steve: Okay. So for the listeners who don’t know exactly what a wireframe is, if you can just kind of describe that process that you went through, that would be great.

Erin: Yeah. It’s– pardon me for using weirdo technology terms. It basically just means like a graph of the app. So you create a step by step map of what it will look. So if you touch this button here, you will get a picture showing this is what the user will see next. So it’s just very clear what the flow will be as the user is working their way through the app. It’s not a difficult process but it can be complicated. You just want to make sure people don’t get trapped somewhere in a dead end and [inaudible] [0:08:54] whatever piece of the app they need to use next.

Steve: So do you use software for this or did you just do it on a piece of paper?

Erin: You can do it either way. We did a lot of it sort of by hand at first and then once we had it locked down we built it more formally with programming.

Steve: So have you used any tools like Balsamiq or any of those tools to wire frame the app?

Erin: No, not me personally.

Steve: And then how did you find Damian?

Erin: This is just– honestly just luck, the stars aligned. We had actually started out with a big development shop was our– they were our first partner and they were great. I will say that they were a lot of young guys who did not have children themselves. And as fantastic as they were I think they couldn’t really wrap their heads around what we were trying to do.

So after a few months with them, when it became clear that relationship wasn’t going to be productive, we parted amicably. About a week later, a friend of mine introduced me to Damian. Damian has three kids and it was like you could see the light bulb turn on. He got it immediately. And he was really enthusiastic about it, and has just found a fantastic partner. Damian is a natural rocket scientist, he teaches– he does aerospace engineering, he teaches classes in engineering and he’s the LA, he’s brilliant, and we are so lucky to have him.

Steve: So are you guys all doing this on the side? Then Damian this is side job for him?

Erin: That is correct.

Steve: Okay. And he has three kids, and he’s a rocket scientist.

Erin: Correct.

Steve: Okay. And he had time to code this up.

Erin: I think he doesn’t sleep, I think [inaudible] [0:10:33].

Steve: So that first company, where did you find that first company that didn’t work out, was it just through a service or something or?-

Erin: That was through a friend of mine recommended this company.

Steve: Okay, okay.

Erin: Former coworker of mine recommended the company.

Steve: Okay, and then as you were wire-framing your app, was there some sort of validation process that you went through before you all decided to kind of go all in on this project?

Erin: Actually not really. Damian was able to get a Beta app and running for us with a lightning speed. And once he had the beta app, we honestly, we sort of pressed our family and friends, and [Inaudible] [00:11:09] and we had a couple of hundred people, our friends and family tested out for us. And that was really the validation we made, several edits to the app as a result of that process before we publically launched it on iTunes.

Steve: Okay, so your Beta testers were mainly friends and family?

Erin: That’s correct.

Steve: Okay and how quickly did you get the Beta version out?

Erin: I want to say from the time we started working with Damian, maybe four months, and again remember he was sort of doing this on nights and weekends.

Steve: Okay, I was just curious, were you getting feedback along the way as you were developing that first Beta or was the first Beta just based on ideas that you guys just the three of you had talked about?

Erin: It was really just the three of us at that point.

Steve: Okay, and then once you started testing, or once you had Beta customers, did you guys make a lot of changes at that point, and what was the process by which you actually took feedback, because I have experienced developing software as well, and often times you get all sorts of feedback, and some of it might not jell with your overall vision for the app, so what was the process by which you kind of processed the feedback.

Erin: It’s a really good question. First of all we could see the path of the app where people are really engaging, and some things that weren’t being so utilized, so we knew where to focus our efforts. And I would say I think to some degree we were just lucky, we had friends and family who were pretty candid with us, and gave us some really excellent points of suggested functionality we had never considered, there was a lot of work around the calendar and piece in particular, around being able to blast one invitation to all of your sitters, and pick the one you wanted.

And so that function– we scrapped that whole thing and started over based on feedback that was– it was not friendly enough. And then we added some additional functionality, like the payment history and there is a time also you can have your set of clock in and out, when she starts and stops of her work, so you know how much you owe her. Those were things that were entirely suggested to us by our users. I do agree with you we received some feedback with which we didn’t agree, we didn’t feel like it was really going to work with our central purpose of the app, with our vision of the app. So there were some things that we considered carefully and discarded. But by and large the feedback that we received during Beta was really helpful.

Steve: And then why your app was in Beta, was it on iTunes for everyone to download, or was it just kind of a private Beta.

Erin: It was a private Beta, we used [inaudible] [0:13:43] which is the modern test flight, so you can just blast your app, only to people you want to have access to it.

Steve: Okay and then how long it was in Beta before you actually decided to put on iTunes.

Erin: I don’t remember exactly, it was a few months of testing.

Steve: Okay, and then once you decided to put it on iTunes, what was kind of your launch strategy?

Erin: Well, we are a small start up, we are bootstrapped, and candidly we were trying to get as much organic press as we could, because we did not have a gigantic marketing budget to spend. So we had then kind of cultivating relationships with a few recorders during the Beta process. And we’re incredibly lucky to have TechCrunch cover our launch, which was amazing. That was amazing.

Steve: So, let’s delve deeper into that, how do you TechCrunch to cover your launch?

Erin: So, my partner Heather who is braver than me, and cooler than me, she without time she applied for us to be in a TechCrunch pitch off, I don’t know if you are familiar with this or not.

Steve: Okay, no I follow TechCrunch for sure, I didn’t know that they have pitch offs.

Erin: They do, they have regional pitch competitions, where basically they take you usually five to ten companies, they give you literally one minute to pitch your company, and then the winners get tickets to TechCrunch Disrupt which is their big conference.

Steve: Yes, yes. I’m familiar with Disrupt, yes.

Erin: Yeah, so Heather applied for us to be in a pitch off and we ended up winning one of the prizes and getting a booth at Disrupt, in their start up early, and we just– we met a ton of really interesting and fun people, but also met a couple of reporters who offered to cover our launch, and in fact came through for us when we were ready to launch.

Steve: Wow. Okay. And so was that the magazine Real Simple on business insider or with these other people?

Erin: I will tell you, I think we were very lucky to get the coverage from TechCrunch because a lot of the other publicity start from there. The pickups from business insider and battle, and some of the other apps, Mommy press, I believe– I don’t know for sure, but I believe they probably came at that because people saw the TechCrunch article.

Steve: Okay, and then just hypothetically speaking, let’s say you did not win that TechCrunch pitch, what was some of the other things that you had in mind, like what was plan B and C and D?

Erin: I think you gave me a credit for being more organized when I answer. We were prepared to work with the PR Company, with a PR firm if we needed to.

Steve: Okay. Do you guys work with one now, I mean how do you get publicity today?

Erin: We do not work with one now, we do a lot of blogging and a lot of social media, and that gets us a fair amount of traffic. In a perfect world if we were– if we had decided to pursue VC money or something like that, I think we probably would be working with a PR firm, but we are really enjoying kind of this organically grown business, it’s been a lot of fun for us, it’s been a great adventure.

Steve: So let’s talk about blogging, so I run a blog, and…

Erin: You run a great blog.

Steve: So is this– thanks– is this blog– flattering me, it always works. Is this blog directly tied to the app or is it kind of an independent blog that…

Erin: No, it’s tied to the app; you can access that from the app web page.

Steve: Okay, So let’s talk about your content strategy, so what are some of things that you write about, and how does that tie into your app?

Erin: Well, we have found that the demographic who’s most humbly using our app is working mums.

Steve: Surprise, surprise.

Erin: Surprise, surprise which makes a lot of them, so we try to blog and write honestly about issues that we ourselves have tackled as working mums, whether it’s suggestions for how to make your day a little easier, or just want empathy for hey this is tough, we’ve been there, you are going to get through it. We blog about a lot of issues, about work and family.

Steve: So, having started a blog myself, I know that in the very beginning it’s pretty lonely when no one is reading, so how did you start that initial traffic burst with your blog?

Erin: That and the second question, Heather and I each wrote a blog, so we did blogging for a little while and it’s kind of what you are talking about, we are so alone in here, and no one’s reading it. And then each of us wrote a post that was very honest, mine was about why I had quit my big corporate job to become– to go freelance. In addition to the app, I’m also an attorney and I run my own small practice. So I wrote a post about why I had quit my big corporate job, how difficult it has been for me, and how candidly I was still mad that I had to quit, and that kind of turn the traffic.

And then Heather wrote a post about her experience, she at one point had quit her job to be a stay-at-home mum, and after several years at home returned to work force. And she talked very honestly about what an incredibly difficult transition that had been for her, and how off ramping, you’re taking time off to stay at home can be more detrimental to your career than people generally will admit in the media. And those two posts together somehow managed to drive a fair amount of traffic to our website. We still get head time results all the time.

Steve: How did you get the word about those articles?

Erin: We posted those articles in addition to like our CluckCluck social media accounts, we posted them to our personal social media accounts which links back, and the traffic all came from there.

Steve: Okay and how did you build– is this from Facebook, or twitter, what are your main social media outlets?

Erin: Our main social media outlets are Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram.

Steve: Okay, so let’s talk about all those actually, let’s talk about Facebook first. How did you build your Facebook fan page?

Erin: Well, Facebook is a tricky one, right. Facebook– I’m going to get all boring a lawyer, I get away from that. Facebook has changed the way the algorithm works, so that posts by companies are becoming less and less obvious in your news feed, and so I think we rely less and less on Facebook, simply because it is not driving traffic that it used to.

Steve: Okay, so what do you focus on then?

Erin: I mostly use Instagram more than anything which is funny because our app is not naturally a super visual piece of media. And so we try to post a lot both serious posts and funny posts on Instagram about challenges of being parents or working parents.

Steve: I actually– I was just about to say your app is perfect for Instagram, because you can post all these funny things about your kids and your family. So do you get kind of personal on your Instagram account? I know my wife doesn’t like me posting pictures of my kids on my account. Are you guys wide open with that?

Erin: We do not post pictures of our children. I will certainly post pictures of the aftermath of our children. My son broke the window this afternoon; I posted a picture of the broken window.

Steve: So how do you mix Instagram posts with kind of more with posts that encourage people to check out your app.

Erin: That has been– it’s a challenging one, because you want your audience to be entertained but you also want them to know about your product. I really love our product and I believe in our product. I just think we try to keep it a fine mix of like “Hey these are funny relatable moments that we’ve had as working parents.” And then we usually– we will post a photo about one of our latest no– let me give you an example. We did it a post about going back to work after maternity leave and we found this great shot of this really gorgeous woman, who look professionally dressed. And so we’ll post something like that with a link back to the blog in the profile section.

Steve: So by link– because Instagram doesn’t allow links, so is it just like the typed out URL?

Erin: So what we do in your Instagram profile, you can– there’s one live link. And we update that link constantly with whatever our new blog post is.

Steve: I see so you make the post and then you say “link in profile” or something like that, right?

Erin: That’s correct.

Steve: And so how do you measure all these– how do you measure what’s coming in from Instagram and– do you guys measure where all of your downloads are coming from? Like the sources?

Erin: It’s hard to measure downloads. We are iTunes only. We are IOS only right now. We are working on an android version, but it is not up and running yet. So it’s hard to tell what brought somebody to iTunes. It’s relatively easy to tell where web-traffic to our website is coming from. And we do use like a Google URL shortener for twitter, for Instagram and so sometimes it’s hard to tell something has come from a Google search or from a URL shortener. Yeah there are many tools available that will tell you where your traffic is coming from.

Steve: So would you say that Instagram is one of your primary sources outside of your blog?

Erin: Yes. Facebook [inaudible] [00:22:44] a fair amount of traffic, but we have kind of seen that go down over the past six months and I expect it will continue to go down.

Steve: Okay, and then what are some of your strategies to get more Instagram followers.

Erin: I do not have any good strategies. Do you have any you would like to share with me?

Steve: Maybe I’ll find. I mean I’ve interviewed some people who base their businesses on Instagram. So I was just curious if you are doing anything special to get more ads. But I mean in a nutshell a lot of these people that build their following, they run contests, they do giveaways and that sort of thing.

Erin: You know we keep talking about that. We probably ought to get more sophisticated about it and do more about it, but right now no we haven’t tried any of those tactics.

Steve: Do you guys do anything paid advertising?

Erin: A little bit. We kind of dabbled to see what moves the middle. But I will tell you in terms of app downloads, the paid ads don’t seem to work as well as just some of the press coverage we’ve gotten.

Steve: Absolutely. So what is your– so you don’t have a PR firm, so how do you do your outreach today for press?

Erin: Oh boy! It’s– we try to be strategic about once a month. We look at our media plan and update it. But it’s really a lot of organic outreach; it’s me and Heather emailing editors, calling people, trying to let them know about the app.

Steve: So are these just editors that you know or they are just brand new cold call editors.

Erin: It’s a combination of both. It’s a lot of cold call quality emails though.

Steve: Okay, and do you guys use the service like Harrell or anything like that?

Erin: We don’t. We haven’t. I know some people have great luck with it, not us.

Steve: Yeah I mean you have to be like the first person to respond. Basically– I mean it’s been hit or miss for me, but I was just curious. So I had another question actually and this is just about the app, why did you decide to price it at 99 cents as opposed to giving it away for free with advertising? What were some of the thought process behind that?

Erin: You know we thought about that a lot and we played with several different models. But this was a big part of our beta test was how– what is the best way to sell it? What do people feel is the best value? And you know free with ads is not a great business model for most apps these days. It’s just that the ads– I think that there will be a great way to monetize mobile, but just banner ads and apps doesn’t tend to really get it done unless you are gigantic, unless you are a huge app. And also kind of we’ve used a bunch of apps without them and some of them don’t just look that great. It interferes with ease of use.

Steve: Yes definitely.

Erin: And we decided we really wanted this to be a clean and simple tool for parents and for baby sitters. And the keeping it ad free was the better way to go.

Steve: Did you guys run any tests to see whether it would generate more income than the download?

Erin: We– yes we did. And we believe that the download model works better for us financially as well.

Steve: Okay. Just a side story there is this pay app that I let my kids play but it’s ad driven. And every now and then they will hit the ad which pisses me off because it takes them to the seller website. Anyway, okay so let’s see– so now your app is on iTunes, what is the secret to getting visibility on iTunes?

Erin: That is– it’s really tricky. There are definite strategies to making your app more visible. If it’s optimized for both iPhones and for an iPad, that will help you definitely apps that are so general orient app that don’t have any mature content on them, that’s a better way to go. And ours definitely doesn’t have mature content, it’s general audience. Having the app available– this is something we are working on; having it available in multiple languages can be helpful. That actually would– will be great when it’s up and running for our app as well because a fair number of our app users English is not their first language.

Steve: Oh really, okay.

Erin: Yeah. Apple is a little bit secretive. There are some strategies to getting your app more favorably placed. But it’s all a little bit of a guessing game I would say.

Steve: So you didn’t do anything super special to kind of rank higher in the iTunes search algorithm?

Erin: No, things like downloads matter. And I will tell you a lot of apps out there pay for downloads. They buy downloads so that their apps appear to be more popular. And that’s is something we have steered away from for a variety of reasons.

Steve: Yes I know that there is companies in china where you just pay X number of dollars and you get like 5,000 downloads, a thousand down– it was actually just in TechCrunch I think, that article. It’s basically this person in front of like a thousand phones, like a huge warehouse array of these things and people are just downloading apps. Okay interesting. What about a strategy for getting reviews. Reviews probably help also, right?

Erin: Yes reviews help also. Maybe aside from sort of bribing our family and friends into reviews was…

Steve: Yes I will go give it a review right after this interview.

Erin: Oh thank you. That’s very kind of you. It’s actually funny enough that we are about to push an update the app-store, which I think it’s going to be a great update. But one of the things that we’ve done is made it easier for people to give reviews within the app, you don’t have to leave the app and go into the iTunes environment. You just prompt– you may have seen this. A lot of apps do this, Instagram is one of them. “Hey, would you like to give us a rating.” And for apps where there is royalty in use of attention, a lot of people will go ahead and volunteer to give the rating.

Steve: Okay yeah that would definitely make it much easier because I don’t– I rarely use– going to iTunes and actually give a review, right?

Erin: It’s not the easiest process.

Steve: Yeah, I mean I have that same problem with this podcast right. If people have to go on the web or iTunes to leave a review generally they are not going to do it. I actually went as far as to bribe people. So I know that works if you want try that.

Erin: Oh that’s good. That’s good [snore] I’m going to put that into our media plan.

Steve: So this is kind of like a technical product. Do you guys actually have to deal with support?

Erin: Yes we do. We do have to deal with support. I mean I will tell you the first version we thought we had beta tested it to death and after it had been live we found a small bug. So these things happen. Luckily again Damian is a genius. So he had a correction on that in about an hour.

Steve: Really? But he still works full time?

Erin: He does, it’s incredible. I don’t know how that man gets it all done; it’s very impressive, because we do get customer emails. “This isn’t working for me.” “Hey I thought this functionality was going to behave a little differently.” We just try to be really on top of that. We are not currently using a service. We are still doing that piece ourselves.

Steve: Okay, do you guys have a phone line or is this all basically email support.

Erin: No, it’s all email support.

Steve: Okay and do you find that because customers pay 99 cents for an app they kind of demand that things get fixed quickly or what has been your experience with customer support?

Erin: We’ve had a few customers who have taken out tact and felt that they either wanted to fix or they wanted their 99 cents back. But I will say most people have been pretty generous and not terribly demanding or mean with their feedback. Not really big with customers, we’ve been lucky so far.

Steve: Okay, and then given that IOS kind of gets updated all the time, does Damian kind of maintain all the code for all the different versions?

Erin: He does, I mean he uses his tool kit, yes, but he is a one man show pretty much, that’s correct.

Steve: He is a one man show, wow, it sounds like I should get a hold of this guy and pay him double whatever you guys are paying him.

Erin: I would never give you his contact and for my sake. No it really is funny though, because he — when Heather and I went to TechCrunch Disrupt which is the giant technology conference, which just everybody there has their own startup that they want to tell you about; people could not believe that Damian had coded the app. Like he was one guy had done it by himself, people were astonished by it. He is real…

Steve: Yeah, I know totally, I mean most apps these days have like a team of people working on them, right?

Erin: Yes, that’s much more common, and that’s where we started, we started with the team.

Steve: I mean the days are over where you could just put up some stupid floating app online to make a lot of money, right?

Erin: Oh, I don’t know YO, was really popular last year.

Steve: That’s true it was, that’s true. So let’s talk about pricing why did you settle on 99 cents? I know there is apps that are priced all across the board.

Erin: We have played with the price a little bit.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: But 99 cents seems to be the sweet spot where customers are — I think most people are willing to do the 99 cents price point. There have been a lot of studies about apps on iTunes. And it seems that there is a drop off between 3 and 99 cents. And there’s a drop off between 99 cents and 2.99, and then a big drop off after 2.99, if you go any higher than that. But 99 cents is a really common price point on the apps store. A lot of people don’t like to pay for downloads, but they’ll consider the dollar. And that just seems to be the sweet spot for us.

Steve: Okay, and did you guys experiment with some of the other price point? I was just curious what the fall off would be if you went to 2.99.

Erin: We did, so we’ve made it free for a while, we’ve made it 2.99 for a while, to see how it moves the numbers. And I’ll tell you making it free — oh boy, I hope this isn’t like two tricks where Heather is going to get mad at me. But making it free actually does not result in a giant increase, making it 2.99 results in a big decrease.

Steve: Okay, and so you guys gave it for free, but there was no ads, right? So there was free ones you weren’t making any money off of right?

Erin: That’s correct, we’ve done it as like promos, hey we are going to be free for the next week, that kind of thing.

Steve: Oh, okay, and in terms of that little payment part of your app. Do you guys take a cut of that at all or is it just…?

Erin: Yes.

Steve: Okay, so in a way that’s kind of internet monetization, right?

Erin: That’s correct, that’s exactly right.

Steve: So what carrier do you use to process credit card transactions in?

Erin: Currently we only have a PayPal integration, and if you use our versions of the app that plan to roll out additional payment options.

Steve: Okay, so the babysitter has to have a PayPal app and you have to have…

Erin: There’s only PayPal accounts, the PayPal functionality yeah.

Steve: So they have an account and then do you need a special account? Like website’s pin and pro or anything like that in order to accept payments?

Erin: No PayPal really handles the entire thing. At this point they can do the payment to the babysitter and then the tiny payment to us in parallel.

Steve: Okay, and so you just need a very standard, very basic PayPal account in order for this work?

Erin: Exactly right, nothing fancy, nothing special.

Steve: Okay, and so what are some of these — what are some of the other — like because I didn’t even know that you are monetizing that part of it. Are there any other ways to make money with the app, like I kind of applied that one app?

Erin: We have some plans to monetize the app in the future. Nothing I can talk about today though unfortunately I apologize for that. And nothing that [inaudible 00:34:14] to roll out and it comes in. I think that we are at least six months away from any different type of monetization beyond taking the convenience beyond the payments of babysitter.

Steve: Okay, now I know a lot of listeners out there they are interested in developing apps for iPhone and android. One question I had was why did you start with Apple as opposed to android, given that android actually has a larger market share at this point?

Erin: That’s a really good question; we did a fair amount of the research. And we had identified relatively online that really our demographic was primarily parents aged 25, to let’s say 45, with generally both parents working outside the home, vast majority of people who fall into that demographic are iPhone users.

Steve: Okay, now that makes total sense actually. And if you were to give some advice to listeners who want to start an app from scratch and they don’t have Damian…

Erin: Oh, good luck.

Steve: If you would just start all over again, could you kind of just walk me through the process that you would go through to create a successful app, as successful as your app has done.

Erin: Oh, yeah, thank you. Yes, so I think the — probably the most important piece first of all is to be very clear in your vision for what the app would look like, how it should behave, because if you go to a developer let’s say you decide to hire a developer to build it for you, the more vague your idea is, the more expensive it is going to be to build. Because you are going to have to iterate more — there’s going to be a discovery process to really clarify that idea to the point where an engineer can do the coding for you.

But if you could go down with it really — going with it really locked down on paper. So somebody could kind of walk and code, pick up your paper and understand the app, and how it should look and how it should work, you are going to save yourself a lot of time and pen.

Steve: So is this as simple as just taking a piece of paper and saying hey, when someone clicks this button, it goes to this page and how the flow of the app works?

Erin: Yes, I think it absolutely could be that simple.

Steve: And what about — one thing I forgot to ask you about was graphics. Who does your graphic design for the app.?

Erin: So my graphic designer is a fantastic woman named Kim. She is — actually I got to tell you this app was a Bourne [ph] racing at the beginning. Kim is the sister in law of one of my best childhood friends. And she was the graphic designer in Natal [ph] for a very long time. And now she works independently, she is freelance designer and she is amazing. So we — Heather and I are lawyers, we are lawyers by background, we are not super creative people, so sort of the logo and looking through was a challenge for us.

So we got her in very early on and hired her to create our logo and to kind of give us some style guidelines for the app, and I think that has made a tremendous difference. Her work took our basic idea and she made it beautiful. And that’s a big deal when you’re using an app. You want it to be stylish, and you want it to be good looking on your phone, so full credit to Kim for that.

Steve: So I’m just listening to all the different pieces that you need to come together for this app. It look like you need a coder, you need a graphics designer, and you needed two lawyers. So how much did you invest to get this app off its feet?

Erin: Well, the funny thing about doing this is [Inaudible] [00:37:46] raising is we didn’t actually end up cutting the cheque. I will say we paid Kim for her graphic design help, but she probably gave us the friends and family rates.

Steve: Sure.

Erin: Damian came on as an equity partner, so we’re not paying him an hourly fee or anything along those lines.

Steve: I see.

Erin: Yeah, so we have been able to keep ourselves pretty lean.

Steve: Okay and so is that– let’s say you didn’t have Damian once again…

Erin: Oh yeah.

Steve: Would you still have gone the equity partner way or would you have kind of paid lump sum, like that first firm that you used, did you pay them or was that an equity deal?

Erin: Without going into great detail, it was more of an equity deal. We did not pay them.

Steve: Okay, and so would you suggest that going forward for people who want to start their own apps and they’re not technical at all?

Erin: I think yes. In my belief, the best thing to do is to find technical co-founders, to find your own Damian. And I do think those people are out there. They can be very difficult to find, but if you are serious about building a product that you want to have a high quality functioning product, the best thing you can do is to have somebody who is invested in it with you. And either– there are some services out there that help match technical co-founders with non technical co-founders. There’s a website called Founder2be, it’s like a match.com for startups, where you can kind of go find the missing piece of your startup.

Steve: Oh, okay. Nice.

Erin: There are places you can go to try and meet engineers or whatever type of expertise you need.

Steve: Okay, are you down in the Silicon Valley, are you?

Erin: No, I live in Los Angeles.

Steve: Oh, you live in Los Angeles. And is everyone local to where you are or people are…

Erin: Actually Heather is based in Atlanta, but she’s back and forth to LA on a regular basis. And yes, Damien and I are both based in Los Angeles.

Steve: So how much would you expect to invest in an app?

Erin: That’s a hard question. So there are apps out there that are really simple like Yo that we talked about early that does literally one thing. And then there are apps that are incredibly complicated like Facebook. The price points on those apps are going to be wildly diversions. I think anything from maybe a few $1000 for something basic, to $100,000 to build Facebook from scratch; probably I’m sure it’s way more than that by the way, but a lot…

Steve: What about…

Erin: In terms Complexity.

Steve: What about from a different perspective. So you guys all work your job still, what about a time commitment? How much time would you guys say you devote to this app?

Erin: A lot of time, a lot of time. I would say it’s [Inaudible] [00:40:27] flows. Right before it launched we were, all three of us, probably working 40 hours a week on it.

Steve: In addition to your….

Erin: In addition to our day job. But then there are times where if we don’t have any updates, that we’re working on at the moment, no big press push, maybe it’s only ten hours a week. It really varies.

Steve: Okay. And so where would you say you spend most of your time now that the app is actually launched?

Erin: Now that the app is launched, we’re currently working on an update as well as working on Android, so that’s a fair amount of time. But marketing and PR is probably the bulk of it at the moment.

Steve: Okay. And then how are the duties kind of divided between you and Heather?

Erin: Heather and I are pretty much 50-50. And the great thing about having a co-founder like Heather is that we can both kind of pick up the spot for each other. If she’s having an insane week at her a day job, I can step it up and vice versa.

Steve: Okay. And then Damian of course, then rockets will not get designed that week I guess.

Erin: I know, right? Seriously though you have to meet him, he’s great. He occasionally has to go into a secret bunker for his job, where he’s like, “They’re going to take my phone away for six hours, but I’ll be back.”

Steve: So this company is government related then I guess?

Erin: Yes.

Steve: Oh, okay, okay. And he’s down in LA?

Erin: Yes.

Steve: I think I know which company it is. Well that’s cool Erin, any other advice that you would give out to someone who’s interested in developing an app? Were there any books or anything that kind of gave you a head start?

Erin: Not on the apps specifically. I’m a big fan of The Lean Startup, if you’re looking to start a business. I’m a huge fan of Ben Horowitz’s book, The Hard Thing About Hard Things, which is about both starting a company and then scaling it up to a big company. And he’s part of Andreessen Horowitz, the large venture capital firm, and man does he have some good advice.

For me personally, I would say my best advice is just to persevere. A lot of small startups, a lot of app companies fail simply because the founders run out of steam and kind of give up. And Heather and Damian and I are pretty tenacious. I really attribute a lot of our success just being willing to beat our heads against the wall until something works.

Steve: And it sounds like in terms of maintenance, maintaining this app does not cost that much money because you have the engineer and then you guys obviously are working on it yourself, but you don’t have any outside help that you’re paying at the moment, right?

Erin: We do not. I think in my dream world if our app got gigantic, I’m sure we will at some point, yes. Sort of outsource or to insource, but currently it’s just us.

Steve: Do you guys pay yourself a salary or just all the money kind of goes right back into the app?

Erin: Right now all the money goes right back into the app. I could envision a day where we all might take a salary, but not yet.

Steve: Okay, and then what is the realistic time frame that you would give for somebody who wants to create an app?

Erin: Well, again I think it’s kind of very based on complexity and based on the talent and time that is there to be doing it, but honestly there’s phrase about the longer it takes to launch, the less likely it is to launch. And I think there is some truth there. You got to give yourself a few months to a year, but try not to go a whole lot longer than that.

Steve: Okay and then you highly recommend doing some sort of beta right away as soon as you can, and then iterating on it?

Erin: That has worked great for us. I loved that route. I know other people have done other things, but that was great for us.

Steve: Okay. Well, great Erin. We’ve been chatting, believe it or not, for 40 minutes already.

Erin: This is been really fun. Thank you again for having me. I very much appreciate it.

Steve: Yeah, really appreciate having you on. If you could tell the audience where they can find you, where they can find your app…

Erin: Yes, of course…

Steve: And get more information that’d be great.

Erin: So our website is www.cluckcluckapp.com, and you can find us on iTunes, if you just search for CluckCluckapp, like the noise the chicken makes.

Steve: And what about your Instagram account and your twitter account?

Erin: We’re @cluckcluckapp for both and same on Facebook, it’s just– search for CluckCluckapp and you’ll find us.

Steve: Awesome Erin. Well, thanks a lot for coming on the show. I had a great time.

Erin: Thank you, so did I. It was a pleasure.

Steve: All right, take care.

Erin: Bye-bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. What I like about Erin is that she doesn’t have a technical background, but she still managed to create an awesome app for parents. And it just goes to show that you don’t really need to know how to code in order to create a successful app. You just need to create the right team to do so.

For more information about this episode go to MyWifeQuitHerJob.com/episode71, and if you enjoyed this episode, please got to iTunes and leave me a review because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks, so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now, as an added incentive, I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner, every single month. For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest, and if you’re interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Once again I just want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend, if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. They’ve got an incredible theme store where you can choose from a wide variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t need to hire a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba so you can easily find products to sell online.

So bottom line, everything from design to sourcing to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products. And you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.MyWifeQuitHerJob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

070: Crazy Simple Business Ideas That Actually Make A Lot Of Money With Lars Hundley

Simple And Crazy Business Ideas That Actually Make Money

When it comes to starting a business, there’s a general misconception that you need to create something grand and invest lots of money in order to be successful. In fact, many would-be entrepreneurs never get started because they think that they need to create the next Facebook, the next Google or the next Amazon.com.

But in reality, it’s very easy to make money online if you start small and simply go for a base hit. In today’s podcast, Lars and I talk about some of the many ways that we’ve made money in the past that do not require any infrastructure or technical know how.

Warning: Some of Lars’ past businesses have been wacky, crazy and off the wall. And in honor of this podcast episode, I’m giving away a free monkey phone call to 3 lucky readers/listeners at MonkeyPhoneCall.com!

Leave a comment below to enter and I’ll do a random drawing.

Remember, the only thing you need to succeed in business is a little confidence and a lot of hustle. Enjoy the episode.

What You’ll Learn

  • Off the wall business ideas that have worked for Lars
  • How I made money before I started my online store
  • 7 different ways to make money that are simple and don’t require much upfront investment
  • Why you need to start selling something today
  • Why your potential for making money is much greater than you think
  • Easy ways to make money right now without any technical knowledge

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

This episode was sponsored by Big Commerce. If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. Where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcast where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiteherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick a shout out to this episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store. And Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here is what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce doesn’t really nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

Now there’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba which is new. So you can easily find products to sell online. Now if you are interested in starting your own online store using Bigcommerce is as about as easy as it gets. Everything from design, to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products.

You can literally start your own online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. Today’s episode is going to be a little different than some of the other episodes we’ve had. Now instead of talk about six, seven, or eight figure online businesses, my guest and I are going to talk about just making money period online. Now here is the thing, most people seem to have this misconception: they had to have the perfect idea before getting started. And most people think that your idea must be scalable in order to be successful. Most people are also afraid that their ideas are stupid, or they can’t think of anything worth doing.

So today I’ve invited my buddy Lars Hundley back on the show to discuss exactly that. Now it turns out that between the two of us, Lars and I have done some pretty silly things online. And some of our business ideas have just been downright ridiculous. Actually Lars beats me in this department. But if you don’t remember Lars, he was actually a guest on episode 29 where he talked about his Clean Air Gardening shop. But the guy actually had many businesses in the past, that he started in the past decade and kind of between the two of us we’ve both kind of failed spectacularly and yet we’ve also made decent money off of ideas that weren’t exactly great.

Now the point here is that you really don’t need a great idea at all to start. You just got to find something and just go with it. And so with that intro welcome to the show Lars. How are you doing today man?

Lars: Thank you Steve. It makes me feel really good about myself that I’m on your show as the example of– a lot of people make a lot of money and are very successful, but here is a guy that well he does a bunch of weird stuff and makes a little bit of money at it. So don’t feel bad about sucking because wait till you hear how this guy sucks.

Steve: So just for the record listeners Lars actually does really well. It just so happens that he’s done a lot of funny stuff too. He usually doesn’t publish his stuff publicly, but we’ve had some chats in the past and he’s done some pretty funny stuff. And I’ve got some stories to tell too. It’s not like I’m going to leave Lars out there alone in this case. But I actually don’t even know where to begin. So should we just start the ball rolling with some bone headed business ideas?

Lars: Well first I got to do a very quick like in my own defense thing. Clean Air Gardening was my– is my main business and I’ve been doing that from one to 15 years. And we’ve been in the Inc. 5000 fastest growing companies list two or three different times. So I do have a real business and I do that for a living. I work out of a warehouse. I’ve been making my living fulltime online since I started making money online 1998. I quit my day job in 2000. So I’ve been doing it fulltime since 2000.

Steve: Plus you’ve got those other businesses too also that we didn’t even talk about in the last lectures. I think everyone out there knows Lars that you are the man. So let’s get to the funny stuff now.

Lars: Which one do you want to hear about?

Steve: I don’t know. What do you got? Let’s– we’ll alternate. Why don’t you start out with one and then I’ll chime in afterwards?

Lars: The stupidest way I’ve ever made money on the internet is I used to make monkey noises where people would pay me 10 bucks to make a monkey phone call where I would call people up and deliver a monkey phone call, or I would make these super loud monkey noises over the phone and just freak people out. It’s like a paid prank call basically. I ended up on like a whole list of clear channel radio DJs on the morning show guys. They keep like a master internal list of people that make good interviews, and I was so weird and bizarre that they had me on probably at least 20 different morning radio shows around the country. Or they would interview me and then sometimes they would make me make monkey phone calls live on the air. That’s probably the most ridiculous way I ever made money.

Steve: How did you get the word out on this monkey call business?

Lars: Well it’s funny, I started way back in– I think it was either 2002 or 2003. So this is before social media even existed.

Steve: Yeah, exactly.

Lars: So if you wanted something to go viral it had to go viral by email and people would share email. What happened was at that time in the early 2000s that was the time when sometimes funny eBay auctions would go viral where people would just list the weirdest stupidest stuff just to get attention, and then sometimes it would get reported in the media. So my brother and I were looking at some of those and there was an eBay auction that was weird like that, that had something to do with monkeys. And we thought, “I know what we can do. Let’s make a website.”

We threw the thing together and built it in about a day or two. I think literally we– I don’t remember if we posted it on some message board or emailed it to somebody that had like a long– that’s how we launched it and it literally went viral all by itself from that. We didn’t really promote it very much. And then every time we’d appear on the radio, everybody in the town– you’d start getting all these orders all from the same area code wherever the radio station was located. Then you can always– do a radio show and I would have to make 50 phone calls.

Steve: So was this a nice website, or did you just kind of throw up a page?

Lars: It still exists.

Steve: Oh it does?

Lars: It does not have the order button because I’m not– I’ve retired from the monkey noise businesses, but it’s Monkeyphonecall.com. That– it’s the original website. It looks totally 2003 when you look at it. It’s not mobile friendly or responsive, and it has funny graphics but it’s still there.

Steve: Give me a sec here. I’m just going to bring it up here. So it’s Monkey…

Lars: Phonecall.com

Steve: Call.com. Oh yeah, the site is really, really 2000, early 2000ish. So people would actually go on this website and click on this order now button, and then pay you 10 bucks per call?

Lars: Yes.

[Crosstalk]

Lars: It totally happened, it was real.

Steve: And then you would just spend the day making these prank calls to people. That’s pretty hilarious.

Lars: I was always doing it on the side so it was basically– it was like extra money in my pocket. It’s like free money and only takes three minutes to make the call. It was a pretty good deal.

Steve: Were you working your fulltime job at the time?

Lars: Oh yeah. That was– I was well into Clean Air Gardening. Clean Air Gardening was launched in 98 and was fulltime since 2000. So it was just something we did as a joke, and I was doing it on the side. When I’d see supporters go through, I would just sort of step aside and make a bunch of monkey noises and then go back to work.

Steve: What’s hilarious here is you even have a bunch of testimonials.

Lars: Those are real too.

Steve: Wow. So I don’t think that I can top that, but actually I just wanted to make a disclaimer to the listeners. Remember Lars when we said that we’ve done some bone headed things online. I actually just said that to make you feel better. I’ve actually never done anything stupid ever. This interview is all about you. All right, so here is one of mine. Long time ago and a lot of the people who’ve read my blog for a long time used to know that I used to buy stuff on Craigslist and I used to sell it on eBay. I got kind of sophisticated about it. I had a script that would send me new deals that popped up.

So one day a deal popped up on my Craigslist radar and it sounded too good to be true. And it was something like hard drives for like $10 that could easily have been sold on eBay for 80 bucks. So I email this dude, I map out the address and I head on over. And as I’m driving I realize that the houses that I was passing by were getting more and more run down and before I knew it I was in the ghetto. So here I was, like this nerdy Chinese guy. I think I was wearing my Stanford sweat shirt at the time; I was wearing my big coke bottle glasses. Driving outty and then I was deep in the ghetto, like G-H-E-T-T-O, ghetto.

So I knock on the dude’s house and this sketchy guy and his buddies walk me over to his van. He shows me the merchandise all of which look stolen. Like he’d ripped out– so these hard drives they still had the cables connected to them and then the cables were like cut. So picture a whole pile of hard drives with cables all from a bunch of computers. Lars I think I’m going to show my age here, but do you remember that episode– do you remember this show way back in the 80s called In Living Color.

Lars: Yeah.

Steve: It was like that skit the homeboy shopping network, “We’ve got car stereos, car radios and if you act now we can even get the car.” So anyway these guys I was dealing with they were pretty intimidating out to this nerdy Chinese dude. So I ended up buying these drives just because I was so intimidated, and I didn’t haggle. I always haggle, but I was just so terrified that I didn’t haggle and I just got the hell out of there. It’s just one of those like really stupid things where I could have gotten killed or mugged or whatever. But I actually made pretty much 1400 bucks that month, so I was pretty happy about myself. So there is my silly story.

Lars: So you sold the hard drives?

Steve: I did. I just turned them over on eBay and I would just do this with electronics and I was just doing this on the side. I would just make a couple of calls to Craigslist people. I always was the first one to jump because I had this script, and just to head on over, buy the stuff. I knew what everything was worth in my mind and I just turned it over on eBay. All right man, your turn.

Lars: It’s funny. You talk about arbitrage. I’m a member of a group here in Dallas, it’s a bunch of people that sell FBA, Fulfilled by Amazon. They were selling on Amazon and they are doing almost the exact same thing you were doing from Craigslist a long time ago where they were buying like weird groceries that are hard to find and toys. They are buying stuff at retail either at clearance or whatever, and then they are selling it on Amazon, FBA and making a profit on it. A bunch of these guys– most of them still have day jobs, but a few of them are doing it full time. They don’t even have their own exclusive product or anything like that. It’s kind of almost the same thing. It’s pretty cool that there are so many different ways to make money.

Steve: Yes. So we’ve actually had a guest. Her name is Jessica Larrew and she does exactly that. And she actually makes six figures doing that. So what she does is she goes over to the clearance houses. She has the Amazon app where you can just pretty much scan what everything is worth. So once week she’ll go through one of these clearance stores, find out whether she can make some money, and then she will just buy out the entire lot of that store and she’ll list it online. She’s done really well doing that.

Lars: You want to talk about Amazon; Amazon is one of the things that I’m actually excited about recently making money on Amazon. I got to tell you, I was making a list before the call started to think of all the different ways that I make money related to Amazon, and I came up with seven different ways that I make money just on Amazon.

Steve: Are you going to share those seven things Lars?

Lars: Oh no, they are all a secret.

Steve: I know you’ve done a bunch of stuff with Amazon actually. It’s really quite impressive; I mean if you want to talk about some of those things.

Lars: Well– okay, here is the list. Since I’m in the gardening business some of the products that I sell were actually either a manufacturer, a private label manufacturer or an importer, but we have exclusive rights to some of these gardening products. Some of these products I sell to Amazon as like where you are an Amazon vendor and you sell it to them at wholesale, and then they sell it on Amazon and that’s where for sale, from Amazon and people buy it that way. So that’s one way. That is the original way that I started making money with Amazon.

And then I figured out how to become a merchant and sell on Amazon, and we used Amazon to liquidate all these dead products that were sitting in our warehouse that had been– like things that weren’t selling. Usually with stuff that you have to liquidate you either have to throw it in the dumpster and take a total loss or maybe there is something like a liquidation company and they’ll give you a five cents on the dollar. It’s just something ridiculously low to carry it away. I started listing all this stuff on Amazon, and I was like making small profits, at least breaking even on all of it.

So I emptied out my warehouse with all these useless stuff that wasn’t selling for me, and it was totally awesome. So that’s one way that I made money on there. And then I started realizing, “Well wait, I bet you there is other stuff that I could sell on Amazon.” So I was selling as a merchant on Amazon that way and making– I’m still a merchant today selling various products although it’s a little bit hard when you are selling stuff as a retailer on Amazon, because there is always somebody else coming along that you are competing for the buy button with a lot of these products. So that’s a pretty competitive space to be.

Then I also sell FBA on Amazon where I have products that I box up and you ship into Amazon’s warehouse and then it’s fulfilled by Amazon. Man I’ll tell you, the difference between selling as a merchant on Amazon and selling Fulfilled by Amazon your volume goes way up because people– like all those people that have Amazon prime accounts really prefer to buy stuff that comes directly from Amazon warehouse because they know they are going to get in two days. So that one– if you’ve got a good product that’s exclusive and you can sell at Amazon FBA, it’s a great way to make some money on Amazon.

I also– I’ve got an affiliate account with Amazon and I’ve got some informational websites out there and occasionally I’ll do affiliate links to products that are related– mostly these informational gardening sites, and I’ll have like a link to something for sale on Amazon that I don’t sell, but it’s related to tomato gardening or something like that. And I probably make 40, $50 a month on affiliate sales on Amazon. It’s not real money, but its good money. I’d rather have $50 than not have $50, right?

Steve: Yeah. So here is the thing about the Amazon affiliate program. What’s nice is you get someone on Amazon and you actually get commission on everything they buy. So what’s hilarious about this– I got a funny story here. Below, a lot of the show notes in some of these podcasts I list Amazon affiliate links for books that people recommend, like some of the guests I have them usually recommend a book or two. There is this one order where someone clicked on that book and bought like a $1000 worth of like spanks. It was just completely random because you can see what the people buy.

So I ended up making a decent amount just off that one order when the original intention was just to buy books. So you can easily make a couple of extra bucks doing that pretty easily if you have a blog or some sort of website.

Lars: I’ve also gotten some weird products that have come through where somebody has clicked through the link and ended up buying other stuff on Amazon too, and it’s like “What is that?”

Steve: Yeah. It’s completely random stuff. It’s actually pretty interesting.

Lars: Well another way I make money on Amazon is I’m actually a Kindle author and I wrote a book about composting. I worked on it– it’s not a very long book, it’s maybe 50 or 60 pages or something, but it’s basically a beginner’s guide to composting that sort of gets you started on it. I had a cover designed and I paid somebody on Elance to edit the book for me, and then put it up there. It’s got like 60 reviews. It does fairly well. I make probably up to a couple of hundred bucks a month on it, and it’s just up there.

I don’t promote it really anymore, and it does fairly well because now that it has enough reviews it sort of keeps going because people see that it has good reviews and they keep buying it. So that’s been a cool way. I made money as an Amazon shareholder for a while. I bought it when the stock was on a tear. Again it was like two or three years ago or whatever. And it was going up and then I stopped out when it started to go back down, because I sort of did trailing stops if I ever buy individual stocks because I’m afraid of losing money.

So Amazon went way up and then as it started to go back down it hit stock number so I sold. So I ended up– I think I almost doubled my money in– I don’t know, two or three years with Amazon. It wasn’t a giant amount, but it’s still kind of cool.

Steve: You know Lars one thing I really like about you is that you just– you try everything, unlike me, like we’re kind of different in this respect, but I tend to do one thing and then it takes me a lot to time to actually for me to start something new, yet you seem to be able to just start new things and try new things without– it’s just in your personality and that’s what I really like about you, and in fact you always try to get me to try new things and which I really appreciate by the way.

And without you like constantly emailing me about new things that you are trying that are working, I may not have even have considered doing some of these things. So let’s talk about some of your resent stuff that’s been pretty cool in my mind, so you recently wrote a post on my blog about a Kickstarter that you did, where you created this really cool bicycle locking belt. Now can you talk about some of the ways that you have been just using Kickstarter recently, and how you experimented with it?

Lars: Yeah, that’s actually another thing that I’m very excited about, I’m excited about Amazon and I’m also excited about Kickstarter, I’ve done two successful Kickstarter projects now and they are both on the minor success scale, I think they both were just under 10,000 dollars each. So I’m not one of the people that make a million dollars on Kickstarter or anything like that, but the first one was Yoyo, because I have one of my ecommerce sites sells Yoyo, that’s one of the ones that’s also been around since 1998 or 1999, that’s one of my original ecommerce sites and I’m actually a Yoyo expert, and I’m really good at Yoyo which is weird but true.

It goes along with [inaudible] [0:21:46] I guess it’s– these things that it’s embarrassing to tell people that you’re good at. But the latest Kickstarer is sort of a little bit outside of my area of expertise, I’m really into cycling, I’m– I like to do a lot of mountain biking, cycle cross bike racing and road bike racing. And so I’ve always sort of wanted to have some kind of bike related product to sell, because I’m personally really interested in it.

And I even went to the Euro bike trade show a couple of years ago to look for a product maybe to import and sell, and I really wasn’t able to find anything that seemed to make sense, because a lot of the products you need so much money to import, like if you want to bring in a bike brand, you got to have millions of dollars because you have to carry every size, every color, every model. And so they are not looking for small time people like me. So anyway, I started thinking of ideas and I came up with this idea for a bike lock with a buddy of mine who actually is in the bike business, and so designed this lock and I worked with a guy that he goes– he flies back and forth to China all the time.

And he can find somebody to manufacture anything. If you have some idea and you don’t have to have like a card drawing and all that, I mean literally you could scribble out your idea on an up can and you can couple it together with purchased products that you’ve bought some place else, and then where there’s ort of a weird working prototype that’s not really– not a good prototype, it’s something that you could show it to some guy, and that’s what I did with this lock.

And then we went over there and then they made several samples and it was cool. And so I decided I was going to launch it on Kickstarter because I don’t really have a channel to sell bike stuff, because…

Steve: Your blog is gardening related, right?

Lars: Right.

Steve: It has nothing to do with… right.

Lars: Right.

Steve: Okay.

Lars: My blog is gardening related, and so– and my website is gardening related, and so I didn’t really have any kind of sales channel for it. So I thought well let’s see if I can pond [ph] the first manufacturing run using Kickstarter, and so I was afraid that the Kickstarter was going to fail.

And so I set the number really low, because with Kickstarter, if you don’t hit your funding goal, you don’t get any of the money, and I thought well, I want to manufacture this product anyway, because I believe in it, but I’ll really like to see how much of it I can pre-sell with Kickstarter as I’m getting started. And hopefully Kickstarter will pay for the whole manufacturing run, so I don’t have to come up with any money out of my own pocket.

And it turned out that I did not make enough money to pay for the whole manufacturing run, but it paid a good portion of the manufacturing run. And so I was definitely ahead of the game of where I would have been if I would have just designed it and had no way to sell it or anything. So it worked out great.

Steve: So regarding the design of this belt, there are other products that were kind of similar, and that you could wear a chain on your waist, and you made a lot of improvements to kind of an existing design, is that how it worked or?

Lars: Yeah. There’s another bike lock out there and it’s supper expensive, and it’s sort of a more complex design and I sort of simplified the concept so that I could make it less expensive, and I think mine is a little better honestly, I’m really happy with the way it turned out.

Mine has a cool reflective strip on the back, so it lights up with the car headlight shines on it. It has a built in zipper pocket where you can keep the keys to your lock, and things like that, and there was already sort of a similar product in that category.

And the way I feel is every idea didn’t have to be the most original perfect idea that no one else has ever thought of in the history of the world, because how do you know if your idea is good? Like I like to find cool things that I can sort of iterate and improve, that is– that are things that I’m interested in rather than maybe I’m just not creative enough to come up with a completely original product.

Steve: By the way, everyone listening Lars is like one of the most self-duplicating guys I know, he’s really awesome yet he always like bashes on himself. Just a couple of words about his bike lock, I actually purchased one, and I find it– I want these bike locks because my wife and I and our kids, we like to go biking and we bought one of these coil type of locks with a padlock on it, and then every time my wife would try to lock the bike, she’d have to unwind this thing around her seat, and then the bike lock actually would start banging against the bike itself. And so I thought it was pretty ingenious, so we picked one up right away. I have yet to receive it yet, however Lars, but…

Lars: Well, no– actually the Kickstarter started out so good that I actually started the manufacturing run while the Kickstarter was still going once I saw that I was going to get funded. So– but they’re made in Asia, so they have to ship by sea because box are heavy, especially a whole bunch of them, so it takes longer, so they’re going to ship mid-February and then I’ll probably also be selling it on Amazon once they get there.

Steve: Awesome.

Lars: Also I’m working on setting up those product listings on Amazon right now.

Steve: So let’s talk about ideas that aren’t necessarily like million dollar ideas, but they just kind of work, like you mentioned you monkey call business. You probably made a couple of thousand dollars doing that I would imagine, and at the height…

Lars: Yeah, like literally some days if I would be on a radio show, I would do up to 50 phone calls in a day, which– that’s is 500 bucks.
.
Steve: Yeah.

Lars: So it did all right, and it was self-sustaining, because like it would always go to a new crowd of people that thought it was hilarious, and then it would keep going. It was funny because you’d see like people would start ordering it all from the same domain name, it’s like people were ordering it for each other at work, and then there’s all kind of weird patterns that you would see.

Steve: I mean this is just kind of that glitter envelope idea that was just– that just kind of went viral recently, where people are sending glitter to other people as a prank, in a way it’s a same sort of idea and it went viral.

Lars: Yeah, exactly. I was way ahead of that guy. Except for, he was much smarter than me because he sold that site for $83,000, I believe it’s the number; it was called Ship Your Enemies glitter. And that actually there’s another side story about that, I read a story, it was on entrepreneur’s magazines website or blog about another guy who– they called him an opportunist entrepreneur, and that basically he heard about the Ship Your Enemies Glitter idea, and he thought this is a good idea.

And he made one call to Sparkle Slap, which is basically– it’s the same thing where he will send an envelope full of glitter to somebody, and he’s also made good money from it, just following the trend, because what happened was The Ship Your Enemies Glitter guy also and he started getting [Inaudible] [00:29:26] with orders, because it went viral and he couldn’t even fill them all because it’s a lot of work to mail envelopes.

And so this guy said well, that guy can’t even fill his orders, so I’m going to get into this and his thing I think it’s still running and profitable, and he’s still– he’s getting his MBA at some place. And so I– anyway I thought that was awesome, because that’s– you don’t have to– you could literally make a knock off of a weird site that sells glitter and be successful with it. Like that’s the way to make money.

Steve: I remember you sent me the link to that guy, he like threw up a sign like a weekend or something like that, and just started selling. And it is a descent looking website too, which I just also want to mention to the listeners, setting up one of these good looking websites actually isn’t that difficult anymore, you can just– there’s a bunch of fully hosted guys out there like the Shopify, Bigcommerce as well. You can literally throw up a fully functional store with just a couple of clicks, so it’s pretty amazing.
Lars: Yeah, they have some really good simple templates if you have an idea like that, you can probably put something together, and under 10 hours if you had a crazy idea, and the price for hosting it is not that high on the low level one, which you can always rise up or go back down.

And the other thing you can do, is you can put up a WordPress site, and there’s a bunch of different templates for a landing page kind of sites or all kinds of crazy templates, if it was a service where you could go even cheaper than putting it on Bigcommerce or Shopify if you wanted to do it that way. And then just take payment with PayPal or something and it’s bam, you’re up and running.

Steve: Actually you got a similar story to this glitter guy, right? I mean I remember you were talking to me, and I think you even wrote a post on my blog about there was some press about these guys that were making house numbers, the numbers that you kind of mount on your house to show off your house number, and you just went ahead and threw up a sign and started drop shipping these things, and it still makes money today, right.

Lars: Yeah. Well that one was actually– it was a column in the Wall Street journal from way back in early 2000s, because this site was also from like 2002, 2003. And what happened was it was in this column called catalogue critic, where every week they would secret-shop and order stuff, and then from a bunch of different catalogues and online sites, and then they would critic it and talk about what was good and what was bad. And that week they had ordered a bunch of address signs, the kind that go on your house.

And they noticed that quite a few of them, all came from the same manufacturer or shipped from the same address. And I was like ding, ding, ding, then my alarm bells were going off and like hey this sounds like a drop ship product that might work. And so I put together a site and man there were so many products, I couldn’t just add it to Cleaner Gardening because it didn’t make sense, this was actually my very niche sight that was a separate site than Cleaner Gardening and my first niche ecommerce site.

And so I thought well, I’m just going to make a separate site out of it, because they did also sell a few things that made sense for Cleaner Gardening, that I sold them at Cleaner Gardening site, but I had to write individual product descriptions for like hundreds of products, because you had to write something and they didn’t give me any text back then.

So it was actually quite a bit of work, I ended up hiring a college kid to help me write some of those, because I got so like bored with putting it together because it was like so much work, but it was– yeah, there was, once again you read something, you see an opportunity, and you act on it and it works out, I mean it’s not been like– but yeah, I mean it still makes money today.

Steve: I mean it’s good spending cash, I don’t know how much it makes, but it sounds like it makes descent money for pretty much a maintenance free site, right?

Lars: Yeah, like back in the day when it used to rank well on Google, when it was easier to rank for stuff, it was making probably mortgage payment level profits per month. So it was…

Steve: A couple of grand a month?

Lars: Yeah, Well yeah. Well you think about California [inaudible] [0:33:40].

Steve: Oh yeah, my bet. Well that would be like 10,000.

Lars: Yeah, I’m thinking more along the lines of Texas mortgages which are in the 1000 to 2000 range for a nice house.

Steve: You know, I mean we had similar ideas too, so I remember my wife and I we use to comb eBay for stuff that was selling, and one idea that we got was going into the personalized baby bib business.

So basically we would just monogram, or we put funny sayings on bibs, and these actually sold pretty well, and what’s awesome about baby bibs is that people– little kids they vomit all over them, and they are pretty much ruined after the first use and then they come back and they buy another one.

And we ended up finding a vendor who was willing to sell these things in super cheap, in thousand unit quantities, so we bought a whole bunch. Eventually we found out that we had to actually get these tested before selling which kind of ruined the whole operation, but for a while we were doing well. But it did get to the point where once we found out they need to get tested, and we were kind of selling these illegally, we ended up having a garage full of these things.

I ended up wearing these baby bibs at dinner, just coz they were like napkins, right. And every kid wore a bib, that was our policy in our house until we went through like the thousands that we had. But anyway just do your research on permits before selling anything, but those ideas are all over the place, you just got to find out what’s selling, or you can use a tool called Terapeak to kind of comb the eBay listings and find out what products are moving well.

Lars: Interesting. I haven’t used Terapeak before.

Steve: Yeah, and you’ve got some other funky businesses that you’ve done in the past which personally I didn’t think would make a dime, but you’ve actually done pretty well with them also.

Lars: Like what are you thinking?

Steve: I was thinking about the one that you sold like wadded up pieces of paper in a box, you want to talk a little on that one, I thought that was pretty interesting to me.

Lars: It’s– first of all, it’s not wadded up pieces of paper, it was actually art.

Steve: My bet, my bet.

Lars: It’s origami [ph] boulder, and basically it’s– that one is actually a reference to an old Matt Groening cartoon book from the 80s that when I was– I was in a book store, I was visiting Austin in high school in the 80s, and we’re in this– it had been a book store, looking through like the humor section, and there’s this Matt Groening, I don’t remember how you pronounce his name, he’s the Simpsons guy, this is way before the Simpsons.

But anyway one of his cartoons– it was called cheap gifts or something like that, and one of them was like jar [ph] or gravel, and the other one was origami boulder, and then it’s just like land– drier land, it was just stupid ideas for– to give as a gift to a purely ultimate lazy person.

And I thought that was hilarious and so it stuck in my mind, and after monkey phone call, I thought what else can I do that’s kind of funny, they might go viral. And so I came up with that idea, and it actually did go viral too, and I can’t say who, I don’t think– I don’t want to violate anybody’s privacy, but once a big name that everybody would recognize from silicon valley, and this was also in probably 2005 or something like that, ordered like a hundred of these origami boulders.

And then I used to have a more expensive version that would have a haiku on the inside, you couldn’t read the haiku because if you opened it up, then you would ruin the art work, but I really did, I wrote in the original haiku for every single one of them. In fact it was just recently some guy emailed me that he waited 10 years and opened up his haiku and read it.

Steve: That’s hilarious, what is this site called, you don’t do this anymore, but…

Lars: No, it’s still up and once again I had the order button down because I’m not up to wadding up paper and sending in mail anymore, it’s origamiboulder.com.

Steve: Origami boulder, hilarious. I don’t think I’ve ever actually went to the site, I remember you telling me the story, oh no the buy buttons are still there.

Lars: I don’t think they work though.

Steve: Oh they don’t work. Okay, hilarious, these are expensive too.

Lars: Yeah, and people would buy them up, and they would buy the most expensive version too. I have one with the bamboo stand, that’s like a display stand, and I was buying those over at the container store.

Steve: Yeah, I know, it’s– you were charging 30 bucks, that’s a lot.

Lars: People were buying them too.

Steve: Yeah, that’s crazy, crazy. I mean it just goes to show that, I don’t know, I mean these are just ideas that are just kind off the wall and they work, and how did that one go viral actually?

Lars: You know, I put it up there, I linked to it from monkey phone call for a while, so people that were visiting Monkey phone call clicked through to it, and then it just went just viral all by itself. And somebody linked to it, and the funny part was that a bunch of people linked to it and it was Origami boulder in the domain name and the name of the site.

And this was back when there was– anchor text was everything with Google. And I was ranking in the top three for just Origami which was really annoying to all the real origami enthusiasts, it was just like a total insult, I would get insulting emails actually about this is not Origami.

And I have a whole actually page of letters where people would get completely offended by this concept of Origami boulders, and they sent me these scathing emails and then I would reply to them, and like in an annoying way, the whole section is called letters from dum dums, and I would just call everybody a dum dum, they wrote and complained about it.

And the site is written sort of in bad English where you are not sure if it’s an Asian guy or not, and then because it was a character basically that I created when I came up with this one because I thought, what would be funny– because just selling up wadded papers is not funny, and so I came with a whole character to go with it.

Steve: Yeah, and what’s funny about all of this is it– kind of all these things kind of tie into like a central theme that I always preach in my class, which is having some sort of interesting story behind your products, and having some sort of value proposition. And often times it’s much easier to get press if you have a good story related to your product.

Steve: A good story? I thought you were going to go in the other direction. You are going to talk about the awesome value preposition.

Lars: Oh yes I couldn’t think of anything there, so I decided to go with the story.

Steve: Well hey so Lars so what are some of pieces of advice that you can give to the listeners here. Just in general when it just comes to just making money like we are not talking about creating $100 million businesses here, we are just talking about making some side money here. You might still be working your full time job, you know what are some of the early steps to kind of dip your feet in the water, and then hopefully gradually build up to something bigger?

Lars: Well that is a good point that I want to make because you know when I started my business even when I started Clean Air Gardening, I kept my day job and I started it. And I was actually; I was getting my MBA at night. And I had a day job, and I was starting a business. And you still have your day job even today. I think that is not a bad idea to keep your day job. I think it’s riskier if you are just going to quit everything for an idea that is completely unproven. And I really love the idea of starting a side business, and then when you see “Hey this is going to be a success,” then you can quit your day job and move on to it. So that’s one thing that I want to point out.

And the other thing that I would like to say is you know there’s a million ideas and there’s nothing new under the sun. There’s so many different ways to make money, and I’m definitely a shiny object guy where I have an idea and I chase this, I go “Oh! Here’s the way to make money. Oh! I’m going to do a Kickstarter thing. Oh I’m going to sell on Amazon.” And I’m going from one thing to the next. And what– in the beginning what you want to do is– and this is what I did, I had one website and it was making money. And I made it work fast.

Because you really want to find at least one thing and get it running where you are making a little bit of money before you do ten things, because otherwise your temptation is right before you make the one thing work, then that’s when you give up on it, because “Oh! There’s this other idea and this is even better.” And you don’t finish your first idea and then you end up like doing all the work, but you reap none of the benefits.

So I highly suggest you figure out– and it doesn’t matter if your first idea is stupid or lame or whatever, just finish your first idea and start making a little bit of money from it first before you do ten things.

Steve: Yeah you know it’s funny as I get a lot of emails from readers of the blog and they email me and they say, “Oh I have tried the whole e-commerce thing and it didn’t work.” Or you know– and then I’ll ask “How long did you try it for,” and they’ll say “Oh! Yeah you know I had it up for six months. You know I only got a couple of sales and so e-commerce just isn’t my thing.” And you know often times I tell people to take kind of a multi year timeframe. You know at least one year; preferably two to three or three to five. I don’t even start anything unless I plan on maintaining it for at least three years. Is that your philosophy too Lars or?

Lars: I think particularly with any kind of website now, I think Google– this is my conspiracy theory, it’s not based on any fact or anything like that, but I think Google makes it hard to ever rank for anything unless your site has been existing for at least a year or so. Of course if your site goes viral or weighing out, there’s all kinds of exceptions to that rule, but I think in general if you are starting a new site, I think it’s unlikely that you are going to rank well in the first year unless you just happen to get lucky.

And so yeah I totally agree with that. That you got to be you are willing to stick with it for a while before you just give up on it because it didn’t take off. I don’t think things– it’s hard. Most things don’t take off. They start slow and then they sort of snow ball. And so you got to not panic when it’s not immediately making $100,000 a month.

Steve: And the things that do take off they always make me suspicious. Like this whole Amazon thing that I’ve been doing seems a little bit too easy right now and I imagine that would probably change at some point. I don’t know. What are your thoughts on Amazon?

Lars: You know Amazon is my greatest friendenemy [ph]. I love them and hate them so much at the same time that it’s a really complex relationship. You know as a competitor– because you know Amazon sells a lot of gardening stuff also. They are a brutal competitor and the buy button– there’s massive competition for it. And there’s always somebody– it seems like your awesome product is somebody else’s like loss leader or somebody else’s liquidation product. And so here you are. You’ll– somebody will be looking on your website and they will say, “Well I looked on Amazon and it was only $40.” And it’s like that’s how much I pay wholesale for it.

So I can’t match that price. I’ll still have to ship it to you on top of that. And I had it shipped to my warehouse. It’s truly frustrating as an e-commerce guy to compete with Amazon. And really I’m having the most success on Amazon with exclusive stuff. But even if you have exclusive stuff on Amazon, you are competing against everything else in that category. Let’s say you know I have like a compost bin actually that I manufacture that I sell on Amazon. I’m competing against every other compost tumbler in that price range you know, and so just because you have a unique product doesn’t even guarantee your success on Amazon.

But they have so many people and the reason why people go to Amazon is to buy things, so all their traffic is so valuable. I don’t know, I’m really excited about what’s happening with Amazon now, but I’m afraid that things might change. You know like e-Bay used to be super easy to make money on. And now it’s not easy to make money on. People still do make money on it. And so I’m afraid that it’s going to be one of the things like that. In general I’m afraid of like hitching my wagon into somebody else’s train or– that’s probably a bad analogy. But you know like once you are hitched to them, well Amazon is always going to do what’s on Amazon’s best interest.

And what if one day Amazon decides, “You know what this Amazon seller thing, it’s not even making money for us, let’s just abandon it. Or let’s charge 30 percent instead of 15 percent so we can double our profits.” They could decide that over night. It’s their business. And yeah it’s probably not likely that they are going to do something that crazy. But I guarantee you though over time they will start cranking up the profit knob to make more money off of it.

Steve: I mean I totally agree. That’s why I’m always preaching that you should have your own branded website and– I usually don’t use the hitching the wagon analogy. I usually use the pregnancy analogy. You want to have fun, but you don’t want to get knocked up by Amazon and really depend on them. Same thing hey, but Lars you know we’ve been chatting for a while now and really appreciate you coming on the show. I’ll link up all of your previous businesses at the end of this podcast so people can see. And where can people find you if they have any questions for you, if they want to pay you a little extra and get a monkey call? You are still doing those even for the right price?

Lars: No, no, not at any price. I’m not– I’m done with those; at cleanairgardening.com is the best place to find me I guess.

Steve: Yeah and I will just link some of your kick starters also, do you have any kick starters on the way or in the process.

Lars: I do, I have some ideas, but they are at this point they are not– I can’t talk about them yet because they are still vague in my brain that I don’t think I could even describe them.

Steve: Okay no problem. Well hey Lars thanks for coming on the show again.

Lars: All right, well I’m sad that we didn’t get to talk about some of my giant e-commerce failures because it makes it sounds like I’m…

Steve: There’s time. There’s time. If you want to tell– I mean I had some failures too. I didn’t even get a chance too because we were going down a different route, but share one of your failures Lars before we go.

Lars: Okay. Well here’s my biggest online failures was, my grandfather used to own a beer dealership when I was a kid. And my dad worked there a little bit when I was a kid before, but he was– he really worked for a Fortune 500 Company after that. But he worked there for a few years with my grandfather. And so I’ve always been sort of interested in cars. And I thought you know what I want to do? I want to get my used car dealer’s licenses and I want to sell cars online, because I read about this company in Dallas that was selling cars on like e-Bay motors and they were just making a killing.

And so I actually went through all of the paper work to be a used car dealer. And you have to have a lot. You have to have like there are all these things you have to have. And it’s so much paper work because it’s like it’s really highly regulated, the car market. And so I spent a ton of– I mean fortunately I already had a building, so I didn’t have to lease a whole space or anything like that because I just made our parking lot the car lot. But even doing it cheap it probably cost me thousands of dollars starting. And I never sold a car for a profit. I sold everything at a loss. And then I gave up on it for a while and then I shut down.

And when I shut down, the state of Texas sent me a $3,000 tax penalty because there was a six month period that I hadn’t shut down yet, and I had not sold anything. And so since I had zero sales, there was some special form that you are supposed to fill out that you have to report that you have zero sales, and since I didn’t report zero sales, they assumed that this and that, and there is no way to get around it. So I had to pay $3000 just to shut the whole thing down.

Steve: And then the cars that you did buy, are you still driving them?

Lars: Yes I’m still driving them. And that was from– I don’t know how many years; it’s a 2010 Subaru Outback. That was the last one that I bought at auction and I’m still driving it today.

Steve: I mean that’s just like my baby bib story. I mean at least your car is useful I mean.

Lars: That is true, but I bet you are shirts stay clean.

Steve: Well you know we’ll have to get on the show again maybe and talk about some of our failures. I got a whole bunch and unfortunately we didn’t have time to get to all of them today. But once again thanks for coming on the show Lars. We’ll have to get in touch again.

Lars: All right, thanks for having me.

Steve: All right take care.

I hope you enjoyed that episode which was a little bit different than some of the other ones that I’ve published in the past. And I hope that you’ve learned that making money online isn’t really that difficult. You just need to take some initiative, take some action, and execute. My friend Lars has just about tried everything and I hope that you can learn from his experiences.

For more information about this episode, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/episode70. And if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. Because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice for my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I’m also giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequiteherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6-day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over $100,000 in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

And once again I just want to thank big commerce for sponsoring this episode. Big commerce is one of the best shopping carts that I personally recommend, if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. They’ve got an incredible theme store where you can choose from a wide variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t need to hire a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba, so you can easily find products to sell online.

So bottom line everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing, is all built in and you just have to populate it with your own products and you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob. Thanks for listening.

Moderator: Thanks for listening to the “My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

069: How Maneesh Sethi Created Pavlok, An Electric Shock Bracelet That Breaks Your Bad Habits

How Maneesh Sethi Created Pavlok, An Electric Shock Bracelet That Breaks Your Bad Habits

Maneesh Sethi has created a revolutionary product called Pavlok, which is a wearable device that helps break bad habits and trains your behavior through electric shock.

Pavlok is easily the most unique product that I have encountered in a very long time and it’s extremely interesting to finally hear the back story behind his business idea.

In fact, right after the interview I purchased the device and have been using it ever since to break some of my bad habits.

Enjoy the episode and if you want to buy a Pavlok, Maneesh has offered everyone 37 dollars off with coupon code: PAV15

Click here to purchase the device

What You’ll Learn

  • How to use electric shock to break your bad habits and change your behavior
  • What it takes to create a hardware/software product
  • How Maneesh created a prototype of the bracelet with a 3D printer
  • How Pavlok works and the principles behind behavorial change
  • How to market such a complicated device to the public
  • How to get the word out about your product
  • How to get your product on television
  • Why Maneesh decided to go with an incubator instead of going completely out on his own
  • How to run a successful IndieGogo campaign.
  • The difference between IndieGogo and Kickstarter

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

This episode was sponsored by Big Commerce. If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners, to each us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest, and if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick a shout out to this episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store, and Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here is what I like about Bigcommerce, unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce doesn’t really nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

Now there’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba which is new, so you can easily find products to sell online. Now if you are interested in starting your own online store using Bigcommerce is as about as easy as it gets. Everything from design to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products. You can literally start your online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now on to the show.

Welcome to the, My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. Today I’m excited to have Maneesh Sethi on the show. Now Maneesh is a fellow Stanford grad, he’s published four books including an international best seller and he is a CEO of a company called Pavlok which is sells an extremely interesting product that we are going to talk about today. He is also runs a popular blog called Hackthesystem.com where he writes about his various hacks for everything in life. And here is what I like about Maneesh, he is a hardcore CS guy which makes a hardware engineer like myself smile, and he’s made enough with his various businesses that he does whatever the heck he wants.

Now he’s travelled over 30 countries, he knows five languages and he even became a famous DJ in Berlin. He’s actually done more already than most people do in a lifetime and with that welcome to the show Maneesh. How are you doing today man?

Maneesh: Hey, it’s a pleasure to finally chat with you.

Steve: You know it’s funny– I’ve met and hang out with your brother Rameet, and I was actually told that you guys have like the complete opposite personality. I’m actually not sure what that means, but I’m sure we’ll find out today.

Maneesh: Yeah. I got a lot of talk about on personalities if we want to go that route too.

Steve: Sorry go ahead.

Maneesh: No, it’s interesting. Let me tell you while we seem opposite in a lot of ways we are actually really similar, if you look at like the Myers-Briggs type. He and I are the same except for the last letter which is perceiver verses the P versus the J. And a J likes to finish stuff, so when they have an idea they want to execute it and make it perfect, and they hate opening new loops without closing the loops. And a perceiver on the other hand loves to start new things, but they have a lot of trouble finishing stuff.

And so what we found is that– it’s well known that ETNP and ENTJ together always mesh really well. It’s like Steve Jobs is a ENTP and Tim Kirk is a ENTJ. They act of having someone who is an idea guy followed by somebody who can execute upon those ideas is one of the things that I have been learning a lot over the last few years.

Steve: So which one are you?

Maneesh: I’m ENTP, Rameet is a ENTJ.

Steve: Interesting, okay. So it’s up to you to find the right team to execute then in your case?

Maneesh: Yeah. Like in my case it’s like identifying your weaknesses and instead of trying to see– instead of trying to optimize yourself to be some idealistic person, it’s recognizing your strengths and recognizing your weaknesses and then building a team that supports you.

Steve: There is a lot we can talk about today, but specifically I want to know more about Pavlok which is your baby. If you could just give a brief intro about Pavlok and how you came up with the idea, that would be great.

Maneesh: Sure. So Pavlok is a wearable device that uses vibration, beeps and electric shock, mild electric shock in order to help you break bad– it helps you break bad habits, improves your memory and trains your behavior. The idea of it started off with an experiment I used to run on my website called Hack the System. Basically I had a lot of trouble while travelling to get stuff done. It’s very hard to maintain a routine and execute it when you have to learn a new language every few months. So along the way I found that there is a lot of tasks that I knew I needed to finish, but they weren’t urgent so I just ended up never getting them done. Things like writing blog posts or filing paper work.

So I eventually started running experiments to see how to get this done. And one particular experiment I hired a girl to sit down next to me and every time I used Facebook I had her slap me in the face. I tracked my productivity during this time and you can see my score on productivity sky rocket from– it was like 28 or 38% on average, I sky rocketed to 98% when she sat down next to me. I said, “This is interesting.” I posted the video online, it went viral, crazy viral. There is over 150 different new sources in a 100 countries and I said, “Well if this is so viral, why am I paying her? I should just make a dog shock collar that shocks me every time I go on Facebook.”

So I did. I made a dog shock collar that shocked me every time I went on Facebook. I laughed about it, I made a video and right before I posted the video online I said to myself, “Wait, this is interesting. There are hundreds of devices out that there that are tracking what we do, but I think that we just made something that’s changing what I do.” There is something here. Maybe it’s more than just a viral blog post. So I took that idea, pitched it to some incubators. One incubator invested in my company, in the idea, and gave me some office space, and gave me a lot of mentorship and helped me bring it to reality. And that’s how it happened.

Steve: So let’s talk about this slap experiment real quick. So did you actually get slapped?

Maneesh: Yeah. If you Google Craigslist’s slapper, you’ll find my name at the top. There is a video of me getting slapped. And actually today I had a– and now I have a– at my office we have a lot of fun here. I have a giant tesla gun. It’s a tesla coil that shoots electricity up to six feet long and it’s held by a gun. You can– like a trigger based gun. So I have a new assistant now who about an hour day, she’ll sit down behind me while I do my email and if I get off task she’ll just start electrocuting the air, scaring me and I haven’t gotten to the point where I have to actually get electrocuted by it yet because I get back to work.

Steve: I know the last time we had spoken you gave me this log in to a website where I could actually send shocks remotely to you?

Maneesh: Oh gosh.

Steve: Are you still doing that?

Maneesh: No, I turned it down because I got electrocuted a lot one day, so I had to turn that off.

Steve: So I just want to make a distinction real quick for the people listening out there. It’s more of like a surprise than an actual electric shock. It’s not like a tesla gun or– not a tesla gun but one of those stun guns or anything like that.

Maneesh: This is actually a really interesting thing to say from a business perspective. I know we are not chatting about this too much so I’ll briefly say this. When we started off the thing that made us different and interesting was the word shock. So we found that when we started– like we got on Good Morning America, [inaudible] [0:08:40] on Steve Harvey show mostly because people were just so blown away by this word shock. How would you do that to yourself? When you start to show it to people, they understand that the word shock is not what the people’s idea of what shock is, is. It’s like shock is any sort of electrical current running through your body that causes any kind of stimulus.

So my electric shock is just like touching a door knob if you rub socks on the ground. It’s like a slight impulse that’s surprising. We’ve actually been changing our literature to use the word jolt or use the word like electric stimulus, and it has changed the way people think about the product from the get go.

Steve: So I was actually looking on your site earlier today. It says that Pavlok can help you with exercising, language learning, creative writing. So how does that actually work from a functional perspective? So for example you mentioned that whenever you went on Facebook you got a shock. Is there some code involved there or do you shock yourself? How does it work?

Maneesh: So we have two different [inaudible] [0:09:37] that we are releasing: one in which you shock yourself and one in which it shocks you. So the one in which you shock yourself is actually really powerful. This is a big breakthrough for our business as well, when we discovered the power of self administered shock. So for untrackable habits, things like smoking cigarettes, nail biting, eating sugar, gambling or like scratching, whatever it is, bad habits like that, it turns out that if you shock yourself while you do the action for about five days your brain starts to classically condition itself to associate the pain of the shock with that undesired action, and it sort of deletes the habit from your brain.

So I did a couple of examples. I used it on myself for tortilla chips. I used to eat like a bag of tortilla chips a day. And so I said, “All right, for five days I’m going to eat as many tortilla chips as I want. I just have to shock myself at every bite.” Day one, day two were terrible, I didn’t want to eat them anymore. Day three, it was really bad. Day four and day five it was really difficult to eat the chips, but at the end of the fifth day I completely still until this day– it’s been over six months now, cannot eat tortilla chips in my house, in particular blue totistos tortilla chips make me sick.

Steve: Because of the fact that you shocked yourself every time you ate one.

Maneesh: Yeah.

Steve: Interesting.

Maneesh: We did a test group at our university. So we did like a research report over at the University of Massachusetts at Boston, and we took a group of eight people who wanted to quit smoking. We had them smoke their cigarettes. They were a pack a day smokers. And just so you know, the average success rate on quitting smoking for anybody who wants to quit is about five percent per year, and for people who use nicorette patches it’s like seven point five percent effective.

Steve: It’s really low.

Maneesh: So what you’ll see on the nicorette boxes like 50% better than a placebo. But 50% better than five percent is not that high. So what we did is we took a group of eight smokers who wanted to quit smoking, and they agreed to for the first five days they shocked themselves with the first cigarette of the day. They pressed the shock button [inaudible] [0:11:41]. And for the second week they shocked themselves for every cigarette of the day. By day 10 six of the eight had completely quit smoking, four weeks later the seventh had completely quit smoking.

So we had in our test period a 75% success rate of smoking secession. Until today it’s been two months now and when they take a puff a couple of them tried, they spat out the cigarette saying it was disgusting.

Steve: That is crazy. So outside the self administered shocking though, like how does it work. Can you have someone else enforce it or can you make it automated somehow?

Maneesh: Sure. Then there is the other side of it, the version which shocks you and that’s done though our device which is Bluetooth connected to your phone and it has an open API. So when you– went to the old website that shocked me from across the internet. What it was doing is when you typed in that URL and hit shock, it was sending a push notification to my phone, and that phone received the push notification and translated it into a shock on my wrist. So what that means is that we are creating an open API. Sorry, for viewers who aren’t familiar with open API is think of it more like an app store, like a free app store.

So people are able to develop apps that vibrate, beep and shock with your permission. So a couple of good examples of stuff that we’ve already built are, there is one integration I have with my productivity tracker where it looks at my productivity over the last 30 minutes, and if I have less than 50% productive, it vibrates, less than 30% productive it shocks and greater than 80% it will give me a vibration like a good job positive reinforcement.

Then we have one that looks at your email and if there is important emails from your boss, if you haven’t responded to within forty five minutes you get a vibration, if you haven’t responded to it within 60 minutes it shocks you. And then stuff like that that are related to fitness. So if you haven’t stood up in the last 30 minutes it will start to vibrate, if you haven’t stood up in the last hour it will start to shock you, if you haven’t been to the gym on time etcetera, etcetera, etcetera.

Steve: I see. So there is a like a software app store type of component to this as well where you’ve developed apps that– or you’ve developed integrations with apps that do this.

Maneesh: Yeah. So we’ve developed our own app that is– our own app that has a lot of different courses within it. And those courses all have sister apps like– sort of the processes. You download the product, you buy the product, you install the app and the first five days the product only allows you to press the shock button. So you can only shock yourself. In those five days you have to listen to our five day audio course. It’s the introduction to habit formation audio course, where we take you through the process of will power breaking and then we actually identify your personality type, and we start to give you a self understanding of what affects your behavior.

Once you get to day five you’ve unlocked the Pavlok [inaudible] [0:14:30]. So now all these different app store integrations are available as well as our sister courses. So we have like a course on waking up earlier and we have an app that allows you to vibrate and/or shock yourself to wake yourself up. It’s the world’s best alarm clock. Then we have another app on fitness where we allow you to bet with your friends and create competition, and then we have flash card app for memory. The memory is actually fascinating with [inaudible] [0:14:55] shock plus remembering things– just you just don’t forget things. So that’s how we kind of build it up.

Additionally we have a full on integration with other people who want to develop their own apps and a few other things.

Steve: So just listening to what’ve you said it sounds like Pavlok requires a combination of a whole bunch of things including mechanical design, hardware design; user interface is on as well as software development, right? So how does one execute on such a complicated product from the very beginning? Were you by yourself when you started this?

Maneesh: Yeah. It’s actually really rare to have a startup, like a hardware startup by a sole non-hardware founder. So I got very lucky in the sense that– I got very lucky but I had a good idea and I put it forward to the right people. So this incubator in Boston called Bolts, B-O-L-T.io is the URL.

Steve: Is that just like a coincidence?

Maneesh: Super coincidence.

Steve: Okay.

Maneesh: So they decided to– they are a hardware startup incubator. If you are familiar with Y Combinator, think of it like the Y Combinator for hardware. They decided to– their first class they offered seven slots. They had like a B to B slot and a B to C slot, and then they had a wild card slot and I was the wild card slot. And so what they were saying here was let’s take a good idea with like a guy who knows marketing, but he doesn’t know hardware and see if we can introduce him into the product.

Now I had to jump through a lot– like it took me forever. I would say the first six months of my one year at Bolt were basically lost– with the exception– the only thing that came out of those first six months was getting the Pavlok name, getting the logo and the tattoo. That’s what happened the first six months. Afterwards I finally found my cofounder who was– his name is Jim Winch. He is the original mentor of Lego Mindstorms.

Steve: Nice.

Maneesh: And he helped me bring about the product into actual something that I could show people. And the process of that was to start off by building out the specks– you speck out exactly what you need, then we bought a lot of product that did the stuff already, then we split our product idea into the known and the unknown. So there was the shock which was the unknown and then everything else which was like a vibrating motor, Bluetooth’s, [inaudible] [0:17:24], that was the known.

And we basically had these two big boards on the table, and the unknown which was the shock; we decided to make it sexy, so we turned it into a business card. So I have these business cards that shock you. And then the known section, other stuff we just set it up, then we connected the two together and know we had a flat two dimensional prototype that worked great. The next step here was to design the industrial design. So what is it going to look like? And this actually took a long, long time. In fact we just basically finished it now.

Steve: You are talking about the mechanical design at this point, right?

Maneesh: Sort of. The industrial design is like what should it look like? The mechanical design is what actually can we manufacture? At least that’s how I define it. So you can 3D print things today in a way it were impossible before. We came up with a lot of designs that we started to 3D print on these printers and they came out great. And actually we assembled them, sold up a lot of these 3D printed Pavlok prototypes, but they are unable to manufacture it because the way the 3D printer process works doesn’t quit mesh up the manufactured tools.

So we had to redesign them as a DFM designed for manufacturing process. So step one– I’ll just reiterate this. Before step one, step two is to have the idea, speck out the document, know what you are going to do. Step one is to build it on flat two dimensional surface with just the electronics and no industrial law. Step three is to try to mesh that into something that you can actually print and wear, and then step four is to fix it so it actually works in the real life setting. And that’s the stage that we are at right now. We’ve just finalized our designs; it’s currently being tooled and produced in China while we sell our prototype versions.

Steve: You said a lot of stuff there. And I just want to break things down. Start from the beginning. First of all, why did you decide to go with an incubator as opposed to just finding a hardware cofounder?

Maneesh: Sure. I tried really hard to start the company before this incubator, I tried for six months. I did not have hardware context back then. And so one thing was I actually found some prototyping companies who offered to prototype the product for us for cash. Their rates were enormous, and they were out of my possible ability to spend. And so I actually had given up on the project before Bolts offered me this contract.

But even in retrospect, incubator gives you a lot of value more so than just the person who knows how to do hardware. They also gave us the office space with 3D printers. The culture of having people around you working on stuff that’s hardware related is– you can’t count the value there, just a culture shift of thinking in hardware. And lastly you can never just build a hardware product with one person. The worst part about hardware is also the best part about hardware, which is that it’s really hard.

So a software product can usually be copied by two dudes, two college kids in a garage over a month or a week again even, whereas a hardware product requires electrical engineers, industrial designers, mechanical engineers and then software designers, app developers and UI UX designers as well. After having a hardware incubator really helped us get– helped me get an understanding over a six months through a year period of the real size of this challenge.

Steve: Since I am hardware guy here, I was just kind of curious what the costs were involved. Did you feel like you needed funding just to produce the hardware itself?

Maneesh: Yeah.

Steve: Because I was just thinking to myself, I was just listening to you talk, the way I would have proceeded with Pavlok is I would just buy an off the shelf board with all the components that you had, kind of muck with the software a little bit. And then I would probably need a mechanical guy and to shrink all that stuff down into a very small PCB, and then all the logistics involved in packaging it for a wearable.

Maneesh: There is a lot of ways to approach the hardware problem. We actually started off by taking the dog shock collar approach, right? So we took the dog shock collar apart, we turned into something that we could use. Then we discovered that the shock from the dog shock collar was too large to fit into a consumer wearable, so we had to turn it into smaller one that required a whole new PCB design and then we started rolling our PCBs.

PCBs are actually the easier part of the product compared to the– well the mechanical and the hardware is hard enough. The PCBs are difficult as well, the firmware has its own thing, and then that doesn’t count anything that relates to software.

Steve: Right. I know, I can imagine all the pieces together would be a pain. I was just curious though I noticed on your site that you also did an Indiegogo campaign. Was that to raise money or awareness? What was the purpose of the campaign?

Maneesh: It was both, right?

Steve: It’s both.

Maneesh: Money and awareness. I’ll tell you like we sold $270,000 or so on Indiegogo and it was great, but we spent that since and we haven’t even bought the products yet. Like hardware costs alone, just tooling costs as well as mostly staff of course costs the most. But to raise awareness it was huge, and actually one of the biggest things that came out of it was understanding how little we knew about our customers.

So we framed this Indiegogo campaign as the best– you know when you live inside of a bubble, when you live inside of something all day you don’t think about– you can’t really see it from the outside view point. So we put up this Indiegogo campaign and there were– we sold really well, but we kept getting the same question of like, “Okay, I get little shocks you but how does it know? How does it know when to shock you?” And we explained that that wasn’t even the point of the sensors and also the stuff but that’s not the point.

The point is that you can use to spur forming habits. Along this process through this Indiegogo campaign made us really look at what we were actually building. And in fact there was one particular day in fact it was Halloween last year where our UI UX guy came. He flew in from San Francisco to hang out with us, and we were all looking at our product and we were like, “This is kind of confusing. We make a product that’s cool, that’s shocks you– cool. But how come all of our Indiegogo campaign question are relating to forming habits about like how do you get yourself to go to the gym and how do you get yourself to eat better.”

That isn’t really what our product does, right? We were all like, “This is interesting.” Let’s take a look at some of the science behind what we’ve been doing. And then we started to look out for what electrical shock has been used for in the past. And we stumbled on about 40 different peer reviewed clinical studies where electric shock was used between 1960 until 1994 to help cure bad habits. And we started to look deeply at these papers where it showed people who were using it to quit smoking within five days, using it to quit nail biting, over eating, sugar addiction, obsessive compulsive disorder, gambling, even heroin addiction in a matter of five to 10 days.

And they didn’t have apps back then; in fact they didn’t even have remote controls. They were just using self administered shock. When it was that month of Indiegogo and not knowing what we were selling before we stumbled upon the fact that we had been holding this world life changing device in our hands for eight months, not focusing on what we had but focusing more on what we should it make it work for what the people or expect the people wanted. I hope what I’m saying is making sense, but what I’m trying to get to you is that the purpose of the Indiegogo campaign was to help us really solidify what our product was more than anything else.

Steve: Interesting. So did you change it halfway through then as you got more information?

Maneesh: We changed it a little bit. We really simplified and clarified kind of what our product was, but even until the end of the campaign we didn’t realize how strong and effective the self shock was. It was kind of mind blowing. When we discovered also that like all the stuff we were selling this product has been tested and proved, and like it was the most common way to quit addictions until 1994 when it just disappeared from America in a matter of four weeks from every single clinic. It was a really fascinating experience to notice that I didn’t even know that until that point.

Steve: So the reason why I asked you those questions about Indiegogo it’s because I had another guest on the show. He did it mainly for the marketing and not necessarily for the money. And it sounds like you did a full combination of both. This first round did it– you kind of used this money to fund your first set of prototypes. Is that accurate?

Maneesh: No. We had already started selling prototypes beforehand.

Steve: You have, okay.

Maneesh: But they were like alpha prototypes. The truth is the amount of money you get from Indiegogo is never enough and Indiegogo is a big risk, because it was always costs more to produce something. We had to raise more money to get to this point and we wouldn’t have been able to do it had we just used Indiegogo money. It was more of a liability than it was anything else.

So I found out like the people who do an Indiegogo campaign and raise like 50K or whatever, I don’t know how they manage. A lot of them just never ship because if we had only made X amount of dollars and hadn’t been able– if we only made the amount we raised, the 250K and we didn’t have any ability to raise any more money, we would not have been able to get a finalized product.

Steve: Interesting. So you just said that it could have been a liability. What did you mean by that? Like if you couldn’t deliver…

Maneesh: It is a liability. Like literally on my balance sheet it’s a giant liability because we got to produce– so we sold like what– 3000ish units on this Indiegogo campaign, and so we got to actually pay to build those units, right? So the 270K we made is great, but the actual cost of good soul, the actual bomb cost of these products that build the materials, the actual cost to get the hardware preassembly is like a significant chunk of that, a very significant chunk of that.

Steve: I see.

Maneesh: The act of having– but the research and development that went in between November and today is higher than the cost– the entire amount of money we made from that Indiegogo campaign.

Steve: Now that makes sense, but these guys what you are basically saying is they are getting at a pretty big discount, because if you were to sell these in stores the margins would be a lot higher than your Indiegogo campaign.

Maneesh: Yes. The prices would be higher.

Steve: That’s what I meant. And I just had a curious– out of curiosity what’s the difference between Indiegogo and Kickstarter? How did you decide between the two?

Maneesh: Honest truth is that Indiegogo’s CEO called me and said, “Hey, here is why you should use it?” But they– I feel like Kickstarter is like the hot girl at the party who doesn’t care about you. Indiegogo when they like your project really supports you. So Indiegogo like took me to sun dancing, introduced me to dozens of celebrities who got shocked by me because they liked our product idea. They’ve really been there for us to help us throughout the process afterwards.

Steve: Interesting. And then when it comes to actually creating the campaign and you want to use it for marketing purposes, do you actually have to promote your Indiegogo campaign like crazy or does Indiegogo kind of bring their awareness to you. Do you kind of understand what I’m asking?

Maneesh: Yeah. Indiegogo does– I’ll say out of the 270K that we sold something like 70 or $80,000 came from Indiegogo users. So they did provide a significant amount of awareness and they also did it through– they added us to their emails, like they did email blast where they promoted us. But no, they would do like not like– no, it’s not enough. You got to do a lot of your own marketing. We had a very targeted goal of hitting our goal by the first 24 hours which is a big thing for long term sales, which we did. We hit our first goal within– we hit our first $50,000 within 24 hours.

Steve: Interesting, okay. Can you walk me through that?

Maneesh: Yeah. So we had a $50,000 minimum and we said, “We want to hit $50,000 by midnight tonight.” And how do we do that? So what we did is we had a bunch of people who were partners of us promised to tweet out and do like social media pushes for us. We had a bunch of– we released a press release and had different– we had already gotten a bunch of different big blogs to– and news reporters who promised to write for us on the day of launch. We set up a bunch of media to go out that day, and we did a couple like guest posts and such that went live that day to ensure that it would be a huge win.

Steve: In reaching out to these people, were they just friends of yours or did you establish contact with them like way in advance or I guess…

Maneesh: I established contact with them well in advance. Some are friends of course. But a lot of people– the thing is we had a product that’s pretty interesting.

Steve: That’s true.

Maneesh: Whether or not you like it or don’t like you can’t just ignore it. So with that in mind we started building out our press contacts and started building our people that we trusted quite early. And we started using that information to start– if they wanted to write stuff about us. And so we gave the people– like we had a systematized system for it. So we have like a press and media list and we have like to tier A, tier B and tier C people. And we got in contact in them in a pretty systematic way.

So tier A people knew like two months of time before they can promote something, tier B people like a couple weeks of time and then tier C people just tweet or Facebook share whatever you want. So we would get in contact with them, get them to agree– we built an affiliate contest, so we had– if you referred sales you would get x dollars per sale and if you got the most sales you would get an extra bonus. That was pretty effective in generating a lot of people helping us out. Does that make sense?

Steve: In terms of reaching out to the tier one people, what was your procedure? Did you coldl or email or did you find someone who knew that person and then get…

Maneesh: I found someone, I knew them or I had talked to them like months before.

Steve: Okay, got it. And then was that to just promote your Indiegogo campaign or is that kind of how you use– what you use today to kind of produce, to promote your website?

Maneesh: Right now we are starting to build our own packages that help them as much as it helps us. We have not been doing as much out boundary reach as we are focused on finishing the product right now. But our sales product is through partnerships. A lot of our sales products is through partnerships.

Steve: Interesting, so partnerships with what sort of companies?

Maneesh: So a lot of health is a big deal. So we had the spray that you spray on your tongue that makes sugar tastes like nothing. I should take a step back and say this. The product is called Pavlok, but that is not our company. Our company is behavioral technology group, and what we do is we focus on helping people improve their behavior and focus from a larger scale. Our core mission is on upgrading humanity, and there is three steps to upgrading humanity.

The first step is to break the bad habits of people who want to break them. The second is to improve the sensory input and the internal subconscious knowledge of people who want to improve themselves. And the third step is to move humanity from where we are to where we could be. So one of the first cores of this is in quitting bad habits and a lot of bad habits are really, really easy to break given electric shock. So one of those bad habits in particular is sugar addiction, which is a really big death sentence for Americans and everybody.

The three biggest killers in America are sugar, smoking and sanitary behavior. We wanted to attack all three of those with this first product. So with regards to sugar, we have a couple of partner products we’ve been working with. One is called knockout sugar which you spray on your tongue and it makes sugar taste like nothing. And so when you combine that knockout sugar with ice-cream or a sugary item for five days, if you eat ice-cream after you spray your tongue, the ice-cream just tastes like nothing. It tastes like yoghourt.

If you shocked yourself for those five days what happens is that your brain starts to see that this item it likes to eat that has no pleasure anymore, it’s only adding pain. It completely deletes the desire for sugar from your brain, no add needed.

Steve: Interesting.

Maneesh: So for a lot of like health bloggers who are creating these special packages where you get the sugar product plus the shock product and then resell them, then they get like an affiliate or wholesale commission.

Steve: Okay, got it. So it just seems like a huge component of the sales for your product depends on education, right?

Maneesh: To an extent, yeah for sure.

Steve: So is there a strategy then to just kind of reach out to these health providers and kind of sell your products alongside with their services?

Maneesh: That’s just a sales outlet. So one of our biggest sales outlets we are working on is retail. Retail can deliver a 20 million purchase in one [inaudible] [0:34:25] if you get the right team. So what you said first about education, that’s very true. Getting people to educate themselves on why they should shock themselves is a big deal. But once you start to see the results you’ll see something very interesting, which is that people who start using the shock directly have insane results. It’s mind blogging how good these results are.

Even I still can’t believe the fact that when I eat tortilla chips I get sick. I still can’t believe the fact that when I shock myself to remember someone’s name or their email address I don’t have to write it down anymore. I just remember it. The power of electric shock is insane, and it’s only been verified by the media since 1994 when it disappeared. So the first step is getting people who use it to actually use it, getting people who’ve already bought the product over 3000 people now to actually use it and then give us back testimonials which we’ve been doing.

I’ve noticed that the product itself sells itself. I can’t have a conversation not about shock anymore even when I try because when someone asks me what I do and I say, “I make a wearable device that uses electric shock.” Or they say, “What’s that on your wrist? And I say, “It’s a wearable device that shocks me to help me improve my memory.” The first thing they say is, “Wait, tell me more. Let me try it. I got to try this out. Holy shit, like let me get my friends over here. Hey come on, you guys want to try this out.” The product sells itself. So I think that our big marketing plan right now is honestly getting into people’s hands because everybody who I give it to sells more.

Steve: No, that makes sense given the nature of your device. Actually you have an advantage in that it has a great story, and it kind of does sell itself actually. That’s what mainly interests me to your product when I saw it.

Maneesh: I can tell you our retail strategy if that’s interesting to you.

Steve: Yeah. Let’s hear it.

Maneesh: So starting last year I was focused on getting our core early app users to do it. So I did this by taking my old email list and pre-selling them this product. Then we took it to Indiegogo in which we had this big launch. And we focused that time on really just detail in the story and getting enough money that we could move to the next step of actually delivering their product. In the mean time we built these prototypes out. And these prototypes we’ve been shipping to customers have gotten us a lot of good results on how users will use it, the user’s experience, how we can improve the product, etcetera.

From now– now our next goal is to get the Indiegogo users to have their product fulfilled. Those will be fulfilled by July, August and that’s a good and bad time. It’s a terrible time to launch a product. July and August is the worst two months you can possibly have, but it’s a fine time for us because we are just delivering a product we’ve already sold, getting it to more users’ hands, and see how they use it. In August and September we are focused on a couple things. The first step is proving that we can sell the product using television, home shopping television channels.

So we are doing a few– we are working right now on building up a couple of different TV channels that we sell sort of like QVC, HSN in order to– where you have enough time to sell your product. This product requires a little bit of education, so you get 20 minutes being able to actually sell it as an infomercial. Once you have that evidence of being able to sell a thousand or so units within a 28 minute session, then you take that proof and you go over to Best Buy or Target and you say, “Here is our product. We want to get it in your stores. We have evidence it sells. What do you think?” And then they make a big purchase order, and that’s where big profit comes for hardware companies.

Steve: And just curious to get on these QVC like type of shows, what are the terms and how do you reach out? How do you even know where to reach out and how do you reach out?

Maneesh: For you, you can just call me. I’ll get you an intro. I’d say that they are a bunch of people– once you start building hardware they start coming to you. The thing is they want to feature your product. They want to sell your stuff if it sells because then they make money. The terms, I can’t really tell you.

Steve: It’s fine.

Maneesh: But it’s typically– a typical deal is involved like a 35% ish cut. But the goal is– my point is understanding that they want your business because you are their customer. You are their client. If your product sells they make money. So the first step in making your product sell, secondly you find them or they find you, but there is a lot of ways. It’s usually intros and intros. And then lastly once you have that evidence then you go to the next step.

Steve: And one thing specifically about your product I would imagine like let’s say I see it on the show for Best Buy, I’m not going to know what to do with it. It almost requires some sort of huge setup to kind of educate the customer on how to buy it or how to use it.

Maneesh: Yeah. We are working through this a lot right now. So there is a couple of ways we are tackling that problem. The first thing is I really believe it’s revolutionary. Our long term vision of this product is to replace your smart phone. And so a lot of things that we are doing is– like if you ask someone like what does a smart phone do you in 1994? It doesn’t really make any sense. It makes calls and it texts, but it also lets you check your bank account and it also lets you do this and also lets you do that. It doesn’t quite make any sense? There is just too much you can do.

So condensing to the core of what it can do is one of our biggest– is what we are doing right now. So getting customers to buy that product alone– sorry, getting customers to buy the Pavlok, buy in to Pavlok, to believe in Pavlok is an education process. But then Pavlok has so many specific use cases that we’ve been testing out like niching down for particular different niches. Pavlok quit nail biting for example can be its own product and it’s just– our Pavlok [Inaudible] [00:40:19] little module that you put inside of a silicon band.

Steve: Like a Fitbit.

Maneesh: Yeah, something like a Fitbit. And also we’ve also created different integrations so it can go in your necklace, or can go into your watchband like in the strap. So we are spot testing like a nail biting product. So you go to Wal-Mart and you just see like “Quit nail biting forever,” and it comes with a wrist band and audio CD. Quit smoking program, quit sugar program that comes with a knockout sugar as well as the Pavlok. So we are testing out the right way to get into the right people’s hands.

Steve: Actually if you frame it that way it’s much more sellable, right? Then you are selling a solution as opposed to your product.

Maneesh: Yeah. And one of the biggest things that has really helped us grow is our coaching program. So we are not just a device. We are actually a coaching program. So everybody who buys a Pavlok get a call from our habit hackers and our habit hackers break down you– they help you understand what you want out of your life or who the dream version of you– what he would be doing in six months, what he’d be doing in three months, what he would be doing next week.

And then we created a poaching service in which we are able to use– whether or not you have a Pavlok actually. We are able to help you coach you through the process of improving yourself. And Pavlok acts as a nice conduit into that world of life. It’s not quite like coaching but something similar like coaching. So right now we offer that coaching program just to our buyers and that helps them even more than the hardware. We’ve found a lot of our– few of our best users have kept the Pavlok on mostly as a reminder of the coaches have really help them push through on their habit formation. So that has been really important, getting human beings to help coach you is a big deal for us.

Steve: When I first saw Pavlok I thought it was just a gadget. It sounds like you have an entire vision that kind of is built completely around Pavlok. Like a much higher level vision that you are trying to meet.

Maneesh: The vision is pretty insane. It gets bigger every day and it’s one of those ENTP things that I have to hire people to making sure [inaudible] [0:42:27] sometimes.

Steve: Hey, just a couple of random question. This is just mainly out of my own curiosity if I want to create my own device. How do you guys going to handle QA and stress testing and all that stuff once you start selling in mass?

Maneesh: Yeah. Right now we have a QA. At my old office in Bolt we have a testing machine so we can do hit and cool. And so we’ll use that for the beginning test and then as we scale really high I’m sure we’ll have a full QA and testing process assembly line.

Steve: For just an aspiring entrepreneur, who kind of wants to create some sort of hardware software device, would you recommend that they took your path or if and if not which path would you have taken ideally?

Maneesh: That’s a tough question. For a hardware entrepreneur?

Steve: Yes.

Maneesh: I recommend getting into an incubator for sure, if you don’t have enough money of your own– hardware is like– when I used to be– like my old blog was all about entrepreneurship and building business and I would just be honest about it. And I’d be like it’s easy, just do it, like go start, write down a code, build it up. But with hardware it’s something that I really do want to caution people, because you can get in over your head and it can be– like software won’t lead to the same sort of credit card debt that hardware will.

So make sure that you have somebody on your team who knows what they are doing, who’s done it before because– or you raise some funding, or you just don’t want to be non hardware person jumping into the hardware world without some kind of experience whether it will be through an incubator, through a partner, through a cofounder. But if they were to have a great idea and a good prototype, then incubator is a really good way to go.

Steve: So just curious, why incubator as opposed to pitching an idea to a VC?

Maneesh: In our case, the incubator helped us build the product. A VC would have just given us money.

Steve: I see, okay.

Maneesh: So incubator really gave us literally 5000 square feet of 3D printers, laser cutters, CMC machines, mills, everything we needed to build the product and people to help us operate them, whereas VC would have just given us the money and said, “Figure it out.”

Steve: I see. And then the resources to actually create the electronics is all in-house as well, like layout guys and all those…?

Maneesh: They had helpful people, but we didn’t need our team to do that. I’d hire people to get that happen.

Steve: Interesting. Can you just briefly comment of kind of like the equity terms of the incubator as opposed to like going with the VC?

Maneesh: Yeah. Bolt in particular was nice. They gave us– what was it, 50K for 10%. And that was common stock whereas VC would have had– they had very few controls like a lot of it– money is cheap right now compared to anytime in the past. Money has never been cheaper meaning that you can get cash. If you supposed to be in Sans Francisco you can get VC terms, but there are two variables and control here. One is cash and one is control. Control is a lot about– we could have gotten, we can still go raise a ton of money if we want, but the terms on that money from VCs will involve a lot of board seats and liquidation preferences and all the stuff that gets us screwed in the long run, whereas Bolts terms were very cool.

They were common stock, like we are on equal terms and we just have to– from most incubators will give you a little bit of help and not kind of ruin you from– before you know what you are doing. It took me a year to figure out what all these venture deals mean, like what these venture terms mean. They can really screw you without you noticing, like really screw you without you having any idea. There is a good article last week about how– there is an article on Happy News I saw that was called, “How to build a billion dollar unicorn company and walk away with nothing.” And it had to do with like these things called liquidation preferences which are really common in VC deals.

What they’ll do is that they’ll say, “We invest $200 million into you out of one billion dollar valuation with a one x or two x liquidation preference.” So from the entrepreneur he’s like, “Holy crap, I just got $100 million at a billion dollar valuation, that’s only 10% of my company, right?” And then the VCs will be happy because they invested at this big amount, but it’s actually a company worth more or whatever.

And then the problem is the liquidation preference which is– the liquidation preference says, “Okay, you bought 20% of the company for however much money and for $100 million.” So you bought 20% of the company for $100 million, so when the company is sold or IPO, when the company exits the VC– first of all he gets his liquidation preference back. So his $200 million comes back to him and then owns 20% of the rest. And so– does that make sense? So he gets…

Steve: I see. So he gets that money in addition to 20% of the rest. He gets his give money guarantee basically.

Maneesh: He gives his money guaranteed and then 20% on top. And those when they start adding up round after round after round, can really screw you over. So I didn’t know that and I thank God because we have a lot of– we are doing some very interesting stuff with our company like from a legal corporate matter style. And if we had taken any VC funding, we would not be able to do the stuff we are doing.

Steve: Interesting, that’s good to know. So it sounds like your incubator is just common stock and they have not preferential treatment over just another regular investor. Is that kind of…

Maneesh: Yeah. It’s just like [inaudible] [0:48:08] invest in our company for example. So he did ask for free [inaudible] [0:48:05] cool people and they all have very similar terms.

Steve: Okay, cool. Hey, we’ve already been chatting for more time than I allotted for you actually. So if anyone wants to know more about Pavlok your company, where can they find you?

Maneesh: Yes. So head over to Pavlok.com P-A-V-L-O-K.com. It’s like Pavlaw but the last letter is a K. And if you want these cool discount credit we have, if you guys want to buy one there is preorders which are the final production units that will be shipping in July and August, and then there is prototypes which are shipping right now. And I’m actually kind of excited because we are going to be raising the price on the prototypes soon, because they are kind of like a collector’s item at this point. It’s only 250 of them left at this moment. And so those ship right now, and they are actually really cool. I’m like really proud of them.

Steve: I’m definitely going to pick one up and then maybe I’ll do a little blog post on my results. I got a couple of bad habits I want to break too.

Maneesh: Yeah. And if you strive for memory, it’s mind blowing dude.

Steve: For memory.

Maneesh: It’s like– I can talk about this a lot. Sorry, before I move onto that– and there is discount code for your readers P-A-V-1-5, PAV 15 is a 15% off discount code.

Steve: Sounds good. I’ll also put a link to your site along with that coupon code in the show notes as well.

Maneesh: But it’s pretty cool. So we discovered that– basically the way that your mind processes memory is through external senses. And so you know how you remember faces or like places that you walk into or like emotional events, but you don’t remember names and numbers because they are like pieces of data and they are not tied to any kind of incoming human sense. Turns out that electric shock is a sense, and so when you get shocked while you are thinking about someone’s name or while you are thinking about someone’s email address, your brain uses that shock as like glue to associate that moment with that memory, and it makes it so at least for the next 48 hours and often for a long term memory that memory is saved.

So I started using shock as like a file save for the brain. Someone is like, “Check out this website or here is my email address.” I don’t have to pull my phone and write it down anymore. I just focus on what he’s saying, press the shock button and when I get home I shock myself again and it comes back. It’s pretty cool.

Steve: One problem I have is when I meet someone I almost forget their name immediately. So you are saying that if I meet someone and I shock myself I’ll remember that guys’ name?

Maneesh: I did a lot of tests on this because I’m the same. I used to have like a 20% success rate of name recognition. So for the first basically six weeks of using the shock, the shock has a two second timer. So the guy would say– I’d say, “Hey my name is Maneesh.” And he’d say, “Hi, my name is Jack.” And then I would press the button as he said Jack, and then I would try to shake his hand and time it. So I said his name right when it hit me. And I found that for the first six weeks my memory shot up to 90%, like I would remember names forever whether or not I was drunk or sober when I met them, whether or not I was on a phone call or it was next to them, I would always remember their name.

I think that has dropped after about six weeks it drops to like 40 to 50%, but it’s still far higher than my two– 20% and we are adding a new memory, like a randomization of the shock to help improve that higher as well. So try that when you get it. It’s pretty cool.

Steve: I know this podcast wasn’t meant to like to sell your product and stuff, but you’re doing a pretty good job.

Maneesh: I’m not even trying to sell it…

Steve: I know, you are not even trying, yeah…

Maneesh: It’s like really cool. I know its crazy– yeah.

Steve: All right dude. Hey man I really appreciate you coming on and maybe one day when you are in the Bay area or something or if I’m out in Boston then we can meet up.

Maneesh: Sure. Let’s talk about that after– and it was a pleasure man. Thank you very much.

Steve: Thanks dude. What an awesome episode. What I like about Maneesh is that the guy always finds a way to do what he’s passionate about. And I simply love the concept of Pavlok. And in fact I just ordered one for myself and will be writing a blog post about it soon.

For more information about this episode go to MyWifeQuitHerJob.com/episode69, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

As an added incentive, I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to MyWifeQuitHerJob.com/contest, and if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.MyWifeQuitHerJob.com for more information.

Once again I just want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend, if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. They’ve got an incredible theme store where you can choose from a wide variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t need to hire a designer. And they also offer integration with AliBaba, so you can easily find products to sell online.

So bottom line, everything from design to sourcing to payment processing is all built in, and you simply have to populate it with your own products. And you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month absolutely free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!